AI Tipiṭaka Translations

Hide English Translation

. Namo tassa bhagavato arahato sammāsambuddhassa.

. Homage to the Blessed One, the Worthy One, the Perfectly Enlightened One.

Aṅguttaranikāye

Aṅguttaranikāya

Pañcakanipāta-aṭṭhakathā

Pañcakanipāta Commentary

1. Paṭhamapaṇṇāsakaṃ

1. First Fifty

1. Sekhabalavaggo

1. Sekhabala Chapter

1. Saṃkhittasuttavaṇṇanā
1. Summary Discourse Commentary

1.Pañcakanipātassa paṭhame sattannaṃ sekhānaṃ balānītisekhabalāni. Saddhābalādīsu assaddhiye na kampatītisaddhābalaṃ. Ahirike na kampatītihirībalaṃ. Anottappe na kampatītiottappabalaṃ. Kosajje na kampatītivīriyabalaṃ. Avijjāya na kampatītipaññābalaṃ. Tasmāti yasmā imāni sattannaṃ sekhānaṃ balāni, tasmā.

1. In the Pañcakanipāta, in the first (discourse), the powers of the seven trainees (sekha) are called sekhabalāni, the powers of the trainees. Among the powers such as the power of conviction (saddhābala), saddhābalaṃ means not wavering in faithlessness. Hirībalaṃ means not wavering in shamelessness (ahirika). Ottappabalaṃ means not wavering in recklessness (anottappa). Vīriyabalaṃ means not wavering in laziness (kosajja). Paññābalaṃ means not wavering in ignorance (avijjā). Tasmā means therefore, since these are the powers of the seven trainees, therefore.

2. Vitthatasuttavaṇṇanā
2. Detailed Discourse Commentary

2.Dutiyekāyaduccaritenātiādīsu upayogatthe karaṇavacanaṃ, hirīyitabbāni kāyaduccaritādīni hirīyati jigucchatīti attho. Ottappaniddese hetvatthe karaṇavacanaṃ, kāyaduccaritādīhi ottappassa hetubhūtehi ottappati bhāyatīti attho.

2. In the second (discourse), in kāyaduccaritenāti, etc., the instrumental case is used in the sense of the dative; hirīyitabbāni kāyaduccaritādīni means that bodily misconduct, etc., are to be felt shame for, one feels disgust for, is the meaning. In the indication of ottappa (moral dread), the instrumental case is used in the sense of the cause; kāyaduccaritādīhi ottappassa hetubhūtehi means one dreads, fears, because of the causes of moral dread, which are bodily misconduct, etc.

Āraddhavīriyoti paggahitavīriyo anosakkitamānaso.Pahānāyāti pahānatthāya.Upasampadāyāti paṭilābhatthāya.Thāmavāti vīriyathāmena samannāgato.Daḷhaparakkamoti thiraparakkamo.Anikkhittadhuro kusalesu dhammesūti kusalesu dhammesu anoropitadhuro anosakkitavīriyo.

Āraddhavīriyoti means one who has aroused energy, whose mind does not waver. Pahānāyāti means for the purpose of abandoning. Upasampadāyāti means for the purpose of attaining. Thāmavāti means endowed with the strength of energy. Daḷhaparakkamoti means of steadfast effort. Anikkhittadhuro kusalesu dhammesūti means one who has not laid down the burden in wholesome qualities, whose energy does not waver.

Udayatthagāminiyāti pañcannaṃ khandhānaṃ udayavayagāminiyā udayañca vayañca paṭivijjhituṃ samatthāya.Paññāyasamannāgatoti vipassanāpaññāya ceva maggapaññāya ca samaṅgibhūto.Ariyāyāti vikkhambhanavasena ca samucchedavasena ca kilesehi ārakā ṭhitāya parisuddhāya.Nibbedhikāyāti sā ca abhinivijjhanato nibbedhikāti vuccati, tāya samannāgatoti attho. Tattha maggapaññā samucchedavasena anibbiddhapubbaṃ appadālitapubbaṃ lobhakkhandhaṃ dosakkhandhaṃ mohakkhandhaṃ nibbijjhati padāletīti nibbedhikā, vipassanāpaññā tadaṅgavasena nibbedhikā, maggapaññāya paṭilābhasaṃvattanato tabbipassanā nibbedhikāti vattuṃ vaṭṭati.Sammā dukkhakkhayagāminiyāti idhāpi maggapaññā sammā hetunā nayena vaṭṭadukkhañca kilesadukkhañca khepayamānā gacchatīti sammā dukkhakkhayagāminī nāma, vipassanāpaññā tadaṅgavasena vaṭṭadukkhañca kilesadukkhañca khepayamānā gacchatīti dukkhakkhayagāminī. Dukkhakkhayagāminiyā vā maggapaññāya paṭilābhāya saṃvattanatopesā dukkhakkhayagāminīti veditabbā. Iti imasmiṃ sutte pañca balāni missakāneva kathitāni, tathā pañcame.

Udayatthagāminiyāti means that which goes to the arising and passing away of the five aggregates, capable of penetrating both arising and passing away. Paññāyasamannāgatoti means endowed with both insight-wisdom (vipassanāpaññā) and path-wisdom (maggañāñā). Ariyāyāti means that which stands far from defilements by way of suppression and by way of eradication, that is, pure. Nibbedhikāyāti that is called nibbedhikā because of thoroughly penetrating, endowed with that, is the meaning. Here, path-wisdom thoroughly penetrates, eradicates the mass of greed, the mass of hatred, the mass of delusion, which has never been penetrated, never been split before; therefore it is called nibbedhikā; insight-wisdom is nibbedhikā by way of its aspect; it is fitting to say that because it conduces to the attainment of path-wisdom, that insight is nibbedhikā. Sammā dukkhakkhayagāminiyāti here also, path-wisdom, going destroying the round of suffering (vaṭṭadukkha) and the suffering of defilements (kilesadukkha) by way of a right cause, method, is called sammā dukkhakkhayagāminī; insight-wisdom, by way of its aspect, goes destroying the round of suffering and the suffering of defilements, therefore it is dukkhakkhayagāminī. Or, it should be understood that insight-wisdom, because it conduces to the attainment of dukkhakkhayagāminī which is path-wisdom, is dukkhakkhayagāminī. Thus, in this sutta, the five powers are spoken of as mixed, and so also in the fifth (sutta).

6. Samāpattisuttavaṇṇanā
6. Samāpatti Discourse Commentary

6.Chaṭṭheakusalassa samāpattīti akusaladhammassa samāpajjanā, tena saddhiṃ samaṅgibhāvoti attho.Pariyuṭṭhāya tiṭṭhatīti pariyonandhitvā tiṭṭhati.

6. In the sixth (discourse), akusalassa samāpattīti means the entering into unwholesome states, being in union with that, is the meaning. Pariyuṭṭhāya tiṭṭhatīti means it stands enveloping.

7. Kāmasuttavaṇṇanā
7. Kāma Discourse Commentary

7.Sattamekāmesu laḷitāti vatthukāmakilesakāmesu laḷitā abhiratā.Asitabyābhaṅginti tiṇalāyanaasitañceva tiṇavahanakājañca.Kulaputtoti ācārakulaputto.Ohāyāti pahāya.Alaṃvacanāyāti yuttaṃ vacanāya.Labbhāti sulabhā sakkā labhituṃ.Hīnā kāmāti pañcannaṃ nīcakulānaṃ kāmā.Majjhimā kāmāti majjhimasattānaṃ kāmā.Paṇītā kāmāti rājarājamahāmattānaṃ kāmā.Kāmātveva saṅkhaṃ gacchantīti kāmanavasena kāmetabbavasena ca kāmāicceva saṅkhaṃ gacchanti.Vuddho hotīti mahallako hoti.Alaṃpaññoti yuttapañño.Attaguttoti attanāva gutto rakkhito, attānaṃ vā gopetuṃ rakkhituṃ samattho.Nālaṃ pamādāyāti na yutto pamajjituṃ.Saddhāya akataṃ hotīti yaṃ saddhāya kusalesu dhammesu kātuṃ yuttaṃ, taṃ na kataṃ hoti. Sesapadesupi eseva nayo.Anapekkho dānāhaṃ, bhikkhave, tasmiṃ bhikkhusmiṃ homīti evaṃ saddhādīhi kātabbaṃ katvāva sotāpattiphale patiṭṭhite tasmiṃ puggale anapekkho homīti dasseti. Imasmiṃ sutte sotāpattimaggo kathito.

7. In the seventh (discourse), kāmesu laḷitāti means delighted, enjoying sensual objects (vatthukāma) and sensual defilements (kilesakāma). Asitabyābhaṅginti means both the reed mat (tiṇalāyanaasita) and the work of carrying reeds (tiṇavahanakāja). Kulaputtoti means a clansman of good conduct. Ohāyāti means having abandoned. Alaṃvacanāyāti means fit to say. Labbhāti means easily obtainable, it is possible to obtain. Hīnā kāmāti means the sensual pleasures of the five low-class families. Majjhimā kāmāti means the sensual pleasures of the middling beings. Paṇītā kāmāti means the sensual pleasures of kings, great kings, and high ministers. Kāmātveva saṅkhaṃ gacchantīti means they go to the reckoning of sensual pleasures only, by way of being sensually desired. Vuddho hotīti means he becomes old. Alaṃpaññoti means endowed with fitting wisdom. Attaguttoti means guarded, protected, by oneself, or capable of protecting, guarding oneself. Nālaṃ pamādāyāti means not fit to be heedless. Saddhāya akataṃ hotīti means what is fit to do by conviction (saddhā) in wholesome qualities, that is not done. The same method applies to the remaining terms as well. Anapekkho dānāhaṃ, bhikkhave, tasmiṃ bhikkhusmiṃ homīti showing that, "Having done what should be done by conviction (saddhā) etc., I am independent in that person established in the fruit of stream-entry." In this discourse, the path of stream-entry is spoken of.

8. Cavanasuttavaṇṇanā
8. Cavana Discourse Commentary

8.Aṭṭhamesaddhammeti sāsanasaddhamme.Assaddhoti okappanasaddhāya ca pakkhandanasaddhāya cāti dvīhipi saddhāhi virahito.Cavati nappatiṭṭhātīti imasmiṃ sāsane guṇehi cavati, patiṭṭhātuṃ na sakkoti. Iti imasmiṃ sutte appatiṭṭhānañca patiṭṭhānañca kathitaṃ.

8. In the eighth (discourse), saddhammeti means in the true doctrine of the Dispensation. Assaddhoti means devoid of even the two kinds of conviction: conviction as acceptance and conviction as inclination. Cavati nappatiṭṭhātīti means he declines in qualities in this Dispensation, he is not able to be established. Thus, in this discourse, both non-establishment and establishment are spoken of.

9. Paṭhamaagāravasuttavaṇṇanā
9. First Agārava Discourse Commentary

9.Navame nāssa gāravotiagāravo. Nāssa patissotiappatisso,ajeṭṭhako anīcavutti. Sesamettha purimasadisameva.

9. In the ninth (discourse), nāssa gāravo means agāravo, without respect. Nāssa patisso means appatisso, without deference, not of humble conduct. The rest here is just like the previous one.

10. Dutiyaagāravasuttavaṇṇanā
10. Second Agārava Discourse Commentary

10.Dasameabhabboti abhājanaṃ.Vuddhinti vaḍḍhiṃ.Virūḷhinti virūḷhamūlatāya niccalabhāvaṃ.Vepullanti mahantabhāvaṃ. Sesaṃ sabbattha uttānamevāti.

10. In the tenth (discourse), abhabboti means incapable. Vuddhinti means growth. Virūḷhinti means immovability due to deeply rootedness. Vepullanti means greatness. The rest is all obvious everywhere.

2. Balavaggo

2. Bala Chapter

1. Ananussutasuttavaṇṇanā
1. Ananussuta Discourse Commentary

11.Dutiyassa paṭhamepubbāhaṃ, bhikkhave, ananussutesu dhammesūti ahaṃ, bhikkhave, pubbe ananussutesu catūsu saccadhammesu.Abhiññāvosānapāramippatto paṭijānāmīti catūsu saccesu catūhi maggehi soḷasavidhassa kiccassa karaṇena abhijānitvā vosānapāramiṃ sabbesaṃ kiccānaṃ niṭṭhitattā katakiccabhāvaṃ pāraṃ patto paṭijānāmīti mahābodhipallaṅke attano āgamanīyaguṇaṃ dasseti.Tathāgatassāti aṭṭhahi kāraṇehi tathāgatassa.Tathāgatabalānīti yathā tehi gantabbaṃ, tatheva gatāni pavattāni ñāṇabalāni.Āsabhaṃ ṭhānanti seṭṭhaṭṭhānaṃ.Sīhanādanti abhītanādaṃ.Brahmacakkanti seṭṭhacakkaṃ.Pavattetīti katheti.

11. In the second (chapter), in the first (discourse), pubbāhaṃ, bhikkhave, ananussutesu dhammesūti means "Formerly, monks, in doctrines unheard before, that is, in the Four Noble Truths. Abhiññāvosānapāramippatto paṭijānāmīti means "Having fully known the Four Noble Truths by the four paths, by doing the sixteen-fold task, having reached the perfection of completion, the state of having done the task, I declare that I have reached the far shore," (thus) showing his own admirable qualities at the Great Bodhi-seat. Tathāgatassāti means of the Tathāgata due to the eight reasons. Tathāgatabalānīti means the powers of knowledge that have gone, proceeded, just as they should be gone by those. Āsabhaṃ ṭhānanti means the excellent state. Sīhanādanti means the fearless roar. Brahmacakkanti means the excellent wheel. Pavattetīti means he sets in motion, declares.

2. Kūṭasuttavaṇṇanā
2. Kūṭa Discourse Commentary

12.Dutiyesekhabalānīti sekhānaṃ ñāṇabalāni.Agganti uttamaṃ. Sesabalāni gopānasiyo kūṭaṃ viya saṅgaṇhātītisaṅgāhikaṃ. Tāneva balāni saṃhatāni karotītisaṅghātaniyaṃ.

12. In the second (discourse), sekhabalānīti means the knowledge-powers of the trainees. Agganti means the best. (It) holds together the remaining powers like the roof holds the rafters, therefore it is saṅgāhikaṃ. (It) makes those same powers united, therefore it is saṅghātaniyaṃ.

3. Saṃkhittasuttavaṇṇanā
3. Summary Discourse Commentary

13.Tatiye tattha muṭṭhassacce na kampatītisatibalaṃ. Uddhacce na kampatītisamādhibalaṃ.

13. In the third (discourse), tattha muṭṭhassacce na kampatīti means satibalaṃ, the power of mindfulness. Uddhacce na kampatīti means samādhibalaṃ, the power of concentration.

4. Vitthatasuttavaṇṇanā
4. Detailed Discourse Commentary

14.Catutthesatinepakkenāti ettha nepakkaṃ vuccati paññā, sā satiyā upakārakabhāvena gahitā.

14. In the fourth (discourse), satinepakkenāti here, nepakka (skill) is called wisdom (paññā), (and) that is taken as helpful to mindfulness (sati).

5. Daṭṭhabbasuttavaṇṇanā
5. Daṭṭhabba Discourse Commentary

15.Pañcame savisayasmiṃyeva lokiyalokuttaradhamme kathetuṃkattha ca, bhikkhave, saddhābalaṃ daṭṭhabbantiādimāha. Yathā hi cattāro seṭṭhiputtā, rājāti rājapañcamesu sahāyesu ‘‘nakkhattaṃ kīḷissāmā’’ti vīthiṃ otiṇṇesu ekassa seṭṭhiputtassa gehaṃ gatakāle itare cattāro tuṇhī nisīdanti, gehasāmikova ‘‘imesaṃ khādanīyaṃ bhojanīyaṃ detha, gandhamālālaṅkārādīni dethā’’ti gehe vicāreti. Dutiyatatiyacatutthassa gehaṃ gatakāle itare cattāro tuṇhī nisīdanti, gehasāmikova ‘‘imesaṃ khādanīyaṃ bhojanīyaṃ detha, gandhamālālaṅkārādīni dethā’’ti gehe vicāreti. Atha sabbapacchā rañño gehaṃ gatakāle kiñcāpi rājā sabbattha issaro, imasmiṃ pana kāle attano geheyeva ‘‘imesaṃ khādanīyaṃ bhojanīyaṃ detha, gandhamālālaṅkārādīni dethā’’ti vicāreti, evamevaṃ saddhāpañcamesu balesu tesu sahāyesu ekato vīthiṃ otarantesu viya ekārammaṇe uppajjamānesupi yathā paṭhamassa gehe itare cattāro tuṇhī nisīdanti, gehasāmikova vicāreti, evaṃ sotāpattiyaṅgāni patvā adhimokkhalakkhaṇaṃ saddhābalameva jeṭṭhakaṃ hoti pubbaṅgamaṃ, sesāni tadanvayāni honti. Yathā dutiyassa gehe itare cattāro tuṇhī nisīdanti, gehasāmikova vicāreti, evaṃ sammappadhānāni patvā paggahalakkhaṇaṃ vīriyabalameva jeṭṭhakaṃ hoti pubbaṅgamaṃ, sesāni tadanvayāni honti. Yathā tatiyassa gehe itare cattāro tuṇhī nisīdanti, gehasāmikova vicāreti, evaṃ satipaṭṭhānāni patvā upaṭṭhānalakkhaṇaṃ satibalameva jeṭṭhakaṃ hoti pubbaṅgamaṃ, sesāni tadanvayāni honti. Yathā catutthassa gehe itare cattāro tuṇhī nisīdanti, gehasāmikova vicāreti, evaṃ jhānavimokkhe patvā avikkhepalakkhaṇaṃ samādhibalameva jeṭṭhakaṃ hoti pubbaṅgamaṃ, sesāni tadanvayāni honti. Sabbapacchā rañño gehaṃ gatakāle pana yathā itare cattāro tuṇhī nisīdanti, rājāva gehe vicāreti, evameva ariyasaccāni patvā pajānanalakkhaṇaṃ paññābalameva jeṭṭhakaṃ hoti pubbaṅgamaṃ, sesāni tadanvayāni hontīti evamidha pañca balāni missakāni kathitāni. Chaṭṭhaṃ uttānatthameva. Evaṃ purimavagge ca idha ca aṭṭhasu suttesu sekhabalāneva kathitāni. Karaṇḍakolavāsī mahādattatthero panāha – ‘‘heṭṭhā catūsu suttesu sekhabalāni kathitāni, upari catūsu asekhabalānī’’ti.

15. In the fifth (discourse), in order to speak about the mundane and supramundane qualities in their own objects, (he said) kattha ca, bhikkhave, saddhābalaṃ daṭṭhabbanti, "And where, monks, should the power of conviction be seen?" Just as when four wealthy merchants' sons, with the king as the fifth, went out into the street thinking, "We will play at the Nakkhatta festival," when they went to the house of one merchant's son, the other four would sit silently, (and) the householder would arrange in the house, "Give these (friends) something to eat and something to drink, give them perfumes, garlands, ornaments, etc." When they went to the houses of the second, third, and fourth (merchant's sons), the other four would sit silently, (and) the householder would arrange in the house, "Give these (friends) something to eat and something to drink, give them perfumes, garlands, ornaments, etc." Then, when they went to the king's house last of all, although the king is master everywhere, in this case, in his own house, he would arrange, "Give these (friends) something to eat and something to drink, give them perfumes, garlands, ornaments, etc." In the same way, when the powers, with conviction (saddhā) as the fifth, were arising in one object, like those friends going out into the street together, just as when the other four sit silently in the first house, (and) the householder arranges (things), in the same way, having attained the factors of stream-entry, the power of conviction, which has the characteristic of resolution (adhimokkha), is the chief, the foremost; the remaining (factors) are in accordance with that. Just as when the other four sit silently in the second house, (and) the householder arranges (things), in the same way, having attained the right efforts (sammappadhāna), the power of energy, which has the characteristic of exertion (paggaha), is the chief, the foremost; the remaining (factors) are in accordance with that. Just as when the other four sit silently in the third house, (and) the householder arranges (things), in the same way, having attained the mindfulness establishments (satipaṭṭhāna), the power of mindfulness, which has the characteristic of attending (upaṭṭhāna), is the chief, the foremost; the remaining (factors) are in accordance with that. Just as when the other four sit silently in the fourth house, (and) the householder arranges (things), in the same way, having attained the meditative liberations (jhānavimokkha), the power of concentration, which has the characteristic of non-distraction (avikkhepa), is the chief, the foremost; the remaining (factors) are in accordance with that. But just as when the other four sit silently when they go to the king's house last of all, (and) the king arranges (things) in the house, in the very same way, having attained the Noble Truths, the power of wisdom, which has the characteristic of understanding (pajānana), is the chief, the foremost; the remaining (factors) are in accordance with that. Thus, here, the five powers are spoken of as mixed. The sixth (discourse) is obvious in meaning itself. Thus, in the previous chapter and here too, in the eight discourses, only the powers of trainees (sekha) are spoken of. However, the Elder Mahādatta of Karaṇḍakola said: "In the four discourses below, the powers of trainees are spoken of, and in the four discourses above, the powers of non-trainees (asekha)."

7. Paṭhamahitasuttavaṇṇanā
7. First Hita Discourse Commentary

17.Sattame sīlādayo missakāva kathitā.Vimuttīti arahattaphalavimuttiyeva.Vimuttiñāṇadassanaṃpaccavekkhaṇañāṇaṃ, taṃ lokiyameva.

17. In the seventh (discourse), morality (sīla) etc. are spoken of as mixed. Vimuttīti means the liberation of arahantship-fruition alone. Vimuttiñāṇadassanaṃ means the reviewing knowledge (paccavekkhaṇañāṇa), that is mundane.

8-10. Dutiyahitasuttādivaṇṇanā
8-10. Second Hita Discourse, etc. Commentary

18-20.Aṭṭhame dussīlo bahussuto kathito, navame appassuto dussīlo, dasame bahussuto khīṇāsavoti.

18-20. In the eighth (discourse), an immoral person who is very learned is spoken of; in the ninth (discourse), an immoral person who is unlearned; in the tenth (discourse), a very learned person who is a Khīṇāsava (one who has destroyed the āsavas).

3. Pañcaṅgikavaggo

3. Pañcaṅgika Chapter

1. Paṭhamaagāravasuttavaṇṇanā
1. First Agārava Discourse Commentary

21.Tatiyassa paṭhameasabhāgavuttikoti asabhāgāya visadisāya jīvitavuttiyā samannāgato.Ābhisamācārikaṃ dhammanti uttamasamācārabhūtaṃ vattavasena paññattasīlaṃ.Sekhaṃ dhammanti sekhapaṇṇattisīlaṃ.Sīlānīti cattāri mahāsīlāni.Sammādiṭṭhinti vipassanāsammādiṭṭhiṃ.Sammāsamādhinti maggasamādhiñceva phalasamādhiñca. Imasmiṃ sutte sīlādīni missakāni kathitāni.

21. In the third (chapter), in the first (discourse), asabhāgavuttikoti means endowed with a dissimilar, discordant mode of life. Ābhisamācārikaṃ dhammanti means the virtue (sīla) prescribed according to the custom, which is the best conduct. Sekhaṃ dhammanti means the virtue relating to the trainee. Sīlānīti means the four great moralities. Sammādiṭṭhinti means insight right view (vipassanāsammādiṭṭhi). Sammāsamādhinti means both path-concentration (magga samādhi) and fruition-concentration (phala samādhi). In this discourse, morality (sīla) etc. are spoken of as mixed.

2. Dutiyaagāravasuttavaṇṇanā
2. Second Agārava Discourse Commentary

22.Dutiyesīlakkhandhanti sīlarāsiṃ. Sesadvayepi eseva nayo. Ime pana tayopi khandhā missakāva kathitāti.

22. In the second (discourse), sīlakkhandhanti means the mass of morality. The same method (applies) in the remaining two also. But these three aggregates are spoken of as mixed.

3. Upakkilesasuttavaṇṇanā
3. Upakkilesa Discourse Commentary

23.Tatiyena ca pabhassaranti na ca pabhāvantaṃ.Pabhaṅgu cāti pabhijjanasabhāvaṃ.Ayoti kāḷalohaṃ.Lohanti ṭhapetvā idha vuttāni cattāri avasesaṃ lohaṃ.Sajjhanti rajataṃ.Cittassāti cātubhūmakakusalacittassa. Tebhūmakassa tāva upakkilesā hontu, lokuttarassa kathaṃ hontīti? Uppajjituṃ appadānena. Yadaggena hi uppajjituṃ na denti, tadaggeneva te lokiyassapi lokuttarassapi upakkilesā nāma honti.Pabhaṅgu cāti ārammaṇe cuṇṇavicuṇṇabhāvūpagamanena bhijjanasabhāvaṃ.Sammāsamādhiyati āsavānaṃ khayāyāti āsavānaṃ khayasaṅkhātassa arahattassa atthāya hetunā kāraṇena samādhiyati. Ettāvatā cittaṃ visodhetvā arahatte patiṭṭhitaṃ khīṇāsavaṃ dasseti. Idānissa abhiññāpaṭivedhaṃ dassentoyassa yassa cātiādimāha. Taṃ uttānatthamevāti.

23. In the third (discourse), na ca pabhassaranti means not radiant. Pabhaṅgu cāti means of a nature to break. Ayoti means black iron. Lohanti means the remaining iron except for the four mentioned here. Sajjhanti means silver. Cittassāti means of the four-planes wholesome consciousness (cātubhūmakakusalacitta). Let there be defilements for the three-planes (consciousness), how can there be for the supramundane? By not giving (them) a chance to arise. For by the very fact that they do not give (them) a chance to arise, by that very fact they are called defilements for both mundane and supramundane (consciousness). Pabhaṅgu cāti means of a nature to break, by going to the state of being crumbled to dust in the object. Sammāsamādhiyati āsavānaṃ khayāyāti means he concentrates rightly for the sake of arahantship, which is the destruction of the āsavas, by way of a cause, a reason. In so far as (he) shows a Khīṇāsava, who, having purified the mind, is established in arahantship. Now, showing his penetration by higher knowledge, (he) said yassa yassa cātiādi, "And of whomever," etc. That is obvious in meaning itself.

4. Dussīlasuttavaṇṇanā
4. Dussīla Discourse Commentary

24.Catutthehatūpanisoti hataupanissayo hatakāraṇo.Yathābhūtañāṇadassananti nāmarūpaparicchedañāṇaṃ ādiṃ katvā taruṇavipassanā.Nibbidāvirāgoti nibbidā ca virāgo ca. Tattha nibbidā balavavipassanā, virāgo maggo.Vimuttiñāṇadassananti phalavimutti ca paccavekkhaṇañāṇañca.

24. In the fourth (discourse), hatūpanisoti means with destroyed support, with destroyed cause. Yathābhūtañāṇadassananti means the knowledge and vision according to reality, beginning with the knowledge of distinguishing name and form, the preliminary insight. Nibbidāvirāgoti means revulsion and cessation. There, revulsion is strong insight; cessation is the path. Vimuttiñāṇadassananti means fruition-liberation and reviewing knowledge.

5. Anuggahitasuttavaṇṇanā
5. Anuggahita Discourse Commentary

25.Pañcamesammādiṭṭhīti vipassanāsammādiṭṭhi.Cetovimuttiphalātiādīsucetovimuttīti maggaphalasamādhi.Paññāvimuttīti phalañāṇaṃ.Sīlānuggahitāti sīlena anuggahitā anurakkhitā.Sutānuggahitāti bāhusaccena anuggahitā.Sākacchānuggahitāti dhammasākacchāya anuggahitā.Samathānuggahitāti cittekaggatāya anuggahitā.

25. In the fifth, sammādiṭṭhi means the sammādiṭṭhi of insight (vipassanā). Among cetovimuttiphalā etc., cetovimutti means the path-fruit samādhi. Paññāvimutti means the wisdom of the fruit. Sīlānuggahitā means supported and protected by virtue (sīla). Sutānuggahitā means supported by great learning (bāhusacca). Sākacchānuggahitā means supported by discussion of the Dhamma. Samathānuggahitā means supported by one-pointedness of mind (cittekaggatā).

Imassa panatthassa āvibhāvatthaṃ madhurambabījaṃ ropetvā samantā mariyādaṃ bandhitvā kālānukālaṃ udakaṃ āsiñcitvā kālānukālaṃ mūlāni sodhetvā kālānukālaṃ patitapāṇake hāretvā kālānukālaṃ makkaṭajālaṃ luñcitvā ambaṃ paṭijagganto puriso dassetabbo. Tassa hi purisassa madhurambabījaropanaṃ viya vipassanāsammādiṭṭhi daṭṭhabbā, mariyādabandhanaṃ viya sīlena anuggaṇhanaṃ, udakāsecanaṃ viya sutena anuggaṇhanaṃ, mūlaparisodhanaṃ viya sākacchāya anuggaṇhanaṃ, pāṇakaharaṇaṃ viya jhānavipassanāpāripanthikasodhanavasena samathānuggaṇhanaṃ, makkaṭajālaluñcanaṃ viya balavavipassanānuggaṇhanaṃ, evaṃ anuggahitassa rukkhassa khippameva vaḍḍhitvā phalappadānaṃ viya imehi sīlādīhi anuggahitāya mūlasammādiṭṭhiyā khippameva maggavasena vaḍḍhitvā cetovimuttipaññāvimuttiphalappadānaṃ veditabbaṃ.

To illustrate this meaning, consider a man who plants a sweet mango seed, builds a fence around it, regularly waters it, regularly clears the roots, regularly removes fallen insects, regularly removes spider webs, and diligently cares for the mango tree. In this simile, planting the sweet mango seed is like vipassanā sammādiṭṭhi; building the fence is like supporting it with sīla; watering it is like supporting it with learning; clearing the roots is like supporting it with discussion; removing insects is like supporting it with samatha by purifying obstacles to jhāna and vipassanā; removing spider webs is like supporting it with strong vipassanā. Just as a tree thus supported quickly grows and bears fruit, so too, the root sammādiṭṭhi, supported by these sīla etc., quickly grows through the path and yields the fruit of cetovimutti and paññāvimutti.

6. Vimuttāyatanasuttavaṇṇanā
6. Vimuttāyatana Sutta Commentary

26.Chaṭṭhevimuttāyatanānīti vimuccanakāraṇāni.Yatthāti yesu vimuttāyatanesu.Satthā dhammaṃ desetīti catusaccadhammaṃ deseti.Atthapaṭisaṃvedinoti pāḷiatthaṃ jānantassa.Dhammapaṭisaṃvedinoti pāḷiṃ jānantassa.Pāmojjanti taruṇapīti.Pītīti tuṭṭhākārabhūtā balavapīti.Kāyoti nāmakāyo.Passambhatīti paṭippassambhati.Sukhaṃ vedetīti sukhaṃ paṭilabhati.Cittaṃ samādhiyatīti arahattaphalasamādhinā samādhiyati. Ayañhi taṃ dhammaṃ suṇanto āgatāgataṭṭhāne jhānavipassanāmaggaphalāni jānāti, tassa evaṃ jānato pīti uppajjati. So tassā pītiyā antarā osakkituṃ na dento upacārakammaṭṭhāniko hutvā vipassanaṃ vaḍḍhetvā arahattaṃ pāpuṇāti. Taṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ – ‘‘cittaṃ samādhiyatī’’ti. Sesesupi eseva nayo. Ayaṃ pana viseso –samādhinimittanti aṭṭhatiṃsāya ārammaṇesu aññataro samādhiyeva samādhinimittaṃ.Suggahitaṃhotītiādisu ācariyassa santike kammaṭṭhānaṃ uggaṇhantena suṭṭhu gahitaṃ hoti suṭṭhu manasikataṃ suṭṭhu upadhāritaṃ.Suppaṭividdhaṃ paññāyāti paññāya suṭṭhu paccakkhaṃ kataṃ.Tasmiṃ dhammeti tasmiṃ kammaṭṭhānapāḷidhamme. Iti imasmiṃ sutte pañcapi vimuttāyatanāni arahattaṃ pāpetvā kathitānīti.

26. In the sixth, vimuttāyatanāni means the causes of liberation. Yatthā means in which vimuttāyatanas. Satthā dhammaṃ desetī means the Teacher teaches the Dhamma of the Four Noble Truths. Atthapaṭisaṃvedino means for one who understands the meaning of the text. Dhammapaṭisaṃvedino means for one who understands the text itself. Pāmojja means initial joy. Pītī means strong joy in the form of satisfaction. Kāyo means the mind-body. Passambhatī means calms down. Sukhaṃ vedetī means obtains happiness. Cittaṃ samādhiyatī means the mind becomes concentrated in the samādhi of the fruit of Arahatship. For when he hears that Dhamma, he knows the jhāna, vipassanā, path and fruit in the places he comes to. As he knows thus, joy arises in him. Not allowing that joy to subside, he becomes focused on the preliminary meditation subject and develops vipassanā, attaining Arahatship. Referring to that, it was said, "cittaṃ samādhiyatī". The same method applies in the remaining cases. But this is the distinction: samādhinimitta means samādhi itself as the object, one of the thirty-eight objects. In suggahitaṃ hotī etc., it is well-grasped, well-attended to, well-ascertained by one who learns the meditation subject from the teacher. Suppaṭividdhaṃ paññāyā means well-penetrated by wisdom. Tasmiṃ dhamme means in that Dhamma of the meditation text. Thus, in this sutta, all five vimuttāyatanas are stated to lead to Arahatship.

7. Samādhisuttavaṇṇanā
7. Samādhi Sutta Commentary

27.Sattameappamāṇanti pamāṇakaradhammarahitaṃ lokuttaraṃ.Nipakā patissatāti nepakkena ca satiyā ca samannāgatā hutvā.Pañca ñāṇānīti pañca paccavekkhaṇañāṇāni.Paccattaññeva uppajjantīti attaniyeva uppajjanti.Ayaṃ samādhi paccuppannasukho cevātiādīsu arahattaphalasamādhi adhippeto. Maggasamādhītipi vadantiyeva. So hi appitappitakkhaṇe sukhattāpaccuppannasukho,purimo purimo pacchimassa pacchimassa samādhisukhassa paccayattāāyatiṃ sukhavipāko,kilesehi ārakattāariyo,kāmāmisavaṭṭāmisalokāmisānaṃ abhāvānirāmiso. Buddhādīhi mahāpurisehi sevitattāakāpurisasevito. Aṅgasantatāya ārammaṇasantatāya sabbakilesadarathasantatāya casanto,atappaniyaṭṭhenapaṇīto. Kilesappaṭippassaddhiyā laddhattā kilesappaṭippassaddhibhāvaṃ vā laddhattāpaṭippassaddhaladdho. Paṭippassaddhaṃ paṭippassaddhīti hi idaṃ atthato ekaṃ. Paṭippassaddhakilesena vā arahatā laddhattāpipaṭippassaddhaladdho,ekodibhāvena adhigatattā ekodibhāvameva vā adhigatattāekodibhāvādhigato. Appaguṇasāsavasamādhi viya sasaṅkhārena sappayogena cittena paccanīkadhamme niggayha kilese vāretvā anadhigatattāna sasaṅkhāraniggayhavāritagato. Taṃ samādhiṃ samāpajjanto tato vā vuṭṭhahanto sativepullappattattāsatova samāpajjati, satova vuṭṭhahati. Yathāparicchinnakālavasena vā sato samāpajjati, sato vuṭṭhahati. Tasmā yadettha ‘‘ayaṃ samādhi paccuppannasukho ceva āyatiñca sukhavipāko cā’’ti evaṃ paccavekkhamānassa paccattaṃyeva aparappaccayañāṇaṃ uppajjati, taṃ ekaṃ ñāṇaṃ. Eseva nayo sesesu. Evaṃ imāni pañca ñāṇāni paccattaññeva uppajjantīti.

27. In the seventh, appamāṇa means the supramundane, devoid of measurable qualities. Nipakā patissatā means having both wisdom and mindfulness. Pañca ñāṇānī means the five knowledges of reviewing. Paccattaññeva uppajjantī means they arise within oneself. In ayaṃ samādhi paccuppannasukho cevā etc., the samādhi of the fruit of Arahatship is intended. Some even say it is the samādhi of the path. For that is paccuppannasukho because it is pleasant at the moment of application, āyatiṃ sukhavipāko because each preceding samādhi is a condition for the happiness of each succeeding samādhi, ariyo because it is far from defilements, nirāmiso because of the absence of sensual, material, and worldly pleasures. It is akāpurisasevito because it is cultivated by great beings such as the Buddhas. It is santo because of the continuity of factors, the continuity of the object, and the continuity of the cessation of all defilements; it is paṇīto because of its nature of non-affliction. It is paṭippassaddhaladdho because it is attained through the subsiding of defilements or because it has obtained the state of subsiding defilements. For this, "paṭippassaddhaṃ paṭippassaddhīti," is the same in meaning. It is also paṭippassaddhaladdho because it is attained by the Arahat who has subsided defilements, and it is ekodibhāvādhigato because it is attained through one-pointedness or is itself the attainment of one-pointedness. Unlike inferior conditioned samādhi, it is na sasaṅkhāraniggayhavāritagato because it is not attained by suppressing and warding off defilements by subduing opposing qualities with a contrived and effortful mind. Entering that samādhi or rising from it, he is satova samāpajjati, satova vuṭṭhahati because he has attained fullness of mindfulness. Or, according to the defined period, he enters mindfully, and he arises mindfully. Therefore, for one who reviews thus, "ayaṃ samādhi paccuppannasukho ceva āyatiñca sukhavipāko cā," there arises within oneself knowledge that is independent of others; that is one knowledge. The same method applies in the remaining cases. Thus, these five knowledges arise within oneself.

8. Pañcaṅgikasuttavaṇṇanā
8. Pañcaṅgika Sutta Commentary

28.Aṭṭhameariyassāti vikkhambhanavasena pahīnakilesehi ārakā ṭhitassa.Bhāvanaṃ desessāmīti brūhanaṃ vaḍḍhanaṃ pakāsayissāmi.Imameva kāyanti imaṃ karajakāyaṃ.Abhisandetīti temeti sneheti, sabbattha pavattapītisukhaṃ karoti.Parisandetīti samantato sandeti.Paripūretīti vāyunā bhastaṃ viya pūreti.Parippharatīti samantato phusati.Sabbāvato kāyassāti assa bhikkhuno sabbakoṭṭhāsavato kāyassa kiñci upādinnakasantatipavattiṭṭhāne chavimaṃsalohitānugataṃ aṇumattampi ṭhānaṃ paṭhamajjhānasukhena aphuṭaṃ nāma na hoti.

28. In the eighth, ariyassā means for one who stands aloof from defilements, having abandoned them by way of suppression. Bhāvanaṃ desessāmī means I will reveal development and growth. Imameva kāya means this very body of elements. Abhisandetī means moistens and suffuses, causing joy and happiness to pervade everywhere. Parisandetī means suffuses all around. Paripūretī means fills like a bellows with air. Parippharatī means touches all around. Sabbāvato kāyassā means in that bhikkhu’s entire body, which possesses all parts, there is not even a place as small as an atom, connected to the continuation of appropriation, associated with skin, flesh, and blood, that is not pervaded by the happiness of the first jhāna.

Dakkhoti cheko paṭibalo nhānīyacuṇṇāni kātuñceva yojetuñca sannetuñca.Kaṃsathāleti yena kenaci lohena katabhājane. Mattikābhājanaṃ pana thiraṃ na hoti, sannentassa bhijjati. Tasmā taṃ na dassesi.Paripphosakaṃparipphosakanti siñcitvā siñcitvā.Sanneyyāti vāmahatthena kaṃsathālaṃ gahetvā dakkhiṇahatthena pamāṇayuttaṃ udakaṃ siñcitvā siñcitvā parimaddanto piṇḍaṃ kareyya.Snehānugatāti udakasinehena anugatā.Snehaparetāti udakasinehena pariggahitā.Santarabāhirāti saddhiṃ antopadesena ceva bahipadesena ca, sabbatthakameva udakasinehena phuṭāti attho.Na ca pagghariṇīti na bindu bindu udakaṃ paggharati, sakkā hoti hatthenapi dvīhipi aṅgulīhi gahetuṃ ovaṭṭikāyapi kātunti attho.

Dakkho means skilled, capable, clever at making, applying, and mixing bath powders. Kaṃsathāle means in a vessel made of any metal. An earthenware vessel, however, is not firm; it breaks while mixing. Therefore, that was not shown. Paripphosakaṃ paripphosaka means sprinkling and sprinkling. Sanneyyā means taking the metal bowl in his left hand and mixing the powder by sprinkling measured amounts of water with his right hand, he would make a ball. Snehānugatā means accompanied by the moisture of water. Snehaparetā means surrounded by the moisture of water. Santarabāhirā means together with the inner and outer surfaces; the meaning is that it is completely pervaded with the moisture of water. Na ca pagghariṇī means water does not drip drop by drop; it is possible to take it in the hand or between two fingers and make it into a ball.

ubbhidodakoti ubbhinnaudako, na heṭṭhā ubbhijjitvā uggacchanaudako, antoyeva pana uppajjanaudakoti attho.Āyamukhanti āgamanamaggo.Devoti megho.Kālena kālanti kāle kāle, anvaḍḍhamāsaṃ vā anudasāhaṃ vāti attho.Dhāranti vuṭṭhiṃ.Nānuppaveccheyyāti nappaveseyya, na vasseyyāti attho.Sītā vāridhārā ubbhijjitvāti sītā vāridhārā taṃ rahadaṃ pūrayamānā ubbhijjitvā. Heṭṭhā uggacchanaudakañhi uggantvā bhijjantaṃ udakaṃ khobheti, catūhi disāhi pavisanaudakaṃ purāṇapaṇṇatiṇakaṭṭhadaṇḍakādīhi udakaṃ khobheti. Vuṭṭhiudakaṃ dhārānipātabubbuḷakehi udakaṃ khobheti, sannisinnameva pana hutvā iddhinimmitamiva uppajjamānaṃ udakaṃ imaṃ padesaṃ pharati, imaṃ na pharatīti natthi. Tena aphuṭokāso nāma na hoti. Tattha rahado viya karajakāyo, udakaṃ viya dutiyajjhānasukhaṃ, sesaṃ purimanayeneva veditabbaṃ.

ubbhidodako means spring water, not water that emerges from below, but water that arises within. Āyamukha means the path of arrival. Devo means cloud. Kālena kāla means from time to time, every half month or every ten days. Dhāra means rain. Nānuppaveccheyyā means should not enter, should not rain. Sītā vāridhārā ubbhijjitvā means a cool stream of water, filling that lake, springs up. For water emerging from below stirs up the water as it rises and breaks, water entering from the four directions stirs up the water with old leaves, grass, sticks, and branches. Rainwater stirs up the water with droplets and bubbles. But water that arises as if created by psychic power, being still, pervades this area and does not pervade that area. Therefore, there is no place that is not pervaded. There, the elemental body is like the lake, the happiness of the second jhāna is like the water; the rest should be understood in the same way as before.

uppalinī. Sesapadadvayepi eseva nayo. Ettha ca setarattanīlesu yaṃkiñci uppalameva, ūnakasatapattaṃ puṇḍarīkaṃ, satapattaṃ padumaṃ. Pattaniyamaṃ vā vināpi setaṃ padumaṃ, rattaṃ puṇḍarīkanti ayamettha vinicchayo.Udakānuggatānīti udakato na uggatāni.Antonimuggaposīnīti udakatalassa anto nimuggāniyeva hutvā posanti vaḍḍhantīti attho. Sesaṃ purimanayeneva veditabbaṃ.

uppalinī. The same method applies to the other two terms as well. Here, any kind of water lily, whether white, red, or blue, is an "uppala," a lotus with less than a hundred petals is a "puṇḍarīka," and a lotus with a hundred petals is a "paduma." Or, without regard to the number of petals, a white lotus is a "paduma," and a red lotus is a "puṇḍarīka"; this is the distinction here. Udakānuggatānī means not rising from the water. Antonimuggaposīnī means growing while submerged inside the surface of the water. The rest should be understood in the same way as before.

parisuddhena cetasā pariyodātenāti ettha nirupakkilesaṭṭhena parisuddhaṃ, pabhassaraṭṭhena pariyodātaṃ veditabbaṃ.Odātena vatthenāti idaṃ utupharaṇatthaṃ vuttaṃ. Kiliṭṭhavatthena hi utupharaṇaṃ na hoti, taṅkhaṇadhotaparisuddhena utupharaṇaṃ balavaṃ hoti. Imissā hi upamāya vatthaṃ viya karajakāyo, utupharaṇaṃ viya catutthajjhānasukhaṃ. Tasmā yathā sunhātassa purisassa parisuddhaṃ vatthaṃ sasīsaṃ pārupitvā nisinnassa sarīrato utu sabbameva vatthaṃ pharati, na koci vatthassa aphuṭokāso hoti, evaṃ catutthajjhānasukhena bhikkhuno karajakāyassa na koci okāso aphuṭo hotīti evamettha attho daṭṭhabbo. Catutthajjhānacittameva vā vatthaṃ viya, taṃsamuṭṭhānarūpaṃ utupharaṇaṃ viya. Yathā hi katthaci katthaci odātavatthe kāyaṃ aphusantepi taṃsamuṭṭhānena utunā sabbatthakameva kāyo phuṭo hoti, evaṃ catutthajjhānasamuṭṭhāpitena sukhumarūpena sabbatthakameva bhikkhuno kāyo phuṭo hotīti evamettha attho daṭṭhabbo.

parisuddhena cetasā pariyodātenā means here, "parisuddhaṃ" should be understood as pure in the sense of being free from defilements, and "pariyodātaṃ" as bright in the sense of being radiant. Odātena vatthenā This was said for the purpose of conveying the sensation of touch. For the sensation of touch is not strong with a soiled cloth, but it is strong with a freshly washed, clean cloth. In this simile, the elemental body is like the cloth, and the sensation of touch is like the happiness of the fourth jhāna. Therefore, just as when a man who has bathed wears a clean cloth over his head and sits down, the sensation of touch pervades the entire cloth from his body, and there is no place on the cloth that is not pervaded, so too, for the bhikkhu, there is no place in the elemental body that is not pervaded by the happiness of the fourth jhāna; thus, the meaning should be understood here. Or, the mind of the fourth jhāna itself is like the cloth, and the materiality born of it is like the sensation of touch. For just as even if the body does not touch the clean cloth everywhere, the body is completely pervaded everywhere by the materiality born of it, so too, the bhikkhu's body is completely pervaded everywhere by the subtle materiality produced by the fourth jhāna; thus, the meaning should be understood here.

Paccavekkhaṇanimittanti paccavekkhaṇañāṇameva.Suggahitaṃ hotīti yathā tena jhānavipassanāmaggā suṭṭhu gahitā honti, evaṃ paccavekkhaṇanimittaṃ aparāparena paccavekkhaṇanimittena suṭṭhu gahitaṃ hoti.Añño vā aññanti añño eko aññaṃ ekaṃ, attanoyeva hi attā na pākaṭo hoti.Ṭhito vā nisinnanti ṭhitakassāpi nisinno pākaṭo hoti, tenevaṃ vuttaṃ. Sesesupi eseva nayo.Udakamaṇikoti samekhalā udakacāṭi.Samatittikoti samabharito.Kākapeyyāti mukhavaṭṭiyaṃ nisīditvā kākena gīvaṃ anāmetvāva pātabbo.

Paccavekkhaṇanimitta means the knowledge of reviewing itself. Suggahitaṃ hotī means just as those jhāna, vipassanā, and paths are well-grasped, so too, the object of reviewing is well-grasped by another succeeding object of reviewing. Añño vā añña means one different from another, for one's own self is not evident to oneself. Ṭhito vā nisinna means even for one standing, the sitting one is evident; therefore, it was said thus. The same method applies in the remaining cases. Udakamaṇiko means a water pot with a rim. Samatittiko means filled to the brim. Kākapeyyā means it should be drunk by a crow sitting at the mouth without bending its neck.

Subhūmiyanti samabhūmiyaṃ. ‘‘Subhūme sukhette vihatakhāṇuke bījāni patiṭṭhāpeyyā’’ti (dī. ni. 2.438) ettha pana maṇḍabhūmi subhūmīti āgatā.Catumahāpatheti dvinnaṃ mahāmaggānaṃ vinivijjhitvā gataṭṭhāne.Ājaññarathoti vinītaassaratho.Odhastapatodoti yathā rathaṃ abhiruhitvā ṭhitena sakkā hoti gaṇhituṃ, evaṃ ālambanaṃ nissāya tiriyato ṭhapitapatodo.Yoggācariyoti assācariyo. Sveva assadamme sāretītiassadammasārathi. Yenicchakanti yena yena maggena icchati.Yadicchakanti yaṃ yaṃ gatiṃ icchati.Sāreyyāti ujukaṃ purato peseyya.Paccāsāreyyāti paṭinivatteyya.

Subhūmiya means on level ground. However, in "Subhūme sukhette vihatakhāṇuke bījāni patiṭṭhāpeyyā" (Dī. Ni. 2.438), "maṇḍabhūmi" has come to mean "subhūmi." Catumahāpathe means at a place where two great roads intersect. Ājaññaratho means a chariot yoked with well-trained thoroughbreds. Odhastapatodo means a goad placed crosswise, so that it can be grasped by one standing having mounted the chariot. Yoggācariyo means a horse trainer. Sveva assadamme sāretīti assadammasārathi means a charioteer who trains the horses. Yenicchaka means by whichever path he wishes. Yadicchaka means to whichever destination he wishes. Sāreyyā means he could send it straight ahead. Paccāsāreyyā means he could turn it back.

so sace ākaṅkhatītiādimāha. Taṃ uttānatthamevāti.

so sace ākaṅkhatī etc. was said. Its meaning is straightforward.

9. Caṅkamasuttavaṇṇanā
9. Caṅkama Sutta Commentary

29.Navameaddhānakkhamo hotīti dūraṃ addhānamaggaṃ gacchanto khamati, adhivāsetuṃ sakkoti.Padhānakkhamoti vīriyakkhamo.Caṅkamādhigato samādhīti caṅkamaṃ adhiṭṭhahantena adhigato aṭṭhannaṃ samāpattīnaṃ aññatarasamādhi.Ciraṭṭhitiko hotīti ciraṃ tiṭṭhati. Ṭhitakena gahitanimittañhi nisinnassa nassati, nisinnena gahitanimittaṃ nipannassa. Caṅkamaṃ adhiṭṭhahantena calitārammaṇe gahitanimittaṃ pana ṭhitassapi nisinnassapi nipannassapi na nassatīti.

29. In the ninth, addhānakkhamo hotī means when going a long distance, he is able to endure; he is able to persevere. Padhānakkhamo means he is able to exert effort. Caṅkamādhigato samādhī means the samādhi attained by one engaging in walking meditation, one of the eight attainments. Ciraṭṭhitiko hotī means it lasts a long time. For the object grasped by one standing is lost to one sitting, and the object grasped by one sitting is lost to one lying down. However, the object grasped by one engaging in walking meditation, an object grasped in a moving posture, is not lost even to one standing, sitting, or lying down.

10. Nāgitasuttavaṇṇanā
10. Nāgita Sutta Commentary

30.Dasame uddhaṃ uggatattā ucco, rāsibhāvena ca mahā saddo etesantiuccāsaddamahāsaddā. Tesu hi uggatuggatesu khattiyamahāsāla-brāhmaṇamahāsālādīsu mahāsakkāraṃ gahetvā āgatesu ‘‘asukassa okāsaṃ detha, asukassa okāsaṃ dethā’’ti vutte ‘‘mayaṃ paṭhamataraṃ āgatā, mayhaṃ paṭhamataraṃ āgatā, natthi okāso’’ti evaṃ aññamaññaṃ kathentānaṃ saddo ucco ceva mahā ca ahosi.Kevaṭṭā maññe macchavilopeti kevaṭṭā viya macchavilope. Tesañhi macchapacchiṃ gahetvā āgatānaṃ vikkiṇanaṭṭhāne ‘‘mayhaṃ detha mayhaṃ dethā’’ti vadato mahājanassa evarūpo saddo hoti.Mīḷhasukhanti asucisukhaṃ.Middhasukhanti niddāsukhaṃ.Lābhasakkārasilokasukhanti lābhasakkārañceva vaṇṇabhaṇanañca nissāya uppannasukhaṃ.

30. In the tenth, uccāsaddamahāsaddā means loud and great noises, because they are high and great in volume. For when those eminent khattiyas, great brāhmaṇas, etc., had arrived, having received great honor, and it was said, "Give space to so-and-so, give space to so-and-so," the noise of those saying to each other, "We arrived earlier, I arrived earlier, there is no space," was both loud and great. Kevaṭṭā maññe macchavilope means like fishermen at a fish market. For such a noise arises from the crowd of people saying, "Give to me, give to me," when fishermen arrive with their baskets of fish to sell. Mīḷhasukha means the pleasure of filth. Middhasukha means the pleasure of sleep. Lābhasakkārasilokasukha means the pleasure arising from gain, honor, and praise.

Taṃninnāvagamissantīti taṃ tadeva bhagavato gataṭṭhānaṃ gamissanti, anubandhissantiyevāti vuttaṃ hoti.Tathā hi, bhante, bhagavato sīlapaññāṇanti yasmā tathāvidhaṃ tumhākaṃ sīlañca ñāṇañcāti attho.Mā ca mayā yasoti mayā saddhiṃ yasopi mā samāgacchatu.Piyānanti piyajanānaṃ.Eso tassa nissandoti esā piyabhāvassa nipphatti.Asubhanimittānuyoganti asubhakammaṭṭhānānuyogaṃ.Subhanimitteti rāgaṭṭhāniye iṭṭhārammaṇe.Eso tassa nissandoti esā tassa asubhanimittānuyogassa nipphatti. Evamimasmiṃ sutte imesu pañcasu ṭhānesu vipassanāva kathitāti.

Taṃninnāva gamissantīti they will go to that very place where the Blessed One has gone, meaning they will undoubtedly follow after him. Tathā hi, bhante, bhagavato sīlapaññāṇanti because your virtue and wisdom are such. Mā ca mayā yasoti may my fame not be associated with me. Piyānanti of beloved people. Eso tassa nissandoti this is the origin of being dear. Asubhanimittānuyoganti application to the contemplation of the unattractive. Subhanimitteti in an attractive object, a place for lust. Eso tassa nissandoti this is the origin of that application to the contemplation of the unattractive. Thus, in this sutta, insight meditation is spoken of in these five instances.

4. Sumanavaggo

4. Sumana Vagga

1. Sumanasuttavaṇṇanā
1. Sumanasuttavaṇṇanā

31.Catutthassa paṭhamesumanā rājakumārīti mahāsakkāraṃ katvā patthanaṃ patthetvā evaṃ laddhanāmā rājakaññā. Vipassisammāsambuddhakālasmiṃ hi nāgaresu ‘‘yuddhampi katvā satthāraṃ amhākaṃ gaṇhissāmā’’ti senāpatiṃ nissāya buddhappamukhaṃ saṅghaṃ labhitvā paṭipāṭiyā puññāni kātuṃ āraddhesu sabbapaṭhamadivaso senāpatissa vāro ahosi. Tasmiṃ divase senāpati mahādānaṃ sajjetvā ‘‘ajja yathā añño koci ekabhikkhampi na deti, evaṃ rakkhathā’’ti samantā purise ṭhapesi. Taṃdivasaṃ seṭṭhibhariyā rodamānā pañcahi kumārikāsatehi saddhiṃ kīḷitvā āgataṃ dhītaraṃ āha – ‘‘sace, amma, tava pitā jīveyya, ajjāhaṃ paṭhamaṃ dasabalaṃ bhojeyya’’nti. Sā taṃ āha – ‘‘amma, mā cintayi, ahaṃ tathā karissāmi, yathā buddhappamukho saṅgho amhākaṃ paṭhamaṃ bhikkhaṃ bhuñjissatī’’ti. Tato satasahassagghanikāya suvaṇṇapātiyā nirudakapāyāsaṃ pūretvā sappimadhusakkharādīhi abhisaṅkharitvā aññissā pātiyā paṭikujjitvā taṃ sumanamālāguḷehi parikkhipitvā mālāguḷasadisaṃ katvā bhagavato gāmaṃ pavisanavelāya sayameva ukkhipitvā dhātigaṇaparivutā gharā nikkhami.

31. In the first sutta of the fourth section, sumanā rājakumārīti the princess who obtained that name by performing great acts of reverence and making a wish. In the time of Vipassi Sammāsambuddha, when the townspeople, relying on their commander-in-chief, prepared to make offerings to the Buddha and the Saṅgha, thinking, "Even if we have to fight, we will seize our Teacher," the first day of their turns to perform meritorious deeds fell to the commander-in-chief. On that day, the commander-in-chief prepared a great offering and stationed men all around, saying, "Protect this so that no one else gives even a single morsel of food to a bhikkhu today." On that day, the wife of a wealthy man, weeping, said to her daughter, who had come after playing with five hundred princesses, "If your father were alive, I would first offer food to the Ten-Powered One today." She said to her mother, "Mother, do not worry, I will ensure that the Buddha and the Saṅgha receive our alms first." Then, filling a golden bowl worth one hundred thousand [coins] with milk-rice without water, and flavoring it with ghee, honey, sugar, etc., she covered it with another bowl, surrounded it with Sumana flower balls, made it resemble a flower ball, and, surrounded by a group of nurses, she left the house just as the Blessed One was entering the village.

Antarāmagge senāpatino upaṭṭhākā, ‘‘amma, mā ito āgamā’’ti vadanti. Mahāpuññā nāma manāpakathā honti, na ca tesaṃ punappunaṃ bhaṇantānaṃ kathā paṭikkhipituṃ sakkā hoti. Sā ‘‘cūḷapita, mahāpita, mātula, kissa tumhe gantuṃ na dethā’’ti āha. Senāpatinā ‘‘aññassa kassaci khādanīyaṃ bhojanīyaṃ mā dethā’’ti ṭhapitamha, ammāti. Kiṃ pana mama hatthe khādanīyaṃ bhojanīyaṃ passathāti? Mālāguḷaṃ passāmāti. Kiṃ tumhākaṃ senāpati mālāpūjampi kātuṃ na detīti? Deti, ammāti. Tena hi apethāti bhagavantaṃ upasaṅkamitvā ‘‘mālāguḷaṃ gaṇhatha bhagavā’’ti āha. Bhagavā ekaṃ senāpatissa upaṭṭhākaṃ oloketvā mālāguḷaṃ gaṇhāpesi. Sā bhagavantaṃ vanditvā ‘‘bhavābhavābhinibbattiyaṃ me sati paritassanajīvitaṃ nāma mā hotu, ayaṃ sumanamālā viya nibbattanibbattaṭṭhāne piyāva homi, nāmena ca sumanāyevā’’ti patthanaṃ katvā satthārā ‘‘sukhinī hohī’’ti vuttā vanditvā padakkhiṇaṃ katvā pakkāmi.

On the way, the commander-in-chief's attendants said, "Mother, do not come this way." Greatly meritorious beings have agreeable speech, and it is not possible to reject the words of those who repeatedly speak. She said, "Little fathers, great fathers, uncles, why do you not allow me to go?" The commander-in-chief has ordered, "Do not give any food or edibles to anyone else, mother." Do you see any food or edibles in my hand? We see a flower ball. Does your commander-in-chief not allow even flower offerings? He does, mother. Then, go away," and approaching the Blessed One, she said, "Please accept the flower ball, Blessed One." The Blessed One looked at one of the commander-in-chief's attendants and had the flower ball accepted. She, after venerating the Blessed One, made a wish, "May I never have a life tormented by craving in future existences; may I be dear in every birth like this Sumana flower, and may my name be Sumana," and having been told by the Teacher, "May you be happy," she departed after venerating and circumambulating him.

Bhagavāpi senāpatissa gehaṃ gantvā paññattāsane nisīdi. Senāpati yāguṃ gahetvā upagañchi, satthā hatthena pattaṃ pidahi. Nisinno, bhante, bhikkhusaṅghoti. Atthi no eko antarāmagge piṇḍapāto laddhoti? Mālaṃ apanetvā piṇḍapātaṃ addasa. Cūḷupaṭṭhāko āha – ‘‘sāmi mālāti maṃ vatvā mātugāmo vañcesī’’ti. Pāyāso bhagavantaṃ ādiṃ katvā sabbabhikkhūnaṃ pahosi. Senāpati attano deyyadhammaṃ adāsi. Satthā bhattakiccaṃ katvā maṅgalaṃ vatvā pakkāmi. Senāpati ‘‘kā nāma sā piṇḍapātamadāsī’’ti pucchi. Seṭṭhidhītā sāmīti. Sappaññā itthī, evarūpāya ghare vasantiyā purisassa saggasampatti nāma na dullabhāti kaṃ ānetvā jeṭṭhakaṭṭhāne ṭhapesi?

The Blessed One also went to the commander-in-chief's house and sat on the prepared seat. The commander-in-chief brought rice-gruel, but the Teacher covered the bowl with his hand. The Saṅgha of monks is seated, Venerable Sir. Is there not a piṇḍapāta received on the way? He removed the flower and saw the piṇḍapāta. A junior attendant said, "Master, the woman deceived me by saying it was flowers." The milk-rice was sufficient for all the monks, beginning with the Blessed One. The commander-in-chief gave his own offering. The Teacher, having finished the meal, gave a blessing and departed. The commander-in-chief asked, "Who was that who gave the piṇḍapāta?" The daughter of a wealthy man, master. A wise woman; for a man who has such a woman living in his house, heavenly fortune is not difficult to obtain," and having brought her, he placed her in the chief position.

Sā pitugehe ca senāpatigehe ca dhanaṃ gahetvā yāvatāyukaṃ tathāgatassa dānaṃ datvā puññāni karitvā tato cutā kāmāvacaradevaloke nibbatti. Nibbattakkhaṇeyeva jāṇuppamāṇena odhinā sakalaṃ devalokaṃ paripūrayamānaṃ sumanavassaṃ vassi. Devatā ‘‘ayaṃ attanāva attano nāmaṃ gahetvā āgatā’’ti ‘‘sumanā devadhītā’’tvevassā nāmaṃ akaṃsu. Sā ekanavutikappe devesu ca manussesu ca saṃsarantī nibbattanibbattaṭṭhāne avijahitasumanavassā ‘‘sumanā sumanā’’tveva nāmā ahosi. Imasmiṃ pana kāle kosalarañño aggamahesiyā kucchismiṃ paṭisandhiṃ gaṇhi. Tāpi pañcasatā kumārikā taṃdivasaññeva tasmiṃ tasmiṃ kule paṭisandhiṃ gahetvā ekadivaseyeva sabbā mātukucchito nikkhamiṃsu. Taṃkhaṇaṃyeva jāṇuppamāṇena odhinā sumanavassaṃ vassi. Taṃ disvā rājā ‘‘pubbe katābhinīhārā esā bhavissatī’’ti tuṭṭhamānaso ‘‘dhītā me attanāva attano nāmaṃ gahetvā āgatā’’ti sumanātvevassā nāmaṃ katvā ‘‘mayhaṃ dhītā na ekikāva nibbattissatī’’ti nagaraṃ vicināpento ‘pañca dārikāsatāni jātānī’’ti sutvā sabbā attanāva posāpesi. Māse māse sampate ‘‘ānetvā mama dhītu dassethā’’ti āha. Evamesā mahāsakkāraṃ katvā patthanaṃ patthetvā evaṃladdhanāmāti veditabbā.

She, taking wealth from both her father's and the commander-in-chief's houses, gave alms to the Tathāgata and performed meritorious deeds for as long as she lived, and upon passing away from there, she was reborn in the world of sense-sphere deities. At the moment of her rebirth, a Sumana rain, filling the entire deva-world with dew the size of a knee, fell. The deities, thinking, "She has come taking her own name," named her "Sumanā devadhītā". As she transmigrated among gods and humans for ninety-one aeons, in every place of birth, unfailing Sumana rain would fall, and her name was always "Sumanā." In this era, she took rebirth in the womb of the chief consort of the Kosala king. Those five hundred princesses also took rebirth on that very day in their respective families, and all emerged from their mothers' wombs on the same day. At that very moment, Sumana rain fell with dew the size of a knee. Seeing this, the king, pleased, thinking, "She must have made a resolve in the past," named her Sumanā, saying, "My daughter has come taking her own name," and thinking, "My daughter will not be born alone," he searched the city and, hearing that "five hundred girls have been born," had all of them raised by himself. Every month, he would say, "Bring them and show them to my daughter." Thus, she should be understood as having obtained that name by performing great acts of reverence and making a wish.

Tassā sattavassikakāle anāthapiṇḍikena vihāraṃ niṭṭhāpetvā tathāgatassa dūte pesite satthā bhikkhusaṅghaparivāro sāvatthiṃ agamāsi. Anāthapiṇḍiko gantvā rājānaṃ evamāha – ‘‘mahārāja, satthu idhāgamanaṃ amhākampi maṅgalaṃ tumhākampi maṅgalameva, sumanaṃ rājakumāriṃ pañcahi dārikāsatehi saddhiṃ puṇṇaghaṭe ca gandhamālādīni ca gāhāpetvā dasabalassa paccuggamanaṃ pesethā’’ti. Rājā ‘‘sādhu mahāseṭṭhī’’ti tathā akāsi. Sāpi raññā vuttanayeneva gantvā satthāraṃ vanditvā gandhamālādīhi pūjetvā ekamantaṃ aṭṭhāsi. Satthā tassā dhammaṃ desesi. Sā pañcahi kumārikāsatehi saddhiṃ sotāpattiphale patiṭṭhāsi. Aññānipi pañca dārikāsatāni pañca mātugāmasatāni pañca upāsakasatāni tasmiṃyeva khaṇe sotāpattiphalaṃ pāpuṇiṃsu. Evaṃ tasmiṃ divase antarāmaggeyeva dve sotāpannasahassāni jātāni.

When she was seven years old, after Anāthapiṇḍika had completed the monastery and sent messengers to the Tathāgata, the Teacher, along with the Saṅgha of monks, went to Sāvatthi. Anāthapiṇḍika went and said to the king, "Great King, the arrival of the Teacher here is auspicious for both of us; send Princess Sumanā with five hundred girls, carrying full water pots and garlands and perfumes, to welcome the Ten-Powered One." The king said, "Good, great merchant," and did so. She too, going in the manner described by the king, venerated the Teacher, offered perfumes and garlands, and stood to one side. The Teacher preached the Dhamma to her. She, along with the five hundred princesses, was established in the fruition of stream-entry. Another five hundred girls, five hundred women, and five hundred laymen also attained the fruition of stream-entry at that very moment. Thus, on that day, two thousand stream-enterers were born on the way.

Yena bhagavā tenupasaṅkamīti kasmā upasaṅkamīti? Pañhaṃ pucchitukāmatāya. Kassapasammāsambuddhakāle kira sahāyakā dve bhikkhū ahesuṃ. Tesu eko sāraṇīyadhammaṃ pūreti, eko bhattaggavattaṃ. Sāraṇīyadhammapūrako itaraṃ āha – ‘‘āvuso, adinnassa phalaṃ nāma natthi, attanā laddhaṃ paresaṃ datvā bhuñjituṃ vaṭṭatī’’ti. Itaro pana āha – ‘‘āvuso, tvaṃ na jānāsi, deyyadhammaṃ nāma vinipātetuṃ na vaṭṭati, attano yāpanamattameva gaṇhantena bhattaggavattaṃ pūretuṃ vaṭṭatī’’ti. Tesu ekopi ekaṃ attano ovāde otāretuṃ nāsakkhi. Dvepi attano paṭipattiṃ pūretvā tato cutā kāmāvacaradevaloke nibbattiṃsu. Tattha sāraṇīyadhammapūrako itaraṃ pañcahi dhammehi adhigaṇhi.

Yena bhagavā tenupasaṅkamīti why did she approach? Desiring to ask a question. It is said that in the time of Kassapa Sammāsambuddha, there were two bhikkhus who were friends. One fulfilled the conditions for cordiality, the other fulfilled the duties of the refectory. The one who fulfilled the conditions for cordiality said to the other, "Friend, there is no fruit in giving nothing; it is proper to eat after giving what one has obtained to others." But the other said, "Friend, you do not know; it is not proper to squander offerings. It is proper to fulfill the duties of the refectory by taking only enough to sustain oneself." Neither of them was able to persuade the other to accept his advice. Both, having fulfilled their own practices, passed away from there and were reborn in the world of sense-sphere deities. There, the one who fulfilled the conditions for cordiality surpassed the other in five ways.

Evaṃ te devesu ca manussesu ca saṃsarantā ekaṃ buddhantaraṃ khepetvā imasmiṃ kāle sāvatthiyaṃ nibbattiṃsu. Sāraṇīyadhammapūrako kosalarañño aggamahesiyā kucchismiṃ paṭisandhiṃ gaṇhi, itaro tassāyeva upaṭṭhākaitthiyā kucchismiṃ paṭisandhiṃ gaṇhi. Te dvepi janā ekadivaseneva jāyiṃsu. Te nāmaggahaṇadivase nhāpetvā sirigabbhe nipajjāpetvā dvinnampi mātaro bahi sakkāraṃ saṃvidahiṃsu. Tesu sāraṇīyadhammapūrako akkhīni ummīletvā mahantaṃ setacchattaṃ supaññattaṃ sirisayanaṃ alaṅkatapaṭiyattañca nivesanaṃ disvā ‘‘ekasmiṃ rājakule nibbattosmī’’ti aññāsi. So ‘‘kiṃ nu kho kammaṃ katvā idha nibbattosmī’’ti āvajjento ‘‘sāraṇīyadhammanissandenā’’ti ñatvā ‘‘sahāyo me kuhiṃ nu kho nibbatto’’ti āvajjento nīcasayane nipannaṃ disvā ‘‘ayaṃ bhattaggavattaṃ pūremīti mama vacanaṃ na gaṇhi, imasmiṃ idāni taṃ ṭhāne niggaṇhituṃ vaṭṭatī’’ti ‘‘samma mama vacanaṃ nākāsī’’ti āha. Atha kiṃ jātanti. Passa mayhaṃ sampattiṃ, setacchattassa heṭṭhā sirisayane nipannosmi, tvaṃ nīcamañce thaddhaattharaṇamatte nipannosīti. Kiṃ pana tvaṃ etaṃ nissāya mānaṃ karosi, nanu veḷusalākāhi katvā pilotikāya paliveṭhitaṃ sabbametaṃ pathavīdhātumattamevāti?

Thus, as they transmigrated among gods and humans, having spent one Buddha-interval, they were born in Sāvatthi in this era. The one who fulfilled the conditions for cordiality took rebirth in the womb of the chief consort of the Kosala king, the other took rebirth in the womb of her attendant. Both of them were born on the same day. On the day of naming them, after bathing them and laying them down in the auspicious chamber, the mothers of both prepared offerings outside. Of them, the one who fulfilled the conditions for cordiality, opening his eyes and seeing the large white parasol, the well-prepared auspicious bed, and the decorated residence, knew, "I have been born in a royal family." He, considering, "What deed did I do to be born here?" knew, "By the outflow of the conditions for cordiality," and considering, "Where was my friend reborn?" and seeing him lying on a lowly bed, [thought,] "He did not heed my words to fulfill the duties of the refectory; now it is proper to suppress him in that place," and said, "Friend, you did not heed my words." Then what happened? Look at my prosperity; I am lying on an auspicious bed under a white parasol, you are lying on a lowly cot with a rough covering. Why do you boast about this? Is not all of this, made of bamboo strips and wrapped in rags, merely the earth element?

Sumanā tesaṃ kathaṃ sutvā ‘‘mama bhātikānaṃ santike koci natthī’’ti tesaṃ samīpaṃ gacchantī dvāraṃ nissāya ṭhitā ‘‘dhātū’’ti vacanaṃ sutvā ‘‘idaṃ dhātūti vacanaṃ bahiddhā natthi. Mama bhātikā samaṇadevaputtā bhavissantī’’ti cintetvā – ‘‘sacāhaṃ ‘ime evaṃ kathentī’ti mātāpitūnaṃ kathessāmi, ‘amanussā ete’ti nīharāpessanti. Idaṃ kāraṇaṃ aññassa akathetvā kaṅkhacchedakaṃ purisaheraññikaṃ mama pitaraṃ mahāgotamadasabalaṃyeva pucchissāmī’’ti bhuttapātarāsā rājānaṃ upasaṅkamitvā ‘‘dasabalassa upaṭṭhānaṃ gamissāmī’’ti āha. Rājā pañca rathasatāni yojāpesi. Jambudīpatalasmiñhi tissova kumāriyo pitūnaṃ santikā pañca rathasatāni labhiṃsu – bimbisārarañño dhītā cundī rājakaññā, dhanañcayassa seṭṭhissa dhītā visākhā, ayaṃ sumanā rājakaññāti. Sā gandhamālaṃ ādāya rathe ṭhitā pañcarathasataparivārā ‘‘imaṃ pañhaṃ pucchissāmī’’ti yena bhagavā tenupasaṅkami.

Sumanā, hearing their conversation, thinking, "There is no one near my brothers," approaching them and standing by the door, hearing the word "elements," thought, "This word 'elements' is not [known] outside. My brothers will become samaṇa-deities," and thinking, "If I tell my parents that 'they are talking like this,' they will drive them out, saying, 'they are non-humans.' Without telling this reason to anyone else, I will ask my father, the great Gotama, the Ten-Powered One, the one who cuts off doubt, the storehouse of jewels," having eaten breakfast, she approached the king and said, "I will go to attend upon the Ten-Powered One." The king had five hundred chariots prepared. For on the surface of Jambudīpa, only three princesses received five hundred chariots from their fathers: Cundī rājakaññā, the daughter of King Bimbisāra, Visākhā, the daughter of Dhanañcaya seṭṭhi, and this Sumanā rājakaññā. Taking perfumes and garlands and standing in the chariot, surrounded by five hundred chariots, "I will ask this question," she approached the Blessed One.

Idhassūti idha bhaveyyuṃ.Eko dāyakoti eko attanā laddhalābhato parassa datvā paribhuñjanako sāraṇīyadhammapūrako.Eko adāyakoti eko attanā laddhaṃ parassa adatvā paribhuñjanako bhattaggavattapūrako.Devabhūtānaṃ pana nesanti devabhūtānaṃ etesaṃ.Adhigaṇhātīti adhibhavitvā gaṇhāti ajjhottharati atiseti.Ādhipateyyenāti jeṭṭhakakāraṇena.Imehi pañcahi ṭhānehīti sesadeve sakko devarājā viya imehi pañcahi kāraṇehi adhigaṇhāti.Mānusakenātiādīsu āyunā mahākassapatthero viya bākulatthero viya ānandatthero viya ca, vaṇṇena mahāgatimbaabhayatthero viya bhaṇḍāgāraamacco viya ca, sukhena raṭṭhapālakulaputto viya soṇaseṭṭhiputto viya yasadārako viya ca, yasena dhammāsoko viya, tathā ādhipaccenāti imehi pañcahi kāraṇehi atireko jeṭṭhako hoti.

Idhassūti may there be here. Eko dāyakoti one who gives to others from the gain he has obtained himself, the one who fulfilled the conditions for cordiality. Eko adāyakoti one who does not give to others what he has obtained himself, the one who fulfilled the duties of the refectory. Devabhūtānaṃ pana nesanti of these become deities. Adhigaṇhātīti surpasses and seizes, overcomes, excels. Ādhipateyyenāti because of seniority. Imehi pañcahi ṭhānehīti like Sakka, king of the gods, surpasses other deities by these five reasons. Mānusakenātiādīsu like Mahākassapa Thera in life-span, like Bākula Thera, like Ānanda Thera, in beauty like Mahāgatimba Abhaya Thera, like the treasurer, in happiness like Raṭṭhapāla Kulaputta, like Soṇa Seṭṭhiputta, like Yasadāraka, in fame like Dhammāsoka, thus in sovereignty, he is superior and senior by these five reasons.

Yācitova bahulanti bākulatthera-sīvalitthera-ānandattherādayo viya yācitova bahulaṃ cīvarādīni paribhuñjatīti imehi kāraṇehi atireko hoti jeṭṭhako.Yadidaṃ vimuttiyā vimuttinti yaṃ ekassa vimuttiyā saddhiṃ itarassa vimuttiṃ ārabbha nānākaraṇaṃ vattabbaṃ bhaveyya, taṃ na vadāmīti attho. Sattavassikadārako vā hi vimuttiṃ paṭivijjhatu vassasatikatthero vā bhikkhu vā bhikkhunī vā upāsako vā upāsikā vā devo vā māro vā brahmā vā, paṭividdhalokuttaramagge nānattaṃ nāma natthi.Alamevāti yuttameva.Yatra hi nāmāti yāni nāma.

Yācitova bahulanti like Bākula Thera, Sīvali Thera, Ānanda Thera, he frequently partakes of robes and other requisites only when requested; by these reasons he is superior and senior. Yadidaṃ vimuttiyā vimuttinti whatever difference should be stated regarding one's liberation in relation to another's liberation, that I do not say. Whether a seven-year-old child realizes liberation, or a bhikkhu or bhikkhunī or upāsaka or upāsikā or deva or māra or brahmā of a hundred years, there is no difference in the path of transcendent attainment. Alamevāti it is fitting. Yatra hi nāmāti whatever name.

Gacchaṃ ākāsadhātuyāti ākāsena gacchanto.Saddhoti ratanattayaguṇānaṃ saddhātā.Thanayanti gajjanto.Vijjumālīti mālāsadisāya meghamukhe carantiyā vijjulatāya samannāgato.Satakkakūti satakūṭo, ito cito ca uṭṭhitena valāhakakūṭasatena samannāgatoti attho.Dassanasampannoti sotāpanno.Bhogaparibyūḷhoti udakoghena viya dānavasena dīyamānehi bhogehi paribyūḷho, devalokaṃ sampāpitoti attho.Peccāti paraloke.Sagge pamodatīti yasmiṃ sagge uppajjati, tattheva modatīti.

Gacchaṃ ākāsadhātuyāti going through the element of space. Saddhoti believing in the qualities of the Triple Gem. Thanayanti thundering. Vijjumālīti endowed with lightning flashes moving in the clouds like garlands. Satakkakūti satakūṭo, endowed with hundreds of peaks of clouds rising here and there. Dassanasampannoti a stream-enterer. Bhogaparibyūḷhoti filled with possessions given in generosity, as if by a flood of water, having attained the deva-world. Peccāti in the next world. Sagge pamodatīti in whatever heaven he is born, he rejoices there.

2. Cundīsuttavaṇṇanā
2. Cundīsuttavaṇṇanā

32.Dutiyepañcahi rathasatehīti bhuttapātarāsā pitu santikaṃ pesetvā pañca rathasatāni yojāpetvā tehi parivutāti attho.Upasaṅkamīti bhātarā saddhiṃ pavattitaṃ pañhasākacchaṃ pucchissāmīti gandhamālacuṇṇādīni ādāya upasaṅkami.Yadeva so hotīti yadā eva so hoti. Atha vā yo eva so hoti.Ariyakantāni sīlānīti maggaphalasampayuttāni sīlāni. Tāni hi ariyānaṃ kantāni honti, bhavantarepi na pariccajanti. Sesaṃ catukkanipāte aggappasādasutte vuttanayeneva veditabbaṃ.

32.In the second, with five hundred chariots: Having sent (her alms) food to her father and having prepared five hundred chariots, surrounded by them, is the meaning. Approached: Thinking, "I will ask about the conversation on the questions conducted with my brothers," she approached, taking perfumes, garlands, and powder. Just as he is: Whenever he is. Or, whoever he is. Ariyakanta sīla: The sīla associated with the paths and fruits. For those are pleasing to the noble ones, and they do not abandon them even in future existences. The rest should be understood in the same manner as stated in the Aggappasāda Sutta in the Catukka Nipāta.

3. Uggahasuttavaṇṇanā
3. Uggaha Sutta Commentary

33.Tatiyebhaddiyeti bhaddiyanagare.Jātiyāvaneti sayaṃjāte aropite himavantena saddhiṃ ekābaddhe vanasaṇḍe, taṃ nagaraṃ upanissāya tasmiṃ vane viharatīti attho.Attacatutthoti attanā catuttho. Kasmā panesa bhagavantaṃ attacatutthaṃyeva nimantesi? Gehe kirassa maṅgalaṃ mahantaṃ, tattha mahantena saṃvidhānena bahū manussā sannipatissanti. Te bhikkhusaṅghaṃ parivisantena dussaṅgahā bhavissantīti attacatutthaṃyeva nimantesi. Api cassa evampi ahosi – ‘‘daharakumārikāyo mahābhikkhusaṅghamajjhe satthari ovadante olīnamanā ovādaṃ gahetuṃ na sakkuṇeyyu’’nti. Imināpi kāraṇena attacatutthameva nimantesi.Ovadatu tāsaṃ, bhanteti, bhante bhagavā, etāsaṃ ovadatu, etā ovadatūti attho. Upayogatthasmiñhi etaṃ sāmivacanaṃ.Yaṃ tāsanti yaṃ ovādānusāsanaṃ etāsaṃ. Evañca pana vatvā so seṭṭhi ‘‘imā mama santike ovādaṃ gaṇhamānā harāyeyyu’’nti bhagavantaṃ vanditvā pakkāmi.

33.In the third, in Bhaddiya: In the city of Bhaddiya. Jātiyāvana: In a self-grown grove, planted and connected to the Himalayas, dwelling in that forest near that city, is the meaning. Himself as the fourth: Himself being the fourth. But why did he invite the Blessed One with himself as the fourth? It seems there was a great celebration at his home, where many people would gather with great preparation. If he invited the Sangha of monks, they would be difficult to manage, so he invited only four, including himself. Moreover, he thought, "Young girls may not be able to attentively receive the advice when the Teacher is advising in the midst of a large Sangha of monks." For this reason too, he invited only four, including himself. Let him advise them, Bhante: Bhante, Blessed One, let him advise these women, let them be advised, is the meaning. For this is a respectful term in the sense of utility. Whatever to them: Whatever advice and instruction to them. Having said this, the wealthy man, thinking, "These women might be embarrassed if they receive advice in my presence," paid homage to the Blessed One and departed.

Bhattūti sāmikassa.Anukampaṃ upādāyāti anuddayaṃ paṭicca.Pubbuṭṭhāyiniyoti sabbapaṭhamaṃ uṭṭhānasīlā.Pacchānipātiniyoti sabbapacchā nipajjanasīlā. Itthiyā hi paṭhamataraṃ bhuñjitvā sayanaṃ āruyha nipajjituṃ na vaṭṭati, sabbe pana gehaparijane bhojetvā upakaraṇabhaṇḍaṃ saṃvidhāya gorūpādīni āgatānāgatāni ñatvā sve kattabbakammaṃ vicāretvā kuñcikāmuddikaṃ hatthe katvā sace bhojanaṃ atthi, bhuñjitvā, no ce atthi, aññaṃ pacāpetvā sabbe santappetvā pacchā nipajjituṃ vaṭṭati. Nipannāyapi yāva sūriyuggamanā niddāyituṃ na vaṭṭati, sabbapaṭhamaṃ pana uṭṭhāya dāsakammakare pakkosāpetvā ‘‘idañcidañca kammaṃ karothā’’ti kammantaṃ vicāretvā dhenuyo duhāpetvā sabbaṃ gehe kattabbakiccaṃ attano paccakkhaṃyeva kātuṃ vaṭṭati. Etamatthaṃ sandhāya ‘‘pubbuṭṭhāyiniyo pacchānipātiniyo’’ti āha.‘‘Kiṃkārapaṭissāviniyoti kiṃ karoma kiṃ karomā’’ti mukhaṃ oloketvā vicaraṇasīlā.Manāpacāriniyoti manāpaṃyeva kiriyaṃ karaṇasīlā.Piyavādiniyoti piyameva vacanaṃ vādanasīlā.Pūjessāmāti catupaccayapūjāya pūjayissāma.

Husband: To the master. Taking compassion: Relying on compassion. Rising early: Being accustomed to rising before everyone else. Retiring late: Being accustomed to retiring after everyone else. For a woman, it is not proper to eat before others and lie down in bed; rather, after feeding all the family members, arranging the utensils, knowing about the cows and other animals that have come or not come, considering the tasks to be done the next day, with the key and seal in hand, if there is food, she should eat, or if not, she should cook something else, satisfying everyone before retiring. Even after lying down, she should not sleep until sunrise, but should rise before everyone else, summoning the servants and instructing them, "Do this and that," overseeing the work, having the cows milked, and personally attending to all the tasks to be done in the house. With this in mind, he said, "Rising early, retiring late." Responding to what to do: Being accustomed to looking at faces and asking, "What shall I do? What shall I do?" Acting agreeably: Being accustomed to doing only what is pleasing. Speaking affectionately: Being accustomed to speaking only affectionate words. We will honor: We will honor with the four requisites.

Abbhāgateti attano santikaṃ āgate.Āsanodakena paṭipūjessāmāti āsanena ca pādadhovanaudakena ca pūjayissāma. Ettha ca mātāpitūnaṃ devasikaṃ sakkāro kātabbo. Samaṇabrāhmaṇānaṃ pana abbhāgatānaṃ āsanaṃ datvā pādadhovanañca dātabbaṃ, sakkāro ca kātabbo.

Guests: Those who have come to her presence. We will honor with seat and water: We will honor with a seat and water for washing the feet. Here, daily respect should be shown to parents. But to the samaṇa and brahmin guests, a seat should be given, and water for washing the feet should be given, and respect should be shown.

Uṇṇāti eḷakalomaṃ.Tattha dakkhā bhavissāmāti eḷakalomānaṃ vijaṭanadhovanarajanaveṇikaraṇādīsu kappāsassa ca vaṭṭanapisanaphoṭanakantanādīsu chekā bhavissāma.Tatrupāyāyāti tasmiṃ uṇṇākappāsasaṃvidhāne upāyabhūtāya ‘‘imasmiṃ kāle idaṃ nāma kātuṃ vaṭṭatī’’ti evaṃ pavattāya vīmaṃsāya samannāgatā.Alaṃ kātuṃ alaṃ saṃvidhātunti attanā kātumpi parehi kārāpetumpi yuttā ceva samatthā ca bhavissāmāti attho.

Wool: Sheep's wool. We will be skilled in that: We will be skilled in untangling, washing, dyeing, and braiding wool, and in spinning, carding, beating, and spinning cotton. Accompanied by means: Accompanied by the investigation that is the means in that arrangement of wool and cotton, proceeding in such a way, "It is proper to do this at this time." Capable of doing, capable of arranging: We will be fit and capable of both doing ourselves and having others do it, is the meaning.

Katañca katato jānissāma, akatañca akatatoti sakaladivasaṃ idaṃ nāma kammaṃ katvā āgatānaṃ, upaḍḍhadivasaṃ idaṃ nāma kammaṃ katvā āgatānaṃ, nikkammānaṃ gehe nisinnānaṃ idaṃ nāma dātuñca evañca kātuṃ vaṭṭatīti evaṃ jānissāma.Gilānakānañca balābalanti sace hi gilānakāle tesaṃ bhesajjabhojanādīni datvā rogaṃ phāsuṃ na karonti, ‘‘ime arogakāle amhe yaṃ icchanti, taṃ kārenti. Gilānakāle atthi bhāvampi no na jānantī’’ti virattarūpā pacchā kiccāni na karonti, dukkaṭāni vā karonti. Tasmā nesaṃ balābalaṃ ñatvā dātabbañca kātabbañca jānissāmāti evaṃ tumhehi sikkhitabbanti dasseti.Khādanīyaṃ bhojanīyañcassāti khādanīyañca bhojanīyañca assa antojanassa.Paccaṃsenāti paṭilabhitabbena aṃsena, attano attano laddhabbakoṭṭhāsānurūpenāti attho.Saṃvibhajissāmāti dassāma.Sampādessāmāti sampādayissāma.

We will know what is done as done, and what is not done as not done: We will know, "It is proper to give this and do this" to those who have come after doing such and such work all day, and to those who have come after doing such and such work half a day, and to those who are sitting idly at home. And the strength and weakness of the sick: For if, in times of sickness, they do not alleviate the illness by giving medicine and food, (the sick) will become disillusioned and not do their duties later or do bad things, (thinking,) "When we are healthy, they make us do whatever they want. When we are sick, they don't even acknowledge our existence." Therefore, he shows that you should train yourselves by knowing their strength and weakness and knowing what should be given and done. Food and edibles for him: Food and edibles for his household. With a due share: With a share to be received, according to their respective portions to be obtained, is the meaning. We will share: We will give. We will provide: We will accomplish.

Adhuttīti purisadhuttasurādhuttatāvasena adhuttiyo.Athenīti atheniyo acoriyo.Asoṇḍīti surāsoṇḍatādivasena asoṇḍiyo.

Not gamblers: Not gamblers in terms of male gamblers and liquor gamblers. Not thieves: Not thieves, not robbers. Not drunkards: Not drunkards due to liquor addiction, etc.

yo naṃ bharati sabbadātiādimāha. Tatthabharatīti posati paṭijaggati.Sabbakāmaharanti sabbakāmadadaṃ.Sotthīti suitthī.Evaṃ vattatīti ettakaṃ vattaṃ pūretvā vattati.Manāpā nāma te devāti nimmānaratī devā. Te hi icchiticchitaṃ rūpaṃ māpetvā abhiramaṇato nimmānaratīti ca manāpāti ca vuccantīti.

He who supports him always: he said, beginning with this. There, supports: nourishes, attends to. Bestower of all desires: Giver of all desires. Happy: Very happy. Thus she behaves: She behaves by fulfilling this much of a duty. The gods are named Manāpa: The Nimmānaratī gods. For they are called Nimmānaratī and Manāpa because they delight in creating whatever forms they desire.

4. Sīhasenāpatisuttavaṇṇanā
4. Sīhasenāpati Sutta Commentary

34.Catutthesandiṭṭhikanti sāmaṃ passitabbakaṃ.Dāyakoti dānasūro. Na so saddhāmattakeneva tiṭṭhati, pariccajitumpi sakkotīti attho.Dānapatīti yaṃ dānaṃ deti, tassa pati hutvā deti, na dāso, na sahāyo. Yo hi attanā madhuraṃ bhuñjati, paresaṃ amadhuraṃ deti, so dānasaṅkhātassa deyyadhammassa dāso hutvā deti. Yo yaṃ attanā bhuñjati, tadeva deti, so sahāyo hutvā deti. Yo pana attanā yena kenaci yāpeti, paresaṃ madhuraṃ deti, so pati jeṭṭhako sāmī hutvā deti. Tādisaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ – ‘‘dānapatī’’ti.

34.In the fourth, Sandiṭṭhika: Something to be seen for oneself. Dāyako: Generous giver. He does not stand only on faith; he is also able to give up (his possessions), is the meaning. Dānapati: He gives as the master of the gift that he gives, not as a slave, not as a friend. For he who eats sweet things himself but gives unsavory things to others gives as a slave of the gift called dāṇa. He who gives what he himself eats gives as a friend. But he who lives on whatever he has but gives sweet things to others gives as a master, an elder, a lord. Referring to such a one, it was said, "Dānapati."

Amaṅkubhūtoti na nittejabhūto.Visāradoti ñāṇasomanassappatto.Sahabyataṃ gatāti sahabhāvaṃ ekībhāvaṃ gatā.Katāvakāsāti yena kammena tattha avakāso hoti, tassa katattā katāvakāsā. Taṃ pana yasmā kusalameva hoti, tasmākatakusalāti vuttaṃ.Modareti modanti pamodanti.Asitassāti anissitassa tathāgatassa.Tādinoti tādilakkhaṇaṃ pattassa.

Amaṅkubhūto: Not being discouraged. Visārado: Attained to the joy of knowledge. Sahabyataṃ gatā: Having gone to companionship, unification. Katāvakāsā: Having made opportunities because of having done that action by which there is an opportunity there. Since that is only wholesome, therefore it is said katakusalā. Modare: They rejoice and are delighted. Asitassa: Of the Tathāgata who is not dependent. Tādino: Of the one who has attained such a characteristic.

5. Dānānisaṃsasuttavaṇṇanā
5. Dānānisaṃsa Sutta Commentary

35.Pañcamegihidhammā anapagato hotīti akhaṇḍapañcasīlo hoti.Sataṃ dhammaṃ anukkamanti sappurisānaṃ mahāpurisānaṃ dhammaṃ anukkamanto.Santonaṃ bhajantīti sappurisā buddhapaccekabuddhatathāgatasāvakā etaṃ bhajanti.

35.In the fifth, does not depart from the qualities of a householder: He has unbroken five precepts. Follows the Dhamma of the virtuous: Following the Dhamma of the great men, the virtuous. The virtuous ones attend to him: The virtuous, the Buddhas, Paccekabuddhas, and disciples of the Tathāgata, attend to him.

6. Kāladānasuttavaṇṇanā
6. Kāladāna Sutta Commentary

36.Chaṭṭhekāladānānīti yuttadānāni, pattadānāni anucchavikadānānīti attho.Navasassānīti aggasassāni.Navaphalānīti ārāmato paṭhamuppannāni aggaphalāni.Paṭhamaṃ sīlavantesu patiṭṭhāpetīti paṭhamaṃ sīlavantānaṃ datvā pacchā attanā paribhuñjati.Vadaññūti bhāsitaññū.Kālena dinnanti yuttappattakālena dinnaṃ.Anumodantīti ekamante ṭhitā anumodanti.Veyyāvaccanti kāyena veyyāvaṭikakammaṃ karonti.Appaṭivānacittoti anukkaṇṭhitacitto.Yattha dinnaṃ mahapphalanti yasmiṃ ṭhāne dinnaṃ mahapphalaṃ hoti, tattha dadeyya.

36.In the sixth, Kāladāna: Appropriate gifts, gifts that are suitable, gifts that are fitting, is the meaning. New crops: The best crops. New fruits: The first fruits produced from the gardens, the best fruits. First establishes in the virtuous: First gives to the virtuous and then consumes himself. Vadaññū: Knowing what has been spoken. Given at the right time: Given at the appropriate and suitable time. They approve: Standing to one side, they approve. Veyyāvacca: They perform helpful acts with their body. Appaṭivānacitto: With a mind without resentment. Where given is of great fruit: Where giving is of great fruit, there one should give.

7. Bhojanasuttavaṇṇanā
7. Bhojana Sutta Commentary

37.Sattameāyuṃ detīti āyudānaṃ deti.Vaṇṇanti sarīravaṇṇaṃ.Sukhanti kāyikacetasikasukhaṃ.Balanti sarīrathāmaṃ.Paṭibhānanti yuttamuttappaṭibhānaṃ.

37.In the seventh, gives life: gives the gift of life. Vaṇṇa: Complexion of the body. Sukha: Physical and mental happiness. Bala: Physical strength. Paṭibhāna: Appropriate and timely eloquence.

8. Saddhasuttavaṇṇanā
8. Saddhā Sutta Commentary

38.Aṭṭhameanukampantīti anuggaṇhanti.Khandhimāva mahādumoti khandhasampanno mahārukkho viya.Manorame āyataneti ramaṇīye samosaraṇaṭṭhāne.Chāyaṃ chāyatthikā yantīti chāyāya atthikāva chāyaṃ upagacchanti.Nivātavuttinti nīcavuttiṃ.Atthaddhanti kodhamānathaddhatāya rahitaṃ.Soratanti soraccena sucisīlena samannāgataṃ.Sakhilanti sammodakaṃ.

38.In the eighth, Anukampantī: They favor. Like a great tree with a trunk: Like a great tree endowed with a trunk. In a delightful abode: In a delightful gathering place. Those who want shade go to the shade: Just as those who desire shade approach the shade. Nivātavutti: Humble conduct. Atthaddha: Devoid of stubbornness due to anger and pride. Sorata: Endowed with gentleness and pure sīla. Sakhila: Amiable.

9. Puttasuttavaṇṇanā
9. Putta Sutta Commentary

39.Navamebhato vā no bharissatīti amhehi thaññapāyanahatthapādavaḍḍhanādīhi bhato paṭijaggito amhe mahallakakāle hatthapādadhovana-nhāpanayāgubhattadānādīhi bharissati.Kiccaṃ vā no karissatīti attano kammaṃ ṭhapetvā amhākaṃ rājakulādīsu uppannaṃ kiccaṃ gantvā karissati.Kulavaṃso ciraṃ ṭhassatīti amhākaṃ santakaṃ khettavatthuhiraññasuvaṇṇādiṃ avināsetvā rakkhante putte kulavaṃso ciraṃ ṭhassati, amhehi vā pavattitāni salākabhattādīni anupacchinditvā pavattessati, evampi no kulavaṃso ciraṃ ṭhassati.Dāyajjaṃ paṭipajjissatīti kulavaṃsānurūpāya paṭipattiyā attānaṃ dāyajjārahaṃ karonto amhākaṃ santakaṃ dāyajjaṃ paṭipajjissati.Dakkhiṇaṃ anuppadassatīti pattidānaṃ katvā tatiyadivasato paṭṭhāya dānaṃ anuppadassati.

39.In the ninth, or he will support us when we are old: Having been supported by us with nursing, feeding, hand and foot care, etc., he will support us in old age with washing our hands and feet, bathing, giving rice gruel and food, etc. Or he will do our work: Setting aside his own work, he will go and do our work that arises in royal families, etc. The family lineage will last long: While the sons protect our property, fields, gold, silver, etc., without destroying them, the family lineage will last long; or, without cutting off the alms food distribution, etc., started by us, he will continue them, and thus our family lineage will last long. He will receive the inheritance: Making himself worthy of inheritance by conduct befitting the family lineage, he will receive our inheritance. He will give donations: Having made the giving of merit, he will give donations from the third day onwards.

Santo sappurisāti imasmiṃ ṭhāne mātāpitūsu sammā paṭipattiyā santo sappurisāti veditabbā.Pubbe katamanussaranti mātāpitūhi paṭhamataraṃ kataguṇaṃ anussarantā.Ovādakārīti mātāpitūhi dinnassa ovādassa kattā.Bhataposīti yehi bhato, tesaṃ posako.Pasaṃsiyoti diṭṭheva dhamme mahājanena pasaṃsitabbo hoti.

The virtuous, the noble ones: In this instance, the virtuous, the noble ones should be understood as proper conduct towards parents. Remembering what was done before: Remembering the good done earlier by the parents. Following advice: A doer of the advice given by the parents. Supporting those who nurtured him: Supporting those by whom he was nurtured. Worthy of praise: He is worthy of praise by the great multitude in this very life.

10. Mahāsālaputtasuttavaṇṇanā
10. Mahāsālaputta Sutta Commentary

40.Dasamemahāsālāti mahārukkhā.Sākhāpattapalāsena vaḍḍhantīti khuddakasākhāhi ca pattasaṅkhātena ca palāsena vaḍḍhanti.Araññasminti agāmake padese.Brahāvaneti mahāvane aṭaviyaṃ. Sesaṃ sabbattha uttānatthamevāti.

40.In the tenth, mahāsālā: Great trees. They grow with branches, leaves, and foliage: They grow with small branches and foliage known as leaves. In the forest: In a non-village area. Brahāvane: In a great forest, in the wilderness. Everywhere else, the meaning is straightforward.

5. Muṇḍarājavaggo

5. Muṇḍarāja Vagga

1. Ādiyasuttavaṇṇanā
1. Ādiya Sutta Commentary

41.Pañcamassa paṭhamebhogānaṃ ādiyāti bhogānaṃ ādātabbakāraṇāni.Uṭṭhānavīriyādhigatehīti uṭṭhānasaṅkhātena vīriyena adhigatehi.Bāhābalaparicitehīti bāhubalena sañcitehi.Sedāvakkhittehīti sedaṃ avakkhipetvā uppāditehi.Dhammikehīti dhammayuttehi.Dhammaladdhehīti dasakusalakammaṃ akopetvā laddhehi.Pīṇetīti pīṇitaṃ thūlaṃ karoti. Sesamettha catukkanipāte vuttanayeneva veditabbaṃ. Dutiyaṃ uttānatthameva.

41.In the first of the fifth, Ādiya of wealth: Reasons for taking from wealth. Uṭṭhānavīriyādhigatehi: Acquired by the effort known as striving. Bāhābalaparicitehi: Accumulated by the strength of the arms. Sedāvakkhittehi: Produced by shedding sweat. Dhammikehi: Righteous. Dhammaladdhehi: Acquired without violating the ten wholesome actions. Pīṇeti: Makes fat by delighting. The rest here should be understood in the same manner as stated in the Catukka Nipāta. The second is straightforward in meaning.

3. Iṭṭhasuttavaṇṇanā
3. Iṭṭha Sutta Commentary

43.Tatiyeāyusaṃvattanikā paṭipadāti dānasīlādikā puññapaṭipadā. Sesesupi eseva nayo.Atthābhisamayāti atthassa abhisamāgamena, atthappaṭilābhenāti vuttaṃ hoti.

43.In the third, conduct conducive to increasing life: the meritorious conduct of giving, sīla, etc. The same method applies in the rest. Atthābhisamayā: By the attainment of meaning, it is said to be the acquisition of benefit.

4. Manāpadāyīsuttavaṇṇanā
4. Manāpadāyī Sutta Commentary

44.Catuttheuggoti guṇehi uggatattā evaṃladdhanāmo.Sālapupphakaṃ khādanīyanti catumadhurayojitena sālipiṭṭhena kataṃ sālapupphasadisaṃ khādanīyaṃ. Tañhi paññāyamānavaṇṭapattakesaraṃ katvā jīrakādisambhārayutte sappimhi pacitvā sappiṃ vinivattetvā kolumbe pūretvā gandhavāsaṃ gāhāpetvā pidahitvā lañchetvā ṭhapitaṃ hoti. Taṃ so yāguṃ pivitvā nisinnassa bhagavato antarabhatte dātukāmo evamāha.Paṭiggahesi bhagavāti desanāmattametaṃ, upāsako pana taṃ bhagavato ca pañcannañca bhikkhusatānaṃ adāsi. Yathā ca taṃ, evaṃ sūkaramaṃsādīnipi. Tatthasampannakolakanti sampannabadaraṃ.Sūkaramaṃsanti madhurarasehi badarehi saddhiṃ jīrakādisambhārehi yojetvā pakkaṃ ekasaṃvaccharikasūkaramaṃsaṃ.Nibbattatelakanti vinivattitatelaṃ.Nāliyasākanti sālipiṭṭhena saddhiṃ madditvā jīrakādisaṃyutte sappimhi pacitvā catumadhurena yojetvā vāsaṃ gāhāpetvā ṭhapitaṃ nāliyasākaṃ.Netaṃ bhagavato kappatīti ettha akappiyaṃ upādāya kappiyampi na kappatīti vuttaṃ, seṭṭhi pana sabbampi taṃ āharāpetvā rāsiṃ katvā yaṃ yaṃ akappiyaṃ, taṃ taṃ antarāpaṇaṃ pahiṇitvā kappiyaṃ upabhogaparibhogabhaṇḍaṃ adāsi. Candanaphalakaṃ nātimahantaṃ dīghato aḍḍhateyyaratanaṃ, tiriyaṃ diyaḍḍharatanaṃ, sāravarabhaṇḍattā pana mahagghaṃ ahosi. Bhagavā taṃ paṭiggahetvā khaṇḍākhaṇḍikaṃ chedāpetvā bhikkhūnaṃ añjanapisanatthāya dāpesi.

44. In "Catutthe," uggo means that he was eminent in good qualities, hence he received that name. Sālapupphakaṃ khādanīyaṃ refers to an edible item made from rice flour combined with the four sweets, resembling a Sāla flower. It was prepared by shaping it with visible stalks, leaves, and pistils, then frying it in ghee infused with spices like cumin. After removing the ghee, it was filled into a flask, sealed to absorb the aroma, and then stamped and stored. Intending to offer this to the Blessed One during the interval between meals after he had drunk the rice-gruel and was seated, he spoke thus: Paṭiggahesi bhagavā is merely an expression, but the lay follower offered it to the Blessed One and the five hundred monks. The same applies to the pork and other items. Here, sampannakolaka means fully ripe jujubes. Sūkaramaṃsa means year-old pork cooked with sweet flavors, jujubes, and spices like cumin. Nibbattatelaka means oil-free. Nāliyasāka refers to nāliya greens kneaded with rice flour, cooked in ghee with spices like cumin, combined with the four sweets, and stored after absorbing the aroma. Netaṃ bhagavato kappatī means that even what is allowable is considered not allowable because of what is unallowable. However, the wealthy man had all of it brought and piled up, then sent whatever was unallowable to the market and offered the allowable items for use and consumption. The sandalwood plank was not very large, measuring three and a half cubits in length and two and a half cubits in width, but it was very valuable because it was made of heartwood. The Blessed One accepted it, had it cut into small pieces, and distributed them to the monks for use as ointment slabs.

Ujjubhūtesūti kāyavācācittehi ujukesu.Chandasāti pemena.Cattantiādīsu pariccāgavasenacattaṃ. Muttacāgatāyamuttaṃ. Anapekkhacittatāya cittena na uggahitantianuggahītaṃ. Khettūpameti viruhanaṭṭhena khettasadise.

Ujjubhūtesū means those who are upright in body, speech, and mind. Chandasā means with affection. Among cattaṃ etc., cattaṃ is in the sense of abandonment through relinquishment. Muttaṃ due to release and giving up. Anuggahītaṃ because it is not taken up by the mind due to a mind free from longing. Khettūpame is likened to a field in the sense of being a place for growth.

Aññataraṃ manomayanti suddhāvāsesu ekaṃ jhānamanena nibbattaṃ devakāyaṃ.Yathādhippāyoti yathājjhāsayo. Iminā kiṃ pucchati? Tassa kira manussakāle arahattatthāya ajjhāsayo ahosi, taṃ pucchāmīti pucchati. Devaputtopi arahattaṃ pattatāyataggha me bhagavā yathādhippāyoti āha.Yattha yatthūpapajjatīti tīsu vā kulasampattīsu chasu vā kāmasaggesu yattha yattha uppajjati, tattha tattha dīghāyu yasavā hotīti. Pañcamaṃ catukkanipāte vuttanayeneva veditabbaṃ. Chaṭṭhasattamāni uttānatthāneva.

Aññataraṃ manomaya means a deva body created by meditative mind in one of the Pure Abodes. Yathādhippāyo means according to his intention. What does he ask with this? It is said that in his human life, he had the intention to attain Arahatship, and he asks whether that is the case. The deva son, having attained Arahatship, replied, taggha me bhagavā yathādhippāyo. Yattha yatthūpapajjatī means that wherever he is reborn, whether in the three kinds of family wealth or in the six sensual heavens, he will be long-lived and glorious. The fifth should be understood in the same manner as stated in the Book of the Fours. The sixth and seventh are self-explanatory.

8. Alabbhanīyaṭhānasuttavaṇṇanā
8. Alabbhanīyaṭhānasuttavaṇṇanā

48.Aṭṭhamealabbhanīyānīti aladdhabbāni, na sakkā labhituṃ.Ṭhānānīti kāraṇāni.Jarādhammaṃ mā jīrīti yaṃ mayhaṃ jarāsabhāvaṃ, taṃ mā jīratu. Sesapadesupi eseva nayo.Nacchādeyyāti na rucceyya.Abbuhīti nīhari.

48. In the eighth, alabbhanīyānī means unobtainable, not possible to obtain. Ṭhānānī means reasons or causes. Jarādhammaṃ mā jīrī means, "May that which is subject to aging not age for me." The same method applies in the remaining passages. Nacchādeyyā means should not be pleasing. Abbuhī means to take out.

Yatoti yasmiṃ kāle.Āpadāsūti upaddavesu.Na vedhatīti na kampati nānusocati.Atthavinicchayaññūti kāraṇatthavinicchaye kusalo.Purāṇanti nibbikāratāya porāṇakameva.Jappenāti vaṇṇabhaṇanena.Mantenāti mahānubhāvamantaparivattanena.Subhāsitenāti subhāsitakathanena.Anuppadānenāti satassa vā sahassassa vā dānena.Paveṇiyāti kulavaṃsena vā, ‘‘idaṃ amhākaṃ paveṇiyā āciṇṇaṃ, idaṃ anāciṇṇa’’nti evaṃ paveṇikathanenāti attho.Yathā yathā yattha labhetha atthanti etesu jappādīsu yena yena yattha yattha ṭhāne jarādhammādīnaṃ ajīraṇatādiatthaṃ labheyya.Tathā tathā tattha parakkameyyāti tena tena tasmiṃ tasmiṃ ṭhāne parakkamaṃ kareyya.Kammaṃ daḷhanti vaṭṭagāmikammaṃ mayā thiraṃ katvā āyūhitaṃ, svāhaṃ idāni kinti karomīti evaṃ paccavekkhitvā adhivāseyyāti.

Yato means at which time. Āpadāsū means in times of distress. Na vedhatī means does not tremble, does not lament. Atthavinicchayaññū means skilled in determining the meaning of causes. Purāṇaṃ means ancient due to being unchanging. Jappenā means by muttering praise. Mantenā means by reciting powerful mantras. Subhāsitenā means by speaking well-spoken words. Anuppadānenā means by giving gifts of a hundred or a thousand. Paveṇiyā vā means by family lineage, meaning stating, "This is customary in our lineage, this is not customary." Yathā yathā yattha labhetha atthaṃ means in whichever way, in whichever place, among these muttering etc., one might obtain the benefit of preventing aging etc. Tathā tathā tattha parakkameyyā means one should make effort in that way, in that place. Kammaṃ daḷhaṃ means "I have firmly established the round-wandering karma, so what shall I do now?" Thus, reflecting and enduring.

9. Kosalasuttavaṇṇanā
9. Kosalasuttavaṇṇanā

49.Navameupakaṇṇaketi kaṇṇamūle.Dummanoti duṭṭhumano.Pattakkhandhoti patitakkhandho.Pajjhāyantoti cintayanto.Appaṭibhānoti nippaṭibhāno hutvā. Sesaṃ heṭṭhā vuttanayameva.

49. In the ninth, upakaṇṇake means at the root of the ear. Dummano means with a troubled mind. Pattakkhandho means a fallen aggregate. Pajjhāyanto means contemplating. Appaṭibhāno means having become without ready wit. The rest is the same as stated below.

10. Nāradasuttavaṇṇanā
10. Nāradasuttavaṇṇanā

50.Dasameajjhomucchitoti adhiomucchito gilitvā pariniṭṭhapetvā gahaṇasabhāvāya atirekamucchāya taṇhāya samannāgato.Mahaccā rājānubhāvenāti mahatā rājānubhāvena, aṭṭhārasahi senīhi parivārito mahatiyā rājiddhiyā pāyāsīti attho.Tagghāti ekaṃsatthe nipāto, ekaṃseneva sokasallaharaṇoti attho. Iti rājā imaṃ ovādaṃ sutvā tasmiṃ ṭhito dhammena samena rajjaṃ kāretvā saggaparāyaṇo ahosi.

50. In the tenth, ajjhomucchito means overwhelmed, completely swallowing, finishing, associated with excessive infatuation and craving due to a receptive nature. Mahaccā rājānubhāvenā means with great royal power, surrounded by eighteen divisions of troops, with great royal splendor, Pāyāsi went. Tagghā is a particle indicating certainty, meaning certainly removing sorrow and grief. Thus, having heard this advice, the king, abiding in it, ruled the kingdom with righteousness and fairness, and was devoted to heaven.

2. Dutiyapaṇṇāsakaṃ

2. Dutiyapaṇṇāsakaṃ

(6) 1. Nīvaraṇavaggo

(6) 1. Nīvaraṇavaggo

1. Āvaraṇasuttavaṇṇanā
1. Āvaraṇasuttavaṇṇanā

51.Dutiyassa paṭhame āvaraṇavasenaāvaraṇā. Nīvaraṇavasenanīvaraṇā. Ceto ajjhāruhantīticetaso ajjhāruhā. Vipassanāpaññañca maggapaññañca uppattinivāraṇaṭṭhena dubbalaṃ karontītipaññāya dubbalīkaraṇā. Yā vā etehi saddhiṃ vokiṇṇā paññā uppajjati, taṃ dubbalaṃ karontītipipaññāya dubbalīkaraṇā. Abalāyāti pañcanīvaraṇapariyonaddhattā apagatabalāya.Uttari vā manussadhammā alamariyañāṇadassanavisesanti dasakusalakammapathasaṅkhātā manussadhammā uttari ariyabhāvaṃ kātuṃ samatthaṃ ñāṇadassanavisesaṃ.Hārahārinīti haritabbaṃ harituṃ samatthā.Naṅgalamukhānīti mātikāmukhāni. Tāni hi naṅgalasarikkhakattā naṅgalehi ca khatattā naṅgalamukhānīti vuccanti.

51. In the first of the second [fifty], āvaraṇā in terms of being hindrances. Nīvaraṇā in terms of being the nīvaraṇas. Ceto ajjhāruhantīti means they overwhelm the mind. Paññāya dubbalīkaraṇā because they weaken both the insight-knowledge (vipassanāpañña) and the path-knowledge (magga-pañña) by hindering their arising. Or, paññāya dubbalīkaraṇā because they weaken any knowledge that arises mixed with these. Abalāyā because she is powerless due to being bound by the five hindrances. Uttari vā manussadhammā alamariyañāṇadassanavisesaṃ means a special knowledge and vision capable of producing a superior noble state beyond human states, namely the ten wholesome courses of action. Hārahārinī means capable of carrying away what should be carried away. Naṅgalamukhānī means ploughshares. They are called ploughshares because they resemble ploughs and are cut by ploughs.

Evameva khoti ettha sotaṃ viya vipassanāñāṇaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ, ubhato naṅgalamukhānaṃ vivaraṇakālo viya chasu dvāresu saṃvarassa vissaṭṭhakālo, majjhenadiyā rukkhapāde koṭṭetvā palālatiṇamattikāhi āvaraṇe kate udakassa vikkhittavisaṭabyādiṇṇakālo viya pañcahi nīvaraṇehi pariyonaddhakālo, evaṃ āvaraṇe kate vihatavegassa udakassa tiṇapalālādīni parikaḍḍhitvā samuddaṃ pāpuṇituṃ asamatthakālo viya vipassanāñāṇena sabbākusale viddhaṃsetvā nibbānasāgaraṃ pāpuṇituṃ asamatthakālo veditabbo. Sukkapakkhe vuttavipallāsena yojanā kātabbā. Imasmiṃ sutte vaṭṭavivaṭṭaṃ kathitaṃ. Dutiyaṃ uttānatthameva.

Evameva kho here, insight-knowledge should be seen as the stream, the time of the breach of restraint in the six doors as the time when the ploughshares are opened on both sides, the time when one is bound by the five hindrances as the time when the water scatters and spreads, having been obstructed by a covering of straw, grass, and mud placed against a tree trunk in the middle of a river; the time when one is unable to reach the ocean, having dragged away the grass and straw, due to the force of the water being weakened by the hindrance, should be understood as the time when one is unable to reach the ocean of Nibbāna by destroying all unwholesome states with insight-knowledge. In the bright side, the connection should be made with the opposite meaning. In this Sutta, the cycle and the breaking of the cycle are described. The second is self-explanatory.

3. Padhāniyaṅgasuttavaṇṇanā
3. Padhāniyaṅgasuttavaṇṇanā

53.Tatiyepadhāniyaṅgānīti padhānaṃ vuccati padahanabhāvo, padhānamassa atthīti padhāniyo, padhāniyassa bhikkhuno aṅgānīti padhāniyaṅgāni.Saddhoti saddhāya samannāgato. Saddhā panesā āgamasaddhā adhigamasaddhā okappanasaddhā pasādasaddhāti catubbidhā. Tattha sabbaññubodhisattānaṃ saddhā, abhinīhārato paṭṭhāya āgatattāāgamasaddhānāma. Ariyasāvakānaṃ paṭivedhena adhigatattāadhigamasaddhānāma. Buddho dhammo saṅghoti vutte acalabhāvena okappanaṃokappanasaddhānāma. Pasāduppattipasādasaddhānāma. Idha okappanasaddhā adhippetā.Bodhinti catumaggañāṇaṃ. Taṃ suppaṭividdhaṃ tathāgatenāti saddahati. Desanāsīsameva cetaṃ, iminā pana aṅgena tīsupi ratanesu saddhā adhippetā. Yassa hi buddhādīsu pasādo balavā, tassa padhānavīriyaṃ ijjhati.

53. In the third, padhāniyaṅgānī means exertion is called endeavor, one who has endeavor is called energetic, the qualities of an energetic bhikkhu are the qualities of endeavor. Saddho means endowed with faith. This faith is of four kinds: faith based on tradition (āgamasaddhā), faith based on realization (adhigamasaddhā), faith based on conviction (okappanasaddhā), and faith based on confidence (pasādasaddhā). Of these, the faith of the all-knowing Bodhisattas, which has come from the time of their aspiration, is called āgamasaddhā. The faith of noble disciples, which is attained through penetration, is called adhigamasaddhā. The unwavering conviction when it is said, "The Buddha, the Dhamma, the Saṅgha," is called okappanasaddhā. The arising of confidence is called pasādasaddhā. Here, faith based on conviction (okappanasaddhā) is intended. Bodhi means the knowledge of the four paths. He has faith that it has been well penetrated by the Tathāgata. This is merely an expression of teaching, but with this quality, faith in all three jewels is implied. For one whose confidence in the Buddha etc. is strong, their effort in exertion is successful.

Appābādhoti arogo.Appātaṅkoti niddukkho.Samavepākiniyāti samavipākiniyā.Gahaṇiyāti kammajatejodhātuyā.Nātisītāya nāccuṇhāyāti atisītalaggahaṇiko hi sītabhīruko hoti, accuṇhaggahaṇiko uṇhabhīruko, tesaṃ padhānaṃ na ijjhati, majjhimaggahaṇikassa ijjhati. Tenāha –majjhimāya padhānakkhamāyāti.Yathābhūtaṃattānaṃ āvikattāti yathābhūtaṃ attano aguṇaṃ pakāsetā.Udayatthagāminiyāti udayañca atthañca gantuṃ paricchindituṃ samatthāya. Etena paññāsalakkhaṇapariggāhakaṃ udayabbayañāṇaṃ vuttaṃ.Ariyāyāti parisuddhāya.Nibbedhikāyāti anibbiddhapubbe lobhakkhandhādayo nibbijjhituṃ samatthāya.Sammā dukkhakkhayagāminiyāti tadaṅgavasena kilesānaṃ pahīnattā yaṃ dukkhaṃ khīyati, tassa dukkhassa khayagāminiyā. Iti sabbehipi imehi padehi vipassanāpaññāva kathitā. Duppaññassa hi padhānaṃ na ijjhati.

Appābādho means without disease. Appātaṅko means without suffering. Samavepākiniyā means with balanced digestion. Gahaṇiyā means with the element of heat produced by kamma. Nātisītāya nāccuṇhāyā means one who is sensitive to extreme cold is afraid of the cold, and one who is sensitive to extreme heat is afraid of the heat, their effort is not successful; the effort of one who is balanced is successful. Therefore, he said, majjhimāya padhānakkhamāyā. Yathābhūtaṃ attānaṃ āvikattā means one who reveals one's true faults. Udayatthagāminiyā means capable of going to and discerning arising and ceasing. With this, the knowledge of arising and passing away is stated, which comprehends the characteristics of wisdom. Ariyāyā means pure. Nibbedhikāyā means capable of penetrating those aggregates of greed etc. that were previously unpenetrated. Sammā dukkhakkhayagāminiyā means leading to the cessation of suffering, since the defilements are abandoned by their parts, the suffering that is destroyed leads to the destruction of suffering. Thus, with all these terms, only insight-knowledge (vipassanāpaññā) is described. For one lacking wisdom, effort is not successful.

4. Samayasuttavaṇṇanā
4. Samayasuttavaṇṇanā

54.Catutthepadhānāyāti vīriyakaraṇatthāya.Na sukaraṃ uñchena paggahena yāpetunti na sakkā hoti pattaṃ gahetvā uñchācariyāya yāpetuṃ. Imasmimpi sutte vaṭṭavivaṭṭameva kathitaṃ.

54. In the fourth, padhānāyā means for the sake of making effort. Na sukaraṃ uñchena paggahena yāpetuṃ means it is not possible to live by gathering alms by going from house to house. In this Sutta too, the cycle and the breaking of the cycle are described.

5. Mātāputtasuttavaṇṇanā
5. Mātāputtasuttavaṇṇanā

55.Pañcamepariyādāya tiṭṭhatīti pariyādiyitvā gahetvā khepetvā tiṭṭhati.Ugghātitāti uddhumātā.

55. In the fifth, pariyādāya tiṭṭhatī means having taken, exhausted, and remained. Ugghātitā means a raising-up mother.

Asihatthenāti sīsacchedanatthāya asiṃ ādāya āgatenāpi.Pisācenāti khādituṃ āgatayakkhenāpi.Āsīdeti ghaṭṭeyya.Mañjunāti mudukena.Kāmoghavuḷhānanti kāmoghena vuḷhānaṃ kaḍḍhitānaṃ.Kālaṃgati bhavābhavanti vaṭṭakālaṃ gatiñca punappunabbhave ca.Purakkhatāti purecārikā purato gatāyeva.Ye ca kāme pariññāyāti ye paṇḍitā duvidhepi kāme tīhi pariññāhi parijānitvā.Caranti akutobhayāti khīṇāsavānaṃ kutoci bhayaṃ nāma natthi, tasmā te akutobhayā hutvā caranti.Pāraṅgatāti pāraṃ vuccati nibbānaṃ, taṃ upagatā, sacchikatvā ṭhitāti attho.Āsavakkhayanti arahattaṃ. Imasmiṃ sutte vaṭṭameva kathetvā gāthāsu vaṭṭavivaṭṭaṃ kathitaṃ.

Asihatthenā means even by one who has come taking a sword to cut off the head. Pisācenā means even by a yakkha who has come to devour. Āsīde means would strike. Mañjunā means gently. Kāmoghavuḷhānaṃ means those who are swept away and dragged by the flood of sensuality. Kālaṃ gati bhavābhavaṃ means the time of the cycle, the destination, and the repeated existence. Purakkhatā means preceding, having gone before. Ye ca kāme pariññāya means those wise ones who, having fully understood both kinds of sensual pleasures with the three kinds of full understanding. Caranti akutobhayā means for those whose defilements are destroyed, there is no fear from anywhere, therefore they wander without fear. Pāraṅgatā means having gone to the far shore, Nibbāna is called the far shore, they have approached it, stood having realized it. Āsavakkhayaṃ means Arahatship. In this Sutta, only the cycle is described, and in the verses, the cycle and the breaking of the cycle are described.

6. Upajjhāyasuttavaṇṇanā
6. Upajjhāyasuttavaṇṇanā

56.Chaṭṭhemadhurakajātoti sañjātagarubhāvo.Disā ca me na pakkhāyantīti catasso disā ca anudisā ca mayhaṃ na upaṭṭhahantīti vadati.Dhammā ca maṃ nappaṭibhantīti samathavipassanādhammāpi me na upaṭṭhahanti.Anabhirato ca brahmacariyaṃ carāmīti ukkaṇṭhito hutvā brahmacariyavāsaṃ vasāmi.Yena bhagavā tenupasaṅkamīti tassa kathaṃ sutvā ‘‘buddhaveneyyapuggalo aya’’nti taṃ kāraṇaṃ bhagavato ārocetuṃ upasaṅkami.Avipassakassa kusalānaṃ dhammānanti kusaladhamme avipassantassa, anesantassa agavesantassāti attho.Bodhipakkhiyānaṃ dhammānanti satipaṭṭhānādīnaṃ sattatiṃsadhammānaṃ.

56. In the sixth, madhurakajāto means having developed a sense of respect. Disā ca me na pakkhāyantī means he says that the four directions and the intermediate directions do not appear to him. Dhammā ca maṃ nappaṭibhantī means the samatha and vipassanā dhammas also do not occur to him. Anabhirato ca brahmacariyaṃ carāmī means I live the holy life being dissatisfied. Yena bhagavā tenupasaṅkamī means having heard his words, he approached the Blessed One to announce the reason, thinking, "This person is suitable to be guided by the Buddha." Avipassakassa kusalānaṃ dhammānaṃ means not seeing, not searching for, not seeking after wholesome states. Bodhipakkhiyānaṃ dhammānaṃ means the thirty-seven qualities beginning with the satipaṭṭhānas.

7. Abhiṇhapaccavekkhitabbaṭhānasuttavaṇṇanā
7. Abhiṇhapaccavekkhitabbaṭhānasuttavaṇṇanā

57.Sattamejarādhammomhīti jarāsabhāvo amhi.Jaraṃ anatītoti jaraṃ anatikkanto, antojarāya eva carāmi. Sesapadesupi eseva nayo.Kammassakotiādīsu kammaṃ mayhaṃ sakaṃ attano santakanti kammassako amhi. Kammassa dāyādotikammadāyādo,kammaṃ mayhaṃ dāyajjaṃ santakanti attho. Kammaṃ mayhaṃ yoni kāraṇantikammayoni. Kammaṃ mayhaṃ bandhūtikammabandhu,kammañātakoti attho. Kammaṃ mayhaṃ paṭisaraṇaṃ patiṭṭhātikammapaṭisaraṇo. Tassa dāyādo bhavissāmīti tassa kammassa dāyādo tena dinnaphalapaṭiggāhako bhavissāmīti attho.Yobbanamadoti yobbanaṃ ārabbha uppannamado. Sesesupi eseva nayo.Maggo sañjāyatīti lokuttaramaggo sañjāyati.Saṃyojanāni sabbaso pahīyantīti dasa saṃyojanāni sabbaso pahīyanti.Anusayā byantīhontīti satta anusayā vigatantā paricchinnā parivaṭumā honti. Evamettha heṭṭhā pañcasu ṭhānesu vipassanā kathitā, imesu pañcasu lokuttaramaggo.

57. In the seventh, jarādhammomhī means I am of the nature to age. Jaraṃ anatīto means not having transcended aging, I live within aging itself. The same method applies in the remaining passages. Among kammassako etc., kammaṃ mayhaṃ sakaṃ attano santakaṃti kammassako amhi means kamma is my own, belonging to myself, therefore I am the owner of kamma. Kammassa dāyādoti kammadāyādo means kamma is my inheritance, belonging to me. Kammaṃ mayhaṃ yoni kāraṇanti kammayoni means kamma is my origin, my cause. Kammaṃ mayhaṃ bandhūti kammabandhu means kamma is my relative, my kin. Kammaṃ mayhaṃ paṭisaraṇaṃ patiṭṭhāti kammapaṭisaraṇo means kamma is my refuge, my support. Tassa dāyādo bhavissāmī means I will be the heir of that kamma, the recipient of the fruit given by it. Yobbanamado means the intoxication that arises in dependence on youth. The same method applies in the remaining passages. Maggo sañjāyatī means the supramundane path arises. Saṃyojanāni sabbaso pahīyantī means the ten fetters are completely abandoned. Anusayā byantīhontī means the seven latent tendencies are completely destroyed, cut off, brought to an end. Thus, here, vipassanā is described in the first five instances, and in these five, the supramundane path is described.

byādhidhammātiādimāha. Tatthañatvā dhammaṃ nirūpadhinti upadhirahitaṃ arahattamaggaṃ ñatvā.Sabbe made abhibhosmīti sabbe ime tayopi made adhibhaviṃ, atikkamma ṭhitosmīti attho.Nekkhammaṃ daṭṭhu khematoti pabbajjaṃ khemato disvā.Tassa me ahu ussāho, nibbānaṃ abhipassatoti tassa mayhaṃ nibbānaṃ abhipassantassa vāyāmo ahosi.Anivatti bhavissāmīti pabbajjato anivattiko bhavissāmi, brahmacariyavāsato anivattiko, sabbaññutaññāṇato anivattiko bhavissāmi.Brahmacariyaparāyaṇoti maggabrahmacariyaparāyaṇo. Iminā lokuttaro aṭṭhaṅgiko maggo kathitoti.

8. Licchavikumārakasuttavaṇṇanā

58.Aṭṭhamesajjāni dhanūnīti sajiyāni āropitadhanūni.Addasūti addasaṃsu.Bhavissanti vajjīti vaḍḍhissanti vajjirājāno.Apānubhāti avaḍḍhinissitā mānathaddhā.Pacchāliyaṃ khipantīti pacchato gantvā piṭṭhiṃ pādena paharanti.Raṭṭhikassātiādīsu raṭṭhaṃ bhuñjatītiraṭṭhiko. Pitarā dattaṃ sāpateyyaṃ bhuñjatītipettaniko. Senāya pati jeṭṭhakotisenāpatiko. Gāmagāmaṇikassāti gāmānaṃ gāmaṇikassa, gāmasāmikassāti attho.Pūgagāmaṇikassāti gaṇajeṭṭhakassa.Kulesūti tesu tesu kulesu.Paccekādhipaccaṃ kārentīti paccekaṃ jeṭṭhakaṭṭhānaṃ kārenti.Kalyāṇena manasā anukampantīti sundarena cittena anuggaṇhanti.Khettakammantasāmantasabyohāreti ye ca attano khettakammantānaṃ sāmantā anantarakkhettasāmino, te ca rajjudaṇḍehi bhūmippamāṇaggāhake sabbohāre ca.Balipaṭiggāhikādevatāti kulappaveṇiyā āgatā ārakkhadevatā.Sakkarotīti tā devatā aggayāgubhattādīhi sakkaroti.

Kiccakaroti uppannānaṃ kiccānaṃ kārako.Ye cassa anujīvinoti ye ca etaṃ upanissāya jīvanti.Ubhinnañceva atthāyāti ubhinnampi hitatthāya paṭipanno hotīti attho.Pubbapetānanti paralokagatānaṃ.Diṭṭhe dhamme ca jīvatanti ye ca diṭṭhe dhamme jīvanti. Iti padadvayenāpi atītapaccuppanne ñātayo dasseti.Vittisañjananoti tuṭṭhijanano.Gharamāvasanti gharāvāsaṃ vasanto.Pujjo hoti pasaṃsiyoti pūjetabbo ca pasaṃsitabbo ca hotīti.

9-10. Vuḍḍhapabbajitasuttadvayavaṇṇanā

59-60.Navamenipuṇoti saṇho sukhumakāraṇaññū.Ākappasampannoti samaṇākappena sampanno. Dasamepadakkhiṇaggāhīti dinnovādaṃ padakkhiṇato gaṇhanto. Sesaṃ sabbattha uttānamevāti.

(7) 2. Saññāvaggo

1-2. Saññāsuttadvayavaṇṇanā

61-62.Dutiyassa paṭhamemahapphalāti vipākaphalena mahapphalā. Vipākānisaṃsenevamahānisaṃsā. Amatogadhāti nibbānapatiṭṭhā.Sabbalokeanabhiratisaññāti sabbasmiṃ tedhātusannivese loke ukkaṇṭhitassa uppajjanakasaññā. Dutiyaṃ uttānatthameva.

3-4. Vaḍḍhasuttadvayavaṇṇanā

63-64.Tatiyevarādāyīti uttamassa varassa ādāyako. Sesamettha catutthe ca uttānatthamevāti.

5. Sākacchasuttavaṇṇanā

65.Pañcamealaṃsākacchoti sākacchāya yutto.Āgataṃ pañhanti pucchitaṃ pañhaṃ.Byākattā hotīti vissajjitā hoti.

6. Sājīvasuttavaṇṇanā

66.Chaṭṭhealaṃsājīvoti sājīvāya yutto.Sājīvoti pañhapucchanañceva pañhavissajjanañca. Sabbepi hi sabrahmacārino pañhaṃ upajīvanti, tenetaṃ pañhapucchanavissajjanaṃ samānājīvatāya sājīvoti vuttaṃ.Kataṃ pañhanti abhisaṅkhataṃ pañhaṃ.

7-10. Paṭhamaiddhipādasuttādivaṇṇanā

67-70.Sattameussoḷhīti adhimattavīriyaṃ. Aṭṭhame attano bodhimaṇḍe paṭividdhe āgamanaiddhipāde kathetvā upari attanova cha abhiññā kathesīti. Navamadasamesu vipassanā kathitā. Sesaṃ sabbattha uttānamevāti.

(8) 3. Yodhājīvavaggo

1. Paṭhamacetovimuttiphalasuttavaṇṇanā

71.Tatiyassa paṭhameyato kho, bhikkhaveti heṭṭhā vuttanayena vipassanaṃ vaḍḍhetvā arahattaṃ pattassa bhikkhuno idāni vaṇṇabhaṇanatthaṃ idaṃ āraddhaṃ. Tatthayato khoti yadā kho.Ukkhittapalighoti avijjāpalighaṃ ukkhipitvā apanetvā ṭhito.Saṃkiṇṇaparikhoti saṃsāraparikhaṃ saṃkiritvā vināsetvā ṭhito.Abbūḷhesikoti taṇhāsaṅkhātaṃ esikāthambhaṃ abbuyha luñcitvā ṭhito.Niraggaḷoti nīvaraṇakavāṭaṃ ugghāṭetvā ṭhito.Pannaddhajo pannabhāroti mānaddhajañca khandhābhisaṅkhārakilesabhārañca pātetvā otāretvā ṭhito.Visaṃyuttoti vaṭṭena visaṃyutto. Sesaṃ pāḷinayeneva veditabbaṃ. Ettāvatā bhagavatā maggena kilese khepetvā nirodhasayanavaragatassa nibbānārammaṇaṃ phalasamāpattiṃ appetvā viharato khīṇāsavassa kālo dassito.

Yathā hi dve nagarāni ekaṃ coranagaraṃ ekaṃ khemanagaraṃ. Atha ekassa mahāyodhassa evaṃ bhaveyya – ‘‘yāvimaṃ coranagaraṃ tiṭṭhati, tāva khemanagaraṃ bhayato na muccati, coranagaraṃ anagaraṃ karissāmī’’ti sannāhaṃ katvā khaggaṃ gahetvā coranagaraṃ upasaṅkamitvā nagaradvāre ussāpite esikāthambhe khaggena chinditvā saddhiṃ dvārabāhāhi kavāṭaṃ bhinditvā palighaṃ ukkhipitvā pākāraṃ bhinditvā parikhaṃ vikiritvā nagarasobhatthāya ussite dhaje pātetvā nagaraṃ agginā jhāpetvā khemanagaraṃ pavisitvā pāsādaṃ āruyha ñātigaṇaparivuto surasabhojanaṃ bhuñjeyya. Evaṃ coranagaraṃ viya sakkāyo, khemanagaraṃ viya nibbānaṃ, mahāyodho viya yogāvacaro. Tassevaṃ hoti – ‘‘yāva sakkāyavaṭṭaṃ vaṭṭati, tāva dvattiṃsakammakāraṇāaṭṭhanavutirogapañcavīsatimahābhayehi parimuccanaṃ natthī’’ti. So mahāyodho sannāhaṃ viya sīlasannāhaṃ katvā paññākhaggaṃ gahetvā khaggena esikāthambhe viya arahattamaggena taṇhesikaṃ luñcitvā, so yodho sadvārabāhakaṃ nagarakavāṭaṃ viya pañcorambhāgiyasaṃyojanaaggaḷaṃ ugghāṭetvā, so yodho palighaṃ viya avijjāpalighaṃ ukkhipitvā, so yodho pākāraṃ bhindanto parikhaṃ viya kammābhisaṅkhāraṃ bhindanto jātisaṃsāraparikhaṃ vikiritvā, so yodho nagaraṃ sobhatthāya ussāpitaddhaje viya mānaddhaje pātetvā sakkāyanagaraṃ jhāpetvā, so yodho khemanagare uparipāsāde subhojanaṃ viya kilesaparinibbānanagaraṃ pavisitvā amataṃ nirodhārammaṇaṃ phalasamāpattisukhaṃ anubhavamāno kālaṃ vītināmeti.

2. Dutiyacetovimuttiphalasuttavaṇṇanā

72.Dutiyeaniccasaññāti khandhapañcakaṃ hutvā abhāvākārena aniccanti uppajjanakasaññā.Anicce dukkhasaññāti yadaniccaṃ, taṃ paṭipīḷanākārena dukkhanti uppajjanakasaññā.Dukkhe anattasaññāti yaṃ dukkhaṃ, taṃ avasavattanākārena anattāti uppajjanakasaññā. Sesaṃ heṭṭhā vuttanayameva. Imesu pana dvīsupi suttesu vipassanāphalaṃ nāma kathitanti.

3. Paṭhamadhammavihārīsuttavaṇṇanā

73.Tatiyedivasaṃ atināmetīti divasaṃ atikkāmeti.Riñcati paṭisallānanti ekībhāvaṃ vissajjeti.Desetīti katheti pakāseti.Dhammapaññattiyāti dhammassa paññāpanāya.Dhammaṃpariyāpuṇātīti navaṅgavasena catusaccadhammaṃ pariyāpuṇāti vaḷañjeti katheti.Na riñcati paṭisallānanti ekībhāvaṃ na vissajjeti.Anuyuñjati ajjhattaṃ cetosamathanti niyakajjhatte cittasamādhiṃ āsevati bhāveti, samathakammaṭṭhāne yuttappayutto hoti.

Hitesināti hitaṃ esantena.Anukampakenāti anukampamānena.Anukampaṃ upādāyāti anukampaṃ cittena pariggahetvā, paṭiccātipi vuttaṃ hoti.Kataṃ vo taṃ mayāti taṃ mayā ime pañca puggale desentena tumhākaṃ kataṃ. Ettakameva hi anukampakassa satthu kiccaṃ yadidaṃ aviparītadhammadesanā, ito paraṃ pana paṭipatti nāma sāvakānaṃ kiccaṃ. Tenāha –etāni bhikkhu rukkhamūlāni…pe… amhākaṃ anusāsanīti. Tattha carukkhamūlānīti iminā rukkhamūlasenāsanaṃ dasseti.Suññāgārānīti iminā janavivittaṭṭhānaṃ. Ubhayenāpi ca yogānurūpaṃ senāsanamācikkhati, dāyajjaṃ niyyāteti.Jhāyathāti ārammaṇūpanijjhānena aṭṭhatiṃsārammaṇāni, lakkhaṇūpanijjhānena ca aniccādito khandhāyatanādīni upanijjhāyatha, samathañca vipassanañca vaḍḍhethāti vuttaṃ hoti.Mā pamādatthāti mā pamajjittha.Mā pacchā vippaṭisārino ahuvatthāti ye hi pubbe daharakāle ārogyakāle sattasappāyādisampattikāle satthu sammukhībhāvakāle ca yonisomanasikāravirahitā rattindivaṃ maṅkulabhattā hutvā seyyasukhamiddhasukhamanuyuttā pamajjanti, te pacchā jarākāle rogakāle maraṇakāle vipattikāle satthu parinibbānakāle ca taṃ pubbe pamādavihāraṃ anussarantā sappaṭisandhikālakiriyañca bhāriyaṃ sampassamānā vippaṭisārino honti. Tumhe pana tādisā mā ahuvatthāti etamatthaṃ dassento āha – ‘‘mā pacchā vippaṭisārino ahuvatthā’’ti.Ayaṃ vo amhākaṃ anusāsanīti ayaṃ amhākaṃ santikā ‘‘jhāyatha mā pamādatthā’’ti tumhākaṃ anusāsanī, ovādoti vuttaṃ hoti.

4. Dutiyadhammavihārīsuttavaṇṇanā

74.Catuttheuttari cassa paññāya atthaṃ nappajānātīti tato pariyattito uttari tassa dhammassa sahavipassanāya maggapaññāya atthaṃ nappajānāti, cattāri saccāni na passati nappaṭivijjhatīti attho. Sesavāresupi eseva nayo. Evametesu dvīsupi suttesu bahussutabhikkhu vipassanākammiko sotāpanno sakadāgāmī anāgāmī khīṇāsavoti cha janā dhammavihārino nāmāti veditabbā.

5. Paṭhamayodhājīvasuttavaṇṇanā

75.Pañcameyodhājīvāti yuddhūpajīvino.Rajagganti hatthiassādīnaṃ pādappahārabhinnāya bhūmiyā uggataṃ rajakkhandhaṃ.Na santhambhatīti santhambhitvā ṭhātuṃ na sakkoti.Sahati rajagganti rajakkhandhaṃ disvāpi adhivāseti.Dhajagganti hatthiassadīnaṃ piṭṭhesu vā rathesu vā ussāpitānaṃ dhajānaṃ aggaṃ.Ussāraṇanti hatthiassarathānañceva balakāyassa ca uccāsaddamahāsaddaṃ.Sampahāreti samāgate appamattakepi pahāre.Haññatīti vihaññati vighātaṃ āpajjati.Byāpajjatīti vipattiṃ āpajjati, pakatibhāvaṃ jahati.Sahati sampahāranti dve tayo pahāre patvāpi sahati adhivāseti.Tamevasaṅgāmasīsanti taṃyeva jayakkhandhāvāraṭṭhānaṃ.Ajjhāvasatīti sattāhamattaṃ abhibhavitvā āvasati. Kiṃ kāraṇā? Laddhapahārānaṃ pahārajagganatthañceva katakammānaṃ visesaṃ ñatvā ṭhānantaradānatthañca issariyasukhānubhavanatthañca.

evameva khotiādimāha. Tatthasaṃsīdatīti micchāvitakkasmiṃ saṃsīdati anuppavisati.Na sakkoti brahmacariyaṃ sandhāretunti brahmacariyavāsaṃ anupacchijjamānaṃ gopetuṃ na sakkoti.Sikkhādubbalyaṃ āvikatvāti sikkhāya dubbalabhāvaṃ pakāsetvā.Kimassa rajaggasminti kiṃ tassa puggalassa rajaggaṃ nāmāti vadati.Abhirūpāti abhirūpavatī.Dassanīyāti dassanayoggā.Pāsādikāti dassaneneva cittappasādāvahā.Paramāyāti uttamāya.Vaṇṇapokkharatāyāti sarīravaṇṇena ceva aṅgasaṇṭhānena ca.Ūhasatīti avahasati.Ullapatīti katheti.Ujjhagghatīti pāṇiṃ paharitvā mahāhasitaṃ hasati.Uppaṇḍetīti uppaṇḍanakathaṃ katheti.Abhinisīdatīti abhibhavitvā santike vā ekāsane vā nisīdati. Dutiyapadepi eseva nayo.Ajjhottharatīti avattharati.Viniveṭhetvā vinimocetvāti gahitaṭṭhānato tassā hatthaṃ vinibbeṭhetvā ceva mocetvā ca. Sesamettha uttānatthamevāti. Imasmiṃ sutte vaṭṭavivaṭṭaṃ kathitaṃ.

Evameva kho, etc., was said. There, saṃsīdatīti: sinks down into, enters into wrong thinking. Na sakkoti brahmacariyaṃ sandhāretunti: is not able to maintain the brahmacariya-life without interruption, to protect it. Sikkhādubbalyaṃ āvikatvāti: having revealed the weakness in training. Kimassa rajaggasminti: what is this person's so-called dust and dirt? Abhirūpāti: of beautiful form. Dassanīyāti: worthy of being seen. Pāsādikāti: inspiring confidence in the mind by just seeing. Paramāyāti: supreme. Vaṇṇapokkharatāyāti: by beauty of complexion and by bodily structure. Ūhasatīti: laughs at. Ullapatīti: speaks. Ujjhagghatīti: laughs a great laugh, striking the hands. Uppaṇḍetīti: tells bawdy stories. Abhinisīdatīti: having overpowered, sits nearby or on the same seat. The same method applies in the second instance. Ajjhottharatīti: spreads over. Viniveṭhetvā vinimocetvāti: having unwound and released her hand from the place it was taken. The rest here is of obvious meaning. In this sutta, the cycle and reverse cycle are spoken of.

6. Dutiyayodhājīvasuttavaṇṇanā
6. Dutiyayodhājīvasuttavaṇṇanā

76.Chaṭṭheasicammaṃ gahetvāti asiñca cammañca gahetvā.Dhanukalāpaṃ sannayhitvāti dhanuñca sarakalāpañca sannayhitvā.Viyūḷhanti yuddhasannivesavesena ṭhitaṃ.Saṅgāmaṃ otaratīti mahāyuddhaṃ otarati.Ussahati vāyamatīti ussāhañca vāyāmañca karoti.Hanantīti ghātenti.Pariyāpādentīti pariyāpādayanti.Upalikkhantīti vijjhanti.Apanentīti sakasenaṃ gahetvā gacchanti.Apanetvā ñātakānaṃ nentīti sakasenaṃ netvā tato ñātakānaṃ santikaṃ nenti.Nīyamānoti attano gehaṃ vā sesañātisantikaṃ vā niyyamāno.Upaṭṭhahanti paricarantīti pahārasodhanavaṇakappanādīni karontā jagganti gopayanti.

76. In the sixth: asicammaṃ gahetvāti: having taken sword and shield. Dhanukalāpaṃ sannayhitvāti: having equipped himself with bow and quiver of arrows. Viyūḷhanti: standing in battle array. Saṅgāmaṃ otaratīti: enters into great battle. Ussahati vāyamatīti: makes effort and exertion. Hanantīti: they kill. Pariyāpādentīti: they completely destroy. Upalikkhantīti: they pierce. Apanentīti: taking their own army, they go away. Apanetvā ñātakānaṃ nentīti: having led away their own army, from there they lead them to their relatives. Nīyamānoti: being led to his own house or to the rest of his relatives. Upaṭṭhahanti paricarantīti: they look after and protect him, doing things such as cleaning wounds, applying bandages, etc.

Arakkhiteneva kāyenāti arakkhitena kāyadvārena.Arakkhitāya vācāyāti arakkhitena vacīdvārena.Arakkhitena cittenāti arakkhitena manodvārena.Anupaṭṭhitāya satiyāti satiṃ supaṭṭhitaṃ akatvā.Asaṃvutehiindriyehīti manacchaṭṭhehi indriyehi apihitehi agopitehi.Rāgo cittaṃ anuddhaṃsetīti rāgo uppajjamānova samathavipassanācittaṃ dhaṃseti, dūre khipati.Rāgapariyuṭṭhitomhi, āvuso, rāgaparetoti ahaṃ, āvuso, rāgena ratto, rāgena anugato.

Arakkhiteneva kāyenāti: through an unguarded bodily door. Arakkhitāya vācāyāti: through an unguarded verbal door. Arakkhitena cittenāti: through an unguarded mental door. Anupaṭṭhitāya satiyāti: without establishing mindfulness well. Asaṃvutehi indriyehīti: with unguarded, unprotected faculties, the six including the mind. Rāgo cittaṃ anuddhaṃsetīti: rāga, just as it arises, destroys the samatha and vipassanā mind, throws it far away. Rāgapariyuṭṭhitomhi, āvuso, rāgaparetoti: I, friend, am dyed with rāga, overcome by rāga.

Aṭṭhikaṅkalūpamātiādīsuaṭṭhikaṅkalūpamāappassādaṭṭhena.Maṃsapesūpamābahusādhāraṇaṭṭhena.Tiṇukkūpamāanudahanaṭṭhena.Aṅgārakāsūpamāmahābhitāpaṭṭhena.Supinakūpamāittarapaccupaṭṭhānaṭṭhena.Yācitakūpamātāvakālikaṭṭhena.Rukkhaphalūpamāsabbaṅgapaccaṅgapalibhañjanaṭṭhena.Asisūnūpamāadhikuṭṭanaṭṭhena.Sattisūlūpamāvinivijjhanaṭṭhena.Sappasirūpamāsāsaṅkasappaṭibhayaṭṭhena.Ussahissāmīti ussāhaṃ karissāmi.Dhārayissāmīti samaṇabhāvaṃ dhārayissāmi.Abhiramissāmīti abhiratiṃ uppādessāmi na ukkaṇṭhissāmi. Sesamettha uttānatthameva. Imasmiṃ sutte vaṭṭavivaṭṭaṃ kathitanti.

Aṭṭhikaṅkalūpamāti, etc.: aṭṭhikaṅkalūpamā: like a skeleton, in the sense of little satisfaction. Maṃsapesūpamā: like a lump of flesh, in the sense of common to many. Tiṇukkūpamā: like a grass torch, in the sense of not burning away. Aṅgārakāsūpamā: like a pit of embers, in the sense of great heat. Supinakūpamā: like a dream, in the sense of fleeting presence. Yācitakūpamā: like a loan, in the sense of temporary. Rukkhaphalūpamā: like the fruit of a tree, in the sense of the breaking of all limbs and parts. Asisūnūpamā: like a butcher, in the sense of much cutting. Sattisūlūpamā: like a spear, in the sense of piercing through. Sappasirūpamā: like the head of a snake, in the sense of dangerous and frightening with apprehension. Ussahissāmīti: I will make an effort. Dhārayissāmīti: I will maintain the state of a renunciant. Abhiramissāmīti: I will generate delight, I will not be disgusted. The rest here is of obvious meaning. In this sutta, the cycle and reverse cycle are spoken of.

7. Paṭhamaanāgatabhayasuttavaṇṇanā
7. Paṭhamaanāgatabhayasuttavaṇṇanā

77.Sattameāraññakenāti araññavāsinā.Appattassāti asampattassa jhānavipassanāmaggaphalappabhedassa visesassa pattiyā. Sesapadesupi eseva nayo.So mamassa antarāyoti so mama jīvitantarāyo ca brahmacariyantarāyo ca, puthujjanakālakiriyaṃ karontassa saggantarāyo ca maggantarāyo ca bhaveyya.Handāti vavassaggatthe nipāto.Vīriyaṃ ārabhāmīti duvidhampi vīriyaṃ karomi.Satthakāti satthaṃ viya sandhibandhanacchedakavātā.Vāḷehīti kakkhaḷehi.Māṇavehīti corehi.Katakammehi vā akatakammehi vāti ettha corikaṃ katvā nikkhantā katakammā nāma, corikaṃ kātuṃ gacchantā akatakammā nāma. Tattha katakammā kammassa nipphannattā sattānaṃ galalohitaṃ gahetvā devatānaṃ baliṃ karonti, akatakammā ‘‘evaṃ no kammaṃ nipphajjissatī’’ti paṭhamataraṃ karonti. Idaṃ sandhāyate maṃ jīvitā voropeyyunti vuttaṃ.Vāḷā amanussāti kakkhaḷā duṭṭhā yakkhādayo amanussā.

77. In the seventh: āraññakenāti: by one who lives in the forest. Appattassāti: for the attainment of the distinction of jhāna, vipassanā, patha, phala, etc., which has not been attained. The same method applies in the remaining words also. So mamassa antarāyoti: that would be an obstacle for me to life and an obstacle to the brahmacariya-life; for one who makes death as a worldling, it would be an obstacle to heaven and an obstacle to the path. Handāti: nipāta in the sense of eagerness. Vīriyaṃ ārabhāmīti: I undertake two kinds of effort. Satthakāti: winds that cut the joints and bonds like a knife. Vāḷehīti: by fierce ones. Māṇavehīti: by thieves. Katakammehi vā akatakammehi vāti: here, those who have gone out having committed theft are called 'katakammā', those who are going to commit theft are called 'akatakammā'. There, the 'katakammā', because the deed is accomplished, take the blood of the necks of beings and make offerings to the deities; the 'akatakammā' do it earlier thinking, "Thus our deed will be accomplished." Referring to this, te maṃ jīvitā voropeyyunti was said. Vāḷā amanussāti: fierce, wicked non-humans such as yakkhas.

8. Dutiyaanāgatabhayasuttavaṇṇanā
8. Dutiyaanāgatabhayasuttavaṇṇanā

78.Aṭṭhamepurā maṃ so dhammo āgacchatīti yāva so dhammo maṃ na upagacchati, tāva ahaṃ puretarameva vīriyaṃ ārabhāmīti attho.Khīrodakībhūtāti khīrodakaṃ viya bhūtā ekībhāvaṃ upagatā.Piyacakkhūhīti mettacakkhūhi.

78. In the eighth: purā maṃ so dhammo āgacchatīti: before that dhamma approaches me, I undertake effort even earlier, is the meaning. Khīrodakībhūtāti: having become unified like milk and water. Piyacakkhūhīti: with eyes of loving-kindness.

9. Tatiyaanāgatabhayasuttavaṇṇanā
9. Tatiyaanāgatabhayasuttavaṇṇanā

79.Navamedhammasandosā vinayasandosoti dhammasandosena vinayasandoso hoti. Kathaṃ pana dhammasmiṃ dussante vinayo dussati nāma? Samathavipassanādhammesu gabbhaṃ aggaṇhantesu pañcavidho vinayo na hoti, evaṃ dhamme dussante vinayo dussati. Dussīlassa pana saṃvaravinayo nāma na hoti, tasmiṃ asati samathavipassanā gabbhaṃ na gaṇhāti. Evaṃ vinayasandosenapi dhammasandoso veditabbo.Abhidhammakathanti sīlādiuttamadhammakathaṃ.Vedallakathanti vedapaṭisaṃyuttaṃ ñāṇamissakakathaṃ.Kaṇhadhammaṃ okkamamānāti randhagavesitāya upārambhapariyesanavasena kāḷakadhammaṃ okkamamānā. Apica duṭṭhacittena puggalaṃ ghaṭṭentāpi taṃ kaṇhadhammaṃ attano dahantāpi lābhasakkāratthaṃ kathentāpi kaṇhadhammaṃ okkamantiyeva.

79. In the ninth: dhammasandosā vinayasandosoti: through corruption of dhamma, there is corruption of vinaya. But how does vinaya become corrupt when dhamma is corrupted? When they do not grasp the essence in the dhammas of samatha and vipassanā, the fivefold vinaya does not exist; thus, when dhamma is corrupted, vinaya is corrupted. For an immoral person, there is no vinaya of restraint; when that does not exist, samatha and vipassanā do not grasp the essence. Thus, corruption of dhamma should be understood even through corruption of vinaya. Abhidhammakathanti: talk about the supreme dhamma such as sīla, etc. Vedallakathanti: talk mixed with knowledge connected to the Vedas. Kaṇhadhammaṃ okkamamānāti: those who attack the dark dhamma, searching for faults, seeking opportunities for reproach. Furthermore, those who strike a person with an angry mind, or those who burn that dark dhamma in themselves, or those who speak for the sake of gain and honor, are indeed attacking the dark dhamma.

Gambhīrāti pāḷigambhīrā.Gambhīratthāti atthagambhīrā.Lokuttarāti lokuttaradhammadīpakā.Suññatāpaṭisaṃyuttāti khandhadhātuāyatanapaccayākārapaṭisaṃyuttā.Na aññā cittaṃ upaṭṭhapessantīti jānanatthāya cittaṃ na ṭhapessanti.Uggahetabbaṃ pariyāpuṇitabbanti uggahetabbe ca vaḷañjetabbe ca.Kavitāti silokādibandhanavasena kavīhi katā.Kāveyyāti tasseva vevacanaṃ.Bāhirakāti sāsanato bahiddhā ṭhitā.Sāvakabhāsitāti bāhirasāvakehi bhāsitā. Sesamettha heṭṭhā vuttanayattā suviññeyyattā ca uttānatthameva.

Gambhīrāti: the Pali is profound. Gambhīratthāti: the meaning is profound. Lokuttarāti: revealing the supramundane dhamma. Suññatāpaṭisaṃyuttāti: connected with the modes of khandha, dhātu, āyatana, and paccaya. Na aññā cittaṃ upaṭṭhapessantīti: they will not establish the mind for the sake of knowing. Uggahetabbaṃ pariyāpuṇitabbanti: to be learned and mastered. Kavitāti: composed by poets in the manner of verses, etc. Kāveyyāti: a synonym of that itself. Bāhirakāti: standing outside the Teaching. Sāvakabhāsitāti: spoken by external disciples. The rest here is of obvious meaning, since the method stated below is easily understood.

10. Catutthaanāgatabhayasuttavaṇṇanā
10. Catutthaanāgatabhayasuttavaṇṇanā

80.Dasamekalyāṇakāmāti sundarakāmā.Rasaggānīti uttamarasāni.Saṃsaṭṭhā viharissantīti pañcavidhena saṃsaggena saṃsaṭṭhā viharissanti.Sannidhikāraparibhoganti sannidhikatassa paribhogaṃ.Oḷārikampi nimittanti ettha pathaviṃ khaṇantopi khaṇāhīti āṇāpentopi pathaviyaṃ oḷārikaṃ nimittaṃ karoti nāma. Tiṇakaṭṭhasākhāpalāsaṃ chindantopi chindāti āṇāpentopi haritagge oḷārikaṃ nimittaṃ karoti nāma. Ājīvatthāya paṇṇanivāpaādīni gāhāpento phalāni ocinante vā ocināpentena vattabbameva natthi. Imesu catūsu suttesu satthārā sāsane vuddhiparihāni kathitāti.

80. In the tenth: kalyāṇakāmāti: desiring what is beautiful. Rasaggānīti: supreme tastes. Saṃsaṭṭhā viharissantīti: they will live associated with five kinds of association. Sannidhikāraparibhoganti: enjoyment of what has been stored up. Oḷārikampi nimittanti: here, even one who digs the earth or orders others to dig, makes a gross sign in the earth. Even one who cuts a grass, wood, branch, or leaf, or orders others to cut, makes a gross sign in green vegetation. There is no need to say anything about one who takes leaves for a living, etc., or one who plucks fruits or orders others to pluck them. In these four suttas, the Teacher spoke of growth and decline in the Teaching.

(9) 4. Theravaggo

(9) 4. Theravaggo

1. Rajanīyasuttavaṇṇanā
1. Rajanīyasuttavaṇṇanā

81.Catutthassa paṭhamerajanīyesūti rāgassa paccayesu ārammaṇesu. Sesesupi eseva nayo.

81. In the first of the fourth: rajanīyesūti: in objects that are the cause of rāga. The same method applies in the remaining instances also.

2. Vītarāgasuttavaṇṇanā
2. Vītarāgasuttavaṇṇanā

82.Dutiyemakkhīti guṇamakkhako.Paḷāsīti yugaggāhalakkhaṇena paḷāsena samannāgato.

82. In the second: makkhīti: one who smears over good qualities. Paḷāsīti: one endowed with selfishness characterized by seizing the best part.

3. Kuhakasuttavaṇṇanā
3. Kuhakasuttavaṇṇanā

83.Tatiyekuhakoti tīhi kuhanavatthūhi samannāgato.Lapakoti lābhasannissitāya lapanāya samannāgato.Nemittikoti nimittakiriyakārako.Nippesikoti nippesanakatāya samannāgato.Lābhena ca lābhaṃ nijigīsitāti lābhena lābhagavesako. Sukkapakkho vuttavipallāsavasena veditabbo. Catutthaṃ uttānameva.

83. In the third: kuhakoti: one endowed with three things of deception. Lapakoti: one endowed with talk based on gain. Nemittikoti: one who performs omens. Nippesikoti: one endowed with the action of solicitation. Lābhena ca lābhaṃ nijigīsitāti: one who seeks gain by gain. The bright side should be understood in terms of the opposite reversal. The fourth is obvious.

5. Akkhamasuttavaṇṇanā
5. Akkhamasuttavaṇṇanā

85.Pañcameakkhamo hoti rūpānanti rūpārammaṇānaṃ anadhivāsako hoti, tadārammaṇehi rāgādīhi abhibhuyyati. Eseva nayo sabbattha.

85. In the fifth: akkhamo hoti rūpānanti: he is not tolerant of objects of form, he is overcome by rāga, etc., due to those objects. The same method applies everywhere.

6. Paṭisambhidāppattasuttavaṇṇanā
6. Paṭisambhidāppattasuttavaṇṇanā

86.Chaṭṭheatthapaṭisambhidāppattoti pañcasu atthesu pabhedagataṃ ñāṇaṃ patto.Dhammapaṭisambhidāppattoti catubbidhe dhamme pabhedagataṃ ñāṇaṃ patto.Niruttipaṭisambhidāppattoti dhammaniruttīsu pabhedagataṃ ñāṇaṃ patto.Paṭibhānapaṭisambhidāppattoti tesu tīsu ñāṇesu pabhedagataṃ ñāṇaṃ patto. So pana tāni tīṇi ñāṇāneva jānāti, na tesaṃ kiccaṃ karoti.Uccāvacānīti mahantakhuddakāni.Kiṃkaraṇīyānīti iti kattabbāni.

86. In the sixth: atthapaṭisambhidāppattoti: one who has attained knowledge that has reached distinctions in five meanings. Dhammapaṭisambhidāppattoti: one who has attained knowledge that has reached distinctions in the fourfold dhamma. Niruttipaṭisambhidāppattoti: one who has attained knowledge that has reached distinctions in dhamma and language. Paṭibhānapaṭisambhidāppattoti: one who has attained knowledge that has reached distinctions in those three knowledges. But he only knows those three knowledges, he does not do their function. Uccāvacānīti: great and small. Kiṃkaraṇīyānīti: what should be done.

7. Sīlavantasuttavaṇṇanā
7. Sīlavantasuttavaṇṇanā

87.Sattamaṃ uttānatthameva. Sīlaṃ panettha khīṇāsavasīlameva, bāhusaccampi khīṇāsavabāhusaccameva, vācāpi khīṇāsavassa kalyāṇavācāva, jhānānipi kiriyajjhānāneva kathitānīti veditabbāni.

87. The seventh is of obvious meaning. Here, sīla should be understood as the sīla of one with destroyed āsavas, much learning also as the much learning of one with destroyed āsavas, speech also as the good speech of one with destroyed āsavas, the jhānas also as the jhānas of one who has done what has to be done.

8. Therasuttavaṇṇanā
8. Therasuttavaṇṇanā

88.Aṭṭhametheroti thirabhāvappatto.Rattaññūti pabbajitadivasato paṭṭhāya atikkantānaṃ bahūnaṃ rattīnaṃ ñātā.Ñātoti paññāto pākaṭo.Yasassīti yasanissito.Micchādiṭṭhikoti ayāthāvadiṭṭhiko.Saddhammā vuṭṭhāpetvāti dasakusalakammapathadhammato vuṭṭhāpetvā.Asaddhamme patiṭṭhāpetīti akusalakammapathesu patiṭṭhāpeti.

88. In the eighth: theroti: one who has attained the state of stability. Rattaññūti: one who knows the many nights that have passed since the day of ordination. Ñātoti: known, manifest. Yasassīti: based on fame. Micchādiṭṭhikoti: one of wrong view, not speaking truthfully. Saddhammā vuṭṭhāpetvāti: having removed from the dhamma of the ten wholesome courses of action. Asaddhamme patiṭṭhāpetīti: he establishes in the unwholesome courses of action.

9. Paṭhamasekhasuttavaṇṇanā
9. Paṭhamasekhasuttavaṇṇanā

89.Navamesekhassāti sikkhakassa sakaraṇīyassa.Parihānāyāti upariguṇehi parihānatthāya.Kammārāmatāti navakamme ramanakabhāvo.Bhassārāmatāti ālāpasallāpe ramanakabhāvo.Niddārāmatāti niddāyane ramanakabhāvo.Saṅgaṇikārāmatāti gaṇasaṅgaṇikāya ramanakabhāvo.Yathāvimuttaṃ cittaṃ na paccavekkhatīti yathā yaṃ cittaṃ vimuttaṃ, ye ca dosā pahīnā, guṇā ca paṭiladdhā, te paccavekkhitvā upariguṇapaṭilābhāya vāyāmaṃ na karotīti attho. Iti imasmiṃ sutte sattannaṃ sekhānaṃ upariguṇehi parihānikāraṇañca vuddhikāraṇañca kathitaṃ. Yañca nāma sekhassa parihānakāraṇaṃ, taṃ puthujjanassa paṭhamameva hotīti.

89. In the ninth: sekhassāti: for a trainee, for what should be done. Parihānāyāti: for decline from superior qualities. Kammārāmatāti: the state of delighting in new work. Bhassārāmatāti: the state of delighting in conversation and talk. Niddārāmatāti: the state of delighting in drowsiness. Saṅgaṇikārāmatāti: the state of delighting in association with groups. Yathāvimuttaṃ cittaṃ na paccavekkhatīti: he does not review the way in which the mind was released and the faults that were abandoned and the qualities that were attained, he does not make effort for the attainment of superior qualities, is the meaning. Thus, in this sutta, the cause of decline from superior qualities and the cause of growth for the seven trainees are spoken of. And that which is the cause of decline for a trainee, that exists for a worldling from the very beginning.

10. Dutiyasekhasuttavaṇṇanā
10. Dutiyasekhasuttavaṇṇanā

90.Dasameviyattoti byatto cheko.Kiṃkaraṇīyesūti iti kattabbesu.Cetosamathanti samādhikammaṭṭhānaṃ.Ananulomikenāti sāsanassa ananucchavikena.Atikālenāti atipātova.Atidivāti divā vuccati majjhanhiko, taṃ atikkamitvā.Ābhisallekhikāti ativiya kilesasallekhikā.Cetovivaraṇasappāyāti cittavivaraṇasaṅkhātānaṃ samathavipassanānaṃ sappāyā.Appicchakathāti appicchā hothāti kathanakathā.Santuṭṭhikathāti catūhi paccayehi santuṭṭhā hothāti kathanakathā.Pavivekakathāti tīhi vivekehi vivittā hothāti kathanakathā.Asaṃsaggakathāti pañcavidhena saṃsaggena asaṃsaṭṭhā hothāti kathanakathā.Vīriyārambhakathāti duvidhaṃ vīriyaṃ ārabhathāti kathanakathā.Sīlakathādīsu sīlaṃ ārabbha kathā sīlakathā. Samādhiṃ ārabbha, paññaṃ ārabbha, pañcavidhaṃ vimuttiṃ ārabbha, ekūnavīsatipaccavekkhaṇasaṅkhātaṃ vimuttiñāṇadassanaṃ ārabbha kathā vimuttiñāṇadassanakathā.Na nikāmalābhītiādīsu na icchiticchitalābhī, dukkhalābhī na vipulalābhīti attho. Sesaṃ uttānatthamevāti.

90. In the tenth: viyattoti: skilled, clever. Kiṃkaraṇīyesūti: in what should be done. Cetosamathanti: the samādhi meditation subject. Ananulomikenāti: not suitable for the Teaching. Atikālenāti: after too much time. Atidivāti: divā is called midday, having gone beyond that. Ābhisallekhikāti: very much concerned with eliminating defilements. Cetovivaraṇasappāyāti: suitable for samatha and vipassanā known as mental purification. Appicchakathāti: talk about 'be of few wishes'. Santuṭṭhikathāti: talk about 'be content with the four requisites'. Pavivekakathāti: talk about 'be secluded with the three kinds of seclusion'. Asaṃsaggakathāti: talk about 'be unassociated with the five kinds of association'. Vīriyārambhakathāti: talk about 'undertake two kinds of effort'. Sīlakathādīsu: talk about sīla is sīlakathā. Talk about samādhi, talk about paññā, talk about the fivefold release, talk about knowledge and vision of release reckoned as nineteenfold reviewing is talk about knowledge and vision of release. Na nikāmalābhītiādīsu: he is not a gainer as he desires, a gainer with difficulty, not a gainer with abundance, is the meaning. The rest is of obvious meaning.

(10) 5. Kakudhavaggo

(10) 5. Kakudhavaggo

1-2. Sampadāsuttadvayavaṇṇanā
1-2. Sampadāsuttadvayavaṇṇanā

91-92.Pañcamassa paṭhame pañca sampadā missikā kathitā. Dutiye purimā catasso missikā, pañcamī lokikāva.

91-92. In the first of the fifth, five mixed kinds of accomplishment are spoken of. In the second, the first four are mixed, the fifth is worldly alone.

3. Byākaraṇasuttavaṇṇanā
3. Byākaraṇasuttavaṇṇanā

93.Tatiyeaññābyākaraṇānīti arahattabyākaraṇāni.Mandattāti mandabhāvena aññāṇena.Momūhattāti atimūḷhabhāvena.Aññaṃ byākarotīti arahattaṃ pattosmīti katheti.Icchāpakatoti icchāya abhibhūto.Adhimānenāti adhigatamānena.Sammadevāti hetunā nayena kāraṇeneva.

93. Aññābyākaraṇāni in the third instance, means declarations of Arahantship. Mandattā means due to slowness, due to lack of knowledge. Momūhattā means due to excessive delusion. Aññaṃ byākaroti means he declares, "I have attained Arahantship." Icchāpakato means overcome by desire. Adhimānenā means with the pride of attainment. Sammadevā means truly, by reason, by cause alone.

4-5. Phāsuvihārasuttādivaṇṇanā
4-5. Explanation of the Phāsuvihārasutta, etc.

94-95.Catutthephāsuvihārāti sukhavihārā. Pañcameakuppanti arahattaṃ.

94-95. In the fourth, phāsuvihārā means comfortable dwellings. In the fifth, akuppaṃ means Arahantship.

6. Sutadharasuttavaṇṇanā
6. Explanation of the Sutadharasutta

96.Chaṭṭheappaṭṭhoti appasamārambho.Appakiccoti appakaraṇīyo.Subharoti sukhena bharitabbo suposo.Susantosoti tīhi santosehi suṭṭhu santoso.Jīvitaparikkhāresūti jīvitasambhāresu.Appāhāroti mandāhāro.Anodarikattanti na odarikabhāvaṃ amahagghasabhāvaṃ anuyutto.Appamiddhoti na bahuniddo. Sattamaṭṭhamāni uttānatthāni.

96. In the sixth, appaṭṭho means with little effort. Appakicco means with little to do. Subharo means easy to support, easy to nourish. Susantoso means well content with the three kinds of contentment. Jīvitaparikkhāresū means regarding the requisites of life. Appāhāro means with little food. Anodarikattaṃ means not addicted to the state of being a glutton, not indulging in excessive eating. Appamiddho means not sleeping much. The seventh and eighth are straightforward in meaning.

9. Sīhasuttavaṇṇanā
9. Explanation of the Sīhasutta

99.Navamesakkaccaññeva deti no asakkaccanti anavaññāya avirajjhitvāva deti, no avaññāya virajjhitvā.Mā me yoggapatho nassāti mayā katayoggapatho mayhaṃ mā nassatu, ‘‘eko sīho uṭṭhāya biḷāraṃ paharanto virajjhitvā paharī’’ti evaṃ vattāro mā hontūti attho.Annabhāranesādānanti ettha annaṃ vuccati yavabhattaṃ, taṃ bhāro etesanti annabhārā. Yācakānaṃ etaṃ nāmaṃ. Nesādā vuccanti sākuṇikā. Iti sabbapacchimāya koṭiyā etesaṃ yācakanesādānampi sakkaccameva deseti.

99. In the ninth, sakkaccaññeva deti no asakkaccaṃ means he gives with respect, without disrespecting, not giving with contempt or disrespect. Mā me yoggapatho nassā means, "May the path of yoga I have undertaken not be lost to me; may there not be those who say, 'One lion rose up and struck the cat without respect.'" This is the meaning. Annabhāranesādānaṃ here, annaṃ means barley porridge, those for whom that is a burden are annabhārā. This is a name for beggars. Nesādā are called hunters. Thus, even to these beggars and hunters at the very lowest level, he teaches respectfully.

10. Kakudhatherasuttavaṇṇanā
10. Explanation of the Kakudhatherasutta

100.Dasameattabhāvapaṭilābhoti sarīrapaṭilābho.Dve vā tīṇi vā māgadhakāni gāmakkhettānīti ettha māgadhikaṃ gāmakkhettaṃ atthi khuddakaṃ, atthi majjhimaṃ, atthi mahantaṃ. Khuddakaṃ gāmakkhettaṃ ito cattālīsaṃ usabhāni, ito cattālīsanti gāvutaṃ hoti, majjhimaṃ ito gāvutaṃ, ito gāvutanti aḍḍhayojanaṃ hoti, mahantaṃ ito diyaḍḍhagāvutaṃ, ito diyaḍḍhagāvutanti tigāvutaṃ hoti. Tesu khuddakena gāmakkhettena tīṇi, khuddakena ca majjhimena ca dve gāmakkhettāni tassa attabhāvo. Tigāvutañhissa sarīraṃ.Pariharissāmīti paṭijaggissāmi gopayissāmi.Rakkhassetanti rakkhassu etaṃ.Moghapurisoti tucchapuriso.Nāssassāti na etassa bhaveyya.Samudācareyyāmāti katheyyāma.Sammannatīti sammānaṃ karoti.Yaṃ tumo karissati tumova tena paññāyissatīti yaṃ esa karissati, esova tena kammena pākaṭo bhavissati. Sesaṃ sabbattha uttānatthamevāti.

100. In the tenth, attabhāvapaṭilābho means the acquisition of a body. Dve vā tīṇi vā māgadhakāni gāmakkhettāni here, a Māgadhaka gāmakkhetta (village field) exists in small, medium, and large sizes. A small gāmakkhetta is forty usabhāni on each side, making a gāvuta; a medium one is a gāvuta on each side, making half a yojana; a large one is one and a half gāvutas on each side, making three gāvutas. Among these, three small gāmakkhettas, or two consisting of one small and one medium gāmakkhetta, is his attabhāva. For his body is three gāvutas. Pariharissāmī means "I will take care of, I will protect." Rakkhassetaṃ means "Protect this." Moghapuriso means empty man. Nāssassa means that would not be his. Samudācareyyāmā means we would speak. Sammannatī means he pays respect. Yaṃ tumo karissati tumova tena paññāyissati means whatever this one does, he himself will be known by that action. The rest is straightforward everywhere.

3. Tatiyapaṇṇāsakaṃ

3. Tatiyapaṇṇāsakaṃ (The Third Book of Fifty)

(11) 1. Phāsuvihāravaggo

(11) 1. Phāsuvihāravaggo (Comfortable Dwelling Chapter)

1. Sārajjasuttavaṇṇanā
1. Explanation of the Sārajjasutta

101.Tatiyassa paṭhamevesārajjakaraṇāti visāradabhāvāvahā.Sārajjaṃ hotīti domanassaṃ hoti.

101. In the first of the third, vesārajjakaraṇā means causing fearlessness. Sārajjaṃ hoti means there is displeasure.

2. Ussaṅkitasuttavaṇṇanā
2. Explanation of the Ussaṅkitasutta

102.Dutiyeussaṅkitaparisaṅkitoti ussaṅkito ca parisaṅkito ca.Api akuppadhammopīti api akuppadhammo khīṇāsavo samānopi parehi pāpabhikkhūhi ussaṅkitaparisaṅkito hotīti attho.Vesiyāgocarotiādīsu vesiyā vuccanti rūpūpajīviniyo, tā gocaro assāti vesiyāgocaro, tāsaṃ gehaṃ abhiṇhagamanoti attho. Sesapadesupi eseva nayo. Tattha panavidhavāti matapatikā.Thullakumārikāti mahallikakumārikāyo.

102. In the second, ussaṅkitaparisaṅkito means both suspected and distrusted. Api akuppadhammopī means even one who has unwavering Dhamma, even a Khīṇāsava, is suspected and distrusted by other evil monks. Regarding vesiyāgocaro, vesiyā means women who live by their beauty; one who frequents them is a vesiyāgocaro, meaning frequenting their houses. The same method applies to the remaining terms. There, vidhavā means a woman whose husband has died. Thullakumārikā means elderly maidens.

3. Mahācorasuttavaṇṇanā
3. Explanation of the Mahācorasutta

103.Tatiyeito bhogena paṭisantharissāmīti ito mama sāpateyyato bhogaṃ gahetvā tena paṭisanthāraṃ karissāmi, tassa ca mama ca antaraṃ pidahissāmīti attho.Gahaṇānīti parasantakānaṃ bhaṇḍānaṃ gahaṇāni.Guyhamantāti guhitabbamantā.Antaggāhikāyāti sassataṃ vā ucchedaṃ vā gahetvā ṭhitāya. Sesamettha uttānatthameva. Catutthe sabbaṃ heṭṭhā vuttanayameva.

103. In the third, ito bhogena paṭisantharissāmī means, "Taking wealth from my possessions here, I will use it for entertainment, and I will close the gap between him and me." Gahaṇāni means the taking of goods belonging to others. Guyhamantā means secrets to be hidden. Antaggāhikāyā means clinging to permanence or annihilation. The rest here is straightforward. In the fourth, everything is as stated below.

5. Phāsuvihārasuttavaṇṇanā
5. Explanation of the Phāsuvihārasutta

105.Pañcamemettaṃ kāyakammanti mettacittena pavattitaṃ kāyakammaṃ.Āvi ceva raho cāti sammukhe ceva parammukhe ca. Itaresupi eseva nayo.Yāni tāni sīlānītiādi catupārisuddhisīlavasena vuttaṃ.Samādhisaṃvattanikānīti maggasamādhiphalasamādhinibbattakāni.Sīlasāmaññagatoti samānasīlataṃ gato, ekasadisasīlo hutvāti attho.Takkarassāti yo naṃ karoti, tassa. Iti imasmiṃ sutte sīlaṃ missakaṃ kathitaṃ, diṭṭhi vipassanāsammādiṭṭhīti.

105. In the fifth, mettaṃ kāyakammaṃ means bodily action motivated by loving-kindness. Āvi ceva raho cā means both in public and in private. The same method applies to the others. Yāni tāni sīlānī etc., is stated in terms of the fourfold purity of morality. Samādhisaṃvattanikāni means conducive to the attainment of Maggasamādhi and Phalasamādhi. Sīlasāmaññagato means having attained equality in morality, having become one of similar morality. Takkarassā means for him who does it. Thus, in this sutta, morality is spoken of as mixed, and diṭṭhi is Vipassanāsammādiṭṭhi.

6. Ānandasuttavaṇṇanā
6. Explanation of the Ānandasutta

106.Chaṭṭheno ca paraṃ adhisīle sampavattā hotīti paraṃ sīlabhāvena na garahati na upavadati.Attānupekkhīti attanova katākataṃ jānanavasena attānaṃ anupekkhitā.No parānupekkhīti parassa katākatesu abyāvaṭo.Apaññātoti apākaṭo appapuñño.Apaññātakenāti apaññātabhāvena apākaṭatāya mandapuññatāya.No paritassatīti paritāsaṃ nāpajjati. Iti imasmiṃ sutte khīṇāsavova kathito.

106. In the sixth, no ca paraṃ adhisīle sampavattā hoti means he does not disparage or criticize others for their morality. Attānupekkhī means disregarding himself in terms of knowing what he has done and not done. No parānupekkhī means not meddling in what others have done and not done. Apaññāto means obscure, with little merit. Apaññātakena means due to being obscure, due to lack of prominence, due to little merit. No paritassatī means he does not experience distress. Thus, in this sutta, only the Khīṇāsava is spoken of.

7-8. Sīlasuttādivaṇṇanā
7-8. Explanation of the Sīlasutta, etc.

107-108.Sattame sīlasamādhipaññā missikā kathitā, vimutti arahattaphalaṃ, vimuttiñāṇadassanaṃ paccavekkhaṇañāṇaṃ lokiyameva. Aṭṭhamepi eseva nayo. Paccavekkhaṇañāṇaṃ panettha asekhassa pavattattā asekhanti vuttaṃ.

107-108. In the seventh, morality, samādhi, and paññā are spoken of as mixed; vimutti is the fruit of Arahantship, and vimuttiñāṇadassanaṃ (knowledge and vision of deliverance) is mundane Paccavekkhaṇañāṇa. The same method applies to the eighth as well. Here, Paccavekkhaṇañāṇa is called Asekha because it occurs for one beyond training.

9-10. Cātuddisasuttādivaṇṇanā
9-10. Explanation of the Cātuddisasutta, etc.

109-110.Navamecātuddisoti catūsu disāsu appaṭihatacāro. Imasmimpi sutte khīṇāsavova kathito. Dasamealanti yutto. Idhāpi khīṇāsavova kathito.

109-110. In the ninth, cātuddiso means wandering unrestrictedly in the four directions. In this sutta too, only the Khīṇāsava is spoken of. In the tenth, alaṃ means suitable. Here too, only the Khīṇāsava is spoken of.

(12) 2. Andhakavindavaggo

(12) 2. Andhakavindavaggo (The Andhakavinda Chapter)

1. Kulūpakasuttavaṇṇanā
1. Explanation of the Kulūpakasutta

111.Dutiyassa paṭhameasanthavavissāsīti attanā saddhiṃ santhavaṃ akarontesu vissāsaṃ anāpajjantesuyeva vissāsaṃ karoti.Anissaravikappīti anissarova samāno ‘‘imaṃ detha, imaṃ gaṇhathā’’ti issaro viya vikappeti.Vissaṭṭhupasevīti vissaṭṭhāni bhinnakulāni ghaṭanatthāya upasevati.Upakaṇṇakajappīti kaṇṇamūle mantaṃ gaṇhāti. Sukkapakkho vuttavipariyāyena veditabbo.

111. In the first of the twelfth, asanthavavissāsī means he places trust in those who do not cultivate intimacy with him, in those who do not inspire confidence. Anissaravikappī means although he is not in control, he dictates as if he were, saying, "Give this, take that." Vissaṭṭhupasevī means he associates with separate, divided families in order to reconcile them. Upakaṇṇakajappī means he whispers a mantra in the ear. The "bright side" should be understood in the opposite way to what has been said.

2. Pacchāsamaṇasuttavaṇṇanā
2. Explanation of the Pacchāsamaṇasutta

112.Dutiyepattapariyāpannaṃ na gaṇhātīti upajjhāye nivattitvā ṭhite attano tucchapattaṃ datvā tassa pattaṃ na gaṇhāti, tato vā dīyamānaṃ na gaṇhāti.Na nivāretīti idaṃ vacanaṃ āpattivītikkamavacanaṃ nāmāti na jānāti. Ñatvā vāpi, ‘‘bhante, evarūpaṃ nāma vattuṃ na vaṭṭatī’’ti na nivāreti.Kathaṃ opātetīti tassa kathaṃ bhinditvā attano kathaṃ paveseti.Jaḷoti jaḍo.Eḷamūgoti paggharitakheḷamukho. Tatiyaṃ uttānameva.

112. In the second, pattapariyāpannaṃ na gaṇhāti means when the preceptor has stepped aside, he does not give his own empty bowl and take the preceptor's bowl, or he does not take it when it is offered. Na nivāreti means he does not know that this statement is called a transgression of the rule. Or, even knowing, he does not prevent it, saying, "Bhante, it is not proper to say such a thing." Kathaṃ opātetī means how does he break his speech and insert his own speech. Jaḷo means dull. Eḷamūgo means one with saliva drooling from his mouth. The third is straightforward.

4. Andhakavindasuttavaṇṇanā
4. Explanation of the Andhakavindasutta

114.Catutthesīlavā hothāti sīlavantā hotha.Ārakkhasatinoti dvārarakkhikāya satiyā samannāgatā.Nipakkasatinoti dvārarakkhanakeneva ñāṇena samannāgatassatino.Satārakkhena cetasā samannāgatāti satārakkhena cittena samannāgatā.Appabhassāti appakathā.Sammādiṭṭhikāti kammassakatajjhāna-vipassanāmagga-phalavasena pañcavidhāya sammādiṭṭhiyā samannāgatā. Apica paccavekkhaṇañāṇampi sammādiṭṭhiyevāti veditabbā.

114. In the fourth, sīlavā hotha means "Be virtuous." Ārakkhasatino means endowed with mindfulness as a doorkeeper. Nipakkasatino means endowed with mindfulness accompanied by wisdom that guards the doors. Satārakkhena cetasā samannāgatā means endowed with a mind guarded by mindfulness. Appabhassā means with little speech. Sammādiṭṭhikā means endowed with the fivefold Sammādiṭṭhi consisting of Kamma-ssakatā, Jjhāna, Vipassanāmagga, and Phala. Moreover, Paccavekkhaṇañāṇa should also be understood as Sammādiṭṭhi.

5. Maccharinīsuttavaṇṇanā
5. Explanation of the Maccharinīsutta

115.Pañcameāvāsamaccharinīti āvāsaṃ maccharāyati, tattha aññesaṃ vāsaṃ na sahati.Kulamaccharinīti upaṭṭhākakulaṃ maccharāyati, aññesaṃ tattha upasaṅkamanaṃ na sahati.Lābhamaccharinīti lābhaṃ maccharāyati, aññesaṃ taṃ uppajjantaṃ na sahati.Vaṇṇamaccharinīti guṇaṃ maccharāyati, aññesaṃ guṇakathaṃ na sahati.Dhammamaccharinīti pariyattidhammaṃ maccharāyati, aññesaṃ dātuṃ na icchati.

115. In the fifth, āvāsamaccharinī means she is miserly with the monastery, not tolerating others residing there. Kulamaccharinī means she is miserly with the supporting family, not tolerating others approaching there. Lābhamaccharinī means she is miserly with gains, not tolerating others receiving them. Vaṇṇamaccharinī means she is miserly with praise, not tolerating others being praised. Dhammamaccharinī means she is miserly with the Dhamma of learning, not wishing to give it to others.

6-7. Vaṇṇanāsuttādivaṇṇanā
6-7. Explanation of the Vaṇṇanāsutta, etc.

116-117.Chaṭṭhesaddhādeyyaṃ vinipātetīti parehi saddhāya dinnapiṇḍapātato aggaṃ aggahetvā parassa deti. Sattameissukinīti issāya samannāgatā. Sesaṃ sabbattha uttānamevāti.

116-117. In the sixth, saddhādeyyaṃ vinipātetī means he gives the best portion from the almsfood given in faith by others to someone else without taking it himself. In the seventh, issukinī means endowed with envy. The rest is straightforward everywhere.

(13) 3. Gilānavaggo

(13) 3. Gilānavaggo (The Sick Chapter)

4. Dutiyaupaṭṭhākasuttavaṇṇanā
4. Explanation of the Dutiyaupaṭṭhākasutta

124.Tatiyassa catutthenappaṭibaloti kāyabalena ca ñāṇabalena ca asamannāgato.Āmisantaroti āmisahetuko cīvarādīni paccāsīsamāno.

124. In the fourth of the third, nappaṭibalo means not endowed with physical strength and intellectual strength. Āmisantaro means hoping for material benefits, expecting robes, etc.

5-6. Anāyussāsuttadvayavaṇṇanā
5-6. Explanation of the two Anāyussāsuttas

125-126.Pañcameanāyussāti āyupacchedanā, na āyuvaḍḍhanā. Chaṭṭhepi eseva nayo.

125-126. In the fifth, anāyussā means causing the cutting off of life, not increasing life. The same method applies to the sixth as well.

7. Vapakāsasuttavaṇṇanā
7. Explanation of the Vapakāsasutta

127.Sattamenālaṃ saṅghamhā vapakāsitunti saṅghato nikkhamitvā ekako vasituṃ na yutto. Kāmañcesa saṅghamajjhepi vasituṃ ayuttova asaṅghasobhanatāya, ovādānusāsanippaṭibaddhattā pana nippariyāyeneva saṅghamhā vapakāsituṃ na yutto.Alaṃ saṅghamhā vapakāsitunti cātuddisattā saṅghamhā nikkhamma ekako vasituṃ yutto, saṅghasobhanatāya pana saṅghepi vasituṃ yuttoyeva. Aṭṭhamaṃ uttānatthameva.

127. In the seventh, nālaṃ saṅghamhā vapakāsituṃ means he is not fit to leave the Saṅgha and live alone. Although he is unfit to live even in the midst of the Saṅgha due to his unsuitability for the Saṅgha and his resistance to advice and instruction, he is definitely unfit to leave the Saṅgha without any alternative. Alaṃ saṅghamhā vapakāsituṃ means, being skilled in the four directions, he is fit to leave the Saṅgha and live alone, but he is also fit to live in the Saṅgha due to his suitability for the Saṅgha. The eighth is straightforward.

9. Parikuppasuttavaṇṇanā
9. Explanation of the Parikuppasutta

129.Navameāpāyikāti apāyagāmino.Nerayikāti nirayagāmino.Parikuppāti parikuppanasabhāvā purāṇavaṇasadisā.Atekicchāti akattabbaparikammā. Dasamaṃ uttānatthamevāti.

129. In the ninth, āpāyikā means going to the apāya. Nerayikā means going to niraya. Parikuppā means having a nature of constant irritation, like an old wound. Atekicchā means incurable. The tenth is straightforward.

(14) 4. Rājavaggo

(14) 4. Rājavaggo (The King Chapter)

1. Paṭhamacakkānuvattanasuttavaṇṇanā
1. Explanation of the Paṭhamacakkānuvattanasutta

131.Catutthassa paṭhamedhammenāti dasakusaladhammena.Cakkanti āṇācakkaṃ.Atthaññūti rajjatthaṃ jānāti.Dhammaññūti paveṇidhammaṃ jānāti.Mattaññūti daṇḍe vā balamhi vā pamāṇaṃ jānāti.Kālaññūti rajjasukhānubhavanakālaṃ, vinicchayakaraṇakālaṃ, janapadacārikākālañca jānāti.Parisaññūti ayaṃ parisā khattiyaparisā, ayaṃ brāhmaṇavessasuddasamaṇaparisāti jānāti.

131. In the first of the fourth, dhammenā means with the ten wholesome Dhammas. Cakkaṃ means the wheel of authority. Atthaññū means he knows the benefit of the kingdom. Dhammaññū means he knows the traditional law. Mattaññū means he knows the measure in punishment or force. Kālaññū means he knows the time for enjoying the pleasures of the kingdom, the time for making judgments, and the time for touring the countryside. Parisaññū means he knows, "This is the assembly of Khattiyas, this is the assembly of Brahmins, Vessas, Suddas, and Samaṇas."

atthaññūti pañca atthe jānāti.Dhammaññūti cattāro dhamme jānāti.Mattaññūti catūsu paccayesu paṭiggahaṇaparibhogamattaṃ jānāti.Kālaññūti ayaṃ kālo paṭisallīnassa, ayaṃ samāpattiyā, ayaṃ dhammadesanāya, ayaṃ janapadacārikāyāti evaṃ kālaṃ jānāti.Parisaññūti ayaṃ parisā khattiyaparisā…pe… ayaṃ samaṇaparisāti jānāti.Anuttaranti navahi lokuttaradhammehi anuttaraṃ.Dhammacakkanti seṭṭhacakkaṃ.

Atthaññū means he knows the five kinds of benefit. Dhammaññū means he knows the four Dhammas. Mattaññū means he knows the measure of receiving and using the four requisites. Kālaññū means he knows the time: "This is the time for seclusion, this is the time for attainment, this is the time for teaching the Dhamma, this is the time for touring the countryside." Parisaññū means he knows, "This is the assembly of Khattiyas…pe… this is the assembly of Samaṇas." Anuttaraṃ means unsurpassed by the nine Lokuttaradhammas. Dhammacakkaṃ means the supreme wheel.

2. Dutiyacakkānuvattanasuttavaṇṇanā
2. Explanation of the Dutiyacakkānuvattanasutta

132.Dutiyepitarā pavattitaṃ cakkanti cakkavattimhi pabbajite vā kālakate vā cakkaratanaṃ sattāhamattaṃ ṭhatvā antaradhāyati, kathamesa taṃ anuppavatteti nāma? Pitu paveṇiyaṃ ṭhatvā cakkavattivattaṃ pūretvā cakkavattirajjaṃ kārentopi pitarā pavattitameva anuppavatteti nāma.

132. In the second, pitarā pavattitaṃ cakkaṃ means when a Cakkavatti ordains or dies, the wheel-jewel remains for only seven days and then disappears; how then does he cause it to continue? Even remaining in the tradition of his father, fulfilling the duties of a Cakkavatti, and ruling the kingdom of a Cakkavatti, he is said to cause what was set in motion by his father to continue.

3. Dhammarājāsuttavaṇṇanā
3. Explanation of the Dhammarājāsutta

133.Tatiyaṃ tikanipāte vuttanayameva. Sevitabbāsevitabbe panettha pacchimapadadvayameva viseso. Tattha sammāājīvo sevitabbo, micchāājīvo na sevitabbo. Sappāyo gāmanigamo sevitabbo, asappāyo na sevitabbo.

133. The third is in accordance with what was said in the Tikanipāta. Here, only the last two terms are different regarding what should be cultivated and what should not be cultivated. There, Sammā-ājīva (Right Livelihood) should be cultivated, and Micchā-ājīva (Wrong Livelihood) should not be cultivated. A suitable village or town should be cultivated, and an unsuitable one should not be cultivated.

4. Yassaṃdisaṃsuttavaṇṇanā
4. Explanation of the Yassaṃdisaṃsutta

134.Catuttheubhatoti dvīhipi pakkhehi.Mātito ca pitito cāti yassa hi mātā khattiyā, mātumātā khattiyā, tassāpi mātā khattiyā. Pitā khattiyo, pitupitā khattiyo, tassapi pitā khattiyo. So ubhato sujāto mātito ca pitito ca.Saṃsuddhagahaṇikoti saṃsuddhāya mātukucchiyā samannāgato. ‘‘Samavepākiniyā gahaṇiyā’’ti ettha pana kammajatejodhātu gahaṇīti vuccati.Yāva sattamā pitāmahayugāti ettha pitupitā pitāmaho, pitāmahassa yugaṃ pitāmahayugaṃ. Yuganti āyuppamāṇaṃ vuccati. Abhilāpamattameva cetaṃ, atthato pana pitāmahoyeva pitāmahayugaṃ. Tato uddhaṃ sabbepi pubbapurisā pitāmahaggahaṇeneva gahitā. Evaṃ yāva sattamo puriso, tāva saṃsuddhagahaṇiko, atha vā akkhitto anupakkuṭṭho jātivādenāti dasseti.Akkhittoti ‘‘apanetha etaṃ, kiṃ iminā’’ti evaṃ akkhitto anavakkhitto.Anupakkuṭṭhoti na upakkuṭṭho na akkosaṃ vā nindaṃ vā pattapubbo. Kena kāraṇenāti?Jātivādena,‘‘itipi hīnajātiko eso’’ti evarūpena vacanenāti attho.

134. In the fourth, ubhato means from both sides, from both parties. Mātito ca pitito cā means whose mother is a Khattiya, the mother's mother is a Khattiya, and her mother is also a Khattiya; whose father is a Khattiya, the father's father is a Khattiya, and his father is also a Khattiya. Thus, he is well-born from both sides, from mother and father. Saṃsuddhagahaṇiko means endowed with a pure womb. However, in "Samavepākiniyā gahaṇiyā," the kammaja-tejodhātu (karmically produced heat element) is called gahaṇī. Yāva sattamā pitāmahayugā means up to the seventh generation of grandfathers. Here, the father's father is the pitāmaha (grandfather), and the grandfather's generation is the pitāmahayuga. Yuga means lifespan. This is just a manner of speaking; in reality, the grandfather himself is the pitāmahayuga. Beyond that, all ancestors are included under the term pitāmaha. Thus, he is of pure descent up to the seventh generation, or, it shows that he is not rejected or reviled by reason of birth. Akkhitto means not rejected, not cast aside, by saying, "Remove this one, what is the use of him?" Anupakkuṭṭho means not reviled, never having been subjected to abuse or scorn. For what reason? Jātivādena, meaning by such words as, "This one is of low birth."

Aḍḍhotiādīsu yo koci attano santakena vibhavena aḍḍho hoti. Idha pana na kevalaṃ aḍḍhoyeva,mahaddhanomahatā aparimāṇasaṅkhena dhanena samannāgatoti attho. Pañcakāmaguṇavasena mahantā uḷārā bhogā assātimahābhogo. Paripuṇṇakosakoṭṭhāgāroti koso vuccati bhaṇḍāgāraṃ, nidahitvā ṭhapitena dhanena paripuṇṇakoso, dhaññena ca paripuṇṇakoṭṭhāgāroti attho. Atha vā catubbidho koso hatthī assā rathā raṭṭhanti, tividhaṃ koṭṭhāgāraṃ dhanakoṭṭhāgāraṃ dhaññakoṭṭhāgāraṃ vatthakoṭṭhāgāranti. Taṃ sabbampi paripuṇṇamassāti paripuṇṇakosakoṭṭhāgāro.Assavāyāti kassaci bahumpi dhanaṃ dentassa senā na suṇāti, sā anassavā nāma hoti. Kassaci adentassāpi suṇātiyeva, ayaṃ assavā nāma.Ovādapaṭikarāyāti ‘‘idaṃ vo kattabba, idaṃ na kattabba’’nti dinnaovādakarāya.Paṇḍitoti paṇḍiccena samannāgato.Byattoti paññāveyyattiyena yutto.Medhāvīti ṭhānuppattikapaññāya samannāgato.Paṭibaloti samattho.Atthe cintetunti vaḍḍhiatthe cintetuṃ. So hi paccuppannaatthavaseneva ‘‘atītepi evaṃ ahesuṃ, anāgatepi evaṃ bhavissantī’’ti cinteti.Vijitāvīnanti vijitavijayānaṃ, mahantena vā vijayena samannāgatānaṃ.Vimuttacittānanti pañcahi vimuttīhi vimuttamānasānaṃ.

Among aḍḍho (rich), etc., anyone is rich with their own possessions. But here, not only rich, but mahaddhano means endowed with great, immeasurable wealth. Mahābhogo means he has great, abundant possessions through the five strands of sense pleasure. Paripuṇṇakosakoṭṭhāgāro means kosa is called the treasury, a treasury full of wealth stored away, and koṭṭhāgāra is a storehouse full of grain. Or, the fourfold treasury consists of elephants, horses, chariots, and kingdom; and the threefold storehouse consists of a wealth storehouse, a grain storehouse, and a cloth storehouse. All of that is full for him, therefore he is paripuṇṇakosakoṭṭhāgāro. Assavāyā means when someone gives much wealth, the army does not listen; that is called anassavā. Even when someone does not give, they listen; this is called assavā. Ovādapaṭikarāyā means doing the advice given, "This should be done by you, this should not be done." Paṇḍito means endowed with wisdom. Byatto means endowed with intelligence. Medhāvī means endowed with wisdom that arises in the proper place. Paṭibalo means capable. Atthe cintetuṃ means to consider matters of increase. He considers, based on the present advantage alone, "Thus they were in the past, thus they will be in the future." Vijitāvīnaṃ means of those who have won victories, or of those endowed with great victory. Vimuttacittānaṃ means of those whose minds are freed by the five kinds of liberation.

5-6. Patthanāsuttadvayavaṇṇanā
5-6. Commentary on the Two Patthanā Suttas

135-136.Pañcamenegamajānapadassāti nigamavāsino ca raṭṭhavāsino ca janassa.Hatthismintiādīhi hatthiassarathatharudhanulekhamuddāgaṇanādīni soḷasa mahāsippāni dassitāni.Anavayoti samattho paripuṇṇo. Sesamettha heṭṭhā vuttanayeneva veditabbaṃ. Chaṭṭheoparajjanti uparājabhāvaṃ.

135-136. In the fifth, negamajānapadassā means of the people who live in towns and those who live in the countryside. By hatthismiṃ, etc., sixteen great arts are shown, such as elephants, horses, chariots, bows, writing, accounting, calculation, etc. Anavayo means capable, complete. The rest here should be understood in the same way as stated below. In the sixth, oparajjaṃ means the state of being an uparāja (viceroy).

7. Appaṃsupatisuttavaṇṇanā
7. Appaṃsupati Sutta Commentary

137.Sattamepurisādhippāyāti assaddhammavasena purise uppannādhippāyā purisajjhāsayā.Ādānādhippāyoti idāni gahetuṃ sakkhissāmi, idāni sakkhissāmīti evaṃ gahaṇādhippāyo.Visaṃyogādhippāyoti idāni nibbānaṃ pāpuṇissāmi, idāni pāpuṇissāmīti evaṃ nibbānajjhāsayo.

137. In the seventh, purisādhippāyā means the inclinations or intentions that arise in a person due to lack of faith. Ādānādhippāyo means the inclination to take, thinking, "Now I will be able to take it, now I will be able to take it." Visaṃyogādhippāyo means the intention for detachment, thinking, "Now I will attain Nibbāna, now I will attain Nibbāna."

8. Bhattādakasuttavaṇṇanā
8. Commentary on the Bhattādaka Sutta

138.Aṭṭhamebhattādakoti bhattakkhādako, bahubhattabhuñjoti attho.Okāsapharaṇoti okāsaṃ pharitvā aññesaṃ sambādhaṃ katvā ṭhānena okāsapharaṇo. Tattha tattha laṇḍaṃ sāreti pātetītilaṇḍasāraṇo. Ettakā hatthīti gaṇanakāle salākaṃ gaṇhātītisalākaggāhī. Nisīdanasayanavasena mañcapīṭhaṃ maddatītimañcapīṭhamaddano. Bhikkhugaṇanakāle salākaṃ gaṇhātītisalākaggāhī.

138. In the eighth, bhattādako means a glutton, one who eats a lot of food. Okāsapharaṇo means filling the space, making it crowded for others, filling the space by his position. Laṇḍasāraṇo means he throws or drops a lump of food here and there. Salākaggāhī means he takes a ticket when counting how many elephants there are. Mañcapīṭhamaddano means he wears out the couches and chairs by sitting and lying on them. Salākaggāhī means he takes a ticket when counting the number of monks.

9. Akkhamasuttavaṇṇanā
9. Commentary on the Akkhama Sutta

139.Navamehatthikāyanti hatthighaṭaṃ. Sesesupi eseva nayo. Saṅgāme avacarantītisaṅgāmāvacarā. Ekissāvā tiṇodakadattiyā vimānitoti ekadivasaṃ ekena tiṇodakadānena vimānito, ekadivasamattaṃ aladdhatiṇodakoti attho. Ito parampi eseva nayo.Na sakkoti cittaṃ samādahitunti ārammaṇe cittaṃ sammā ṭhapetuṃ na sakkoti. Sesamettha uttānameva. Imasmiṃ pana sutte vaṭṭavivaṭṭaṃ kathitanti veditabbaṃ.

139. In the ninth, hatthikāyaṃ means a group of elephants. The same method applies to the rest as well. Saṅgāmāvacarā means moving around in battle. Ekissā vā tiṇodakadattiyā vimānito means deprived by one offering of grass and water for one day, meaning he did not receive grass and water for just one day. The same method applies beyond this as well. Na sakkoti cittaṃ samādahituṃ means he is not able to properly establish his mind on an object. The rest here is straightforward. But in this sutta, it should be understood that the round and the open are discussed.

10. Sotasuttavaṇṇanā
10. Commentary on the Sota Sutta

140.Dasameduruttānanti na suṭṭhu vuttānaṃ dosavasena pavattitānaṃ pharusavacanānaṃ.Durāgatānanti dukkhuppādanākārena sotadvāraṃ āgatānaṃ.Vacanapathānanti vacanānaṃ.Dukkhānanti dukkhamānaṃ.Tibbānanti bahalānaṃ tāpanasabhāvānaṃ vā.Kharānanti pharusānaṃ.Kaṭukānanti tikhiṇānaṃ.Asātānanti amadhurānaṃ.Amanāpānanti manaṃ appāyituṃ vaḍḍhetuṃ asamatthānaṃ.Pāṇaharānanti jīvitaharānaṃ.Yā sā disāti sabbasaṅkhārasamathādivasena dissati apadissatīti nibbānaṃ disāti veditabbaṃ. Yasmā pana taṃ āgamma sabbe saṅkhārā samathaṃ gacchanti, tasmāsabbasaṅkhārasamathoti vuttaṃ. Sesaṃ sabbattha uttānameva. Imasmiṃ pana sutte sīlasamādhipaññā missikā kathitāti.

140. In the tenth, duruttānaṃ means of harsh words that are not well-spoken, that are uttered due to faults. Durāgatānaṃ means having come to the ear-door in a way that causes suffering. Vacanapathānaṃ means of words. Dukkhānaṃ means painful. Tibbānaṃ means intense, or of a burning nature. Kharānaṃ means harsh. Kaṭukānaṃ means sharp. Asātānaṃ means unpleasant. Amanāpānaṃ means unable to delight or gladden the mind. Pāṇaharānaṃ means life-destroying. Yā sā disā means that direction, Nibbāna, should be understood as that which is seen or pointed to in terms of the stilling of all saṅkhāras. Moreover, because all saṅkhāras go to peace by reaching it, therefore it is said sabbasaṅkhārasamatho. The rest is straightforward everywhere. But in this sutta, morality, concentration, and wisdom are discussed in combination.

(15) 5. Tikaṇḍakīvaggo

(15) 5. Tikaṇḍakī Vagga

1. Avajānātisuttavaṇṇanā
1. Commentary on the Avajānāti Sutta

141.Pañcamassa paṭhamesaṃvāsenāti ekatovāsena.Ādeyyamukhoti ādiyanamukho, gahaṇamukhoti attho.Tamenaṃ datvā avajānātīti ‘‘ayaṃ dinnaṃ paṭiggahetumeva jānātī’’ti evaṃ avamaññati.Tamenaṃ saṃvāsena avajānātīti appamattake kismiñcideva kujjhitvā ‘‘jānāmahaṃ tayā katakammaṃ, ettakaṃ addhānaṃ ahaṃ kiṃ karonto vasiṃ, nanu tuyhameva katākataṃ vīmaṃsanto’’tiādīni vattā hoti. Atha itaro ‘‘addhā koci mayhaṃ doso bhavissatī’’ti kiñci paṭippharituṃ na sakkoti.Taṃ khippaññeva adhimuccitā hotīti taṃ vaṇṇaṃ vā avaṇṇaṃ vā sīghameva saddahati. Saddahanaṭṭhena hi ādānena esa ādiyanamukhoti vutto.Ādheyyamukhoti pāḷiyā pana ṭhapitamukhoti attho. Magge khaṭaāvāṭo viya āgatāgataṃ udakaṃ vaṇṇaṃ vā avaṇṇaṃ vā saddahanavasena sampaṭicchituṃ ṭhapitamukhoti vuttaṃ hoti.

141. In the first of the fifth, saṃvāsenā means by living together. Ādeyyamukho means with a receptive face, with an accepting face. Tamenaṃ datvā avajānātī means he despises him, thinking, "This one only knows how to receive what is given." Tamenaṃ saṃvāsenā avajānātī means if he is angry about something insignificant, he says, "I know what you have done; how long have I been living, doing what? Am I not the one who is scrutinizing your actions?" Then the other one is not able to retort at all, thinking, "Truly, there must be some fault of mine." Taṃ khippaññeva adhimuccitā hotī means he quickly believes that praise or blame. He is called ādiyanamukho (receptive) by way of believing. However, in the reading ādheyyamukho, it means with a face for placing something. It is said to be with a face for receiving, for placing, for readily accepting praise or blame, just like a well-worn watering hole in the road accepts water that comes and goes.

Ittarasaddhoti parittakasaddho.Kusalākusale dhamme na jānātītiādīsu kusale dhamme ‘‘ime kusalā’’ti na jānāti, akusale dhamme ‘‘ime akusalā’’ti na jānāti. Tathā sāvajje sadosadhamme ‘‘ime sāvajjā’’ti, anavajje ca niddosadhamme ‘‘ime anavajjā’’ti, hīne hīnāti, paṇīte paṇītāti.Kaṇhasukkasappaṭibhāgeti ‘‘ime kaṇhā sukke paṭibāhetvā ṭhitattā sappaṭibhāgā nāma, ime ca sukkā kaṇhe paṭibāhitvā ṭhitattā sappaṭibhāgā’’ti na jānāti.

Ittarasaddho means with little faith. Among kusalākusale dhamme na jānātī, he does not know of wholesome things that "these are wholesome," he does not know of unwholesome things that "these are unwholesome." Likewise, he does not know of blameworthy and faulty things that "these are blameworthy," and of blameless and faultless things that "these are blameless," of inferior things that "these are inferior," of superior things that "these are superior." Kaṇhasukkasappaṭibhāge means he does not know that "these dark things are called sappaṭibhāga because they stand repelling the bright things, and these bright things are called sappaṭibhāga because they stand repelling the dark things."

2. Ārabhatisuttavaṇṇanā
2. Commentary on the Ārabhati Sutta

142.Dutiyeārabhati ca vippaṭisārī ca hotīti āpattivītikkamanavasena ārabhati ceva, tappaccayā ca vippaṭisārī hoti.Cetovimuttiṃ paññāvimuttinti arahattasamādhiñceva arahattaphalañāṇañca.Nappajānātīti anadhigatattā na jānāti.Ārabhati na vippaṭisārī hotīti āpattiṃ āpajjati, vuṭṭhitattā pana na vippaṭisārī hoti.Nārabhati vippaṭisārī hotīti sakiṃ āpattiṃ āpajjitvā tato vuṭṭhāya pacchā kiñcāpi nāpajjati, vippaṭisāraṃ pana vinodetuṃ na sakkoti.Nārabhati na vippaṭisārī hotīti na ceva āpattiṃ āpajjati, na ca vippaṭisārī hoti.Tañca cetovimuttiṃ…pe… nirujjhantīti arahattaṃ pana appatto hoti. Pañcamanayena khīṇāsavo kathito.

142. In the second, ārabhati ca vippaṭisārī ca hotī means he incurs an offense by transgression, and because of that, he feels remorse. Cetovimuttiṃ paññāvimuttiṃ means the concentration of Arahatship and the knowledge of the fruit of Arahatship. Nappajānātī means he does not know because he has not attained it. Ārabhati na vippaṭisārī hotī means he incurs an offense, but because he has recovered, he does not feel remorse. Nārabhati vippaṭisārī hotī means having once incurred an offense, then having recovered from that, even though he does not incur further offenses, he is not able to dispel the remorse. Nārabhati na vippaṭisārī hotī means he neither incurs an offense, nor does he feel remorse. Tañca cetovimuttiṃ…pe… nirujjhantī means he has not yet attained Arahatship. The khīṇāsava (one with destroyed taints) is described by the fifth method.

Ārambhajāti āpattivītikkamasambhavā.Vippaṭisārajāti vippaṭisārato jātā.Pavaḍḍhantīti punappunaṃ uppajjanena vaḍḍhanti.Ārambhaje āsave pahāyāti vītikkamasambhave āsave āpattidesanāya vā āpattivuṭṭhānena vā pajahitvā.Paṭivinodetvāti suddhante ṭhitabhāvapaccavekkhaṇena nīharitvā.Cittaṃ paññañca bhāvetūti vipassanācittañca taṃsampayuttaṃ paññañca bhāvetu. Sesaṃ iminā upāyeneva veditabbanti.

Ārambhajā means born of transgression. Vippaṭisārajā means born from remorse. Pavaḍḍhantī means they grow by repeatedly arising. Ārambhaje āsave pahāyā means having abandoned the taints born of transgression by confession of the offense or by rising from the offense. Paṭivinodetvā means having removed them by reflecting on the state of purity. Cittaṃ paññañca bhāvetū means he should develop the mind of insight and the wisdom associated with it. The rest should be understood in this way.

3. Sārandadasuttavaṇṇanā
3. Commentary on the Sārandada Sutta

143.Tatiyekāmādhimuttānanti vatthukāmakilesakāmesu adhimuttānaṃ.Dhammānudhammappaṭipannoti navalokuttaradhammatthāya sahasīlakaṃ pubbabhāgappaṭipadaṃ paṭipanno paṭipattipūrako puggalo dullabho lokasmiṃ.

143. In the third, kāmādhimuttānaṃ means those who are intent on the object of desire or the desire of defilement. Dhammānudhammappaṭipanno means a person who practices the preliminary practice together with morality for the sake of the nine supramundane Dhammas, who fulfills the practice is rare in the world.

4. Tikaṇḍakīsuttavaṇṇanā
4. Commentary on the Tikaṇḍakī Sutta

144.Catuttheappaṭikūleti appaṭikūlārammaṇe.Paṭikūlasaññīti paṭikūlanti evaṃsaññī. Esa nayo sabbattha. Kathaṃ panāyaṃ evaṃ viharatīti? Iṭṭhasmiṃ vatthusmiṃ pana asubhāya vā pharati, aniccato vā upasaṃharati. Evaṃ tāva appaṭikūle paṭikūlasaññī viharati. Aniṭṭhasmiṃ vatthusmiṃ mettāya vā pharati, dhātuto vā upasaṃharati. Evaṃ paṭikūle appaṭikūlasaññī viharati. Ubhayasmiṃ pana purimanayassa ca pacchimanayassa ca vasena tatiyacatutthavārā vuttā, chaḷaṅgupekkhāvasena pañcamo. Chaḷaṅgupekkhā cesā khīṇāsavassa upekkhāsadisā, na pana khīṇāsavupekkhā. Tatthaupekkhako vihareyyāti majjhattabhāve ṭhito vihareyya.Kvacanīti kismiñci ārammaṇe.Katthacīti kismiñci padese.Kiñcanati koci appamattakopi. Iti imasmiṃ sutte pañcasu ṭhānesu vipassanāva kathitā. Taṃ āraddhavipassako bhikkhu kātuṃ sakkoti, ñāṇavā paññuttaro bahussutasamaṇopi kātuṃ sakkoti. Sotāpannasakadāgāmianāgāmino kātuṃ sakkontiyeva, khīṇāsave vattabbameva natthīti. Pañcamaṃ uttānameva.

144. In the fourth, appaṭikūle means on an agreeable object. Paṭikūlasaññī means perceiving it as disagreeable. This method is the same everywhere. But how does he live thus? In a desirable object, he pervades it with foulness or reflects on its impermanence. Thus, he lives perceiving the agreeable as disagreeable. In an undesirable object, he pervades it with loving-kindness or reflects on its elements. Thus, he lives perceiving the disagreeable as agreeable. In both, the third and fourth instances are stated based on the former and latter methods, and the fifth is based on the six-factored equanimity. And this six-factored equanimity is similar to the equanimity of the khīṇāsava, but it is not the equanimity of the khīṇāsava. There, upekkhako vihareyya means he should live abiding in a neutral state. Kvacanī means in any object. Katthacī means in any place. Kiñcana means even a little. Thus, in this sutta, insight is discussed in five places. A monk who has initiated insight can do that, a wise one, a learned one, a much-learned recluse can do that. Sotāpanna, sakadāgāmī, and anāgāmī can certainly do it; there is no need to mention the khīṇāsava. The fifth is straightforward.

6. Mittasuttavaṇṇanā
6. Commentary on the Mitta Sutta

146.Chaṭṭhekammantaṃ kāretīti khettādikammantaṃ kāreti.Adhikaraṇaṃ ādiyatīti cattāri adhikaraṇāni ādiyati.Pāmokkhesu bhikkhūsūti disāpāmokkhesu bhikkhūsu.Paṭiviruddhohotīti paccanīkaggāhitāya viruddho hoti.Anavatthacārikanti anavatthānacārikaṃ.

146. In the sixth, kammantaṃ kāretī means he has field work, etc., done. Adhikaraṇaṃ ādiyatī means he undertakes the four kinds of legal issues. Pāmokkhesu bhikkhūsū means among the leading monks in various regions. Paṭiviruddho hotī means he is opposed by taking the opposite side. Anavatthacārikaṃ means wandering without a fixed abode.

7. Asappurisadānasuttavaṇṇanā
7. Commentary on the Asappurisadāna Sutta

147.Sattameasakkaccaṃ detīti na sakkaritvā suciṃ katvā deti.Acittīkatvā detīti acittīkārena agāravavasena deti.Apaviddhaṃ detīti na nirantaraṃ deti, atha vā chaḍḍetukāmo viya deti.Anāgamanadiṭṭhiko detīti katassa nāma phalaṃ āgamissatīti na evaṃ āgamanadiṭṭhiṃ na uppādetvā deti.

147. In the seventh, asakkaccaṃ detī means he does not give respectfully, making it clean. Acittīkatvā detī means he gives without honoring it, without respect. Apaviddhaṃ detī means he does not give continuously, or he gives as if wanting to throw it away. Anāgamanadiṭṭhiko detī means he does not give while producing the view of the fruit that will come from what has been done, thinking, "Will the fruit come?"

cittīkatvā detīti deyyadhamme ca dakkhiṇeyyesu ca cittīkāraṃ upaṭṭhapetvā deti. Tattha deyyadhammaṃ paṇītaṃ ojavantaṃ katvā dento deyyadhamme cittīkāraṃ upaṭṭhapeti nāma. Puggalaṃ vicinitvā dento dakkhiṇeyyesu cittīkāraṃ upaṭṭhapeti nāma.Sahatthā detīti āṇattiyā parahatthena adatvā ‘‘anamatagge saṃsāre vicarantena me hatthapādānaṃ aladdhakālassa pamāṇaṃ nāma natthi, vaṭṭamokkhaṃ bhavanissaraṇaṃ karissāmī’’ti sahattheneva deti.Āgamanadiṭṭhikoti ‘‘anāgatabhavassa paccayo bhavissatī’’ti kammañca vipākañca saddahitvā detīti.

cittīkatvā detī means he establishes honoring both the gift and those worthy of offerings. There, when giving a fine and flavorful gift, he establishes honoring the gift. When giving after carefully choosing the person, he establishes honoring those worthy of offerings. Sahatthā detī means he gives with his own hand, not giving with another's hand by command, thinking, "There is no measure to the time that my hands and feet have not obtained while wandering in the beginningless Saṃsāra. I will make an escape from the round, an exit from existence." Āgamanadiṭṭhiko means he gives believing in both the action and the result, thinking, "It will be a condition for a future existence."

8. Sappurisadānasuttavaṇṇanā
8. Commentary on the Sappurisadāna Sutta

148.Aṭṭhamesaddhāyāti dānañca dānaphalañca saddahitvā.Kālenāti yuttappattakālena.Anaggahitacittoti aggahitacitto muttacāgo hutvā.Anupahaccāti anupaghātetvā guṇe amakkhetvā.Kālāgatā cassa atthā pacurā hontīti atthā āgacchamānā vayovuḍḍhakāle anāgantvā yuttappattakāle paṭhamavayasmiṃyeva āgacchanti ceva bahū ca honti.

148. In the eighth, saddhāyā means having faith in the gift and the fruit of the gift. Kālenā means at the proper time. Anaggahitacitto means with a mind not seized, being freely generous. Anupahaccā means without harming, without disparaging the qualities. Kālāgatā cassa atthā pacurā hontī means the benefits that come do not come in old age, but they come at the proper time, in early adulthood, and they are plentiful.

9. Paṭhamasamayavimuttasuttavaṇṇanā
9. Paṭhamasamayavimuttasuttavaṇṇanā

149.Navamesamayavimuttassāti appitappitakkhaṇeyeva vikkhambhitehi kilesehi vimuttattā samayavimuttisaṅkhātāya lokiyavimuttiyā vimuttacittassa. Dasamaṃ uttānatthameva.

149. In the ninth, samayavimuttassa: Because of being liberated from defilements restrained at the moment of attainment, to the mind liberated by the worldly liberation called samayavimutti. The tenth is straightforward in meaning.

4. Catutthapaṇṇāsakaṃ

4. Catutthapaṇṇāsakaṃ

(16) 1. Saddhammavaggo

(16) 1. Saddhammavaggo

1. Paṭhamasammattaniyāmasuttavaṇṇanā
1. Paṭhamasammattaniyāmasuttavaṇṇanā

151.Catutthassa paṭhameabhabbo niyāmaṃ okkamituṃ kusalesu dhammesu sammattanti kusalesu dhammesu sammattabhūtaṃ magganiyāmaṃ okkamituṃ abhabbo abhājanaṃ.Kathaṃ paribhotītiādīsu ‘‘kiṃ kathā nāma esā’’ti vadantokathaṃ paribhotināma. ‘‘Kiṃ nāmesa katheti, kiṃ ayaṃ jānātī’’ti vadantokathikaṃ paribhotināma. ‘‘Mayaṃ kiṃ jānāma, kuto amhākaṃ etaṃ sotuṃ bala’’nti vadantoattānaṃ paribhotināma. Vipariyāyena sukkapakkho veditabbo.

151. In the first of the fourth, abhabbo niyāmaṃ okkamituṃ kusalesu dhammesu sammattaṃ: He is incapable, unfit, to cross over the right path (magga niyāma) which is established in wholesome qualities (kusala dhamma). Kathaṃ paribhotī etc., saying "what talk is this?", he insults by kathaṃ paribhoti. Saying "What is he talking about? What does he know?", he insults by kathikaṃ paribhoti. Saying, "What do we know? Where is the strength for us to hear this?", he insults attānaṃ paribhoti. The bright side should be understood in the opposite way.

2. Dutiyasammattaniyāmasuttavaṇṇanā
2. Dutiyasammattaniyāmasuttavaṇṇanā

152.Dutiyeanaññāte aññātamānīti aviññātasmiṃyeva ‘‘viññātamidaṃ mayā’’ti evaṃmānī.

152. In the second, anaññāte aññātamānī: regarding what is not known, he thinks, "This is known by me."

3. Tatiyasammattaniyāmasuttavaṇṇanā
3. Tatiyasammattaniyāmasuttavaṇṇanā

153.Tatiyemakkhī dhammaṃ suṇātīti makkhī hutvā guṇamakkhanacittena dhammaṃ suṇāti.Upārambhacittoti niggahāropanacitto.Randhagavesīti guṇarandhaṃ guṇacchiddaṃ gavesanto.

153. In the third, makkhī dhammaṃ suṇāti: being a makkhī, he listens to the Dhamma with a mind to denigrate its qualities. Upārambhacitto: with a mind to find fault. Randhagavesī: seeking a fault, a flaw in the qualities.

4. Paṭhamasaddhammasammosasuttavaṇṇanā
4. Paṭhamasaddhammasammosasuttavaṇṇanā

154.Catutthena sakkaccaṃ dhammaṃ suṇantīti ohitasotā sukatakārino hutvā na suṇanti.Na pariyāpuṇantīti yathāsutaṃ dhammaṃ vaḷañjantāpi sakkaccaṃ na vaḷañjenti. Pañcamaṃ uttānameva.

154. In the fourth, na sakkaccaṃ dhammaṃ suṇantī: they do not listen attentively, with an attentive ear and proper respect. Na pariyāpuṇantī: even while repeating the Dhamma as it was heard, they do not repeat it attentively. The fifth is straightforward.

6. Tatiyasaddhammasammosasuttavaṇṇanā
6. Tatiyasaddhammasammosasuttavaṇṇanā

156.Chaṭṭheappaṭisaraṇoti appatiṭṭho. Ācariyā hi suttantassa paṭisaraṇaṃ nāma, tesaṃ abhāvā appaṭisaraṇo hoti. Sesamettha heṭṭhā vuttanayameva.

156. In the sixth, appaṭisaraṇo: without support. Teachers are called the support of the suttanta; in their absence, one is without support. The rest here is as stated below.

7. Dukkathāsuttavaṇṇanā
7. Dukkathāsuttavaṇṇanā

157.Sattamepuggalaṃ upanidhāyāti taṃ taṃ puggalaṃ upanikkhipitvā, sakkhiṃ katvāti attho.Kacchamānāyāti kathiyamānāya. Sesamettha aṭṭhamañca uttānatthamevāti.

157. In the seventh, puggalaṃ upanidhāya: setting up that particular person, making him a witness, is the meaning. Kacchamānāya: while speaking. The rest here, and the eighth, are straightforward in meaning.

9. Udāyīsuttavaṇṇanā
9. Udāyīsuttavaṇṇanā

159.Navameanupubbiṃ kathaṃ kathessāmīti dānānantaraṃ sīlaṃ, sīlānantaraṃ sagganti evaṃ desanānupubbiṃ kathaṃ vā, yaṃ yaṃ suttapadaṃ vā gāthāpadaṃ vā nikkhittaṃ hoti, tassa tassa anurūpakathaṃ kathessāmīti cittaṃ upaṭṭhapetvā paresaṃ dhammo desetabbo.Pariyāyadassāvīti tassa tassa atthassa taṃ taṃ kāraṇaṃ dassento. Kāraṇañhi idha pariyāyoti vuttaṃ.Anuddayataṃ paṭiccāti ‘‘mahāsambādhappatte satte sambādhato mocessāmī’’ti anukampaṃ āgamma.Na āmisantaroti na āmisahetuko, attano catupaccayalābhaṃ anāsīsantoti attho.Attānañca parañca anupahaccāti attukkaṃsanaparavambhanādivasena attānañca parañca guṇupaghātena anupahantvā.

159. In the ninth, anupubbiṃ kathaṃ kathessāmī: how shall I speak in gradual order, giving alms and then morality, morality and then heaven? Or, thinking how shall I speak the words in accordance with each suttapada or gāthāpada that has been established, the Dhamma should be taught to others. Pariyāyadassāvī: showing the specific reason for each meaning. For here, kāraṇa is called pariyāya. Anuddayataṃ paṭiccā: having come to compassion, thinking, "I will free beings who have reached great distress from their distress." Na āmisantaro: not for the sake of material gain, not desiring the gain of the four requisites for oneself is the meaning. Attānañca parañca anupahaccā: without harming oneself or others by praising oneself or disparaging others, or by harming their qualities.

10. Duppaṭivinodayasuttavaṇṇanā
10. Duppaṭivinodayasuttavaṇṇanā

160.Dasameduppaṭivinodayāti yāni hassādīni kiccāni nipphādetuṃ ṭhānāni uppannāni honti, tesu matthakaṃ asampattesu antarāyeva dunnīhārā duvikkhambhayā honti.Paṭibhānanti kathetukāmatā vuccati. Imāni pañca duppaṭivinodayāni, na suppaṭivinodayāni. Upāyena pana kāraṇena anurūpāhi paccavekkhaṇaanusāsanādīhi sakkā paṭivinodetunti.

160. In the tenth, duppaṭivinodayā: those places that arise to accomplish such actions as laughter etc., are difficult to remove, difficult to dispel midway before reaching the peak. Paṭibhāna: is called the desire to speak. These five are difficult to remove, not easy to remove. However, they can be removed by skillful means, by appropriate reflection, instruction, etc.

(17) 2. Āghātavaggo

(17) 2. Āghātavaggo

1. Paṭhamaāghātapaṭivinayasuttavaṇṇanā
1. Paṭhamaāghātapaṭivinayasuttavaṇṇanā

161.Dutiyassa paṭhame āghātaṃ paṭivinenti vūpasamentītiāghātapaṭivinayā. Yattha bhikkhuno uppanno āghāto sabbaso paṭivinetabboti yattha ārammaṇe bhikkhuno āghāto uppanno hoti, tattha so sabbo imehi pañcahi paṭivinodetabboti attho.Mettā tasmiṃ puggale bhāvetabbāti tikacatukkajjhānavasena mettā bhāvetabbā.Karuṇāyapi eseva nayo.Upekkhāpana catukkapañcakajjhānavasena bhāvetabbā. Yasmā pana yaṃ puggalaṃ passato cittaṃ na nibbāti, tasmiṃ muditā na saṇṭhahati, tasmā sā na vuttā.Asatiamanasikāroti yathā so puggalo na upaṭṭhāti, kuṭṭādīhi antarito viya hoti, evaṃ tasmiṃ asatiamanasikāro āpajjitabbo. Sesaṃ heṭṭhā vuttanayattā uttānameva.

161. In the first of the second, āghātaṃ paṭivinenti vūpasamentīti āghātapaṭivinayā: āghāta is warded off and calmed down, therefore it is āghātapaṭivinaya. Yattha bhikkhuno uppanno āghāto sabbaso paṭivinetabbo: wherever āghāta has arisen in a bhikkhu, all of it should be warded off by these five means, is the meaning. Mettā tasmiṃ puggale bhāvetabbā: mettā should be cultivated towards that person by way of the three or four jhānas. The same method applies to karuṇāya too. Upekkhā, however, should be cultivated by way of the four or five jhānas. But because muditā does not arise in one for whom the mind is not calmed down, therefore it was not mentioned. Asatiamanasikāro: just as that person does not appear, as if he is hidden by a wall etc., so asatiamanasikāro should be practiced towards him. The rest is straightforward, as the meaning has been stated below.

2. Dutiyaāghātapaṭivinayasuttavaṇṇanā
2. Dutiyaāghātapaṭivinayasuttavaṇṇanā

162.Dutiye āghāto etesu paṭivinetabbotiāghātapaṭivinayā. Āghāto etehi paṭivinetabbotipiāghātapaṭivinayā. Paṭivinayoti hi paṭivinayavatthūnampi paṭivinayakāraṇānampi etaṃ adhivacanaṃ, tadubhayampi idha vaṭṭati. Pañca hi puggalā paṭivinayavatthū honti pañcahi upamāhi pañca paṭipattiyo paṭivinayakāraṇāni.Labhati ca kālena kālaṃ cetaso vivaraṃ cetaso pasādanti kāle kāle samathavipassanācittassa uppannokāsasaṅkhātaṃ vivarañceva saddhāsampannabhāvasaṅkhātaṃ pasādañca labhati.

162. In the second, āghāto etesu paṭivinetabboti āghātapaṭivinayā: āghāta is warded off in these, therefore it is āghātapaṭivinaya. Āghāto etehi paṭivinetabbotipi āghātapaṭivinayā: āghāta is warded off by these, therefore it is āghātapaṭivinaya. For paṭivinaya is a designation for both the objects of warding off and the causes of warding off; both are applicable here. For the five persons are the objects of warding off, and the five similes and five practices are the causes of warding off. Labhati ca kālena kālaṃ cetaso vivaraṃ cetaso pasāda: from time to time, one obtains the opening (vivara) consisting of the opportunity that arises for the mind of serenity and insight, and the clarity (pasāda) consisting of being endowed with faith.

Rathiyāyāti antaravīthiyaṃ.Nantakanti pilotikakhaṇḍaṃ.Niggahetvāti akkamitvā.Yo tattha sāroti yaṃ tattha thiraṭṭhānaṃ.Taṃ paripātetvāti taṃ luñcitvā.Evameva khoti ettha paṃsukūliko viya mettāvihārī daṭṭhabbo, rathiyāya nantakaṃ viya veripuggalo, dubbalaṭṭhānaṃ viya aparisuddhakāyasamācāratā, thiraṭṭhānaṃ viya parisuddhavacīsamācāratā, dubbalaṭṭhānaṃ chaḍḍetvā thiraṭṭhānaṃ ādāya gantvā sibbitvā rajitvā pārupitvā vicaraṇakālo viya aparisuddhakāyasamācārataṃ amanasikatvā parisuddhavacīsamācārataṃ manasikatvā verimhi cittuppādaṃ nibbāpetvā phāsuvihārakālo daṭṭhabbo.

Rathiyāyā: in the inner lane. Nantaka: a rag fragment. Niggahetvā: having stepped on it. Yo tattha sāro: whatever is firm there. Taṃ paripātetvā: having plucked that. Evameva kho: here, the one living in loving-kindness should be seen as like the one who wears rags, the person who is an enemy like the rag fragment in the lane, impure bodily conduct like the weak spot, pure verbal conduct like the firm spot; the time of warding off the impure bodily conduct, taking the firm spot, going, sewing, dyeing, and wearing it, should be seen as the time of calming down the arising of mind towards the enemy, focusing on pure verbal conduct, and living comfortably.

Sevālapaṇakapariyonaddhāti sevālena ca udakapappaṭakena ca paṭicchannā.Ghammaparetoti ghammena anugato.Kilantoti maggakilanto.Tasitoti taṇhābhibhūto.Pipāsitoti pānīyaṃ pātukāmo.Apaviyūhitvāti apanetvā.Pivitvāti pasannaudakaṃ pivitvā.Evameva khoti ettha ghammābhitatto puriso viya mettāvihārī daṭṭhabbo, sevālapaṇakaṃ viya aparisuddhavacīsamācāratā, pasannaudakaṃ viya parisuddhakāyasamācāratā, sevālapaṇakaṃ apabyūhitvā pasannodakaṃ pivitvā gamanaṃ viya aparisuddhavacīsamācārataṃ amanasikatvā parisuddhakāyasamācārataṃ manasikatvā verimhi cittuppādaṃ nibbāpetvā phāsuvihārakālo daṭṭhabbo.

Sevālapaṇakapariyonaddhā: covered with algae and water plants. Ghammapareto: overcome by heat. Kilanto: tired from the journey. Tasito: overwhelmed by thirst. Pipāsito: desiring to drink water. Apaviyūhitvā: having removed it. Pivitvā: having drunk clear water. Evameva kho: here, the one living in loving-kindness should be seen as like the man afflicted by heat, impure verbal conduct like the algae and water plants, pure bodily conduct like the clear water; the time of warding off the impure verbal conduct, removing the algae and water plants, drinking the clear water and going, should be seen as the time of calming down the arising of mind towards the enemy, focusing on pure bodily conduct, and living comfortably.

Khobhessāmīti cālessāmi.Loḷessāmīti ākulaṃ karissāmi.Apeyyampi taṃ karissāmīti pivituṃ asakkuṇeyyaṃ karissāmi.Catukkuṇḍikoti jāṇūhi ca hatthehi ca bhūmiyaṃ patiṭṭhānena catukkuṇḍiko hutvā.Gopītakaṃ pivitvāti gāviyo viya mukhena ākaḍḍhento pivitvā.Evameva khoti ettha ghammābhitatto puriso viya mettāvihārī daṭṭhabbo, gopadaṃ viya veripuggalo, gopade parittaudakaṃ viya tassabbhantare parittaguṇo, catukkuṇḍikassa gopītakaṃ pivitvā pakkamanaṃ viya tassa aparisuddhakāyavacīsamācārataṃ amanasikatvā yaṃ so kālena kālaṃ dhammassavanaṃ nissāya cetaso vivarappasādasaṅkhātaṃ pītipāmojjaṃ labhati, taṃ manasikatvā cittuppādanibbāpanaṃ veditabbaṃ.

Khobhessāmī: I will stir it up. Loḷessāmī: I will make it turbid. Apeyyampi taṃ karissāmī: I will make it undrinkable. Catukkuṇḍiko: being on all fours, with the knees and hands on the ground. Gopītakaṃ pivitvā: drinking by drawing up with the mouth like a cow. Evameva kho: here, the one living in loving-kindness should be seen as like the man afflicted by heat, the cow's footprint like the person who is an enemy, the little water in the cow's footprint like the little good quality within him; the calming down of the arising of mind should be known as focusing on the joy and delight consisting of the opening and clarity of mind that he obtains from time to time by relying on the hearing of the Dhamma, just as the man on all fours drinks the water drawn up from the cow's footprint and departs.

Ābādhikoti iriyāpathabhañjanakena visabhāgābādhena ābādhiko.Puratopissāti puratopi bhaveyya.Anayabyasananti avaḍḍhivināsaṃ.Evameva khoti ettha so anāthagilāno viya sabbakaṇhadhammasamannāgato puggalo, addhānamaggo viya anamataggasaṃsāro, purato ca pacchato ca gāmānaṃ dūrabhāvo viya nibbānassa dūrabhāvo, sappāyabhojanānaṃ alābho viya sāmaññaphalabhojanānaṃ alābho, sappāyabhesajjānaṃ alābho viya samathavipassanānaṃ abhāvo, patirūpaupaṭṭhākānaṃ alābho viya ovādānusāsanīhi kilesatikicchakānaṃ abhāvo, gāmantanāyakassa alābho viya nibbānasampāpakassa tathāgatassa vā tathāgatasāvakassa vā aladdhabhāvo, aññatarassa purisassa disvā kāruññupaṭṭhānaṃ viya tasmiṃ puggale mettāvihārikassa kāruññaṃ uppādetvā cittanibbāpanaṃ veditabbaṃ.

Ābādhiko: afflicted with a discordant illness that disrupts the bodily postures. Puratopissā: he might also be ahead. Anayabyasana: misfortune and ruin. Evameva kho: here, that person endowed with all dark qualities is like that helpless sick person, the endless cycle of rebirths is like the road, the distance of the villages ahead and behind is like the distance of Nibbāna, the lack of suitable food is like the lack of the food of the fruits of recluseship, the lack of suitable medicine is like the absence of serenity and insight, the lack of suitable attendants is like the absence of those who treat defilements with advice and instruction, the lack of a village leader is like the unavailability of the Tathāgata or a disciple of the Tathāgata who leads to Nibbāna; the calming down of the mind should be understood as producing compassion in the one living in loving-kindness towards that person, just as another man, seeing him, offers compassionate assistance.

Acchodakāti pasannodakā.Sātodakāti madhurodakā.Sītodakāti tanusītasalilā.Setakāti ūmibhijjanaṭṭhānesu setavaṇṇā.Supatitthāti samatitthā.Evameva khoti ettha ghammābhitatto puriso viya mettāvihārī daṭṭhabbo, sā pokkharaṇī viya parisuddhasabbadvāro puriso, nhatvā pivitvā paccuttaritvā rukkhacchāyāya nipajjitvā yathākāmaṃ gamanaṃ viya tesu dvāresu yaṃ icchati, taṃ ārammaṇaṃ katvā cittanibbāpanaṃ veditabbaṃ. Tatiyacatutthāni heṭṭhā vuttanayāneva.

Acchodakā: with clear water. Sātodakā: with sweet water. Sītodakā: with cool, thin water. Setakā: white in places where the waves break. Supatitthā: with even banks. Evameva kho: here, the one living in loving-kindness should be seen as like the man afflicted by heat, the pool like the person with completely pure faculties, the calming down of the mind by making whichever object one desires in those faculties as the object, just as one bathes, drinks, comes out, lies down in the shade of a tree, and goes as one pleases. The third and fourth are the same as stated below.

5. Pañhapucchāsuttavaṇṇanā
5. Pañhapucchāsuttavaṇṇanā

165.Pañcameparibhavanti paribhavanto, evaṃ paribhavissāmīti paribhavanatthāya pucchatīti attho.Aññātukāmoti jānitukāmo hutvā.

165. In the fifth, paribhava: disparaging, meaning he asks for the purpose of disparagement, thinking, "I will disparage in this way." Aññātukāmo: wanting to know.

6. Nirodhasuttavaṇṇanā
6. Nirodhasuttavaṇṇanā

166.Chaṭṭheatthetaṃ ṭhānanti atthi etaṃ kāraṇaṃ.No ce diṭṭheva dhamme aññaṃ ārādheyyāti no ce imasmiṃyeva attabhāve arahattaṃ pāpuṇeyya.Kabaḷīkārāhārabhakkhānaṃ devānanti kāmāvacaradevānaṃ.Aññataraṃ manomayaṃ kāyanti jhānamanena nibbattaṃ aññataraṃ suddhāvāsabrahmakāyaṃ.Udāyīti lāḷudāyī. So hi ‘‘manomaya’’nti sutvā ‘‘āruppe na bhavitabba’’nti paṭibāhi. Thero ‘‘sāriputto kiṃ jānāti, yassa sammukhā evaṃ bhikkhū vacanaṃ paṭikkosantī’’ti evaṃ bālānaṃ laddhiuppattipaṭibāhanatthaṃ taṃ vacanaṃ anadhivāsetvā yena bhagavā tenupasaṅkami.

166. In the sixth, atthetaṃ ṭhāna: this is the cause. No ce diṭṭheva dhamme aññaṃ ārādheyyā: if he does not attain arahatta in this very existence. Kabaḷīkārāhārabhakkhānaṃ devāna: to the kāmāvacara deities. Aññataraṃ manomayaṃ kāya: another body of the suddhāvāsa Brahmās created by the mind of jhāna. Udāyī: Lāḷudāyī. For he, having heard "mind-made," rejected it, saying, "It should not be in the immaterial realms." The Elder, not approving that statement, went to the Blessed One, thinking, "What does Sāriputta know, in whose presence bhikkhus reject his words in this way?" in order to refute the arising of wrong views in fools.

Atthi nāmāti amarisanatthe nipāto. Teneva cettha ‘‘ajjhupekkhissathā’’ti anāgatavacanaṃ kataṃ. Ayañhetthattho – ānanda, tumhe theraṃ bhikkhuṃ viheṭhiyamānaṃ ajjhupekkhatha, na vo etaṃ marisayāmi na sahāmi nādhivāsemīti. Kasmā pana bhagavā ānandatheraṃyeva evamāhāti? Dhammabhaṇḍāgārikattā. Dhammabhaṇḍāgārikassa hi evaṃ vadanto paṭibāhituṃ bhāro. Apicesa sāriputtattherassa piyasahāyo, tenāpissa esa bhāro. Tattha kiñcāpi bhagavā ānandattheraṃ garahanto evamāha, na panesā tasseva garahā, sammukhībhūtānaṃ sabbesaṃyeva garahāti veditabbā.Vihāranti gandhakuṭiṃ.

Atthi nāmā: is a particle in the sense of displeasure. Therefore, the future tense "ajjhupekkhissathā" is used here. The meaning here is this: Ānanda, you tolerate the elder bhikkhu being harassed; I do not approve of it, I do not tolerate it, I do not accept it. But why did the Blessed One say this only to Ānanda Thera? Because he is the treasurer of the Dhamma. For it is the duty of the treasurer of the Dhamma to object when someone speaks like this. Moreover, he is a dear friend of Sāriputta Thera, so this is also his duty. Although the Blessed One said this rebuking Ānanda Thera, it should be understood that this rebuke is not only for him, but for all those present. Vihāra: the Perfumed Chamber (gandhakuṭi).

Anacchariyanti na acchariyaṃ.Yathāti kāraṇavacanaṃ.Āyasmantaṃyevettha upavānaṃ paṭibhāseyyāti ettha bhagavatā ca evaṃ etadeva kāraṇaṃ ārabbha udāhaṭe āyasmatoyeva upavānassa paṭivacanaṃ paṭibhātu upaṭṭhātūti dīpeti.Sārajjaṃ okkantanti domanassaṃ anupaviṭṭhaṃ.Sīlavātiādīhi khīṇāsavasīlādīniyeva kathitāni.Khaṇḍiccenātiādīni sakkārādīnaṃ kāraṇapucchāvasena vuttāni. Kiṃ khaṇḍiccādīhi kāraṇehi taṃ taṃ sabrahmacāriṃ sakkareyyunti ayañhettha adhippāyo.

Anacchariya: not wonderful. Yathā: is a word of reason. Āyasmantaṃyevettha upavānaṃ paṭibhāseyyā: here, the Blessed One, having mentioned this very reason, indicates that the answer should occur, should appear, to Venerable Upavāna himself. Sārajjaṃ okkanta: overcome with dejection. Sīlavā etc. only speak of the morality etc. of the khīṇāsava. Khaṇḍiccenā etc. are stated in terms of asking the reason for honoring etc. What is the point of honoring that fellow brahmacārī with such reasons as being broken-toothed etc.? This is the idea here.

7. Codanāsuttavaṇṇanā
7. Codanāsuttavaṇṇanā

167.Sattamecodakenāti vatthusandassanā āpattisandassanā saṃvāsappaṭikkhepo sāmīcippaṭikkhepoti catūhi codanāvatthūhi codayamānena.Kālena vakkhāmi no akālenāti ettha cuditakassa kālo kathito, na codakassa. Paraṃ codentena hi parisamajjhe vā uposathapavāraṇagge vā āsanasālābhojanasālādīsu vā na codetabbo, divāṭṭhāne nisinnakāle ‘‘karotāyasmā okāsaṃ, ahaṃ āyasmantaṃ vattukāmo’’ti evaṃ okāsaṃ kāretvā codetabbo. Puggalaṃ pana upaparikkhitvā yo lolapuggalo abhūtaṃ vatvā bhikkhūnaṃ ayasaṃ āropeti, so okāsakammaṃ vināpi codetabbo.Bhūtenāti tacchena sabhāvena.Saṇhenāti maṭṭhena mudukena.Atthasaṃhitenāti atthakāmatāya hitakāmatāya upetena.Avippaṭisāro upadahātabboti amaṅkubhāvo upanetabbo.Alaṃte avippaṭisārāyāti yuttaṃ te amaṅkubhāvāya. Sesamettha uttānamevāti. Aṭṭhamaṃ heṭṭhā vuttanayattā pākaṭameva.

167. In the seventh, codakenā means one who is accusing with four grounds for accusation: accusation of an offense, accusation of seeing an offense, rejection of association, and rejection of proper conduct. Kālena vakkhāmi no akālenā means here the proper time is stated for the one being accused, not for the accuser. For one accusing another should not accuse them in the middle of an assembly, or at the Uposatha or Pavāraṇā gathering, or in places like the assembly hall or dining hall, but when they are sitting in a daytime resting place, they should first ask for permission, saying, "May the venerable one grant me leave, I wish to speak to the venerable one." However, having examined the individual, if he is a fickle person who, by speaking untruths, brings dishonor upon the monks, he should be accused even without asking for permission. Bhūtena means with what is true, with the real nature. Saṇhena means smoothly, gently. Atthasaṃhitena means endowed with a desire for benefit, a desire for welfare. Avippaṭisāro upadahātabbo means non-remorse should be brought near. Alaṃ te avippaṭisārāyā means it is fitting for you to be without remorse. The rest here is self-explanatory. The eighth is clear because the method has already been stated below.

9. Khippanisantisuttavaṇṇanā
9. Khippanisantisuttavaṇṇanā

169.Navame khippaṃ nisāmayati upadhāretītikhippanisanti. Suggahitaṃ katvā gaṇhātītisuggahitaggāhī. Atthakusaloti aṭṭhakathāya cheko.Dhammakusaloti pāḷiyaṃ cheko.Niruttikusaloti niruttivacanesu cheko.Byañjanakusaloti akkharappabhede cheko.Pubbāparakusaloti atthapubbāparaṃ, dhammapubbāparaṃ, akkharapubbāparaṃ, byañjanapubbāparaṃ, anusandhipubbāparanti imasmiṃ pañcavidhe pubbāpare cheko. Tatthaatthapubbāparakusaloti heṭṭhā atthena upari atthaṃ jānāti, upari atthena heṭṭhā atthaṃ jānāti. Kathaṃ? So hi heṭṭhā atthaṃ ṭhapetvā upari atthe vutte ‘‘heṭṭhā attho atthī’’ti jānāti. Upari atthaṃ ṭhapetvā heṭṭhā atthe vuttepi ‘‘upari attho atthī’’ti jānāti. Ubhato ṭhapetvā majjhe atthe vutte ‘‘ubhato attho atthī’’ti jānāti. Majjhe atthaṃ ṭhapetvā ubhatobhāgesu atthe vutte ‘‘majjhe attho atthī’’ti jānāti.Dhammapubbāparādīsupi eseva nayo.Anusandhipubbāparepana sīlaṃ ādiṃ katvā āraddhe suttante matthake chasu abhiññāsu āgatāsu ‘‘yathānusandhiṃ yathānuparicchedaṃ suttanto gato’’ti jānāti. Diṭṭhivasena āraddhe upari saccesu āgatesupi ‘‘yathānusandhinā gato’’ti jānāti. Kalahabhaṇḍanavasena āraddhe upari sāraṇīyadhammesu āgatesupi, dvattiṃsatiracchānakathāvasena āraddhe upari dasakathāvatthūsu (a. ni. 10.69; udā.31) āgatesupi ‘‘yathānusandhinā gato’’ti jānātīti.

169. In the ninth, khippanisanti means one who quickly listens and considers. Suggahitaggāhī means one who grasps, having taken it up well. Atthakusalo means skilled in the commentary. Dhammakusalo means skilled in the Pali. Niruttikusalo means skilled in the expressions of language. Byañjanakusalo means skilled in the divisions of letters. Pubbāparakusalo means skilled in the prior and subsequent meanings, the prior and subsequent teachings, the prior and subsequent letters, the prior and subsequent expressions, and in this fivefold prior and subsequent connection. Here, atthapubbāparakusalo means he knows the meaning above by the meaning below, he knows the meaning below by the meaning above. How? When the meaning below is established and the meaning above is spoken, he knows, "There is a meaning below." When the meaning above is established and the meaning below is spoken, he knows, "There is a meaning above." When both are established and a meaning in the middle is spoken, he knows, "There is a meaning in both." When a meaning in the middle is established and meanings on both sides are spoken, he knows, "There is a meaning in the middle." The same method applies to dhammapubbāparā and the others. However, in anusandhipubbāpare, when a discourse is begun with virtue (sīla) as the beginning, and the six superknowledges (abhiññā) come at the end, he knows, "The discourse has proceeded according to the connection, according to the delimitation." When begun from the perspective of views, and the truths (sacca) come at the end, he knows, "It has proceeded according to the connection." When begun from the perspective of quarrels and disputes, and the principles conducive to friendliness (sāraṇīyadhamma) come at the end, even when begun from the perspective of the thirty-two base topics of conversation and the ten grounds for discussion (kathāvatthu) come at the end, he knows, "It has proceeded according to the connection."

10. Bhaddajisuttavaṇṇanā
10. Bhaddajisuttavaṇṇanā

170.Dasameabhibhūti abhibhavitvā ṭhito jeṭṭhako.Anabhibhūtoti aññehi anabhibhūto.Aññadatthūti ekaṃsavacane nipāto. Dassanavasenadaso,sabbaṃ passatīti adhippāyo.Vasavattīti sabbaṃ janaṃ vase vatteti.Yathā passatoti iṭṭhārammaṇaṃ vā hotu aniṭṭhārammaṇaṃ vā, yenākārena taṃ passantassa.Anantarā āsavānaṃ khayo hotīti anantarāyeva arahattaṃ uppajjati.Yathā suṇatoti etthāpi eseva nayo. Atha vā yaṃ cakkhunā rūpaṃ disvā nirantarameva vipassanaṃ paṭṭhapetvā arahattaṃ pāpuṇāti, taṃ tassa arahattaṃ cakkhuviññāṇānantaraṃ nāma hoti. Taṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ –idaṃ dassanānaṃ agganti. Dutiyapadepi eseva nayo.

170. In the tenth, abhibhū means one who is superior, standing having overcome, the chief. Anabhibhūto means unconquered by others. Aññadatthū is a particle in the singular number. Daso from the perspective of seeing, means he sees everything, this is the meaning. Vasavattī means he controls all people. Yathā passato means in whatever way, whether the object is pleasing or unpleasing, for him seeing that. Anantarā āsavānaṃ khayo hotī means immediately, arahantship arises. Yathā suṇato here too, the same method applies. Or alternatively, if one, having seen a form with the eye, immediately establishes insight (vipassanā) and attains arahantship, that arahantship of his is said to be immediately after eye-consciousness. With that in mind, it was said – idaṃ dassanānaṃ agga – "this is the foremost of seeing." The same method applies in the second phrase.

Yathā sukhitassāti yena maggasukhena sukhitassa.Anantarā āsavānaṃ khayo hotīti samanantarameva arahattaṃ uppajjati.Idaṃ sukhānaṃ agganti idaṃ maggasukhaṃ sukhānaṃ uttamaṃ.Yathā saññissāti idhāpi maggasaññāva adhippetā.Yathā bhūtassāti yasmiṃ bhave yasmiṃ attabhāve ṭhitassa.Anantarāti anantarāyena arahattaṃ uppajjati.idaṃ bhavānaṃ agganti ayaṃ pacchimo attabhāvo bhavānaṃ aggaṃ nāma. Atha vāyathā bhūtassāti yehi khandhehi maggakkhaṇe bhūtassa vijjamānassa.Anantarā āsavānaṃ khayo hotīti maggānantarameva phalaṃ uppajjati.Idaṃ bhavānaṃ agganti idaṃ maggakkhaṇe khandhapañcakaṃ bhavānaṃ aggaṃ nāmāti.

Yathā sukhitassā means by whatever happiness of the path (magga), one is happy. Anantarā āsavānaṃ khayo hotī means immediately, arahantship arises. Idaṃ sukhānaṃ agga means this happiness of the path is the highest of happinesses. Yathā saññissā means here too, the path's perception (saññā) is intended. Yathā bhūtassā means in whatever existence (bhava), in whatever state of being one is abiding. Anantarā means immediately, arahantship arises. Idaṃ bhavānaṃ agga means this final state of being is called the foremost of existences. Alternatively, yathā bhūtassā means with whatever aggregates (khandha) of existence, one exists at the moment of the path. Anantarā āsavānaṃ khayo hotī means immediately after the path, fruition (phala) arises. Idaṃ bhavānaṃ agga means this five aggregates at the moment of the path is called the foremost of existences.

(18) 3. Upāsakavaggo

(18) 3. Upāsakavaggo

1-3. Sārajjasuttādivaṇṇanā
1-3. Sārajjasuttādivaṇṇanā

171-173.Tatiyassa paṭhamadutiyatatiyesu agāriyappaṭipatti kathitā. Sotāpannasakadāgāminopi hontu, vaṭṭantiyeva.

171-173. In the first, second, and third of the third, the practice of a householder is described. Even if they are stream-enterers (sotāpanna) or once-returners (sakadāgāmin), they still revolve in the cycle.

4. Verasuttavaṇṇanā
4. Verasuttavaṇṇanā

174.Catutthebhayānīti cittutrāsabhayāni.Verānīti akusalaverānipi puggalaverānipi.Cetasikanti cittanissitaṃ.Dukkhanti kāyapasādavatthukaṃ dukkhaṃ.Domanassanti domanassavedanaṃ. Imasmiṃ sutte viratipahānaṃ kathitaṃ.

174. In the fourth, bhayānī means fears that cause terror. Verānī means both unwholesome enmities and personal enmities. Cetasika means dependent on the mind. Dukkha means suffering based on the bodily sense-faculty. Domanassa means the feeling of displeasure. In this sutta, the abandonment through restraint (virati) is described.

5. Caṇḍālasuttavaṇṇanā
5. Caṇḍālasuttavaṇṇanā

175.Pañcameupāsakapatikuṭṭhoti upāsakapacchimako.Kotūhalamaṅgalikoti ‘‘iminā idaṃ bhavissatī’’ti evaṃ pavattattā kotūhalasaṅkhātena diṭṭhasutamutamaṅgalena samannāgato.Maṅgalaṃ pacceti no kammanti maṅgalaṃ oloketi, kammaṃ na oloketi.Ito ca bahiddhāti imamhā sāsanā bahiddhā.Pubbakāraṃ karotīti dānādikaṃ kusalakiccaṃ paṭhamataraṃ karoti.

175. In the fifth, upāsakapatikuṭṭho means one who is last among the lay followers. Kotūhalamaṅgaliko means one who is endowed with omens of what has been seen, heard, and thought, which are called curiosity, due to their occurrence with the thought that "this will happen because of this." Maṅgalaṃ pacceti no kamma means he trusts in omens, he does not trust in action. Ito ca bahiddhā means outside this dispensation. Pubbakāraṃ karotī means he does good deeds such as giving alms, earlier.

6. Pītisuttavaṇṇanā
6. Pītisuttavaṇṇanā

176.Chaṭṭhekinti mayanti kena nāma upāyena mayaṃ.Pavivekaṃ pītinti paṭhamadutiyajjhānāni nissāya uppajjanakapītiṃ.Kāmūpasaṃhitanti kāmanissitaṃ duvidhe kāme ārabbha uppajjanakaṃ.Akusalūpasaṃhitanti ‘‘migasūkarādayo vijjhissāmī’’ti saraṃ khipitvā tasmiṃ viraddhe ‘‘viraddhaṃ mayā’’ti evaṃ akusale nissāya uppajjanakaṃ. Tādisesu pana ṭhānesu avirajjhantassa ‘‘suṭṭhu me viddhaṃ, suṭṭhu me pahaṭa’’nti uppajjanakaṃakusalūpasaṃhitaṃ sukhaṃ somanassaṃnāma. Dānādiupakaraṇānaṃ asampattiyā uppajjamānaṃ panakusalūpasaṃhitaṃ dukkhaṃ domanassanti veditabbaṃ.

176. In the sixth, kinti mayaṃ means by what means indeed, do we. Pavivekaṃ pīti means the joy that arises dependent on the first and second jhānas. Kāmūpasaṃhita means associated with sensual pleasures, arising in dependence on the two kinds of sensual pleasures. Akusalūpasaṃhita means arising in dependence on the unwholesome, thinking "I will shoot deer, pigs, and so on," and if it misses, thinking "I missed." However, for one who does not miss in such places, the akusalūpasaṃhitaṃ sukhaṃ somanassaṃ means the pleasure and happiness that arises thinking "I shot well, I hit well." However, the kusalūpasaṃhitaṃ dukkhaṃ domanassa means the suffering and displeasure that arises due to the non-attainment of things such as the requisites for giving.

7. Vaṇijjāsuttavaṇṇanā
7. Vaṇijjāsuttavaṇṇanā

177.Sattamevaṇijjāti vāṇijakammāni.Upāsakenāti tisaraṇagatena.Satthavaṇijjāti āvudhabhaṇḍaṃ kāretvā tassa vikkayo.Sattavaṇijjāti manussavikkayo.Maṃsavaṇijjāti sūkaramigādayo posetvā tesaṃ vikkayo.Majjavaṇijjāti yaṃkiñci majjaṃ kāretvā tassa vikkayo.Visavaṇijjāti visaṃ kāretvā tassa vikkayo. Iti sabbampi imaṃ vaṇijjaṃ neva attanā kātuṃ, na pare samādapetvā kāretuṃ vaṭṭati.

177. In the seventh, vaṇijjā means trade. Upāsakena means by one who has gone for refuge to the three jewels. Satthavaṇijjā means making and selling weapons. Sattavaṇijjā means trading in human beings. Maṃsavaṇijjā means raising pigs, deer, and so on, and selling them. Majjavaṇijjā means making and selling any kind of intoxicant. Visavaṇijjā means making and selling poison. Thus, it is not proper to do any of this trade oneself, nor to induce others to do it.

8. Rājasuttavaṇṇanā
8. Rājasuttavaṇṇanā

178.Aṭṭhamepabbājentīti raṭṭhamhā pabbājenti.Yathāpaccayaṃ vā karontīti yathādhippāyaṃ yathājjhāsayaṃ karonti.Tatheva pāpakammaṃ pavedentīti yathā tena kataṃ, taṃ tatheva aññesaṃ ārocenti kathenti.

178. In the eighth, pabbājentī means they expel from the kingdom. Yathāpaccayaṃ vā karontī means they do as they please, as they intend. Tatheva pāpakammaṃ pavedentī means they declare and tell others about the evil deed just as it was done by him.

9. Gihisuttavaṇṇanā
9. Gihisuttavaṇṇanā

179.Navamesaṃvutakammantanti pihitakammantaṃ.Ābhicetasikānanti uttamacittanissitānaṃ.Diṭṭhadhammasukhavihārānanti paccakkheyeva dhamme pavattikkhaṇe sukhavihārānaṃ.Ariyakantehīti ariyānaṃ kantehi maggaphalasīlehi.

179. In the ninth, saṃvutakammanta means one with closed-off actions. Ābhicetasikāna means those dependent on the highest mind. Diṭṭhadhammasukhavihārāna means abiding in happiness in this very life, at the moment of occurrence. Ariyakantehī means with virtues pleasing to the noble ones, the virtues of the path and fruition.

Ariyadhammaṃ samādāyāti ettha ariyadhammoti pañca sīlāni kathitāni.Merayaṃ vāruṇinti catubbidhaṃ merayaṃ pañcavidhañca suraṃ.Dhammañcānuvitakkayeti navavidhaṃ lokuttaradhammaṃ anussativaseneva vitakkeyya.Abyāpajjhaṃ hitaṃ cittanti niddukkhaṃ mettādibrahmavihāracittaṃ.Devalokāya bhāvayeti brahmalokatthāya bhāveyya.Puññatthassa jigīsatoti puññena atthikassa puññaṃ gavesantassa.Santesūti buddhapaccekabuddhatathāgatasāvakesu.Vipulā hoti dakkhiṇāti evaṃ dinnadānaṃ mahapphalaṃ hoti.Anupubbenāti sīlapūraṇādinā anukkamena. Sesaṃ tikanipāte vuttatthameva.

Ariyadhammaṃ samādāyā here, ariyadhamma means the five precepts are spoken of. Merayaṃ vāruṇiṃ means four kinds of meraya and five kinds of sura. Dhammañcānuvitakkaye means one should reflect upon (vitakkeya) the ninefold supramundane Dhamma by way of recollection. Abyāpajjhaṃ hitaṃ cittaṃ means a mind of loving-kindness and the other brahma-vihāras, free from suffering. Devalokāya bhāvaye means one should develop it for the sake of the Brahma world. Puññatthassa jigīsato means for one who desires merit, who seeks merit. Santesū means in those who are peaceful: Buddhas, Paccekabuddhas, and disciples of the Tathāgata. Vipulā hoti dakkhiṇā means a gift given thus is of great fruit. Anupubbenā means gradually, by the completion of virtue, and so on, in due order. The rest has the same meaning as stated in the Tika Nipata.

10. Gavesīsuttavaṇṇanā
10. Gavesīsuttavaṇṇanā

180.Dasamesitaṃ pātvākāsīti mahāmaggeneva gacchanto taṃ sālavanaṃ oloketvā ‘‘atthi nu kho imasmiṃ ṭhāne kiñci sukāraṇaṃ uppannapubba’’nti addasa kassapabuddhakāle gavesinā upāsakena kataṃ sukāraṇaṃ. Athassa etadahosi – ‘‘idaṃ sukāraṇaṃ bhikkhusaṅghassa apākaṭaṃ paṭicchannaṃ, handa naṃ bhikkhusaṅghassa pākaṭaṃ karomī’’ti maggā okkamma aññatarasmiṃ padese ṭhitova sitapātukammaṃ akāsi, aggaggadante dassetvā mandahasitaṃ hasi. Yathā hi lokiyamanussā udaraṃ paharantā ‘‘kahaṃ kaha’’nti hasanti, na evaṃ buddhā. Buddhānaṃ pana hasitaṃ haṭṭhapahaṭṭhākāramattameva hoti.

180. In the tenth, sitaṃ pātvākāsī means while going along the great path, he looked at that sal tree grove and saw a meritorious act done by the lay follower Gavesi in the time of Kassapa Buddha, thinking, "Is there any well-done deed that has occurred in this place?" Then it occurred to him, "This meritorious act is not known, is hidden from the community of monks; come, I will make it known to the community of monks," and deviating from the path, standing in a certain place, he made the smile appear, showing the tips of his teeth, he smiled gently. For worldly people laugh striking their belly saying, "Where? Where?" but Buddhas do not do so. For the Buddhas' smile is only a mere manifestation of joy.

Hasitañca nāmetaṃ terasahi somanassasahagatacittehi hoti. Tattha lokiyamahājano akusalato catūhi, kāmāvacarakusalato catūhīti aṭṭhahi cittehi hasati, sekhā akusalato diṭṭhigatasampayuttāni dve apanetvā chahi cittehi hasanti, khīṇāsavā catūhi sahetukakiriyacittehi, ekena ahetukakiriyacittenāti pañcahi cittehi hasanti. Tesupi balavārammaṇe āpāthamāgate dvīhi ñāṇasampayuttacittehi hasanti, dubbalārammaṇe duhetukacittadvayena ca ahetukacittena cāti tīhi cittehi hasanti. Imasmiṃ pana ṭhāne kiriyāhetukamanoviññāṇadhātusomanassasahagatacittaṃ bhagavato pahaṭṭhākāramattahasitaṃ uppādeti.

And this laughter occurs with thirteen types of consciousness accompanied by gladness. There, ordinary people laugh with eight types of citta, four from the unwholesome and four from the wholesome of the desire realm, trainees laugh with six types of citta, removing two cittas associated with the view of the unwholesome, and arahants laugh with five types of citta namely with four root-caused kriya cittas and one non-root-caused kriya citta. Even among those, they laugh with two wisdom-endowed cittas when a strong object comes into range, and with three cittas when the object is weak, namely two cittas rooted in two causes and one non-root-caused citta. In this instance, however, a mind element of action rooted in a cause, a consciousness element, and citta accompanied by gladness produces the mere appearance of joy in the Blessed One's smile.

Taṃ panetaṃ hasitaṃ evaṃ appamattakampi therassa pākaṭaṃ ahosi. Kathaṃ? Tathārūpe hi kāle tathāgatassa catūhi dāṭhāhi cātuddīpikamahāmeghamukhato samosaritā vijjulatā viya virocamānā mahātālakkhandhappamāṇā rasmivaṭṭiyo uṭṭhahitvā tikkhattuṃ siravaraṃ padakkhiṇaṃ katvā dāṭhaggesuyeva antaradhāyanti. Tena saññāṇena āyasmā ānando bhagavato pacchato gacchamānopi sitapātubhāvaṃ jānāti.

That smile, even so slight, became evident to the Elder. How? At such a time, a circle of rays, appearing from the four canine teeth of the Tathāgata, shining like lightning streaks emerging from the mouth of a great cloud covering the four continents, rising up the size of a great palm tree trunk, circumambulating the excellent head three times, would then disappear at the tips of the teeth themselves. By that sign, the venerable Ānanda, even though walking behind the Blessed One, knows that a smile has appeared.

Iddhanti samiddhaṃ.Phītanti atisamiddhaṃ sabbapāliphullaṃ viya.Ākiṇṇamanussanti janasamākulaṃ.Sīlesu aparipūrakārīti pañcasu sīlesu asamattakārī.Paṭidesitānīti upāsakabhāvaṃ paṭidesitāni.Samādapitānīti saraṇesu patiṭṭhāpitānīti attho.Iccetaṃ samasamanti iti etaṃ kāraṇaṃ sabbākārato samabhāveneva samaṃ, na ekadesena.Natthi kiñci atirekanti mayhaṃ imehi kiñci atirekaṃ natthi.Handāti vavassaggatthe nipāto.Atirekāyāti visesakāraṇatthāya paṭipajjāmīti attho.Sīlesu paripūrakāriṃ dhārethāti pañcasu sīlesu samattakārīti jānātha. Ettāvatā tena pañca sīlāni samādinnāni nāma honti.Kimaṅga pana na mayanti mayaṃ pana keneva kāraṇena paripūrakārino na bhavissāma. Sesamettha uttānamevāti.

Iddhaṃ means prosperous. Phītaṃ means very prosperous, like fully blossomed with all the leaves. Ākiṇṇamanussaṃ means crowded with people. Sīlesu aparipūrakārī means one who does not fully complete the five precepts. Paṭidesitānī means they have confessed their lay follower state. Samādapitānī means they have been established in the refuges, this is the meaning. Iccetaṃ samasamaṃ means thus, this reason is equal in every way, not just in one aspect. Natthi kiñci atirekaṃ means I have nothing extra with these. Handā is a particle in the sense of abandonment. Atirekāyā means I will undertake for the sake of a special reason, this is the meaning. Sīlesu paripūrakāriṃ dhārethā means know that he is one who fully completes the five precepts. By this much, it is said that he has undertaken the five precepts. Kimaṅga pana na mayaṃ means why indeed should we not be those who fully complete them? The rest here is self-explanatory.

(19) 4. Araññavaggo

(19) 4. Araññavaggo

1. Āraññikasuttavaṇṇanā
1. Āraññikasuttavaṇṇanā

181.Catutthassa paṭhamemandattā momūhattāti neva samādānaṃ jānāti, na ānisaṃsaṃ. Attano pana mandattā momūhattā aññāṇeneva āraññako hoti.Pāpiccho icchāpakatoti ‘‘araññe me viharantassa ‘ayaṃ āraññako’ti catupaccayasakkāraṃ karissanti, ‘ayaṃ bhikkhu lajjī pavivitto’tiādīhi ca guṇehi sambhāvessantī’’ti evaṃ pāpikāya icchāya ṭhatvā tāya eva icchāya abhibhūto hutvā āraññako hoti. Ummādavasena araññaṃ pavisitvā viharanto panaummādā cittakkhepāāraññako nāma hoti.Vaṇṇitanti idaṃ āraññakaṅgaṃ nāma buddhehi ca buddhasāvakehi ca vaṇṇitaṃ pasatthanti āraññako hoti.Idamatthitanti imāya kalyāṇāya paṭipattiyā attho etassāti idamatthī, idamatthino bhāvo idamatthitā. Taṃ idamatthitaṃyeva nissāya, na aññaṃ kiñci lokāmisanti attho. Sesamettha ito paresu ca uttānatthameva.

181. In the first of the fourth, mandattā momūhattā means he knows neither the undertaking nor the benefit. But due to his own dullness and delusion, he becomes a forest dweller (āraññako) just out of ignorance. Pāpiccho icchāpakato means, "While I am dwelling in the forest, they will give me the four requisites, saying, 'This is a forest dweller,' and they will esteem me with qualities such as 'This monk is conscientious and secluded,'" thus standing with an evil desire, being overcome by that very desire, he becomes a forest dweller. However, one who enters and dwells in the forest due to madness is called ummādā cittakkhepāāraññako. Vaṇṇitaṃ means this practice of forest dwelling is praised and commended by the Buddhas and the disciples of the Buddhas, thus he becomes a forest dweller. Idamatthita means this practice has a purpose; the state of having a purpose is idamatthitā. Relying on that very idamatthitā, not on any worldly gain, this is the meaning. The rest here and in what follows is self-explanatory.

(20) 5. Brāhmaṇavaggo

(20) 5. Brāhmaṇavaggo

1. Soṇasuttavaṇṇanā
1. Soṇasuttavaṇṇanā

191.Pañcamassa paṭhamebrāhmaṇadhammāti brāhmaṇasabhāvā.Sunakhesūti kukkuresu.Neva kiṇanti na vikkiṇantīti na gaṇhantā kiṇanti, na dadantā vikkiṇanti.Sampiyeneva saṃvāsaṃ saṃbandhāya sampavattentīti piyo piyaṃ upasaṅkamitvā paveṇiyā bandhanatthaṃ saṃvāsaṃ pavattayanti.Udarāvadehakanti udaraṃ avadihitvā upacinitvā pūretvā.Avasesaṃ ādāya pakkamantīti yaṃ bhuñjituṃ na sakkonti, taṃ bhaṇḍikaṃ katvā gahetvā gacchanti. Imasmiṃ sutte vaṭṭameva kathitaṃ.

191. In the first of the fifth, brāhmaṇadhammā means the nature of a Brahmin. Sunakhesu means among dogs. Neva kiṇanti na vikkiṇantī means they do not take and buy, nor do they give and sell. Sampiyeneva saṃvāsaṃ saṃbandhāya sampavattentī means approaching each other with affection, they establish cohabitation for the sake of a lasting bond. Udarāvadehaka means having filled and swollen the belly. Avasesaṃ ādāya pakkamantī means whatever they cannot eat, they make into a bundle and take away. In this sutta, only behavior (vaṭṭa) is discussed.

2. Doṇabrāhmaṇasuttavaṇṇanā
2. Commentary on the Doṇabrāhmaṇa Sutta

192.Dutiyetvampi noti tvampi nu.Pavattāroti pavattayitāro.Yesanti yesaṃ santakaṃ.Mantapadanti vedasaṅkhātaṃ mantameva.Gītanti aṭṭhakādīhi dasahi porāṇakabrāhmaṇehi sarasampattivasena sajjhāyitaṃ.Pavuttanti aññesaṃ vuttaṃ, vācitanti attho.Samīhitanti samupabyūḷhaṃ rāsikataṃ, piṇḍaṃ katvā ṭhapitanti attho.Tadanugāyantīti etarahi brāhmaṇā taṃ tehi pubbehi gītaṃ anugāyanti anusajjhāyanti.Tadanubhāsantīti taṃ anubhāsanti. Idaṃ purimasseva vevacanaṃ.Bhāsitamanubhāsantīti tehi bhāsitaṃ anubhāsanti.Sajjhāyitamanusajjhāyantīti tehi sajjhāyitaṃ anusajjhāyanti.Vācitamanuvācentīti tehi aññesaṃ vācitaṃ anuvācenti.Seyyathidanti te katameti attho.Aṭṭhakotiādīni tesaṃ nāmāni. Te kira dibbena cakkhunā oloketvā parūpaghātaṃ akatvā kassapasammāsambuddhassa bhagavato pāvacanena saha saṃsandetvā mante ganthesuṃ. Aparāpare pana brāhmaṇā pāṇātipātādīni pakkhipitvā tayo vede bhinditvā buddhavacanena saddhiṃ viruddhe akaṃsu.Tyāssu’meti etthaassūti nipātamattaṃ, te brāhmaṇā ime pañca brāhmaṇe paññāpentīti attho.

192. In the second, tvampi no means “even you?”. Pavattāro means “those who propagate”. Yesa means “whose possession”. Mantapada means “the mantra known as the Veda”. Gīta means “recited in harmonious tones by the ten ancient Brahmins, beginning with Aṭṭhaka”. Pavutta means “said to others,” that is, recited. Samīhita means “collected together, piled up,” meaning gathered into a lump and set aside. Tadanugāyantī means that nowadays, Brahmins sing along with that which was previously sung by them, they recite along. Tadanubhāsantī means they repeat it. This is a synonym for the previous one. Bhāsitamanubhāsantī means they repeat what was spoken by them. Sajjhāyitamanusajjhāyantī means they recite what was recited by them. Vācitamanuvācentī means they cause to be recited what was recited to others by them. Seyyathida means “how were they?” Aṭṭhako etc. are their names. It seems they, having looked with divine vision, without harming others, composed the mantras harmoniously with the dispensation of Kassapa, the Perfectly Enlightened Buddha. Other Brahmins, however, having inserted things like killing living beings, divided the three Vedas and made them contradictory to the Buddha's teaching. Tyāssu’me here, assū is merely a particle, meaning those Brahmins make known these five Brahmins.

Mante adhīyamānoti vede sajjhāyanto gaṇhanto.Ācariyadhananti ācariyadakkhiṇaṃ ācariyabhāgaṃ.Na issatthenāti na yodhājīvakammena uppādeti.Na rājaporisenāti na rājupaṭṭhākabhāvena.Kevalaṃ bhikkhācariyāyāti suddhāya bhikkhācariyāya eva.Kapālaṃanatimaññamānoti taṃ bhikkhābhājanaṃ anatimaññamāno. So hi puṇṇapattaṃ ādāya sīsaṃ nhāto kuladvāresu ṭhatvā ‘‘ahaṃ aṭṭhacattālīsa vassāni komārabrahmacariyaṃ cariṃ, mantāpi me gahitā, ācariyassa ācariyadhanaṃ dassāmi, dhanaṃ me dethā’’ti yācati. Taṃ sutvā manussā yathāsatti yathābalaṃ aṭṭhapi soḷasapi satampi sahassampi denti. Evaṃ sakalagāmaṃ caritvā laddhadhanaṃ ācariyassa niyyādeti. Taṃ sandhāyetaṃ vuttaṃ.Evaṃ kho doṇa brāhmaṇo brahmasamo hotīti evaṃ brahmavihārehi samannāgatattā brāhmaṇo brahmasamo nāma hoti.

Mante adhīyamāno means studying the Vedas, learning them. Ācariyadhana means the teacher's fee, the teacher's share. Na issatthenā means he does not earn it through the occupation of a warrior. Na rājaporisenā means not by being a royal attendant. Kevalaṃ bhikkhācariyāyā means solely by pure mendicancy. Kapālaṃ anatimaññamāno means not despising that alms bowl. For he, taking a full bowl, having washed his head, standing at the doors of families, begs, "I have lived the celibate life of a youth for forty-eight years, and I have mastered the mantras; I will give the teacher's fee to the teacher, give me wealth." Hearing that, people give according to their ability and strength, eight, sixteen, a hundred, or even a thousand. Thus, having wandered through the entire village, he delivers the wealth he has obtained to the teacher. This is what is meant by this statement. Evaṃ kho doṇa brāhmaṇo brahmasamo hotī means in this way, because he is endowed with the brahmavihāras, the Brahmin is called equal to Brahmā.

Nevakayena na vikkayenāti neva attanā kayaṃ katvā gaṇhāti, na parena vikkayaṃ katvā dinnaṃ.Udakūpassaṭṭhanti udakena upassaṭṭhaṃ pariccattaṃ. So hi yasmiṃ kule vayappattā dārikā atthi, gantvā tassa dvāre tiṭṭhati. ‘‘Kasmā ṭhitosī’’ti vutte ‘‘ahaṃ aṭṭhacattālīsa vassāni komārabrahmacariyaṃ cariṃ, taṃ sabbaṃ tumhākaṃ demi, tumhe mayhaṃ dārikaṃ dethā’’ti vadati. Te dārikaṃ ānetvā tassa hatthe udakaṃ pātetvā denti. So taṃ udakūpassaṭṭhaṃ bhariyaṃ gaṇhitvā gacchati.Atimīḷhajoti atimīḷhe mahāgūtharāsimhi jāto.Tassa sāti tassa esā.Na davatthāti na kīḷanatthā.Na ratatthāti na kāmaratiatthā.Methunaṃuppādetvāti dhītaraṃ vā puttaṃ vā uppādetvā ‘‘idāni paveṇi ghaṭīyissatī’’ti nikkhamitvā pabbajati.Sugatiṃ saggaṃ lokanti brahmalokameva sandhāyetaṃ vuttaṃ.Devasamo hotīti dibbavihārehi samannāgatattā devasamo nāma hoti.

Neva kayena na vikkayenā means he neither buys and takes for himself, nor gives what is sold by another. Udakūpassaṭṭha means given away with water sprinkled. For he goes and stands at the door of a family in which there is a girl of marriageable age. When asked, "Why are you standing here?", he says, "I have lived the celibate life of a youth for forty-eight years, I give all of that to you, give me the girl." They bring the girl and give her to him, pouring water into his hand. He takes that wife given with water sprinkled and departs. Atimīḷhajo means born in a great heap of excrement. Tassa sā means that is his. Na davatthā means not for the sake of amusement. Na ratatthā means not for the sake of sensual pleasure. Methunaṃ uppādetvā means having produced a daughter or a son, thinking, "Now the lineage will be established," he goes forth and becomes a recluse. Sugatiṃ saggaṃ loka this is said referring to the Brahma world itself. Devasamo hotī means because he is endowed with divine abodes, he is called equal to the gods.

Tameva puttassādaṃ nikāmayamānoti yvāssa dhītaraṃ vā puttaṃ vā jātaṃ disvā puttapemaṃ puttassādo uppajjati, taṃ patthayamāno icchamāno.Kuṭumbaṃ ajjhāvasatīti kuṭumbaṃ saṇṭhapetvā kuṭumbamajjhe vasati. Sesamettha uttānamevāti.

Tameva puttassādaṃ nikāmayamāno means desiring that affection for a child, that enjoyment of a child, which arises in him upon seeing his daughter or son born. Kuṭumbaṃ ajjhāvasatī means settling down and living in the midst of the family. The rest is self-explanatory here.

3. Saṅgāravasuttavaṇṇanā
3. Commentary on the Saṅgārava Sutta

193.Tatiyepagevāti paṭhamaññeva.Kāmarāgapariyuṭṭhitenāti kāmarāgaggahitena.Kāmarāgaparetenāti kāmarāgānugatena.Nissaraṇanti tividhaṃ kāmarāgassa nissaraṇaṃ vikkhambhananissaraṇaṃ, tadaṅganissaraṇaṃ, samucchedanissaraṇanti. Tattha asubhe paṭhamajjhānaṃ vikkhambhananissaraṇaṃ nāma, vipassanā tadaṅganissaraṇaṃ nāma, arahattamaggo samucchedanissaraṇaṃ nāma. Taṃ tividhampi nappajānātīti attho.Attatthampītiādīsu arahattasaṅkhāto attano attho attattho nāma, paccayadāyakānaṃ attho parattho nāma, sveva duvidho ubhayattho nāma. Iminā nayena sabbavāresu attho veditabbo.

193. In the third, pagevā means first of all. Kāmarāgapariyuṭṭhitenā means seized by sensual lust. Kāmarāgaparetenā means devoted to sensual lust. Nissaraṇa means the three kinds of escape from sensual lust: escape by suppression (vikkhambhana), escape by temporary removal (tadaṅga), and escape by eradication (samuccheda). Herein, the first jhāna with respect to the foul is escape by suppression; insight is escape by temporary removal; the Arahat Path is escape by eradication. He does not understand even that threefold escape, is the meaning. In attatthampī etc., one's own welfare, which is Arahatship, is one's own benefit; the welfare of those who give requisites is the benefit of others; that very twofold benefit is the benefit of both. The meaning should be understood in all cases in this way.

byāpādassa nissaraṇantiādīsu hi dveva nissaraṇāni vikkhambhananissaraṇañca samucchedanissaraṇañca. Tattha byāpādassa tāva mettāya paṭhamajjhānaṃ vikkhambhananissaraṇaṃ nāma, anāgāmimaggo samucchedanissaraṇaṃ, thinamiddhassa ālokasaññā vikkhambhananissaraṇaṃ, arahattamaggo samucchedanissaraṇaṃ. Uddhaccakukkuccassa yo koci samatho vikkhambhananissaraṇaṃ, uddhaccassa panettha arahattamaggo, kukkuccassa anāgāmimaggo samucchedanissaraṇaṃ. Vicikicchāya dhammavavatthānaṃ vikkhambhananissaraṇaṃ, paṭhamamaggo samucchedanissaraṇaṃ.

In byāpādassa nissaraṇa etc., there are only two kinds of escape: escape by suppression and escape by eradication. Herein, the first jhāna of loving-kindness is escape by suppression from ill-will; the Anāgāmi Path is escape by eradication; perception of light is escape by suppression from sloth and torpor; the Arahat Path is escape by eradication. Any kind of serenity is escape by suppression from restlessness and remorse; in this context, the Arahat Path is escape by eradication from restlessness, and the Anāgāmi Path is escape by eradication from remorse. Discrimination of phenomena is escape by suppression from doubt; the first Path is escape by eradication.

seyyathāpi, brāhmaṇa, udapatto saṃsaṭṭho lākhāya vātiādikā upamā vuttā, tāsuudapattoti udakabharitā pāti.Saṃsaṭṭhoti vaṇṇabhedakaraṇavasena saṃsaṭṭho.Ukkudhitoti kudhito.Ussadakajātoti usumakajāto.Sevālapaṇakapariyonaddhoti tilabījakādibhedena sevālena vā nīlamaṇḍūkapiṭṭhivaṇṇena vā udakapiṭṭhiṃ chādetvā nibbattena paṇakena pariyonaddho.Vāteritoti vātena erito kampito.Āviloti appasanno.Luḷitoti asannisinno.Kalalībhūtoti kaddamībhūto.Andhakāre nikkhittoti koṭṭhakantarādibhede anālokaṭṭhāne ṭhapito. Imasmiṃ sutte bhagavā tīhi bhavehi desanaṃ nivaṭṭetvā arahattanikūṭena niṭṭhapesi, brāhmaṇo pana saraṇamatte patiṭṭhitoti.

seyyathāpi, brāhmaṇa, udapatto saṃsaṭṭho lākhāya vā etc., similes have been stated; in those, udapatto means a bowl filled with water. Saṃsaṭṭho means mixed in such a way as to alter the color. Ukkudhito means curdled. Ussadakajāto means born of warmth. Sevālapaṇakapariyonaddho means covered over with algae of the nature of sesame seeds etc., or with scum which has arisen covering the surface of the water and is of the color of a bluebottle fly's back. Vāterito means agitated by the wind. Āvilo means not clear. Luḷito means not settled. Kalalībhūto means muddy. Andhakāre nikkhitto means placed in a place without light, such as inside a storeroom. In this sutta, the Blessed One, having turned the teaching away from the three existences (bhava), concluded with the pinnacle of Arahatship, but the Brahmin was established only in taking refuge.

4. Kāraṇapālīsuttavaṇṇanā
4. Commentary on the Kāraṇapālī Sutta

194.Catutthekāraṇapālīti pāloti tassa nāmaṃ, rājakulānaṃ pana kammante kāretīti kāraṇapālī nāma jāto.Kammantaṃkāretīti pātova uṭṭhāya dvāraṭṭālakapākāre akate kāreti, jiṇṇe paṭijaggāpeti.Piṅgiyāniṃ brāhmaṇanti evaṃnāmakaṃ anāgāmiphale patiṭṭhitaṃ ariyasāvakaṃ brāhmaṇaṃ. So kira pātova uṭṭhāya gandhamālādīni gāhāpetvā satthu santikaṃ gantvā vanditvā gandhamālādīhi pūjetvā nagaraṃ āgacchati, idaṃ brāhmaṇassa devasikaṃ vattanti. Taṃ so evaṃ vattaṃ katvā āgacchantaṃ addasa.Etadavocāti ‘‘ayaṃ brāhmaṇo paññavā ñāṇuttaro, kahaṃ nu kho pātova gantvā āgacchatī’’ti cintetvā anukkamena santikaṃ āgataṃ sañjānitvā ‘‘handa kuto nū’’tiādivacanaṃ avoca.

194. In the fourth, kāraṇapālī means Pāli is his name; but he is named Kāraṇapālī because he causes work to be done in royal families. Kammantaṃ kāretī means rising early in the morning, he has gates and ramparts built if they are not yet made, and has the old ones repaired. Piṅgiyāniṃ brāhmaṇa means a Brahmin of that name, an Ariya disciple established in the fruit of Anāgāmi. It seems that rising early in the morning, he would have perfumes, garlands, etc., taken, go to the presence of the Teacher, pay homage, and worship with perfumes, garlands, etc., and then return to the city; this is the Brahmin’s daily routine. He saw him coming back after making that his routine. Etadavocā means thinking, "This Brahmin is wise, superior in knowledge; where does he go early in the morning and return from?", having recognized him as he came near in due course, he spoke the words beginning with "Well, from where?".

divā divassāti divasassāpi divā, majjhanhikakāleti attho.Paṇḍito maññeti bhavaṃ piṅgiyānī samaṇaṃ gotamaṃ paṇḍitoti maññati, udāhu noti ayamettha attho.Ko cāhaṃ, bhoti, bho, samaṇassa gotamassa paññāveyyattiyajānane ahaṃ ko nāma?Ko ca samaṇassa gotamassa paññāveyyattiyaṃ jānissāmīti kuto cāhaṃ samaṇassa gotamassa paññāveyyattiyaṃ jānissāmi, kena nāma kāraṇena jānissāmīti evaṃ sabbathāpi attano ajānanabhāvaṃ dīpeti.Sopi nūnassa tādisovāti yo samaṇassa gotamassa paññāveyyattiyaṃ jāneyya, sopi nūna dasa pāramiyo pūretvā sabbaññutaṃ patto tādiso buddhoyeva bhaveyya. Sineruṃ vā hi pathaviṃ vā ākāsaṃ vā pametukāmena tappamāṇo daṇḍo vā rajju vā laddhuṃ vaṭṭati, samaṇassa gotamassa paññaṃ jānantenapi tassa ñāṇasadisameva sabbaññutaññāṇaṃ laddhuṃ vaṭṭatīti dīpeti. Ādaravasena panettha āmeḍitaṃ kataṃ.Uḷārāyāti uttamāya seṭṭhāya.Ko cāhaṃ, bhoti, bho, ahaṃ samaṇassa gotamassa pasaṃsane ko nāma.Ko ca samaṇaṃ gotamaṃ pasaṃsissāmīti kena kāraṇena pasaṃsissāmi.

divā divassā means even in the daytime of the day, at midday, is the meaning. Paṇḍito maññe means does the esteemed Piṅgiyāni consider the ascetic Gotama to be wise, or not?, this is the meaning here. Ko cāhaṃ, bho means, "Venerable sir, what am I, in knowing the discernment of wisdom of the ascetic Gotama?" Ko ca samaṇassa gotamassa paññāveyyattiyaṃ jānissāmī means "How could I know the discernment of wisdom of the ascetic Gotama? By what reason could I know?", thus he reveals his state of unknowing in every way. Sopi nūnassa tādisovā means "Whoever might know the discernment of wisdom of the ascetic Gotama, surely even he would be such a one, a Buddha who has fulfilled the ten perfections and attained omniscience." Just as one wanting to measure Mount Sineru, or the earth, or the sky, is fit to obtain a measuring stick or a rope for that measurement, so too, one who knows the wisdom of the ascetic Gotama is fit to obtain the all-knowing wisdom similar to his knowledge, this he reveals. Here, it is repeated out of respect. Uḷārāyā means excellent, best. Ko cāhaṃ, bho means, "Venerable sir, what am I in praising the ascetic Gotama?" Ko ca samaṇaṃ gotamaṃ pasaṃsissāmī means "By what reason could I praise him?"

Pasatthappasatthoti sabbaguṇānaṃ upari carehi sabbalokapasatthehi attano guṇeheva pasattho, na tassa aññehi pasaṃsanakiccaṃ atthi. Yathā hi campakapupphaṃ vā nīluppalaṃ vā padumaṃ vā lohitacandanaṃ vā attano vaṇṇagandhasiriyāva pāsādikañceva sugandhañca, na tassa āgantukehi vaṇṇagandhehi thomanakiccaṃ atthi. Yathā ca maṇiratanaṃ vā candamaṇḍalaṃ vā attano ālokeneva obhāsati, na tassa aññena obhāsanakiccaṃ atthi, evaṃ samaṇo gotamo sabbalokapasatthehi attano guṇeheva pasattho thomito, sabbalokassa seṭṭhataṃ pāpito. Na tassa aññena pasaṃsanakiccaṃ atthi.

Pasatthappasattho means praised by his own virtues, which are praised by the entire world by those who move above all virtues; he has no need for praise by others. Just as a campaka flower, or a blue lotus, or a lotus, or red sandalwood is pleasing and fragrant by its own beauty, scent, and splendor, it has no need for commendation by external colors and scents. Just as a jewel or the orb of the moon shines by its own light, it has no need for shining by another, so the ascetic Gotama is praised and commended by his own virtues, which are praised by the entire world, he is brought to the highest state by the entire world. He has no need for praise by another.

pasatthappasattho. Ke pana pasatthā nāma? Rājā pasenadi kosalo kāsikosalavāsikehi pasattho, bimbisāro aṅgamagadhavāsīhi, vesālikā licchavī vajjitaṭṭhavāsīhi pasatthā, pāveyyakā mallā kosinārakā mallā aññepi te te khattiyā tehi tehi jānapadehi pasatthā, caṅkiādayo brāhmaṇā brāhmaṇagaṇehi, anāthapiṇḍikādayo upāsakā upāsakagaṇehi, visākhāādikā upāsikā anekasatāhi upāsikāhi, sakuludāyiādayo paribbājakā anekehi paribbājakasatehi, uppalavaṇṇattheriādikā mahāsāvikā anekehi bhikkhunisatehi, sāriputtattherādayo mahātherā anekasatehi bhikkhūhi, sakkādayo devā anekasahassehi devehi, mahābrahmādayo brahmāno anekasahassehi brahmehi pasatthā. Te sabbepi dasabalaṃ thomenti vaṇṇenti pasaṃsantīti bhagavā ‘‘pasatthappasattho’’ti vuccati.Atthavasanti atthānisaṃsaṃ.

pasatthappasattho. But who are the praised ones? King Pasenadi of Kosala is praised by the inhabitants of Kāsikosala, Bimbisāra by the inhabitants of Aṅga and Magadha, the Licchavis of Vesālī by the inhabitants of Vajji territory, the Mallas of Pāveyyaka, the Mallas of Kusinārā, and other various Khattiyas are praised by those various regions, the Brahmins headed by Caṅki are praised by groups of Brahmins, the lay followers headed by Anāthapiṇḍika are praised by groups of lay followers, the female lay followers headed by Visākhā are praised by many hundreds of female lay followers, the wanderers headed by Sakuludāyi are praised by many hundreds of wanderers, the great female disciples headed by Uppalavaṇṇā Theri are praised by many hundreds of bhikkhunis, the great elders headed by Sāriputta Thera are praised by many hundreds of bhikkhus, the devas headed by Sakka are praised by many thousands of devas, the Brahmas headed by Mahābrahmā are praised by many thousands of Brahmas. All of them praise, extol, and commend the Ten-Powered One, thus the Blessed One is called "praised by the praised." Atthavasa means advantage of meaning.

seyyathāpi, bho, purisotiādimāha. Tatthaaggarasaparitittoti bhojanarasesu pāyāso sneharasesu gosappi, kasāvarasesu khuddakamadhu aneḷakaṃ, madhurarasesu sakkarāti evamādayo aggarasā nāma. Tesu yena kenaci parititto ākaṇṭhappamāṇaṃ bhuñjitvā ṭhito.Aññesaṃ hīnānanti aggarasehi aññesaṃ hīnarasānaṃ.Suttasoti suttato, suttabhāvenāti attho. Sesupi eseva nayo.Tato tatoti suttādīsu tato tato.Aññesaṃ puthusamaṇabrāhmaṇāppavādānanti ye aññesaṃ puthūnaṃ samaṇabrāhmaṇānaṃ laddhisaṅkhātappavādā, tesaṃ.Na pihetīti na pattheti, te kathiyamāne sotumpi na icchati.Jighacchādubbalyaparetoti jighacchāya ceva dubbalabhāvena ca anugato.Madhupiṇḍikanti sālipiṭṭhaṃ bhajjitvā catumadhurena yojetvā kataṃ baddhasattupiṇḍikaṃ, madhurapūvameva vā.Adhigaccheyyāti labheyya.Asecanakanti madhurabhāvakaraṇatthāya aññena rasena anāsittakaṃ ojavantaṃ paṇītarasaṃ.

seyyathāpi, bho, puriso etc. was said. Therein, aggarasaparititto means among flavors of food, rice gruel is the best, among flavors of oils, ghee from cows, among astringent flavors, small honey is the best, among sweet flavors, sugar, etc., these are the best flavors. Satiated with any one of them, having eaten to the full, he stands. Aññesaṃ hīnāna means flavors inferior to the best flavors. Suttaso means by means of a thread, in the manner of a thread, is the meaning. The same method applies in the remaining cases. Tato tato means from this and that in threads etc. Aññesaṃ puthusamaṇabrāhmaṇāppavādāna means those doctrines known as the teachings of other ordinary ascetics and Brahmins. Na pihetī means he does not desire, he does not even want to hear them being spoken. Jighacchādubbalyapareto means overcome by both hunger and weakness. Madhupiṇḍika means a lump of ground rice fried and combined with the four sweets, a lump of hardened parched grain flour, or simply a sweet cake. Adhigaccheyyā means he would obtain. Asecanaka means not moistened with another flavor for the sake of making it sweet, possessing essence, of excellent flavor.

Haricandanassāti suvaṇṇavaṇṇacandanassa.Lohitacandanassāti rattavaṇṇacandanassa.Surabhigandhanti sugandhaṃ.Darathādayo vaṭṭadarathā, vaṭṭakilamathā, vaṭṭapariḷāhā eva.Udānaṃ udānesīti udāhāraṃ udāhari. Yathā hi yaṃ telaṃ mānaṃ gahetuṃ na sakkoti, vissanditvā gacchati, taṃ avasekoti vuccati. Yañca jalaṃ taḷākaṃ gahetuṃ na sakkoti, ajjhottharitvā gacchati, taṃ oghoti vuccati. Evamevaṃ yaṃ pītivacanaṃ hadayaṃ gahetuṃ na sakkoti, adhikaṃ hutvā anto asaṇṭhahitvā bahi nikkhamati, taṃ udānanti vuccati. Evarūpaṃ pītimayavacanaṃ nicchāresīti attho.

Haricandanassā ti: of yellow sandalwood. Lohitacandanassā ti: of red sandalwood. Surabhigandhaṃ ti: fragrant. Darathā and so on, are vaṭṭadarathā, vaṭṭakilamathā, vaṭṭapariḷāhā themselves. Udānaṃ udānesī ti: uttered an exclamation. Just as oil that cannot be contained in a measure overflows and goes, that is called avaseka. And water that cannot be contained in a pond overflows and goes, that is called ogha. In the same way, a speech of joy that the heart cannot contain, becoming excessive, not staying inside, goes out, that is called udāna. The meaning is that he emitted such a joyful speech.

5. Piṅgiyānīsuttavaṇṇanā
5. Piṅgiyānīsutta Commentary

195.Pañcamenīlāti idaṃ sabbasaṅgāhikaṃ.Nīlavaṇṇātiādi tasseva vibhāgadassanaṃ. Tattha na tesaṃ pakativaṇṇo nīlo, nīlavilepanavilittattā panetaṃ vuttaṃ.Nīlavatthāti paṭadukūlakoseyyādīnipi tesaṃ nīlāneva honti.Nīlālaṅkārāti nīlamaṇīhi nīlapupphehi alaṅkatā, tesaṃ hatthālaṅkāra-assālaṅkāra-rathālaṅkāra-sāṇivitānakañcukāpi sabbe nīlāyeva honti. Iminā nayena sabbapadesu attho veditabbo.

195. In the fifth [sutta], nīlā ti: this is all-inclusive. Nīlavaṇṇā etc., are showing the distinctions of that itself. There, their natural color is not blue, but this is said because they are smeared and anointed with blue unguents. Nīlavatthā ti: their cloths, linen, silk and so on are also blue. Nīlālaṅkārā ti: adorned with blue gems and blue flowers; their hand ornaments, horse ornaments, chariot ornaments, and canopies are all blue. The meaning should be understood in this way in all places.

Padumaṃyathāti yathā satapattaṃ rattapadumaṃ.Kokanadanti tasseva vevacanaṃ.Pātoti pageva suriyuggamanakāle.Siyāti bhaveyya.Avītagandhanti avigatagandhaṃ.Aṅgīrasanti bhagavato aṅgamaṅgehi rasmiyo niccharanti, tasmā aṅgīrasoti vuccati.Tapantamādiccamivantalikkheti dvisahassadīpaparivāresu catūsu mahādīpesu ālokakaraṇavasena antalikkhe tapantaṃ ādiccaṃ viya virocamānaṃ.Aṅgīrasaṃ passāti attānameva vā mahājanaṃ vā sandhāya evaṃ vadati.

Padumaṃ yathā ti: just as a hundred-petaled red lotus. Kokanadaṃ ti: a synonym for that itself. Pāto ti: early, at the time of sunrise. Siyā ti: may be. Avītagandhaṃ ti: with fragrance not gone. Aṅgīrasaṃ ti: rays emanate from the Blessed One's limbs, therefore he is called Aṅgīrasa. Tapantamādiccamivantalikkhe ti: shining like the sun blazing in the sky in the four great continents with their two thousand surrounding islands, by way of giving light. Aṅgīrasaṃ passā ti: he says thus referring to himself or to the great multitude.

6. Mahāsupinasuttavaṇṇanā
6. Mahāsupina Sutta Commentary

196.Chaṭṭhemahāsupināti mahantehi purisehi passitabbato mahantānañca atthānaṃ nimittabhāvato mahāsupinā.Pāturahesunti pākaṭā ahesuṃ. Tattha supinaṃ passanto catūhi kāraṇehi passati dhātukkhobhato vā anubhūtapubbato vā devatopasaṃhārato vā pubbanimittato vāti.

196. In the sixth [sutta], mahāsupinā ti: great dreams because they should be seen by great men and because they are the cause of great events. Pāturahesuṃ ti: became manifest. There, one who is dreaming sees a dream for four reasons: by disturbance of the elements, by something previously experienced, by the intervention of deities, or by a premonitory sign.

dhātukkhobhatosupinaṃ passati. Passanto ca nānāvidhaṃ supinaṃ passati pabbatā patanto viya, ākāsena gacchanto viya, vāḷamigahatthicorādīhi anubaddho viya ca.Anubhūtapubbatopassanto pubbe anubhūtapubbaṃ ārammaṇaṃ passati.Devatopasaṃhāratopassantassa devatā atthakāmatāya vā anatthakāmatāya vā atthāya vā anatthāya vā nānāvidhāni ārammaṇāni upasaṃharanti. So tāsaṃ devatānaṃ ānubhāvena tāni ārammaṇāni passati.Pubbanimittatopassanto puññāpuññavasena uppajjitukāmassa atthassa vā anatthassa vā pubbanimittabhūtaṃ supinaṃ passati bodhisattamātā viya puttapaṭilābhanimittaṃ, kosalarājā viya soḷasa supine, ayameva bhagavā bodhisattabhūto ime pañca mahāsupine viya cāti.

One sees a dream by disturbance of the elements. And seeing, one sees various kinds of dreams, such as falling from a mountain, going through the sky, or being pursued by wild beasts, elephants, thieves, and so on. One seeing by something previously experienced sees an object previously experienced. When one is seeing by the intervention of deities, deities, desiring benefit or harm, present various objects for benefit or harm. He sees those objects by the power of those deities. One seeing by a premonitory sign sees a dream that is a premonitory sign of benefit or harm that is about to arise due to merit or demerit, like the mother of a Bodhisatta for the sign of obtaining a son, like King Kosala for the sixteen dreams, and like this Blessed One, when he was a Bodhisatta, for these five great dreams.

Tattha yaṃ dhātukkhobhato anubhūtapubbato ca supine passati, na taṃ saccaṃ hoti. Yaṃ devatopasaṃhārato passati, taṃ saccaṃ vā hoti alikaṃ vā. Kuddhā hi devatā upāyena vināsetukāmā viparītampi katvā dassenti. Yaṃ pana pubbanimittato passati, taṃ ekantaṃ saccameva hoti. Etesaṃ catunnaṃ mūlakāraṇānaṃ saṃsaggabhedatopi supinabhedo hotiyeva.

There, the dream that one sees by disturbance of the elements and by something previously experienced is not true. That which one sees by the intervention of deities can be true or false. Angry deities, wishing to destroy by trickery, also show things perverted. But that which one sees by a premonitory sign is certainly true. Also, a variety of dreams occurs because of the combination and difference of these four root causes.

Taṃ panetaṃ catubbidhampi supinaṃ sekhaputhujjanāva passanti appahīnavipallāsattā, asekhā na passanti pahīnavipallāsattā. Kiṃ panetaṃ passanto sutto passati paṭibuddho, udāhu neva sutto na paṭibuddhoti? Kiñcettha yadi tāva sutto passati, abhidhammavirodho āpajjati. Bhavaṅgacittena hi supati, taṃ rūpanimittādiārammaṇaṃ rāgādisampayuttaṃ vā na hoti. Supinaṃ passantassa ca īdisāni cittāni uppajjanti. Atha paṭibuddho passati, vinayavirodho āpajjati. Yañhi paṭibuddho passati, taṃ sabbohārikacittena passati. Sabbohārikacittena ca kate vītikkame anāpatti nāma natthi. Supinaṃ passantena pana katepi vītikkame ekantaṃ anāpatti eva. Atha neva sutto na paṭibuddho passati, na nāma passati. Evañca sati supinassa abhāvo ca āpajjati? Na abhāvo. Kasmā? Yasmā kapimiddhapareto passati. Vuttañhetaṃ – ‘‘kapimiddhapareto kho, mahārāja, supinaṃ passatī’’ti.

But both trainees (sekha) and ordinary people see this fourfold dream, because they have not abandoned perversions (vipallāsa); those beyond training (asekha) do not see [dreams] because they have abandoned perversions. But does one see this while sleeping or awake, or neither sleeping nor awake? In this case, if he sees it while sleeping, a contradiction of the Abhidhamma arises. For one sleeps with bhavaṅga-citta, and that is not associated with a rūpanimitta etc. as object, or with attachment etc. And such cittas arise for one who is dreaming. If he sees it while awake, a contradiction of the Vinaya arises. For what one sees awake, one sees with sabbohārika-citta. And in a transgression done with sabbohārika-citta, there is no such thing as non-offense. But even in a transgression done by one who is dreaming, there is only non-offense. If he sees [the dream] neither sleeping nor awake, he does not see it at all. And if that is so, does the non-existence of the dream arise? No, non-existence does not arise. Why? Because one overcome by kapimiddha sees it. For it was said, "Mahārāja, one overcome by kapimiddha sees a dream."

Kapimiddhaparetoti makkaṭaniddāya yutto. Yathā hi makkaṭassa niddā lahuparivattā hoti, evaṃ yā niddā punappunaṃ kusalādicittavokiṇṇattā lahuparivattā, yassā pavattiyaṃ punappunaṃ bhavaṅgato uttaraṇaṃ hoti, tāya yutto supinaṃ passati. Tenāyaṃ supino kusalopi hoti akusalopi abyākatopi. Tattha supinante cetiyavandanadhammassavanadhammadesanādīni karontassa kusalo, pāṇātipātādīni karontassa akusalo, dvīhi antehi mutto āvajjanatadārammaṇakkhaṇe abyākatoti veditabbo. Svāyaṃ dubbalavatthukattā cetanāya paṭisandhiṃ ākaḍḍhituṃ asamattho. Pavatte pana aññehi kusalākusalehi upatthambhito vipākaṃ deti. Kiñcāpi vipākaṃ deti, atha kho avisaye uppannattā abbohārikāva supinantacetanā. So panesa supino kālavasenapi divā tāva diṭṭho na sameti, tathā paṭhamayāme majjhimayāme pacchimayāme ca. Balavapaccūse pana asitapītakhāyite sammā pariṇāmaṃ gate kāyasmiṃ ojāya patiṭṭhitāya aruṇe uggacchamāneva diṭṭho supino sameti. Iṭṭhanimittaṃ supinaṃ passanto iṭṭhaṃ paṭilabhati, aniṭṭhanimittaṃ passanto aniṭṭhaṃ.

Kapimiddhapareto ti: endowed with monkey-sleep. Just as a monkey's sleep is of quick changes, so the sleep that is of quick changes because it is repeatedly interspersed with wholesome cittas etc., in whose occurrence there is repeated rising from bhavaṅga, one endowed with that sees a dream. Therefore, this dream can be wholesome, unwholesome, or indeterminate. There, for one doing such things as worshipping a shrine, hearing Dhamma, preaching Dhamma, etc., in a dream, it is wholesome; for one doing such things as killing living beings, it is unwholesome; that which is free from the two extremes is indeterminate in the moment of adverting and registering. So, this, being of weak object, is incapable of attracting rebirth by volition (cetanā). But in the course [of existence], supported by other wholesome or unwholesome deeds, it gives result. Although it gives result, that volition in the dream is only unreal because it arises in an unreal sphere. But this dream is appropriate according to time: during the day it does not come to fulfillment, and likewise in the first watch, middle watch, and last watch. But in the strong pre-dawn, when the body has undergone proper transformation in what has been eaten and drunk, when the essence (ojā) is established and the dawn is rising, a dream seen at that time comes to fulfillment. One seeing a dream with a desirable sign obtains what is desirable; one seeing [a dream] with an undesirable sign [obtains] what is undesirable.

Ime pana pañca mahāsupine neva lokiyamahājano passati, na mahārājāno, na cakkavattirājāno, na aggasāvakā, na paccekabuddhā, na sammāsambuddhā, eko sabbaññubodhisattoyeva passati. Amhākaṃ pana bodhisatto kadā ime supine passīti? ‘‘Sve buddho bhavissāmī’’ti cātuddasiyaṃ pakkhassa rattivibhāyanakāle passi. Terasiyantipi vadantiyeva. So ime supine disvā uṭṭhāya pallaṅkaṃ ābhuñjitvā nisinno cintesi – ‘‘sace mayā kapilavatthunagare ime supinā diṭṭhā assu, pitu mahārājassa katheyyaṃ. Sace pana me mātā jīveyya, tassā katheyyaṃ. Imasmiṃ kho pana ṭhāne imesaṃ paṭiggāhako nāma natthi, ahameva paṭigaṇhissāmī’’ti. Tato ‘‘idaṃ imassa pubbanimittaṃ idaṃ imassā’’ti sayameva supine paṭiggaṇhitvā uruvelagāme sujātāya dinnaṃ pāyāsaṃ paribhuñjitvā bodhimaṇḍaṃ āruyha bodhiṃ patvā anukkamena jetavane viharanto attano makulabuddhakāle diṭṭhe pañca mahāsupine vitthāretuṃ bhikkhū āmantetvā imaṃ desanaṃ ārabhi.

But these five great dreams are seen neither by ordinary worldly people, nor by great kings, nor by wheel-turning kings, nor by chief disciples, nor by Private Buddhas, nor by Perfectly Enlightened Buddhas, [but] only by a single all-knowing Bodhisatta. But when did our Bodhisatta see these dreams? He saw them on the fourteenth, at dawn, thinking, "Tomorrow I will become a Buddha." They also say on the thirteenth. Having seen these dreams, he arose, sat cross-legged, and thought: "If I had seen these dreams in Kapilavatthu, I would have told my father, the great king. But if my mother were alive, I would have told her. But in this place, there is no one to interpret these [dreams]; I myself will interpret them." Then, having himself interpreted the dreams, [thinking] "this is the premonitory sign of this, this is the premonitory sign of that," having consumed the milk-rice given by Sujātā in Uruvelā village, having ascended the Bodhi-maṇḍa, having attained enlightenment, while dwelling in Jetavana in due course, he began this discourse, addressing the monks in order to explain the five great dreams seen in his Makula Buddha-period.

mahāpathavīti cakkavāḷagabbhaṃ pūretvā ṭhitā mahāpathavī.Mahāsayanaṃ ahosīti sirisayanaṃ ahosi.Ohitoti ṭhapito. So pana na udakasmiṃyeva ṭhapito ahosi, atha kho pācīnasamuddassa uparūparibhāgena gantvā pācīnacakkavāḷamatthake ṭhapito ahosīti veditabbo.Pacchime samudde dakkhiṇe samuddeti etesupi eseva nayo.Tiriyā nāma tiṇajātīti dabbatiṇaṃ vuccati.Nābhiyā uggantvā nabhaṃ āhacca ṭhitā ahosīti naṅgalamattena rattadaṇḍena nābhito uggantvā passantassa passantasseva vidatthimattaṃ ratanamattaṃ byāmamattaṃ yaṭṭhimattaṃ gāvutamattaṃ aḍḍhayojanamattaṃ yojanamattanti evaṃ uggantvā uggantvā anekayojanasahassaṃ nabhaṃ āhacca ṭhitā ahosi.Pādehi ussakkitvāti agganakhato paṭṭhāya pādehi abhiruhitvā.Nānāvaṇṇāti eko nīlavaṇṇo, eko pītavaṇṇo, eko lohitavaṇṇo, eko paṇḍupalāsavaṇṇoti evaṃ nānāvaṇṇā.Setāti paṇḍarā parisuddhā.Mahato mīḷhapabbatassāti tiyojanubbedhassa gūthapabbatassa.Uparūparicaṅkamatīti matthakamatthake caṅkamati. Dīghāyukabuddhā pana tiyojanike mīḷhapabbate anupavisitvā nisinnā viya honti.

Mahāpathavī ti: the great earth standing filling the womb of the world-circle. Mahāsayanaṃ ahosī ti: it became a sleeping couch. Ohito ti: placed. But it should be understood that he was not placed only in the water, but having gone over the upper part of the eastern ocean, he was placed on the top of the eastern world-circle. Pacchime samudde dakkhiṇe samudde ti: the same method applies in these also. Tiriyā nāma tiṇajātī ti: dabba grass is meant. Nābhiyā uggantvā nabhaṃ āhacca ṭhitā ahosī ti: having sprung from the navel with a plough-handle's length of red stalk, and as he looked, springing up and up to a span's length, a cubit's length, an arm's length, a rod's length, a quarter-league's length, half a league's length, a league's length, thus springing up and up, it stood striking the sky for many thousands of leagues. Pādehi ussakkitvā ti: having climbed up with his feet starting from his toenails. Nānāvaṇṇā ti: one is blue, one is yellow, one is red, one is the color of withered leaves, thus of various colors. Setā ti: white, pure. Mahato mīḷhapabbatassā ti: of a mountain of excrement three leagues in thickness. Uparūpari caṅkamatī ti: he walks on the top. But long-lived Buddhas are like ones sitting having entered on a mountain of excrement three leagues [in height].

yampi, bhikkhavetiādimāha. Tattha sabbaguṇadāyakattā buddhānaṃ arahattamaggoanuttarā sammāsambodhināma. Tasmā yaṃ so cakkavāḷamahāpathaviṃ sirisayanabhūtaṃ addasa, taṃ buddhabhāvassa pubbanimittaṃ. Yaṃ himavantapabbatarājānaṃ bimbohanaṃ addasa, taṃ sabbaññutaññāṇabimbohanassa pubbanimittaṃ. Yaṃ cattāro hatthapāde cakkavāḷamatthake ṭhite addasa, taṃ dhammacakkassa appaṭivattiyabhāve pubbanimittaṃ. Yaṃ attānaṃ uttānakaṃ nipannaṃ addasa, taṃ tīsu bhavesu avakujjānaṃ sattānaṃ uttānamukhabhāvassa pubbanimittaṃ. Yaṃ akkhīni ummīletvā passanto viya ahosi, taṃ dibbacakkhupaṭilābhassa pubbanimittaṃ. Yaṃ yāva bhavaggā ekālokaṃ ahosi, taṃ anāvaraṇañāṇassa pubbanimittaṃ. Sesaṃ pāḷivaseneva veditabbanti.

Yampi, bhikkhave etc. he said. There, because it gives all qualities, the path of arahantship for Buddhas is called anuttarā sammāsambodhi 'unsurpassed perfect enlightenment'. Therefore, that he saw the great earth of the world-circle as a sleeping couch was a premonitory sign of Buddhahood. That he saw the king of the Himalayan mountains as a pillow was a premonitory sign of the pillow of all-knowing knowledge. That he saw the four hands and feet placed on the top of the world-circle was a premonitory sign of the irrevertibility of the Wheel of the Dhamma. That he saw himself lying supine was a premonitory sign of the condition of beings upturning in the three existences. That he was as if seeing opening his eyes was a premonitory sign of the attainment of the divine eye. That until the peak of existence there was a single light was a premonitory sign of unobstructed knowledge. The rest should be understood just as in the Pali.

7. Vassasuttavaṇṇanā
7. Vassa Sutta Commentary

197.Sattamenemittāti nimittapāṭhakā.Tejodhātu pakuppatīti mahāaggikkhandho uppajjati.Pāṇinā udakaṃ sampaṭicchitvāti uppannaṃ utusamuṭṭhānaṃ udakaṃ tiyojanasatena hatthena paṭiggahetvā.Pamattā hontīti attano kīḷāya pamattā honti vippavuṭṭhasatino. Tesañhi sakāya ratiyā ‘‘ramāmā’’ti citte uppanne akālepi devo vassati, tadabhāve na vassati. Taṃ sandhāyetaṃ vuttaṃ – ‘‘na kālavassa’’nti. Aṭṭhamanavamāni uttānatthāneva.

197. In the seventh [sutta], nemittā ti: omen readers. Tejodhātu pakuppatī ti: a great mass of fire arises. Pāṇinā udakaṃ sampaṭicchitvā ti: having received the season-produced water that had arisen with his hand for three hundred leagues. Pamattā hontī ti: they are negligent in their play, of withdrawn mindfulness. For when a thought arises in their minds, "Let us enjoy ourselves," the deva rains even out of season; in the absence of that, he does not rain. With reference to that, this was said: "not in season." The eighth and ninth are of obvious meaning.

10. Nissāraṇīyasuttavaṇṇanā
10. Nissāraṇīya Sutta Commentary

200.Dasamenissāraṇīyāti nissaṭā visaññuttā.Dhātuyoti attasuññasabhāvā.Kāmaṃ manasikarototi kāmaṃ manasikarontassa, asubhajjhānato vuṭṭhāya agadaṃ gahetvā visaṃ vīmaṃsanto viya vīmaṃsanatthaṃ kāmābhimukhaṃ cittaṃ pesentassāti attho.Na pakkhandatīti nappavisati.Nappasīdatīti pasādaṃ nāpajjati.Na santiṭṭhatīti nappatiṭṭhahati.Na vimuccatīti na adhimuccati. Yathā pana kukkuṭapattaṃ vā nhārudaddulaṃ vā aggimhi pakkhittaṃ paṭilīyati patikuṭati pativaṭṭati na saṃpasārīyati, evaṃ paṭilīyati na saṃpasārīyati.Nekkhammaṃ kho panāti idha nekkhammaṃ nāma asubhesu paṭhamajjhānaṃ, tadassa manasikaroto cittaṃ pakkhandati.Tassa taṃ cittanti tassa taṃ asubhajjhānacittaṃ.Sugatanti gocare gatattā suṭṭhu gataṃ.Subhāvitanti ahānabhāgiyattā suṭṭhu bhāvitaṃ.Suvuṭṭhitanti kāmato vuṭṭhitaṃ.Suvimuttanti kāmehi suṭṭhu vimuttaṃ.Kāmapaccayā āsavānāma kāmahetukā cattāro āsavā.Vighātāti dukkhā.Pariḷāhāti kāmarāgapariḷāhā.Na so taṃ vedanaṃ vediyatīti so taṃ kāmavedanaṃ vighātapariḷāhavedanañca na vediyati.Idamakkhātaṃ kāmānaṃ nissaraṇanti idaṃ asubhajjhānaṃ kāmehi nissaṭattā kāmānaṃ nissaraṇanti akkhātaṃ. Yo pana taṃ jhānaṃ pādakaṃ katvā saṅkhāre sammasanto tatiyamaggaṃ patvā anāgāmiphalena nibbānaṃ disvā ‘‘puna kāmā nāma natthī’’ti jānāti. Tassa cittaṃ accantanissaraṇameva. Sesapadesupi eseva nayo.

200. In the tenth [sutta], nissāraṇīyā ti: gone forth, disjoined. Dhātuyo ti: elements, of self-empty nature. Kāmaṃ manasikaroto ti: for one considering sensual pleasure, the meaning is for one who, having risen from the contemplation of the repulsive, sends his mind towards sensual pleasure for the purpose of investigating, like one taking an antidote and examining poison. Na pakkhandatī ti: it does not enter. Nappasīdatī ti: it does not attain serenity. Na santiṭṭhatī ti: it does not stand still. Na vimuccatī ti: it does not become liberated. But just as a chicken feather or a tendon scrap thrown into a fire curls up, contracts, recoils, and does not expand, so it curls up and does not expand. Nekkhammaṃ kho panā ti: here, nekhamma means the first jhāna in [contemplating] the repulsive; the mind enters into that when he considers it. Tassa taṃ cittaṃ ti: that mind of his, that repulsive-jhāna-mind. Sugataṃ ti: gone well because it has gone to its object. Subhāvitaṃ ti: well developed because it is conducive to abandonment. Suvuṭṭhitaṃ ti: risen well from sensual pleasure. Suvimuttaṃ ti: well liberated from sensual pleasures. Kāmapaccayā āsavā means the four cankers caused by sensual pleasure. Vighātā ti: pains. Pariḷāhā ti: torments of sensual lust. Na so taṃ vedanaṃ vediyatī ti: he does not feel that feeling of sensual pleasure, and the feeling of pain and torment. Idamakkhātaṃ kāmānaṃ nissaraṇaṃ ti: this contemplation of the repulsive is declared to be the going forth from sensual pleasures because it has gone forth from sensual pleasures. But he who, having made that jhāna a foundation, surveys formations, attains the third path, sees Nibbāna with the fruit of non-returning, and knows that "there are no more sensual pleasures," his mind is truly absolute going forth. The same method [applies] in the remaining passages.

sakkāyaṃ manasikarototi suddhasaṅkhāre pariggaṇhitvā arahattaṃ pattassa sukkhavipassakassa phalasamāpattito vuṭṭhāya vīmaṃsanatthaṃ pañcupādānakkhandhābhimukhaṃ cittaṃ pesentassa.Idamakkhātaṃ sakkāyassa nissaraṇanti idaṃ arahattamaggena ca phalena ca nibbānaṃ disvā ṭhitassa bhikkhuno ‘‘puna sakkāyo natthī’’ti uppannaṃ arahattaphalasamāpatticittaṃ sakkāyassa nissaraṇanti akkhātaṃ. Idāni evaṃ sakkāyanissaraṇaṃ nirodhaṃ patvā ṭhitassa khīṇāsavassa vaṇṇaṃ kathentotassa kāmanandīpi nānusetītiādimāha. Tatthanānusetīti na nibbattati.Ananusayāti anibbattiyā. Sesamettha uttānatthamevāti.

Sakkāyaṃ manasikaroto ti: for one who, having apprehended pure formations and attained arahantship, having risen from fruition attainment, sends his mind towards the five aggregates of clinging for the purpose of investigating, for a dry-insight meditator. Idamakkhātaṃ sakkāyassa nissaraṇaṃ ti: this attainment of the fruit of arahantship arising for a bhikkhu who, having seen Nibbāna with the path of arahantship and the fruit, [thinks] "there is no more personality," is declared to be the going forth from personality. Now, while describing the one whose cankers are destroyed, who stands having attained this going forth from personality that is cessation, he says tassa kāmanandīpi nānusetī etc. There, nānusetī ti: does not arise. Ananusayā ti: by non-arising. The rest here is of obvious meaning.

5. Pañcamapaṇṇāsakaṃ

5. Fifth Set of Fifty

(21) 1. Kimilavaggo

(21) 1. Kimila Section

1. Kimilasuttavaṇṇanā
1. Kimila Sutta Commentary

201.Pañcamassa paṭhamekimilāyanti evaṃnāmake nagare.Niculavaneti mucalindavane.Etadavocāti ayaṃ kira thero tasmiṃyeva nagare seṭṭhiputto satthu santike pabbajitvā pubbenivāsañāṇaṃ paṭilabhi. So attanā nivutthaṃ khandhasantānaṃ anussaranto kassapadasabalassa sāsanosakkanakāle pabbajitvā catūsu parisāsu sāsane agāravaṃ karontīsu nisseṇiṃ bandhitvā pabbataṃ āruyha tattha samaṇadhammaṃ katvā attano nivutthabhāvaṃ addasa. So ‘‘satthāraṃ upasaṅkamitvā taṃ kāraṇaṃ pucchissāmī’’ti etaṃ ‘‘ko nu kho, bhante’’tiādivacanaṃ avoca.

201. In the first, Kimilāya means in a city of that name. Niculavane means in Mucalinda Grove. Etadavocā means that this elder, having been born as a wealthy man's son in that city, ordained in the presence of the Teacher and attained the knowledge of past lives. Remembering the aggregates he had inhabited, having ordained during the period when the dispensation of Kassapa, the Ten-Powered One, was being weakened, and when the four assemblies were showing disrespect towards the dispensation, he built a ladder and climbed a mountain. There, practicing the life of a recluse, he saw his former existence. Thinking, "I will approach the Teacher and ask about this reason," he spoke these words, beginning with "ko nu kho, bhante."

Satthari agāravā viharanti appatissāti satthari gāravañceva jeṭṭhakabhāvañca anupaṭṭhapetvā viharanti. Sesesupi eseva nayo. Tattha cetiyaṅgaṇādīsu chattaṃ dhāretvā upāhanā āruyha vicaranto nānappakārañca niratthakakathaṃ kathento satthari agāravo viharati nāma. Dhammassavanagge pana nisīditvā niddāyanto ceva nānappakārañca niratthakakathaṃ kathento dhamme agāravo viharati nāma. Saṅghamajjhe bāhāvikkhepakaṃ nānattakathaṃ kathento theranavamajjhimesu ca cittīkāraṃ akaronto saṅghe agāravo viharati nāma. Sikkhaṃ aparipūrento sikkhāya agāravo viharati nāma. Aññamaññaṃ kalahabhaṇḍanādīni karonto aññamaññaṃ agāravo viharati nāma. Dutiyaṃ uttānatthameva.

Satthari agāravā viharanti appatissā means they live without showing respect and deference to the Teacher. The same method applies to the rest as well. There, one lives disrespectfully towards the Teacher by wandering around the monastery grounds and so on, holding an umbrella and wearing shoes, and telling various kinds of pointless stories. However, one lives disrespectfully towards the Dhamma by sitting and sleeping during the teaching of the Dhamma and telling various kinds of pointless stories. One lives disrespectfully towards the Sangha in the midst of the Sangha by gesticulating one’s arms, telling diverse stories, and not showing regard to the elders, those in the middle, and the new ones. One lives disrespectfully towards the training by not fulfilling the training. One lives disrespectfully towards one another by engaging in quarrels, disputes, and so on. The second is straightforward in meaning.

3. Assājānīyasuttavaṇṇanā
3. Assājānīyasutta-vaṇṇanā

203-204.Tatiyeajjavenāti ujubhāvena avaṅkagamanena.Javenāti padajavena.Maddavenāti sarīramudutāya.Khantiyāti adhivāsanakkhantiyā.Soraccenāti sucisīlatāya. Bhikkhuvāreajjavanti ñāṇassa ujukagamanaṃ.Javoti sūraṃ hutvā ñāṇassa gamanabhāvo.Maddavanti sīlamaddavaṃ.Khantīti adhivāsanakkhantiyeva.Soraccaṃsucisīlatāyeva. Catutthe pañca balāni missakāni kathitāni.

203-204. In the third, ajjavenā means by straightness, by going without crookedness. Javenā means by swiftness of foot. Maddavenā means by gentleness of body. Khantiyā means by forbearance of endurance. Soraccenā means by purity of virtue. In the bhikkhu section, ajjava means the straight going of knowledge. Javo means the state of knowledge going by being courageous. Maddava means gentleness of virtue. Khantī means forbearance of endurance itself. Soraccaṃ means purity of virtue itself. In the fourth, the five powers are spoken of mixed together.

5. Cetokhilasuttavaṇṇanā
5. Cetokhilasutta-vaṇṇanā

205.Pañcamecetokhilāti cittassa thaddhabhāvā, kacavarabhāvā, khāṇukabhāvā.Satthari kaṅkhatīti satthu sarīre vā guṇe vā kaṅkhati. Sarīre kaṅkhamāno ‘‘dvattiṃsavarapurisalakkhaṇapaṭimaṇḍitaṃ nāma sarīraṃ atthi nu kho natthī’’ti kaṅkhati, guṇe kaṅkhamāno ‘‘atītānāgatapaccuppannajānanasamatthaṃ sabbaññutaññāṇaṃ atthi nu kho natthī’’ti kaṅkhati.Vicikicchatīti vicinanto kicchati, dukkhaṃ āpajjati, vinicchetuṃ na sakkoti.Nādhimuccatīti evametanti adhimokkhaṃ na paṭilabhati.Na sampasīdatīti guṇesu otaritvā nibbicikicchabhāvena pasīdituṃ anāvilo bhavituṃ na sakkoti.Ātappāyāti kilesasantāpakavīriyakaraṇatthāya.Anuyogāyāti punappunaṃ yogāya.Sātaccāyāti satatakiriyāya.Padhānāyāti padahanatthāya.Ayaṃ paṭhamo cetokhiloti ayaṃ satthari vicikicchāsaṅkhāto paṭhamo cittassa thaddhabhāvo evametassa bhikkhuno appahīno hoti.

205. In the fifth, cetokhilā means stiffness of mind, a state of being like rubbish, a state of being like a stump. Satthari kaṅkhatī means he doubts in the Teacher’s body or in his qualities. Doubting in the body, he doubts, "Is there indeed a body adorned with the thirty-two marks of a great man, or is there not?" Doubting in the qualities, he doubts, "Is there indeed omniscient knowledge capable of knowing the past, future, and present, or is there not?" Vicikicchatī means he labors while investigating, he encounters suffering, he is not able to decide. Nādhimuccatī means he does not attain conviction that ‘this is so.’ Na sampasīdatī means he is not able to become clear, to be serene, having entered into the qualities in a state free from doubt. Ātappāyā means for the sake of doing energy that scorches defilements. Anuyogāyā means for repeated engagement. Sātaccāyā means for continuous action. Padhānāyā means for the sake of striving. Ayaṃ paṭhamo cetokhilo means this first stiffness of the mind, reckoned as doubt in the Teacher, is unabandoned by this bhikkhu.

Dhammeti pariyattidhamme ca paṭivedhadhamme ca. Pariyattidhamme kaṅkhamāno ‘‘tepiṭakaṃ buddhavacanaṃ caturāsītidhammakkhandhasahassānīti vadanti, atthi nu kho etaṃ natthī’’ti kaṅkhati. Paṭivedhadhamme kaṅkhamāno ‘‘vipassanānissando maggo nāma, magganissandaṃ phalaṃ nāma, sabbasaṅkhārapaṭinissaggo nibbānaṃ nāmāti vadanti, taṃ atthi nu kho natthī’’ti kaṅkhati.Saṅghe kaṅkhatīti ‘‘ujuppaṭipanno’’tiādīnaṃ padānaṃ vasena ‘‘evarūpaṃ paṭipadaṃ paṭipanno cattāro maggaṭṭhā cattāro phalaṭṭhāti aṭṭhannaṃ puggalānaṃ samūhabhūto saṅgho nāma atthi nu kho natthī’’ti kaṅkhati.Sikkhāyakaṅkhamāno ‘‘adhisīlasikkhā nāma adhicittaadhipaññāsikkhā nāmāti vadanti, sā atthi nu kho natthī’’ti kaṅkhati.Ayaṃ pañcamoti ayaṃ sabrahmacārīsu kopasaṅkhāto pañcamo cittassa thaddhabhāvo kacavarabhāvo khāṇukabhāvo.

Dhamme means in the Dhamma of learning and in the Dhamma of realization. Doubting in the Dhamma of learning, he doubts, "They say that the Tipitaka is the word of the Buddha, eighty-four thousand aggregates of teachings; is this indeed so, or is it not?" Doubting in the Dhamma of realization, he doubts, "They say that there is a path that is the outflow of insight, a fruit that is the outflow of the path, and Nibbana that is the relinquishing of all conditioned things; is that indeed so, or is it not?" Saṅghe kaṅkhatī means doubting, on the basis of phrases such as "one who has practiced straightly," "is there indeed a Sangha, a group of eight types of individuals—the four who are established in the path and the four who are established in the fruit—who have practiced such a practice, or is there not?" Sikkhāya kaṅkhamāno means doubting in the training, "They say there is the training in higher virtue, the training in higher mind, and the training in higher wisdom; is that indeed so, or is it not?" Ayaṃ pañcamo means this fifth stiffness of the mind, reckoned as anger towards co-religious, a state of being like rubbish, a state of being like a stump.

6. Vinibandhasuttavaṇṇanā
6. Vinibandhasutta-vaṇṇanā

206.Chaṭṭhecetasovinibandhāti cittaṃ vinibandhitvā muṭṭhiyaṃ katvā viya gaṇhantīti cetasovinibandhā.Kāmeti vatthukāmepi kilesakāmepi.Kāyeti attano kāye.Rūpeti bahiddhārūpe.Yāvadatthanti yattakaṃ icchati, tattakaṃ.Udarāvadehakanti udarapūraṃ. Tañhi udaraṃ avadehanato udarāvadehakanti vuccati.Seyyasukhanti mañcapīṭhasukhaṃ, utusukhaṃ vā.Passasukhanti yathā samparivattakaṃ sayantassa dakkhiṇapassa vāmapassānaṃ sukhaṃ hoti, evaṃ uppannasukhaṃ.Middhasukhanti niddāsukhaṃ.Anuyuttoti yuttappayutto viharati.Paṇidhāyāti patthayitvā.Sīlenātiādīsusīlanti catupārisuddhisīlaṃ.Vatanti vatasamādānaṃ.Tapoti tapacaraṇaṃ.Brahmacariyanti methunavirati.Devo vā bhavissāmīti mahesakkhadevo vā bhavissāmi.Devaññataro vāti appesakkhadevesu vā aññataroti.

206. In the sixth, cetasovinibandhā means things that bind the mind, as if grasping it having made a fist. Kāme means in sense objects as well as defilements of sensual desire. Kāye means in one’s own body. Rūpe means in external form. Yāvadattha means as much as one wants, that much. Udarāvadehaka means filling the belly. For, that belly is called udarāvadehaka because of abandoning the body. Seyyasukha means the pleasure of couch and chair, or the pleasure of the seasons. Passasukha means the pleasure that arises when lying down, alternatively turning from the right side to the left side. Middhasukha means the pleasure of sleep. Anuyutto means he lives devoted and engaged. Paṇidhāyā means aspiring. In sīlenā etc., sīla means the fourfold purification of virtue. Vata means undertaking a vow. Tapo means the practice of asceticism. Brahmacariya means abstinence from sexual activity. Devo vā bhavissāmī means I will become a deity of great power. Devaññataro vā means or one of the deities of little power.

7-8. Yāgusuttādivaṇṇanā
7-8. Yāgusuttādi-vaṇṇanā

207-208.Sattamevātaṃ anulometīti vātaṃ anulometvā harati.Vatthiṃ sodhetīti dhamaniyo suddhā karoti.Āmāvasesaṃ pācetīti sace āmāvasesakaṃ hoti, taṃ pāceti. Aṭṭhameacakkhussanti na cakkhūnaṃ hitaṃ, cakkhuṃ visuddhaṃ na karoti.

207-208. In the seventh, vātaṃ anulometī means it moves harmonizing with the wind. Vatthiṃ sodhetī means it purifies the channels. Āmāvasesaṃ pācetī means if there is any residue of raw food, it digests it. In the eighth, acakkhussa means it is not beneficial for the eyes, it does not purify the eye.

9. Gītassarasuttavaṇṇanā
9. Gītassarasutta-vaṇṇanā

209.Navameāyatakenāti dīghena, paripuṇṇapadabyañjanakaṃ gāthāvattañca vināsetvā pavattena.Sarakuttimpi nikāmayamānassāti evaṃ gītassaro kātabboti sarakiriyaṃ patthayamānassa.Samādhissa bhaṅgo hotīti samathavipassanācittassa vināso hoti.

209. In the ninth, āyatakenā means with a drawn-out, continuous sound, destroying the meter of the verses with complete words and syllables. Sarakuttimpi nikāmayamānassā means to one desiring to make modulations of the voice, thinking, ‘the voice should be made in this way.’ Samādhissa bhaṅgo hotī means there is destruction of the mind of serenity and insight.

10. Muṭṭhassatisuttavaṇṇanā
10. Muṭṭhassatisutta-vaṇṇanā

210.Dasamedukkhaṃ supatīti nānāvidhaṃ supinaṃ passanto dukkhaṃ supati.Dukkhaṃ paṭibujjhatīti paṭibujjhantopi uttasitvā salomahaṃso paṭibujjhati. Imasmiṃ sutte satisampajaññaṃ missakaṃ kathitaṃ.

210. In the tenth, dukkhaṃ supatī means he sleeps suffering, seeing various kinds of dreams. Dukkhaṃ paṭibujjhatī means even when waking up, he wakes up terrified, with his hair standing on end. In this sutta, mindfulness and comprehension are spoken of mixed together.

(22) 2. Akkosakavaggo

(22) 2. Akkosakavagga

1. Akkosakasuttavaṇṇanā
1. Akkosakasutta-vaṇṇanā

211.Dutiyassa paṭhameakkosakaparibhāsakoti dasahi akkosavatthūhi akkosako, bhayadassanena paribhāsako.Chinnaparipanthoti lokuttaraparipanthassa chinnattā chinnaparipantho.Rogātaṅkanti rogoyeva kicchajīvikāyāvahanato rogātaṅko nāma.

211. In the first of the second, akkosakaparibhāsako means one who abuses with the ten grounds for abuse, one who reviles with fearful display. Chinnaparipantho means one whose obstacles are cut off, since the obstacles of the supramundane are cut off. Rogātaṅka means illness itself is called rogātaṅka because it brings about a difficult livelihood.

2. Bhaṇḍanakārakasuttavaṇṇanā
2. Bhaṇḍanakārakasutta-vaṇṇanā

212.Dutiyeadhikaraṇakārakoti catunnaṃ adhikaraṇānaṃ aññatarassa kārako.Anadhigatanti pubbe appattavisesaṃ.

212. In the second, adhikaraṇakārako means one who makes one of the four legal disputes. Anadhigata means a special quality not previously attained.

3. Sīlasuttavaṇṇanā
3. Sīlasutta-vaṇṇanā

213.Tatiyedussīloti asīlo nissīlo.Sīlavipannoti vipannasīlo bhinnasaṃvaro.Pamādādhikaraṇanti pamādakāraṇā. Idañca suttaṃ gahaṭṭhānaṃ vasena āgataṃ, pabbajitānampi pana labbhateva. Gahaṭṭho hi yena yena sippaṭṭhānena jīvikaṃ kappeti, yadi kasiyā, yadi vaṇijjāya, pāṇātipātādivasena pamatto taṃ taṃ yathākālaṃ sampādetuṃ na sakkoti, athassa mūlaṃ vinassati. Māghātakālepi pāṇātipātaṃ adinnādānādīni ca karonto daṇḍavasena mahatiṃ bhogajāniṃ nigacchati. Pabbajito dussīlo pamādakāraṇā sīlato buddhavacanato jhānato sattaariyadhanato ca jāniṃ nigacchati. Gahaṭṭhassa ‘‘asuko asukakule jāto dussīlo pāpadhammo pariccattaidhalokaparaloko salākabhattamattampi na detī’’ti catuparisamajjhe pāpako kittisaddo abbhuggacchati. Pabbajitassa ‘‘asuko nāsakkhi sīlaṃ rakkhituṃ buddhavacanaṃ gahetuṃ, vejjakammādīhi jīvati, chahi agāravehi samannāgato’’ti evaṃ abbhuggacchati.

213. In the third, dussīlo means one who is without virtue, devoid of virtue. Sīlavipanno means one who is corrupt in virtue, with broken restraint. Pamādādhikaraṇa means due to negligence. And this sutta comes with regard to householders, but it can be obtained by renunciants as well. For the householder, by whatever craft he makes a living, whether it be by farming or by trade, if he is negligent due to killing living beings and so on, he is not able to accomplish that in due time, then his capital is ruined. Even at the time of a festival, doing killing of living beings, taking what is not given, and so on, he incurs a great loss of wealth due to punishment. The renunciant who is immoral, due to negligence, incurs loss from virtue, from the word of the Buddha, from jhāna, and from the seven riches of the Noble Ones. For the householder, the evil report spreads in the midst of the four assemblies that "so-and-so, born in such-and-such family, is immoral, of evil conduct, deprived of this world and the next, and does not give even a portion of alms-food." For the renunciant, it spreads that "so-and-so was not able to protect virtue, to grasp the word of the Buddha, he lives by medical practices and so on, and is endowed with the six kinds of disrespect."

Avisāradoti gahaṭṭho tāva ‘‘avassaṃ bahūnaṃ sannipātaṭṭhāne koci mama kammaṃ jānissati, atha maṃ niggaṇhissanti vā, rājakulassa vā dassantī’’ti sabhayo upasaṅkamati.Maṅkubhūtoca patitakkhandho adhomukho aṅguṭṭhakena bhūmiṃ kasanto nisīdati, visārado hutvā kathetuṃ na sakkoti. Pabbajitopi ‘‘bahū bhikkhū sannipatitā, avassaṃ koci mama kammaṃ jānissati, atha me uposathampi pavāraṇampi ṭhapetvā sāmaññā cāvetvā nikkaḍḍhissantī’’ti sabhayo upasaṅkamati, visārado hutvā kathetuṃ na sakkoti. Ekacco pana dussīlopi dappito viya carati, sopi ajjhāsayena maṅku hotiyeva.

Avisārado means the householder approaches fearfully, thinking, "Surely someone will know my deed in a gathering place of many, then they will rebuke me or hand me over to the royal family." Maṅkubhūto means one whose faculties are diminished, downcast, scratching the ground with his thumb, he sits, unable to speak confidently. The renunciant also approaches fearfully, thinking, "Many bhikkhus have gathered, surely someone will know my deed, then they will remove me from the Uposatha and Pavāraṇā, and they will expel me from the life of a Samaṇa," he is unable to speak confidently. But some immoral people behave as if arrogant; even they are truly dejected in their intention.

Sammūḷho kālaṃ karotīti tassa hi maraṇamañce nipannassa dussīlakammaṃ samādāya vattitaṭṭhānaṃ āpāthaṃ āgacchati. So ummīletvā idhalokaṃ passati, nimmīletvā paralokaṃ. Tassa cattāro apāyā upaṭṭhahanti, sattisatena sīse pahariyamāno viya hoti. So ‘‘vāretha vārethā’’ti viravanto marati. Tena vuttaṃ – ‘‘sammūḷho kālaṃ karotī’’ti. Pañcamapadaṃ uttānameva. Ānisaṃsakathā vuttavipariyāyena veditabbā.

Sammūḷho kālaṃ karotī means for him, lying on his deathbed, the place where he conducted his immoral deeds comes into view. He opens his eyes and sees this world, he closes his eyes and sees the next world. The four woeful courses appear to him, he is as if being struck on the head with a hundred spears. He dies crying out, "Stop it, stop it!" Therefore, it was said, "sammūḷho kālaṃ karotī." The fifth phrase is straightforward in meaning. The talk of benefits should be understood in the opposite way to what was said.

4. Bahubhāṇisuttavaṇṇanā
4. Bahubhāṇisutta-vaṇṇanā

214.Catutthebahubhāṇisminti paññāya aparicchinditvā bahuṃ bhaṇante.Mantabhāṇisminti mantā vuccati paññā, tāya paricchinditvā bhaṇante.

214. In the fourth, bahubhāṇismi means one who speaks much without discerning with wisdom. Mantabhāṇismi means manta is called wisdom, one who speaks discerning with that.

5. Paṭhamaakkhantisuttavaṇṇanā
5. Paṭhamaakkhantisutta-vaṇṇanā

215.Pañcameverabahuloti puggalaverenapi akusalaverenapi bahuvero.Vajjabahuloti dosabahulo.

215. In the fifth, verabahulo means much animosity with personal animosity as well as unskillful animosity. Vajjabahulo means much fault.

6. Dutiyaakkhantisuttavaṇṇanā
6. Dutiyaakkhantisutta-vaṇṇanā

216.Chaṭṭheluddoti dāruṇo kakkhaḷo.Vippaṭisārīti maṅkubhāvena samannāgato.

216. In the sixth, luddo means fierce, rough. Vippaṭisārī means endowed with dejection.

7.Paṭhamaapāsādikasuttavaṇṇanā
7.Paṭhamaapāsādikasutta-vaṇṇanā

217.Sattameapāsādiketi apāsādikehi kāyakammādīhi samannāgate.Pāsādiketi pasādāvahe parisuddhasamācāre. Aṭṭhamanavamāni uttānatthāneva.

217. In the seventh, apāsādike means endowed with unappealing bodily actions and so on. Pāsādike means conduct that inspires confidence, of pure conduct. The eighth and ninth are straightforward in meaning.

10. Madhurāsuttavaṇṇanā
10. Madhurāsutta-vaṇṇanā

220.Dasamepañcime, bhikkhave, ādīnavā madhurāyanti ekaṃ samayaṃ bhagavā bhikkhusaṅghaparivuto cārikaṃ caramāno madhurānagaraṃ sampāpuṇitvā antonagaraṃ pavisituṃ ārabhi. Athekā micchādiṭṭhikā yakkhinī acelā hutvā dve hatthe pasāretvā jivhaṃ nillāletvā dasabalassa purato aṭṭhāsi. Satthā antonagaraṃ appavisitvā tatova nikkhamitvā vihāraṃ agamāsi. Mahājano khādanīyabhojanīyañceva sakkārasammānañca ādāya vihāraṃ gantvā buddhappamukhassa bhikkhusaṅghassa dānaṃ adāsi. Satthā tassa nagarassa niggaṇhanatthāya imaṃ suttaṃ ārabhi. Tatthavisamāti na samatalā.Bahurajāti vātapaharaṇakāle uddhatena rajakkhandhena pariyonaddhā viya hoti. Sesaṃ sabbattha uttānamevāti.

220. In the tenth, pañcime, bhikkhave, ādīnavā madhurāya means on one occasion, the Blessed One, wandering on tour surrounded by a Sangha of bhikkhus, arrived at the city of Madhura and began to enter the inner city. Then, a certain wrong-viewed ogress, having become naked, stretching out both hands, and lolling her tongue, stood in front of the Ten-Powered One. The Teacher, without entering the inner city, departed from there and went to the monastery. The great crowd, taking food, both hard and soft, and honorific offerings, went to the monastery and gave alms to the Sangha of bhikkhus with the Buddha at its head. The Teacher began this sutta in order to subdue that city. There, visamā means not level. Bahurajā means it is as if covered with a mass of dust raised by the wind. The rest is straightforward in meaning everywhere.

(23) 3. Dīghacārikavaggo

(23) 3. Dīghacārikavagga

1. Paṭhamadīghacārikasuttavaṇṇanā
1. Paṭhamadīghacārikasutta-vaṇṇanā

221.Tatiyassa paṭhameanavatthacārikanti avavatthitacārikaṃ.Sutaṃ na pariyodapetīti yampissa sutaṃ atthi, taṃ pariyodapetuṃ na sakkoti.Sutenekaccena avisārado hotīti thokathokena sutena vijjamānenāpi ñāṇena somanassappatto na hoti.Samavatthacāreti samavatthitacāre. Dutiyaṃ uttānatthameva.

221. In the first of the third, anavatthacārika means wandering without settling down. Sutaṃ na pariyodapetī means he is not able to purify even what he has heard. Sutenekaccena avisārado hotī means he is not confident, having attained joy with the knowledge existing even from a small amount of what he has heard. Samavatthacāre means wandering having settled down. The second is straightforward in meaning.

3-4. Atinivāsasuttādivaṇṇanā
3-4. Atinivāsasuttādi-vaṇṇanā

223-224.Tatiyebahubhaṇḍoti bahuparikkhāro.Bahubhesajjoti sappinavanītādīnaṃ bahutāya bahubhesajjo.Byattoti byāsatto.Saṃsaṭṭhoti pañcavidhena saṃsaggena saṃsaṭṭho hutvā.Ananulomikenāti sāsanassa ananucchavikena. Catutthevaṇṇamaccharīti guṇamaccharī.Dhammamaccharīti pariyattimaccharī.

223-224. In the third, bahubhaṇḍo means much equipment. Bahubhesajjo means much medicine due to the abundance of ghee and butter etc. Byatto means attached. Saṃsaṭṭho means having become associated with five kinds of association. Ananulomikenā means unsuitable for the dispensation. In the fourth, vaṇṇamaccharī means stingy with praise. Dhammamaccharī means stingy with learning.

5-6. Kulūpakasuttādivaṇṇanā
5-6. Kulūpakasuttādi-vaṇṇanā

225-226.Pañcameanāmantacāre āpajjatīti ‘‘nimantito sabhatto samāno santaṃ bhikkhuṃ anāpucchā purebhattaṃ vā pacchābhattaṃ vā kulesu cārittaṃ āpajjeyyā’’ti sikkhāpade (pārā. 294) vuttaṃ āpattiṃ āpajjati.Raho nisajjāyātiādīnipi tesaṃ tesaṃ sikkhāpadānaṃ vasena veditabbāni. Chaṭṭheativelanti atikkantapamāṇakālaṃ. Sattamaṃ uttānameva.

225-226. In the fifth, anāmantacāre āpajjatī means "if, being invited to a meal, he would resort to wandering in families before or after the meal without asking the bhikkhu," he incurs the offense stated in the training rule (pārā. 294). Raho nisajjāyā and so on should be understood according to the respective training rules. In the sixth, ativela means beyond the proper time. The seventh is straightforward in meaning.

8. Ussūrabhattasuttavaṇṇanā
8. Ussūrabhattasutta-vaṇṇanā

228.Aṭṭhameussūrabhatteti atidivāpacanabhatte.Na kālena paṭipūjentīti yāgukāle yāguṃ, khajjakakāle khajjakaṃ, bhojanakāle bhojanaṃ apacantā yuttappayuttakālassa atināmitattā na kālena paṭipūjenti, attano citteneva denti nāma. Tato tepi tesu attano gehaṃ āgatesu tatheva karonti. Kulapaveṇiyā āgatā balipaṭiggāhikā devatāpi yuttappayuttakālena lābhaṃ labhamānāyeva rakkhanti gopayanti pīḷaṃ akatvā. Akāle labhamānā pana ‘‘ime amhesu anādarā’’ti ārakkhaṃ na karonti.

228. In the eighth, ussūrabhatta means food prepared after midday. Na kālena paṭipūjentī means they do not properly honor with the appropriate timing—not preparing rice-gruel at the time for rice-gruel, snacks at the time for snacks, or food at the time for food. Because the proper timing of what is suitable has been allowed to pass, they give merely according to their own inclination. Then, when those deities come to their house, they act in the same way. The deities who receive offerings, who have come through the family tradition, protect and guard only when they receive offerings at the appropriate times, without causing harm. But those who receive them at inappropriate times do not offer protection, thinking, "These people are disrespectful to us."

Vimukhā kammaṃ karontīti ‘‘pāto kiñci na labhāma, khudāya paṭipīḷitā kammaṃ kātuṃ na sakkomā’’ti kammaṃ vissajjetvā nisīdanti.Anojavantaṃ hotīti akāle bhuttaṃ ojaṃ harituṃ na sakkoti. Sukkapakkho vuttavipallāsena veditabbo.

Vimukhā kammaṃ karontī means, "We don't get anything in the morning, and we are too oppressed by hunger to work," so they abandon their work and sit down. Anojavantaṃ hotī means food eaten at the wrong time is not able to provide nourishment. The white side (sukkapakka) should be understood in reverse of what has been said.

9. Paṭhamakaṇhasappasuttavaṇṇanā
9. Explanation of the First Kaṇhasappa Sutta

229.Navamesabhīrūti saniddo mahāniddaṃ niddāyati.Sappaṭibhayoti taṃ nissāya bhayaṃ uppajjati, tasmā sappaṭibhayo.Mittadubbhīti pānabhojanadāyakampi mittaṃ dubbhati hiṃsati. Mātugāmepi eseva nayo.

229. In the ninth, sabhīrū means one who sleeps a great sleep, deeply asleep. Sappaṭibhayo means fear arises dependent on him, therefore he is frightening. Mittadubbhī means he harms even a friend who gives drink and food. The same method applies to women.

10. Dutiyakaṇhasappasuttavaṇṇanā
10. Explanation of the Second Kaṇhasappa Sutta

230.Dasameghoravisoti kakkhaḷaviso.Dujjivhoti dvidhā bhinnajivho.Ghoravisatāti ghoravisatāya. Sesadvayepi eseva nayo.

230. In the tenth, ghoraviso means potent poison. Dujjivho means one with a forked tongue. Ghoravisatā means by the state of having potent poison. The same method applies to the other two as well.

(24) 4. Āvāsikavaggo

(24) 4. Āvāsika Vagga

1. Āvāsikasuttavaṇṇanā
1. Āvāsika Sutta Explanation

231.Catutthassa paṭhamena ākappasampannoti samaṇākappena sampanno.Abhāvanīyo hotīti vaḍḍhanīyo na hoti. Dutiyaṃ uttānameva.

231. In the first sutta of the fourth vagga, na ākappasampanno means not endowed with the appearance of a monk. Abhāvanīyo hotī means he is not to be developed. The second is straightforward.

3. Sobhanasuttavaṇṇanā
3. Sobhana Sutta Explanation

233.Tatiyepaṭibaloti kāyabalena ca ñāṇabalena ca samannāgatattā paṭibalo.

233. In the third, paṭibalo means capable, because he is endowed with both physical strength and the strength of knowledge.

4. Bahūpakārasuttavaṇṇanā
4. Bahūpakāra Sutta Explanation

234.Catutthekhaṇḍaphullanti patitaṭṭhānañca bhinnaṭṭhānañca.Paṭisaṅkharotīti paṭipākatikaṃ karoti.Ārocetīti idaṃ pavāritakulānaṃ vasena vuttaṃ.

234. In the fourth, khaṇḍaphulla means places that have fallen apart and places that are broken. Paṭisaṅkharotī means he restores it to its original condition. Ārocetī means this is said with reference to invited families.

5. Anukampasuttavaṇṇanā
5. Anukampa Sutta Explanation

235.Pañcameadhisīlesūti pañcasu sīlesu.Dhammadassane nivesetīti catusaccadhammadassane patiṭṭhāpeti.Arahaggatanti sabbasakkārānaṃ arahe ratanattayeva gataṃ, tīsu vatthūsu garucittīkāraṃ upaṭṭhapethāti attho. Chaṭṭhaṃ uttānameva.

235. In the fifth, adhisīlesū means in the five precepts. Dhammadassane nivesetī means he establishes them in the vision of the Four Noble Truths. Arahaggata means gone to the worthy one of all reverence, namely, the Triple Gem; the meaning is that he establishes a reverential attitude towards the three objects. The sixth is straightforward.

7. Dutiyaavaṇṇārahasuttavaṇṇanā
7. Dutiyaavaṇṇāraha Sutta Explanation

237.Sattameāvāsapaligedhīti āvāsaṃ balavagiddhivasena gilitvā viya ṭhito. Sesaṃ sabbaṃ uttānamevāti.

237. In the seventh, āvāsapaligedhī means he is attached to his dwelling, as if he has swallowed it with strong greed. The rest is all straightforward.

(25) 5. Duccaritavaggo

(25) 5. Duccarita Vagga

1. Paṭhamaduccaritasuttavaṇṇanā
1. Paṭhamaduccarita Sutta Explanation

241.Pañcamassa paṭhameduccarite sucariteti idaṃ abhedato vuttaṃ,kāyaduccaritetiādi kāyadvārādīnaṃ vasena bhedato.Saddhammāti dasakusalakammapathadhammato.Asaddhammeti akusalakammapathasaṅkhāte assaddhamme.

241. In the first sutta of the fifth vagga, duccarite sucarite this is stated without distinction, but kāyaduccarite etc., is with distinction based on the doors of body, etc. Saddhammā means the ten wholesome courses of action. Asaddhamme means in the unrighteousness reckoned as the unwholesome courses of action.

9. Sivathikasuttavaṇṇanā
9. Sivathika Sutta Explanation

249.Navamesivathikāyāti susāne.Ārodanāti ārodanaṭṭhānaṃ.Asucināti jigucchanīyena.

249. In the ninth, sivathikāyā means in a cemetery. Ārodanā means a place for wailing. Asucinā means with what is repulsive.

10. Puggalappasādasuttavaṇṇanā
10. Puggalappasāda Sutta Explanation

250.Dasamepuggalappasādeti ekapuggalasmiṃ uppannappasāde.Ante nisīdāpetīti bhikkhūnaṃ āsanapariyante nisīdāpeti. Sesaṃ sabbattha uttānatthamevāti.

250. In the tenth, puggalappasāde means in the faith that has arisen in one individual. Ante nisīdāpetī means he seats them at the edge of the monks’ seating area. The rest is all straightforward in all cases.

(26) 6. Upasampadāvaggo

(26) 6. Upasampadā Vagga

1-3. Upasampādetabbasuttādivaṇṇanā
1-3. Upasampādetabba Sutta Explanation

251-253.Chaṭṭhassa paṭhameupasampādetabbanti upajjhāyena hutvā upasampādetabbaṃ. Dutiyenissayo dātabboti ācariyena hutvā nissayo dātabbo. Tatiyesāmaṇero upaṭṭhāpetabboti upajjhāyena hutvā sāmaṇero gahetabbo. Iti imāni tīṇipi suttāni paṭhamabodhiyaṃ khīṇāsavavasena vuttāni. Catutthādīni anupadavaṇṇanāto uttānatthāneva.

251-253. In the first sutta of the sixth vagga, upasampādetabba means should be conferred the higher ordination by being the preceptor. In the second, nissayo dātabbo means should be given dependence by being the teacher. In the third, sāmaṇero upaṭṭhāpetabbo means the novice should be cared for, by being the preceptor. Thus, these three suttas were spoken in the first enlightenment with reference to those whose taints are destroyed. The fourth and following are straightforward in meaning from the explanation without further detail.

1. Sammutipeyyālādivaṇṇanā
1. Sammuti peyyāla Explanation

272.Bhattuddesakādīnaṃ vinicchayakathā samantapāsādikāya vinayaṭṭhakathāyaṃ (cūḷava. aṭṭha. 325) vuttanayena veditabbāti.Sammato na pesetabboti pakatiyā sammato ‘‘gaccha bhattāni uddisāhī’’ti na pesetabbo.

272. The explanation of the decisions regarding the distributor of food, etc., should be understood in accordance with the method stated in the Vinaya commentary, Samantapāsādikā (cūḷava. aṭṭha. 325). Sammato na pesetabbo means one who is authorized by nature should not be sent, saying, "Go and distribute the food."

273-285.Sāṭiyaggāhāpakoti vassikasāṭikāya gāhāpako.Pattaggāhāpakoti ‘‘yo ca tassā bhikkhuparisāya pattapariyanto, so tassa bhikkhuno padātabbo’’ti ettha vuttapattaggāhāpako.

273-285. Sāṭiyaggāhāpako means one who obtains the rains-cloth. Pattaggāhāpako means one who obtains the bowl, as stated here: "Whatever is the last bowl of that monastic community, that should be given to that monk."

293-302.Ājīvakoti naggaparibbājako.Nigaṇṭhoti purimabhāgappaṭicchanno.Muṇḍasāvakoti nigaṇṭhasāvako.Jaṭilakoti tāpaso.Paribbājakoti channaparibbājako.Māgaṇḍikādayopi titthiyā eva. Etesaṃ pana sīlesu paripūrakāritāya abhāvena sukkapakkho na gahito. Sesamettha uttānamevāti.

293-302. Ājīvako means a naked ascetic. Nigaṇṭho means one covered in the front part. Muṇḍasāvako means a disciple of the Nigaṇṭhas. Jaṭilako means an ascetic with matted hair. Paribbājako means a wandering ascetic. Māgaṇḍikā and others are also sectarians. However, the white side is not taken here because of the absence of the fulfillment of precepts among these. The rest here is straightforward.

. Namo tassa bhagavato arahato sammāsambuddhassa.

. Homage to the Blessed One, the Worthy One, the Perfectly Self-Enlightened One.

Aṅguttaranikāye

Aṅguttara Nikāya

Chakkanipāta-aṭṭhakathā

Chakka Nipāta Aṭṭhakathā

1. Paṭhamapaṇṇāsakaṃ

1. Paṭhama Paṇṇāsaka

1. Āhuneyyavaggo

1. Āhuneyya Vagga

1. Paṭhamaāhuneyyasuttavaṇṇanā
1. Paṭhama Āhuneyya Sutta Explanation

1.Chakkanipātassa paṭhameidha, bhikkhave, bhikkhūti, bhikkhave, imasmiṃ sāsane bhikkhu.Neva sumano hoti na dummanoti iṭṭhārammaṇe rāgasahagatena somanassena sumano vā aniṭṭhārammaṇe dosasahagatena domanassena dummano vā na hoti.Upekkhako viharati sato sampajānoti majjhattārammaṇe asamapekkhanena aññāṇupekkhāya upekkhakabhāvaṃ anāpajjitvā sato sampajāno hutvā ārammaṇe majjhatto viharati. Imasmiṃ sutte khīṇāsavassa satatavihāro kathito.

1. In the first sutta of the Chakka Nipāta, idha, bhikkhave, bhikkhū means, monks, a monk in this Dispensation. Neva sumano hoti na dummano means he is neither glad with gladness accompanied by attachment for a desirable object, nor is he sad with sadness accompanied by aversion for an undesirable object. Upekkhako viharati sato sampajāno means without falling into indifference with unknowing equanimity towards a neutral object, but being mindful and fully aware, he dwells in equanimity towards the object. In this sutta, the constant dwelling of one whose taints are destroyed is described.

2. Dutiyaāhuneyyasuttavaṇṇanā
2. Dutiya Āhuneyya Sutta Explanation

2-4.Dutiyeanekavihitaṃ iddhividhantiādīni visuddhimagge vuttāneva.Āsavānaṃ khayā anāsavanti āsavānaṃ khayena anāsavaṃ, na cakkhuviññāṇādīnaṃ viya abhāvenāti. Imasmiṃ sutte khīṇāsavassa abhiññā paṭipāṭiyā kathitā. Tatiyacatutthesu khīṇāsavo kathito.

2-4. In the second, anekavihitaṃ iddhividha etc., are as stated in the Visuddhimagga. Āsavānaṃ khayā anāsava means untainted by the destruction of the āsavas, not by the absence as with eye-consciousness, etc. In this sutta, the sequence of supernormal knowledges of one whose taints are destroyed is described. In the third and fourth, one whose taints are destroyed is described.

5-7. Ājānīyasuttattayavaṇṇanā
5-7. Ājānīya Sutta Explanation

5-7.Pañcameaṅgehīti guṇaṅgehi.Khamoti adhivāsako.Rūpānanti rūpārammaṇānaṃ.Vaṇṇasampannoti sarīravaṇṇena sampanno. Chaṭṭhebalasampannoti kāyabalena sampanno. Sattamejavasampannoti padajavena sampanno.

5-7. In the fifth, aṅgehī means with the qualities. Khamo means forbearing. Rūpāna means of the visible objects. Vaṇṇasampanno means endowed with a beautiful complexion. In the sixth, balasampanno means endowed with physical strength. In the seventh, javasampanno means endowed with swiftness of foot.

8-9. Anuttariyasuttādivaṇṇanā
8-9. Anuttariya Sutta Explanation

8-9.Aṭṭhameanuttariyānīti aññena uttaritarena rahitāni niruttarāni.Dassanānuttariyanti rūpadassanesu anuttaraṃ. Esa nayo sabbapadesu. Hatthiratanādīnañhi dassanaṃ na dassanānuttariyaṃ, niviṭṭhasaddhassa pana niviṭṭhapemavasena dasabalassa vā bhikkhusaṅghassa vā kasiṇaasubhanimittādīnaṃ vā aññatarassa dassanaṃ dassanānuttariyaṃ nāma. Khattiyādīnaṃ guṇakathāsavanaṃ na savanānuttariyaṃ, niviṭṭhasaddhassa pana niviṭṭhapemavasena tiṇṇaṃ vā ratanānaṃ guṇakathāsavanaṃ tepiṭakabuddhavacanasavanaṃ vā savanānuttariyaṃ nāma. Maṇiratanādīnaṃ lābho na lābhānuttariyaṃ, sattavidhaariyadhanalābho pana lābhānuttariyaṃ nāma. Hatthisippādisikkhanaṃ na sikkhānuttariyaṃ, sikkhāttayassa pūraṇaṃ pana sikkhānuttariyaṃ nāma. Khattiyādīnaṃ pāricariyā na pāricariyānuttariyaṃ, tiṇṇaṃ pana ratanānaṃ pāricariyā pāricariyānuttariyaṃ nāma. Khattiyādīnaṃ guṇānussaraṇaṃ na anussatānuttariyaṃ, tiṇṇaṃ pana ratanānaṃ guṇānussaraṇaṃ anussatānuttariyaṃ nāma. Iti imāni cha anuttariyāni lokiyalokuttarāni kathitāni. Navamebuddhānussatīti buddhaguṇārammaṇā sati. Sesapadesupi eseva nayo.

8-9. In the eighth, anuttariyānī means unsurpassed, devoid of anything superior. Dassanānuttariya means unsurpassed in seeing forms. This method applies in all instances. Indeed, the sight of elephant jewels, etc., is not unsurpassed seeing, but for one with firm faith, seeing the Ten-Powered One, or the Sangha of monks, or one of the kasina or asubha signs due to firm affection, is called unsurpassed seeing. Hearing the talk of qualities of Khattiyas, etc., is not unsurpassed hearing, but for one with firm faith, hearing the talk of qualities of the Triple Gem, or hearing the Tipitaka, the Buddha's word, due to firm affection, is called unsurpassed hearing. Gaining jewel-stones, etc., is not unsurpassed gaining, but gaining the seven kinds of noble wealth is called unsurpassed gaining. Learning elephant training, etc., is not unsurpassed training, but the fulfillment of the three trainings is called unsurpassed training. Serving Khattiyas, etc., is not unsurpassed serving, but serving the Triple Gem is called unsurpassed serving. Remembering the qualities of Khattiyas, etc., is not unsurpassed remembering, but remembering the qualities of the Triple Gem is called unsurpassed remembering. Thus, these six unsurpassed things, mundane and supramundane, are described. In the ninth, buddhānussatī means mindfulness directed to the qualities of the Buddha. The same method applies in the remaining instances as well.

10. Mahānāmasuttavaṇṇanā
10. Mahānāma Sutta Explanation

10.Dasamemahānāmoti dasabalassa cūḷapitu putto eko sakyarājā.Yenabhagavā tenupasaṅkamīti bhuttapātarāso hutvā dāsaparijanaparivuto gandhamālādīni gāhāpetvā yattha satthā, tattha agamāsi. Ariyaphalaṃ assa āgatantiāgataphalo. Sikkhāttayasāsanaṃ etena viññātantiviññātasāsano. Iti ayaṃ rājā ‘‘sotāpannassa nissayavihāraṃ pucchāmī’’ti pucchanto evamāha.

10. In the tenth, mahānāmo means a Sakyan king, the son of the Ten-Powered One’s paternal aunt. Yena bhagavā tenupasaṅkamī means after eating breakfast, surrounded by servants, taking perfumes and garlands, he went to where the Teacher was. Āgataphalo means one who has attained the fruit. Viññātasāsano means one by whom the teaching of the three trainings has been understood. Thus, this king, asking, "I will ask about the abiding dependent on the Stream-Enterer," spoke thus.

Nevassa rāgapariyuṭṭhitanti na uppajjamānena rāgena uṭṭhahitvā gahitaṃ.Ujugatanti buddhānussatikammaṭṭhāne ujukameva gataṃ.Tathāgataṃ ārabbhāti tathāgataguṇe ārabbha.Atthavedanti aṭṭhakathaṃ nissāya uppannaṃ pītipāmojjaṃ.Dhammavedanti pāḷiṃ nissāya uppannaṃ pītipāmojjaṃ.Dhammūpasañhitanti pāḷiñca aṭṭhakathañca nissāya uppannaṃ.Pamuditassāti duvidhena pāmojjena pamuditassa.Pīti jāyatīti pañcavidhā pīti nibbattati.Kāyo passambhatīti nāmakāyo ca karajakāyo ca darathapaṭippassaddhiyā paṭippassambhati.Sukhanti kāyikacetasikasukhaṃ.Samādhiyatīti ārammaṇe sammā ṭhapitaṃ hoti.Visamagatāya pajāyāti rāgadosamohavisamagatesu sattesu.Samappattoti samaṃ upasamaṃ patto hutvā.Sabyāpajjhāyāti sadukkhāya.Dhammasotaṃsamāpannoti vipassanāsaṅkhātaṃ dhammasotaṃ samāpanno.Buddhānussatiṃ bhāvetīti buddhānussatikammaṭṭhānaṃ brūheti vaḍḍheti. Iminā nayena sabbattha attho veditabbo. Iti mahānāmo sotāpannassa nissayavihāraṃ pucchi. Satthāpissa tameva kathesi. Evaṃ imasmiṃ sutte sotāpannova kathitoti.

Nevassa rāgapariyuṭṭhita means not seized by attachment that arises. Ujugata means directly gone to the mindfulness of the Buddha meditation subject. Tathāgataṃ ārabbhā means concerning the qualities of the Tathāgata. Atthaveda means joy and delight that arises dependent on the commentary. Dhammaveda means joy and delight that arises dependent on the Pali. Dhammūpasañhita means arising dependent on both the Pali and the commentary. Pamuditassā means of one gladdened by twofold joy. Pīti jāyatī means five kinds of joy arise. Kāyo passambhatī means the mind-body and the material body are calmed by the tranquility of distress. Sukha means physical and mental happiness. Samādhiyatī means it is well-established on the object. Visamagatāya pajāyā means among beings who are unevenly gone due to attachment, aversion, and delusion. Samappatto means having attained evenness, peace. Sabyāpajjhāyā means with sorrow. Dhammasotaṃ samāpanno means one who has attained the stream of Dhamma reckoned as insight. Buddhānussatiṃ bhāvetī means he develops and cultivates the meditation subject of mindfulness of the Buddha. In this manner, the meaning should be understood everywhere. Thus, Mahānāma asked about the dwelling dependent on the Stream-Enterer. The Teacher spoke the same to him. Thus, in this sutta, only the Stream-Enterer is described.

2. Sāraṇīyavaggo

2. Sāraṇīya Vagga

1. Paṭhamasāraṇīyasuttavaṇṇanā
1. Paṭhama Sāraṇīya Sutta Explanation

11.Dutiyassa paṭhamesāraṇīyāti saritabbayuttakā.Mettaṃ kāyakammanti mettena cittena kātabbaṃ kāyakammaṃ.Vacīkammamanokammesupi eseva nayo. Imāni ca pana bhikkhūnaṃ vasena āgatāni, gihīsupi labbhanti. Bhikkhūnañhi mettena cittena ābhisamācārikadhammapūraṇaṃ mettaṃ kāyakammaṃ nāma. Gihīnaṃ cetiyavandanatthāya bodhivandanatthāya saṅghanimantanatthāya gamanaṃ, gāmaṃ piṇḍāya paviṭṭhe bhikkhū disvā paccuggamanaṃ, pattapaṭiggahaṇaṃ, āsanapaññāpanaṃ, anugamananti evamādikaṃ mettaṃ kāyakammaṃ nāma.

11. In the first sutta of the second vagga, sāraṇīyā means conducive to being remembered. Mettaṃ kāyakamma means bodily action that should be done with a loving mind. The same method applies to vacīkamma and manokamma as well. These, however, come with reference to monks, but they are available to laypeople as well. For monks, the fulfillment of the rules of etiquette with a loving mind is called loving bodily action. For laypeople, going for the sake of worshiping a shrine, for the sake of worshiping the Bodhi tree, for the sake of inviting the Sangha, seeing monks entering a village for alms, going to meet them, receiving their bowls, arranging seats, and following them is called loving bodily action.

Bhikkhūnaṃ mettena cittena ācārapaṇṇattisikkhāpanaṃ, kammaṭṭhānakathanaṃ, dhammadesanā, tepiṭakampi buddhavacanaṃ mettaṃ vacīkammaṃ nāma. Gihīnaṃ ‘‘cetiyavandanāya gacchāma, bodhivandanāya gacchāma, dhammassavanaṃ karissāma, dīpamālāpupphapūjaṃ karissāma, tīṇi sucaritāni samādāya vattissāma, salākabhattādīni dassāma, vassāvāsikaṃ dassāma, ajja saṅghassa cattāro paccaye dassāma, saṅghaṃ nimantetvā khādanīyādīni saṃvidahatha, āsanāni paññāpetha, pānīyaṃ upaṭṭhāpetha, saṅghaṃ paccuggantvā ānetha, paññattāsane nisīdāpetvā ussāhajātā veyyāvaccaṃ karothā’’tiādivacanakāle mettaṃ vacīkammaṃ nāma.

For monks, teaching the code of conduct and training, speaking about meditation subjects, giving a Dhamma talk, and even the Tipitaka, the word of the Buddha, with a loving mind, is called loving verbal action. For laypeople, at the time of saying, "We will go to worship a shrine, we will go to worship the Bodhi tree, we will listen to the Dhamma, we will offer lamps and flowers, we will live undertaking the three kinds of good conduct, we will give ticket-food, etc., we will give the rains-residence, today we will give the Sangha the four requisites, invite the Sangha and prepare hard and soft food, arrange seats, provide water, go to greet the Sangha and bring them, seating them on prepared seats, you should do the duties with enthusiasm," loving verbal action is such.

Bhikkhūnaṃ pātova uṭṭhāya sarīrapaṭijagganaṃ cetiyaṅgaṇavattādīni ca katvā vivittāsane nisīditvā ‘‘imasmiṃ vihāre bhikkhū sukhī hontu averā abyāpajjhā’’ti cintanaṃ mettaṃ manokammaṃ nāma. Gihīnaṃ ‘‘ayyā sukhī hontu averā abyāpajjhā’’ti cintanaṃ mettaṃ manokammaṃ nāma.

For monks, getting up early in the morning, performing bodily upkeep, and having done the shrine courtyard duties, sitting in a secluded seat and thinking, "May the monks in this monastery be happy, free from enmity, free from affliction," is called loving mental action. For laypeople, thinking, "May the noble ones be happy, free from enmity, free from affliction," is called loving mental action.

Āvi ceva raho cāti sammukhā ca parammukhā ca. Tattha navakānaṃ cīvarakammādīsu sahāyabhāvagamanaṃ sammukhā mettaṃ kāyakammaṃ nāma, therānaṃ pana pādadhovanadānādibhedaṃ sabbampi sāmīcikammaṃ sammukhā mettaṃ kāyakammaṃ nāma. Ubhayehipi dunnikkhittānaṃ dārubhaṇḍādīnaṃ tesu avaññaṃ akatvā attanā dunnikkhittānaṃ viya paṭisāmanaṃ parammukhā mettaṃ kāyakammaṃ nāma. ‘‘Devatthero tissatthero’’ti evaṃ paggayha vacanaṃ sammukhā mettaṃ vacīkammaṃ nāma. Vihāre asantaṃ pana paṭipucchantassa ‘‘kahaṃ amhākaṃ devatthero, kahaṃ amhākaṃ tissatthero, kadā nu kho āgamissatī’’ti evaṃ mamāyanavacanaṃ parammukhā mettaṃ vacīkammaṃ nāma. Mettāsinehasiniddhāni pana nayanāni ummīletvā pasannena mukhena olokanaṃ sammukhā mettaṃ manokammaṃ nāma. ‘‘Devatthero tissatthero arogo hotu appābādho’’ti samannāharaṇaṃ parammukhā mettaṃ manokammaṃ nāma.

Āvi ceva raho cā means both in presence and in absence. Herein, for the new monks, going to assist with robe-making and other tasks is called sammukhā mettaṃ kāyakammaṃ, which means loving-kindness expressed through bodily action in presence. But for senior monks, all acts of service, such as providing foot-washing water, are called sammukhā mettaṃ kāyakammaṃ. For both, carefully putting away wooden utensils and other items without disdain, as if they were one's own, is called parammukhā mettaṃ kāyakammaṃ, which means loving-kindness expressed through bodily action in absence. Speaking respectfully, saying, "Devathera, Tissathera," is called sammukhā mettaṃ vacīkammaṃ, which means loving-kindness expressed through verbal action in presence. But in the absence of a monk in the monastery, asking, "Where is our Devathera? Where is our Tissathera? When will he return?" with an attitude of attachment, is called parammukhā mettaṃ vacīkammaṃ, which means loving-kindness expressed through verbal action in absence. Looking with eyes filled with loving-kindness and affection, with a pleasant expression, is called sammukhā mettaṃ manokammaṃ, which means loving-kindness expressed through mental action in presence. Thinking, "May Devathera, Tissathera be free from illness and suffering," is called parammukhā mettaṃ manokammaṃ, which means loving-kindness expressed through mental action in absence.

Lābhāti cīvarādayo laddhapaccayā.Dhammikāti kuhanādibhedaṃ micchājīvaṃ vajjetvā dhammena samena bhikkhācariyavattena uppannā.Antamaso pattapariyāpannamattampīti pacchimakoṭiyā pattapariyāpannaṃ pattassa antogataṃ dvattikaṭacchubhikkhāmattampi.Appaṭivibhattabhogīti ettha dve paṭivibhattāni nāma āmisapaṭivibhattaṃ pana puggalapaṭivibhattañca. Tattha ‘‘ettakaṃ dassāmi, ettakaṃ na dassāmī’’ti evaṃ cittena paṭivibhajanaṃ āmisapaṭivibhattaṃ nāma. ‘‘Asukassa dassāmi, asukassa na dassāmī’’ti evaṃ cittena vibhajanaṃ pana puggalapaṭivibhattaṃ nāma. Tadubhayampi akatvā yo appaṭivibhattaṃ bhuñjati, ayaṃ appaṭivibhattabhogī nāma.Sīlavantehi sabrahmacārīhi sādhāraṇabhogīti ettha sādhāraṇabhogino idaṃ lakkhaṇaṃ – yaṃ yaṃ paṇītaṃ labhati, taṃ taṃ neva lābhenalābhaṃ-nijigīsanatāmukhena gihīnaṃ deti, na attanā paribhuñjati, paṭiggaṇhanto ca ‘‘saṅghena sādhāraṇaṃ hotū’’ti gahetvā ghaṇṭiṃ paharitvā paribhuñjitabbaṃ saṅghasantakaṃ viya passati.

Lābhā means material gains such as robes and other requisites acquired. Dhammikā means gains acquired righteously, avoiding dishonest means of livelihood such as pretense, and through the proper conduct of a bhikkhu, such as going for alms. Antamaso pattapariyāpannamattampī means even as little as what fills the bowl, the last portion contained within the bowl. Appaṭivibhattabhogī—here, there are two kinds of dividing: dividing of material things and dividing of people. Dividing with the intention, "I will give this much, I will not give that much," is called dividing of material things. Dividing with the intention, "I will give to so-and-so, I will not give to so-and-so," is called dividing of people. One who enjoys without doing either of these is called appaṭivibhattabhogī. Sīlavantehi sabrahmacārīhi sādhāraṇabhogī—here, the characteristic of a common enjoyer is this: whatever excellent things one receives, one does not give them to laypeople with the intention of outdoing others in gains, nor does one consume them oneself; and when accepting, one thinks, "Let this be shared by the Sangha," and after taking it, one regards it as belonging to the Sangha, to be used after striking the bell.

Imaṃ pana sāraṇīyadhammaṃ ko pūreti, ko na pūreti? Dussīlo tāva na pūreti. Na hi tassa santakaṃ sīlavantā gaṇhanti. Parisuddhasīlo pana vattaṃ akhaṇḍento pūreti. Tatridaṃ vattaṃ – yo hi odissakaṃ katvā mātu vā pitu vā ācariyupajjhāyādīnaṃ vā deti, so dātabbaṃ deti. Sāraṇīyadhammo panassa na hoti, palibodhajagganaṃ nāma hoti. Sāraṇīyadhammo hi muttapalibodhassa vaṭṭati. Tena pana odissakaṃ dentena gilānagilānupaṭṭhākaāgantukagamikānañceva navapabbajitassa ca saṅghāṭipattaggahaṇaṃ ajānantassa dātabbaṃ. Etesaṃ datvā avasesaṃ therāsanato paṭṭhāya thokaṃ thokaṃ adatvā yo yattakaṃ gaṇhāti, tassa tattakaṃ dātabbaṃ. Avasiṭṭhe asati puna piṇḍāya caritvā therāsanato paṭṭhāya yaṃ yaṃ paṇītaṃ, taṃ taṃ datvā sesaṃ bhuñjitabbaṃ. ‘‘Sīlavantehī’’ti vacanato dussīlassa adātumpi vaṭṭati.

Who fulfills this quality conducive to cordiality, and who does not? An immoral person does not fulfill it. The virtuous do not accept what belongs to him. But a person of pure virtue fulfills it, not breaking the rule. Here is the rule: one who sets aside a portion and gives it to his mother, father, teacher, preceptor, or others is giving what should be given, but he does not have the quality conducive to cordiality; it is called increasing his encumbrances. The quality conducive to cordiality is suitable for one who is free from encumbrances. Therefore, when giving what is set aside, it should be given to the sick, those attending to the sick, newcomers, travelers, and those newly ordained who do not know how to keep the Sanghati robe and bowl. Having given to these, the remainder should be given little by little, starting from the senior monks, to each according to what they take. If there is nothing left, one should go for alms again, and having given whatever is excellent, starting from the senior monks, the rest should be consumed. From the statement "with virtuous ones," it is also proper not to give to an immoral person.

Ayaṃ pana sāraṇīyadhammo susikkhitāya parisāya supūro hoti, susikkhitāya hi parisāya yo aññato labhati, so na gaṇhāti. Aññato alabhantopi pamāṇayuttameva gaṇhati, na atirekaṃ. Ayaṃ pana sāraṇīyadhammo evaṃ punappunaṃ piṇḍāya caritvā laddhaṃ laddhaṃ dentassāpi dvādasahi vassehi pūreti, na tato oraṃ. Sace hi dvādasame vasse sāraṇīyadhammapūrako piṇḍapātapūraṃ pattaṃ āsanasālāyaṃ ṭhapetvā nhāyituṃ gacchati, saṅghatthero ca ‘‘kasseso patto’’ti vatvā ‘‘sāraṇīyadhammapūrakassā’’ti vutte ‘‘āharatha na’’nti sabbaṃ piṇḍapātaṃ vicāretvāva bhuñjitvā rittapattaṃ ṭhapeti. Atha kho so bhikkhu rittapattaṃ disvā ‘‘mayhaṃ asesetvāva paribhuñjiṃsū’’ti domanassaṃ uppādeti, sāraṇīyadhammo bhijjati, puna dvādasa vassāni pūretabbo hoti. Titthiyaparivāsasadiso hesa, sakiṃ khaṇḍe jāte puna pūretabbova. Yo pana ‘‘lābhā vata me, suladdhaṃ vata me, yassa me pattagataṃ anāpucchāva sabrahmacārī paribhuñjantī’’ti somanassaṃ janeti, tassa puṇṇo nāma hoti.

This quality conducive to cordiality is easily fulfilled in a well-trained community. In a well-trained community, one who receives something from elsewhere does not accept it. Even if one does not receive from elsewhere, one accepts only what is appropriate, not more. This quality conducive to cordiality is fulfilled even by one who repeatedly goes for alms and gives whatever is received for twelve years, but not before. If, in the twelfth year, the one who fulfills the quality conducive to cordiality places a bowl filled with alms food in the assembly hall and goes to bathe, and the senior monk says, "Whose bowl is this?" and upon being told, "It belongs to the one who fulfills the quality conducive to cordiality," he says, "Bring it here," and distributes and consumes all the alms food, leaving the bowl empty. Then, if that bhikkhu sees the empty bowl and generates displeasure, thinking, "They consumed mine completely without leaving anything," the quality conducive to cordiality is broken, and it must be fulfilled again for twelve years. This is similar to the penance of the heretics; once it is broken, it must be fulfilled again. But one who generates joy, thinking, "What gains I have, what good fortune I have, that my fellow practitioners consume what is in my bowl without asking," it is said to be complete.

Evaṃ pūritasāraṇīyadhammassa pana neva issā na macchariyaṃ hoti, manussānaṃ piyo hoti, amanussānaṃ piyo hoti, sulabhapaccayo. Pattagatamassa diyyamānampi na khīyati, bhājanīyabhaṇḍaṭṭhāne aggabhaṇḍaṃ labhati, bhaye vā chātake vā patte devatā ussukkaṃ āpajjanti.

For one who has thus fulfilled the quality conducive to cordiality, there is neither envy nor stinginess; one is beloved by humans and beloved by non-humans, and one easily obtains requisites. What is in one’s bowl does not diminish even when being given away, and in places where things are shared, one obtains the best things. In times of fear or famine, deities take interest in one’s bowl.

senagirivāsī tissattherokira mahāgirigāmaṃ upanissāya vasati, paññāsa mahātherā nāgadīpaṃ cetiyavandanatthāya gacchantā girigāme piṇḍāya caritvā kiñci aladdhā nikkhamiṃsu. Thero pavisanto te disvā pucchi – ‘‘laddhaṃ, bhante’’ti? Vicarimhā, āvusoti. So aladdhabhāvaṃ ñatvā āha – ‘‘bhante, yāvāhaṃ āgacchāmi, tāva idheva hothā’’ti. Mayaṃ, āvuso, paññāsa janā pattatemanamattampi na labhimhāti. Bhante, nevāsikā nāma paṭibalā honti, alabhantāpi bhikkhācāramaggasabhāgaṃ jānantīti. Therā āgamesuṃ. Thero gāmaṃ pāvisi. Dhurageheyeva mahāupāsikā khīrabhattaṃ sajjetvā theraṃ olokayamānā ṭhitā therassa dvāraṃ sampattasseva pattaṃ pūretvā adāsi. So taṃ ādāya therānaṃ santikaṃ gantvā ‘‘gaṇhatha, bhante’’ti saṅghattheraṃ āha. Thero ‘‘amhehi ettakehi kiñci na laddhaṃ, ayaṃ sīghameva gahetvā āgato, kiṃ nu kho’’ti sesānaṃ mukhaṃ olokesi. Thero olokanākāreneva ñatvā, ‘‘bhante, dhammena samena laddho, nikkukkuccā gaṇhathā’’ti ādito paṭṭhāya sabbesaṃ yāvadatthaṃ datvā attanāpi yāvadatthaṃ bhuñji.

It is said that Tissathera, a resident of Senagiri, lived near Mahagirigama. Fifty senior monks, going to Nagadipa to venerate the Cetiya, went for alms in Girigama but left without getting anything. The Thera, entering, saw them and asked, "Did you receive anything, Bhante?" "We went around, Āvuso." Knowing that they had received nothing, he said, "Bhante, please wait here until I return." "Āvuso, we fifty people did not get even enough to fill a bowl." "Bhante, the residents are capable; even if they do not receive anything, they know their share of the alms round." The Theras waited. The Thera entered the village. At the door of a certain house, a great female lay follower, having prepared milk-rice, stood watching for the Thera and, as soon as he arrived at the door, filled his bowl and gave it to him. Taking it, he went to the Theras and said, "Accept it, Bhante," to the senior monk. The Thera looked at the faces of the others, thinking, "We have received nothing with so many of us, and he has returned quickly with something; what could it be?" The Thera, knowing by the way he looked, said, "Bhante, it was obtained righteously, accept it without any doubt," and gave to all from the beginning as much as they needed, and he himself also ate as much as he needed.

pattagataṃ na khīyatīti ettha vatthu.

Regarding pattagataṃ na khīyatī, what is in one's bowl does not diminish, there is a story.

bhājanīyabhaṇḍaṭṭhāne aggabhaṇḍaṃ pāpuṇātīti ettha vatthu.

Regarding bhājanīyabhaṇḍaṭṭhāne aggabhaṇḍaṃ pāpuṇātī, in places where things are shared, one obtains the best things, there is a story.

Brāhmaṇatissabhaye pana bhātaragāmavāsino nāgattheriyā anārocetvāva palāyiṃsu. Therī paccūsasamaye ‘‘ativiya appanigghoso gāmo, upadhāretha tāvā’’ti daharabhikkhuniyo āha. Tā gantvā sabbesaṃ gatabhāvaṃ ñatvā āgamma theriyā ārocesuṃ. Sā sutvā ‘‘mā tumhe tesaṃ gatabhāvaṃ cintayittha, attano uddesaparipucchāyonisomanasikāresuyeva yogaṃ karothā’’ti vatvā bhikkhācāravelāyaṃ pārupitvā attadvādasamā gāmadvāre nigrodharukkhamūle aṭṭhāsi. Rukkhe adhivatthā devatā dvādasannampi bhikkhunīnaṃ piṇḍapātaṃ datvā, ‘‘ayye, aññattha mā gacchatha, niccaṃ idheva āgaccheyyāthā’’ti āha. Theriyā pana kaniṭṭhabhātā nāgatthero nāma atthi. So ‘‘mahantaṃ bhayaṃ, na sakkā yāpetuṃ, paratīraṃ gamissāmī’’ti attadvādasamova attano vasanaṭṭhānā nikkhanto ‘‘theriṃ disvā gamissāmī’’ti bhātaragāmaṃ āgato. Therī ‘‘therā āgatā’’ti sutvā tesaṃ santikaṃ gantvā ‘‘kiṃ ayyā’’ti pucchi. So taṃ pavattiṃ ārocesi. Sā ‘‘ajja ekadivasaṃ vihāreva vasitvā sve gamissathā’’ti āha. Therā vihāraṃ agamiṃsu.

During the Brahmana Tissa scare, the residents of Bhataragama fled without even informing Nagatheri. At dawn, the Therī said to the young bhikkhunis, "The village is unusually quiet; let's investigate." They went and, having learned that everyone had left, reported it to the Therī. Hearing this, she said, "Do not think about their departure; focus on your own learning, questioning, and wise attention," and at the time for the alms round, having put on her robes, she stood with twelve bhikkhunis at the foot of a banyan tree at the village gate. The deity dwelling in the tree gave alms to the twelve bhikkhunis and said, "Ayye, do not go elsewhere, always come here." The Therī had a younger brother named Nagathera. He, thinking, "There is great danger; it is not possible to survive; I will go to the other shore," left his dwelling with twelve others, thinking, "I will go after seeing the Therī," and came to Bhataragama. The Therī, hearing that "the Theras have come," went to them and asked, "What is it, Ayya?" He told her the situation. She said, "Stay here at the monastery for one day and go tomorrow." The Theras went to the monastery.

Therī punadivase rukkhamūle piṇḍāya caritvā theraṃ upasaṅkamitvā ‘‘imaṃ piṇḍapātaṃ paribhuñjathā’’ti āha. Thero ‘‘vaṭṭissati therī’’ti vatvā tuṇhī aṭṭhāsi. Dhammiko, tāta, piṇḍapāto, kukkuccaṃ akatvā paribhuñjathāti. Vaṭṭissati therīti? Sā pattaṃ gahetvā ākāse khipi, patto ākāse aṭṭhāsi. Thero ‘‘sattatālamatte ṭhitampi bhikkhunībhattameva therī’’ti vatvā ‘‘bhayaṃ nāma sabbakālaṃ na hoti, bhaye vūpasante ariyavaṃsaṃ kathayamāno, ‘bho piṇḍapātika, bhikkhunībhattaṃ bhuñjitvā vītināmayitthā’ti cittena anuvadiyamāno santhambhituṃ na sakkhissāmi, appamattā hotha theriyo’’ti maggaṃ paṭipajji.

The next day, the Therī went for alms at the foot of the tree and, approaching the Thera, said, "Consume this alms food." The Thera remained silent, thinking, "It is proper for the Therī." "Tāta, this alms food is righteous; consume it without any doubt." "Is it proper for the Therī?" She took the bowl and threw it into the sky; the bowl remained in the sky. The Thera, thinking, "Even standing at the height of seven tāla trees, she is still just a bhikkhuni," and also thinking, "Danger is not always present, and when the danger has passed, if I am rebuked in my heart for having lived off bhikkhunis' alms food while speaking of the Ariyan lineage, I will not be able to bear it; be heedful, Therī," and departed.

devatā ussukkaṃ āpajjantīti ettha vatthu. Tatra hi therī sāraṇīyadhammapūrikā ahosi.

Regarding devatā ussukkaṃ āpajjantī, deities take interest, there is a story. There, the Therī was fulfilling the quality conducive to cordiality.

Akhaṇḍānītiādīsu yassa sattasu āpattikkhandhesu ādimhi vā ante vā sikkhāpadaṃ bhinnaṃ hoti, tassa sīlaṃ pariyante chinnasāṭako viyakhaṇḍaṃnāma. Yassa pana vemajjhe bhinnaṃ, tassa chiddasāṭako viyachiddaṃnāma hoti. Yassa paṭipāṭiyā dve tīṇi bhinnāni, tassa piṭṭhiyaṃ vā kucchiyaṃ vā uṭṭhitena visabhāgavaṇṇena kāḷarattādīnaṃ aññataravaṇṇā gāvī viyasabalaṃnāma hoti. Yassa antarantarā bhinnāni, tassa antarantarā visabhāgabinduvicitrā gāvī viyakammāsaṃnāma hoti. Yassa pana sabbena sabbaṃ abhinnāni, tassa tāni sīlāniakhaṇḍāni acchiddāni asabalāni akammāsānināma honti. Tāni panetāni taṇhādāsabyato mocetvā bhujissabhāvakaraṇatobhujissāni,buddhādīhi viññūhi pasatthattāviññuppasatthāni,taṇhādiṭṭhīhi aparāmaṭṭhattā ‘‘idaṃ nāma tvaṃ āpannapubbo’’ti kenaci parāmaṭṭhuṃ asakkuṇeyyattā caaparāmaṭṭhāni,upacārasamādhiṃ appanāsamādhiṃ vā saṃvattayantītisamādhisaṃvattanikānīti vuccanti.

Regarding Akhaṇḍānī and so on, for one whose precept is broken at the beginning or end of the seven aggregates of offenses, that sīla is called khaṇḍaṃ, broken, like a torn cloth at the edge. But for one that is broken in the middle, that is called chiddaṃ, torn, like a cloth with a hole. For one with two or three broken in succession, that is called sabalaṃ, mottled, like a cow with a discolored patch on its back or belly, of black, red, or some other color. For one with breaks here and there, that is called kammāsaṃ, spotted, like a cow with various spots of different colors here and there. But for one with all the precepts unbroken, those sīlas are called akhaṇḍāni acchiddāni asabalāni akammāsāni, unbroken, without holes, not mottled, not spotted. Moreover, because they free one from the slavery of craving and lead to the state of being free, they are called bhujissāni, freeing; because they are praised by the wise, such as the Buddhas, they are called viññuppasatthāni, praised by the wise; because they are not touched by craving and wrong views, and because no one can accuse one of having previously committed an offense, they are called aparāmaṭṭhāni, untouched; and because they lead to access concentration or attainment concentration, they are called samādhisaṃvattanikāni, conducive to samādhi.

Sīlasāmaññagatoviharatīti tesu tesu disābhāgesu viharantehi bhikkhūhi saddhiṃ samānabhāvūpagatasīlo viharati. Sotāpannādīnañhi sīlaṃ samuddantarepi devalokepi vasantānaṃ aññesaṃ sotāpannādīnaṃ sīlena samānameva hoti, natthi maggasīle nānattaṃ. Taṃ sandhāyetaṃ vuttaṃ.

Sīlasāmaññagato viharatī means one lives with sīla that is in conformity with that of the bhikkhus living in those various regions. For the sīla of the Sotāpannas and others is the same as the sīla of other Sotāpannas and others living across the ocean or in the deva world; there is no difference in the sīla of the path. This was said with that in mind.

Yāyaṃ diṭṭhīti maggasampayuttā sammādiṭṭhi.Ariyāti niddosā. Niyyātītiniyyānikā. Takkarassāti yo tathākārī hoti.Dukkhakkhayāyāti sabbadukkhakkhayatthaṃ.Diṭṭhisāmaññagatoti samānadiṭṭhibhāvaṃ upagato hutvā viharatīti.

Yāyaṃ diṭṭhī means the Right View associated with the path. Ariyā means faultless. Niyyātīti niyyānikā. Takkarassā means one who acts accordingly. Dukkhakkhayāyā means for the purpose of the end of all suffering. Diṭṭhisāmaññagato means living having attained a state of conformity in view.

2. Dutiyasāraṇīyasuttavaṇṇanā
2. Commentary on the Second Sāraṇīya Sutta

12.Dutiye yo te dhamme pūreti, taṃ sabrahmacārīnaṃ piyaṃ karontītipiyakaraṇā. Garuṃ karontītigarukaraṇā. Saṅgahāyāti saṅgaṇhanatthāya.Avivādāyāti avivadanatthāya.Sāmaggiyāti samaggabhāvatthāya.Ekībhāvāyāti ekabhāvatthāya ninnānākaraṇāya.Saṃvattantīti vattanti pavattanti.

12.In the second, yo te dhamme pūreti, taṃ sabrahmacārīnaṃ piyaṃ karontītipiyakaraṇā means making beloved, because it makes one beloved to one's fellow practitioners. Garuṃ karontītigarukaraṇā means making venerable, because it makes one venerable. Saṅgahāyā means for the purpose of gathering together. Avivādāyā means for the purpose of non-dispute. Sāmaggiyā means for the purpose of harmony. Ekībhāvāyā means for the purpose of oneness, for not making diverse. Saṃvattantī means they conduce, they lead.

3. Nissāraṇīyasuttavaṇṇanā
3. Commentary on the Nissāraṇīya Sutta

13.Tatiyenissāraṇīyā dhātuyoti nissaraṇadhātuyova.Mettā hi kho me cetovimuttīti ettha paccanīkadhammehi vimuttattā tikacatukkajjhānikā mettāva mettācetovimutti nāma.Bhāvitāti vaḍḍhitā.Bahulīkatāti punappunaṃ katā.Yānīkatāti yuttayānasadisā katā.Vatthukatāti patiṭṭhā katā.Anuṭṭhitāti adhiṭṭhitā.Paricitāti samantato citā ācitā upacitā.Susamāraddhāti suppaguṇakaraṇena suṭṭhu samāraddhā.Pariyādāya tiṭṭhatīti pariyādiyitvā gahetvā tiṭṭhati.Mā hevantissa vacanīyoti yasmā abhūtabyākaraṇaṃ byākaroti, tasmā ‘‘mā evaṃ bhaṇī’’ti vattabbo.Yadidaṃ mettācetovimuttīti yā ayaṃ mettācetovimutti, idaṃ nissaraṇaṃ byāpādassa, byāpādato nissaṭāti attho. Yo pana mettāya tikacatukkajjhānato vuṭṭhito saṅkhāre sammasitvā tatiyamaggaṃ patvā ‘‘puna byāpādo natthī’’ti tatiyaphalena nibbānaṃ passati, tassa cittaṃ accantanissaraṇaṃ byāpādassa. Etenupāyena sabbattha attho veditabbo.

13.In the third, nissāraṇīyā dhātuyo means the element of escape. Mettā hi kho me cetovimuttī—here, because of being freed from opposing qualities, loving-kindness that is the first, second, third, or fourth jhāna is called loving-kindness, liberation of mind. Bhāvitā means developed. Bahulīkatā means repeatedly done. Yānīkatā means made like a fitted vehicle. Vatthukatā means made a foundation. Anuṭṭhitā means established. Paricitā means accumulated, piled up, increased on all sides. Susamāraddhā means well-undertaken with skillful effort. Pariyādāya tiṭṭhatī means it stands having grasped and mastered. Mā hevantissa vacanīyo means because he declares what is untrue, he should be told, "Do not speak thus." Yadidaṃ mettācetovimuttī means whatever this loving-kindness, liberation of mind, this is the escape from ill-will; it means escaped from ill-will. But one who, having arisen from the first, second, third, or fourth jhāna of loving-kindness, contemplates formations and attains the third path, seeing Nibbāna with the third fruition, thinking, "There is no more ill-will," for him, the mind is completely escaped from ill-will. In this way, the meaning should be understood everywhere.

Animittācetovimuttīti balavavipassanā. Dīghabhāṇakā pana arahattaphalasamāpattīti vadanti. Sā hi rāganimittādīnañceva rūpanimittādīnañca niccanimittādīnañca abhāvā animittāti vuttā.Nimittānusārīti vuttappabhedaṃ nimittaṃ anusaraṇasabhāvaṃ.

Animittācetovimuttī means strong Vipassanā. But the Dīghabhāṇakas say it means attainment of the fruition of Arahatship. For it is called signless because of the absence of signs of lust and so on, and of signs of form and so on, and of signs of permanence and so on. Nimittānusārī means the nature of following the signs of the kinds mentioned above.

Asmīti asmimāno.Ayamahamasmīti pañcasu khandhesu ayaṃ nāma ahaṃ asmīti. Ettāvatā arahattaṃ byākataṃ hoti.Vicikicchākathaṃkathāsallanti vicikicchābhūtaṃ kathaṃkathāsallaṃ.Mā hevantissa vacanīyoti sace te paṭhamamaggavajjhā vicikicchā uppajjati, arahattabyākaraṇaṃ micchā hoti, tasmā ‘‘mā abhūtaṃ gaṇhī’’ti vāretabbo.Asmītimānasamugghātoti arahattamaggo. Arahattamaggaphalavasena hi nibbāne diṭṭhe puna asmimāno natthīti arahattamaggo ‘‘asmīti mānasamugghāto’’ti vutto. Iti imasmiṃ sutte abhūtabyākaraṇaṃ nāma kathitaṃ.

Asmīti the "I am" conceit. Ayamahamasmīti in the five aggregates, this name is what I am. This is as far as declaring Arahatship goes. Vicikicchākathaṃkathāsallanti doubt is the dart of questioning. Mā hevantissa vacanīyoti if doubt arises in you concerning the first path, declaring Arahatship becomes false, therefore, one should be dissuaded, saying, "Do not grasp what is untrue." Asmītimānasamugghātoti the path of Arahatship. For when Nibbana is seen by way of the path and fruit of Arahatship, there is no more "I am" conceit; therefore, the path of Arahatship is called the "uprooting of the 'I am' conceit." Thus, in this sutta, untrue declaration has been spoken of.

4. Bhaddakasuttavaṇṇanā
4. Bhaddaka Sutta Commentary

14.Catutthena bhaddakanti na laddhakaṃ. Tattha yo hi bhītabhīto marati, tassa na bhaddakaṃ maraṇaṃ hoti. Yo apāye paṭisandhiṃ gaṇhāti, tassa na bhaddikā kālakiriyā hoti.Kammārāmotiādīsu āramaṇaṃ ārāmo, abhiratīti attho. Vihārakaraṇādimhi navakamme ārāmo assātikammārāmo. Tasmiṃyeva kamme ratotikammarato. Tadeva kammārāmataṃ punappunaṃ yuttotianuyutto. Esa nayo sabbattha. Ettha cabhassanti ālāpasallāpo.Niddāti soppaṃ.Saṅgaṇikāti gaṇasaṅgaṇikā. Sā ‘‘ekassa dutiyo hoti, dvinnaṃ hoti tatiyako’’tiādinā nayena veditabbā.Saṃsaggoti dassanasavanasamullāpasambhogakāyasaṃsaggavasena pavatto saṃsaṭṭhabhāvo.Papañcoti taṇhādiṭṭhimānavasena pavatto madanākārasaṇṭhito kilesapapañco.Sakkāyanti tebhūmakavaṭṭaṃ.Sammā dukkhassa antakiriyāyāti hetunā nayena sakalavaṭṭadukkhassa parivaṭumaparicchedakaraṇatthaṃ.Magoti magasadiso.Nippapañcapadeti nibbānapade.Ārādhayīti paripūrayi taṃ sampādesīti.

14.In the fourth, na bhaddakanti not fortunate. For he who dies in fear does not have a fortunate death. He who takes rebirth in the lower realms does not have a good passing away. In kammārāmotiādi, āramaṇaṃ means delight, or enjoyment. Kammārāmo means having delight in new undertakings such as building a monastery. Kammarato means delighting in that same work. Anuyutto means constantly engaged in that very delight in work. This method applies everywhere. And here, bhassanti means speech, conversation. Niddāti sleep. Saṅgaṇikāti assembly, gathering. This should be understood in the manner of "one has a second, two have a third," and so on. Saṃsaggoti association, is the state of being mixed up that occurs through association with seeing, hearing, conversing, intimacy, and physical contact. Papañcoti proliferation, refers to the proliferation of defilements, structured in the form of intoxication, driven by craving, views, and conceit. Sakkāyanti the three-plane round of existence. Sammā dukkhassa antakiriyāyāti for the sake of making an end to all suffering of the round of existence, by way of cause and method. Magoti like a deer. Nippapañcapadeti in the state of Nibbana, free from proliferation. Ārādhayīti fulfilled, accomplished that.

5. Anutappiyasuttavaṇṇanā
5. Anutappiya Sutta Commentary

15.Pañcameanutappāti anusocitabbā anutāpakārī. Imesu dvīsupi suttesu gāthāsu ca vaṭṭavivaṭṭaṃ kathitaṃ.

15.In the fifth, anutappāti should be regretted, causing remorse. In these two suttas and in the verses, the round of existence and release from it are spoken of.

6. Nakulapitusuttavaṇṇanā
6. Nakulapitu Sutta Commentary

16.Chaṭṭhebāḷhagilānoti adhimattagilāno.Etadavocāti sāmikassa bhesajjaṃ katvā byādhiṃ vūpasametuṃ asakkontī idāni sīhanādaṃ naditvā saccakiriyāya byādhiṃ vūpasametuṃ santike nisīditvā etaṃ ‘‘mā kho tva’’ntiādivacanaṃ avoca.Sāpekkhoti sataṇho.Na nakulamātāti ettha na-kāro na sakkhatīti evaṃ parapadena yojetabbo.Santharitunti nicchiddaṃ kātuṃ, saṇṭhapetunti attho.Veṇiṃ olikhitunti eḷakalomāni kappetvā vijaṭetvā veṇiṃ kātuṃ.

16.In the sixth, bāḷhagilānoti exceedingly ill. Etadavocāti being unable to alleviate the disease of her husband by preparing medicine, she now, sitting nearby, uttered these words beginning with "mā kho tvaṃ" to alleviate the disease through an act of truth, roaring a lion's roar. Sāpekkhoti with craving. Na nakulamātāti here, the "na" should be construed with the following word, meaning "not capable." Santharitunti to make without gaps, to establish. Veṇiṃ olikhitunti to comb the braid after cutting and untangling the goat hair.

Aññaṃ gharaṃ gamissatīti aññaṃ sāmikaṃ gaṇhissati.Soḷasa vassāni gahaṭṭhakaṃ brahmacariyaṃ samāciṇṇanti ito soḷasavassamatthake gahaṭṭhabrahmacariyavāso samāciṇṇo.Dassanakāmatarāti atirekena dassanakāmā. Imehi tīhi aṅgehi sīhanādaṃ naditvā ‘‘iminā saccena tava sarīre byādhi phāsu hotū’’ti saccakiriyaṃ akāsi.

Aññaṃ gharaṃ gamissatīti will take another husband. Soḷasa vassāni gahaṭṭhakaṃ brahmacariyaṃ samāciṇṇanti the life of celibacy as a householder has been practiced for sixteen years from now. Dassanakāmatarāti exceedingly desirous of seeing. With these three factors, having roared a lion's roar, she performed an act of truth, saying, "By this truth, may there be ease in your body."

siyā khopana tetiādimāha. Tatthaparipūrakārinīti samattakārinī.Cetosamathassāti samādhikammaṭṭhānassa.Ogādhappattāti ogādhaṃ anuppavesaṃ pattā.Patigādhappattāti patigādhaṃ patiṭṭhaṃ pattā.Assāsappattāti assāsaṃ avassayaṃ pattā.Vesārajjappattāti somanassañāṇaṃ pattā.Aparappaccayāti parappaccayo vuccati parasaddhā parapattiyāyanā, tāya virahitāti attho. Imehi tīhi aṅgehi attano guṇe ārabbha saccakiriyaṃ akāsi.Gilānā vuṭṭhitoti gilāno hutvā vuṭṭhito.Yāvatāti yattikāyo.Tāsaṃ aññatarāti tāsaṃ antare ekā.Anukampikāti hitānukampikā.Ovādikāti ovādadāyikā.Anusāsikāti anusiṭṭhidāyikā.

Siyā khopana tetiādimāha. Therein, paripūrakārinīti accomplishing completely. Cetosamathassāti of the concentration-subject. Ogādhappattāti having attained immersion. Patigādhappattāti having attained establishment. Assāsappattāti having attained reliance. Vesārajjappattāti having attained joyful knowledge. Aparappaccayāti parappaccayo means the faith of others, inclination towards others; being without that is the meaning. With these three factors, having recollected her own qualities, she performed an act of truth. Gilānā vuṭṭhitoti having risen up from being ill. Yāvatāti however many. Tāsaṃ aññatarāti one among them. Anukampikāti compassionate for welfare. Ovādikāti giver of advice. Anusāsikāti giver of instructions.

7. Soppasuttavaṇṇanā
7. Soppa Sutta Commentary

17.Sattamepaṭisallānā vuṭṭhitoti ekībhāvāya dhammanijjhānakkhantito phalasamāpattivihārato vuṭṭhito.Yathāvihāranti attano attano vasanavihāraṃ.Navāti pabbajjāya navakā. Te pañcasatamattā ahesuṃ.Kākacchamānāti kākasaddaṃ karontā dante khādantā.Therāti thirabhāvaṃ pattā.Tena noti tena nu.Seyyasukhādīni heṭṭhā vuttatthāneva.Raṭṭhikoti yo raṭṭhaṃ bhuñjati.Pettaṇikoti yo pitarā bhuttānubhuttaṃ bhuñjati.Senāpatikoti senāya jeṭṭhako.Gāmagāmaṇikoti gāmabhojako.Pūgagāmaṇikoti gaṇajeṭṭhako.Avipassakokusalānaṃ dhammānanti kusalānaṃ dhammānaṃ anesako agavesako hutvā.Bodhipakkhiyānaṃ dhammānanti sattatiṃsāya bodhipakkhiyadhammānaṃ.

17.In the seventh, paṭisallānā vuṭṭhitoti having arisen from the seclusion of meditative absorption for the sake of unity, or from the dwelling of fruition attainment. Yathāvihāranti to their own dwellings. Navāti new to the monastic life. There were about five hundred of them. Kākacchamānāti making a crow-like noise, grinding their teeth. Therāti having attained stability. Tena noti is that so? Seyyasukhādīni have the same meaning as stated below. Raṭṭhikoti one who enjoys the kingdom. Pettaṇikoti one who enjoys what has been enjoyed by his father. Senāpatikoti the chief of the army. Gāmagāmaṇikoti the village headman. Pūgagāmaṇikoti the head of the guild. Avipassakokusalānaṃ dhammānanti not a seeker, not a searcher for skillful qualities. Bodhipakkhiyānaṃ dhammānanti of the thirty-seven factors of enlightenment.

8. Macchabandhasuttavaṇṇanā
8. Macchabandha Sutta Commentary

18.Aṭṭhamemacchikanti macchaghātakaṃ. Hatthinā yātītihatthiyāyī. Paratopi eseva nayo.Vajjheti vadhitabbe.Vadhāyanīteti vadhāya upanīte.Pāpakena manasāti lāmakena vadhakacittena. Pāḷiyaṃ pana vadhāyupanīteti likhanti.Māgavikoti migaghātako.Ko pana vādo manussabhūtanti yo manussabhūtaṃ pāpakena manasā anupekkhati, tassa sampattiyā abhāve kimeva vattabbaṃ. Idaṃ pāpakassa kammuno aniṭṭhaphalabhāvaṃ dassetuṃ vuttaṃ. Yesaṃ pana tādisaṃ kammaṃ karontānampi yasapaṭilābho hoti, tesaṃ taṃ akusalaṃ nissāya kusalaṃ vipaccatīti veditabbaṃ. Tena panassa akusalakammena upahatattā vipāko na ciraṭṭhitiko hoti. Imasmiṃ sutte akusalapakkhova kathito.

18.In the eighth, macchikanti fish killer. Hatthinā yātītihatthiyāyī means going by elephant. The same method applies further on. Vajjheti to be killed. Vadhāyanīteti brought for killing. Pāpakena manasāti with a base mind, a murderer's thought. But in the Pali, they write "vadhāyupanīte." Māgavikoti deer hunter. Ko pana vādo manussabhūtanti what then should be said about one who regards a human being with a wicked mind, given the absence of success? This was said to show the undesirable result of evil action. But it should be understood that for those who, even while doing such actions, gain fame and profit, their skillfulness ripens relying on that unskillfulness. However, because one is afflicted by that unskillful action, the result is not long-lasting. In this sutta, only the unskillful side is spoken of.

9. Paṭhamamaraṇassatisuttavaṇṇanā
9. First Maraṇassati Sutta Commentary

19.Navamenātiketi evaṃnāmake gāme.Giñjakāvasatheti iṭṭhakāmaye pāsāde.Amatogadhāti nibbānogadhā, nibbānapatiṭṭhāti attho.Bhāvetha noti bhāvetha nu.Maraṇassatinti maraṇassatikammaṭṭhānaṃ.Aho vatāti patthanatthe nipāto.Bahuṃvata me kataṃ assāti tumhākaṃ sāsane mama kiccaṃ bahu kataṃ assa.Tadantaranti taṃ antaraṃ khaṇaṃ okāsaṃ.Assasitvā vā passasāmīti ettha assāso vuccati anto pavisanavāto, passāso bahi nikkhamanavāto. Iti ayaṃ bhikkhu yāva anto paviṭṭhavāto bahi nikkhamati, bahi nikkhanto vāto anto pavisati, tāva jīvitaṃ patthento evamāha.Dandhanti mandaṃ garukaṃ asīghappavattaṃ.Āsavānaṃ khayāyāti arahattaphalatthāya. Imasmiṃ sutte maraṇassati arahattaṃ pāpetvā kathitāti.

19.In the ninth, nātiketi in a village named thus. Giñjakāvasatheti in a brick palace. Amatogadhāti immersed in the Deathless, with Nibbana as the foundation. Bhāvetha noti should you develop? Maraṇassatinti the meditation subject of mindfulness of death. Aho vatāti an expletive expressing a wish. Bahuṃvata me kataṃ assāti much would have been done by me in your Dispensation. Tadantaranti that interval, moment, opportunity. Assasitvā vā passasāmīti here, assāso means the in-coming breath, passāso the out-going breath. Thus, this monk, desiring life for as long as the in-coming breath goes out, or the out-going breath goes in, speaks thus. Dandhanti slow, heavy, not quickly flowing. Āsavānaṃ khayāyāti for the sake of the destruction of the āsavas, for the sake of the fruit of Arahatship. In this sutta, mindfulness of death is spoken of as leading to Arahatship.

10. Dutiyamaraṇassatisuttavaṇṇanā
10. Second Maraṇassati Sutta Commentary

20.Dasamepatigatāyāti paṭipannāya.Iti paṭisañcikkhatīti evaṃ paccavekkhati.So mamassa antarāyoti ettha tividho antarāyo jīvitantarāyo, samaṇadhammantarāyo, puthujjanakālakiriyaṃ karontassa saggantarāyo ceva maggantarāyo cāti. Taṃ sabbampi sandhāyevamāha.Byāpajjeyyāti ajiṇṇakādivasena vipajjeyya.Adhimattoti balavā.Chandoti kattukamyatāchando.Vāyāmoti payogavīriyaṃ.Ussāhoti ussāpanavīriyaṃ.Ussoḷhīti sampādanavīriyaṃ.Appaṭivānīti anukkaṇṭhanā appaṭisaṅgharaṇā. Sesaṃ sabbattha uttānatthamevāti.

20.In the tenth, patigatāyāti to one who has undertaken. Iti paṭisañcikkhatīti thus he reflects. So mamassa antarāyoti here, there are three kinds of danger: danger to life, danger to the monastic life, and danger to heavenly realms for one who makes death as an ordinary person, as well as danger to the path. He speaks thus referring to all of that. Byāpajjeyyāti might perish due to indigestion, etc. Adhimattoti strong. Chandoti desire to do. Vāyāmoti effort of application. Ussāhoti rousing effort. Ussoḷhīti accomplishing effort. Appaṭivānīti without aversion, without rejecting. The rest is straightforward in meaning everywhere.

3. Anuttariyavaggo

3. The Section on the Unsurpassed

1-2. Sāmakasuttādivaṇṇanā
1-2. Sāmaka Sutta, etc., Commentary

21-22.Tatiyassa paṭhamesāmagāmaketi sāmakānaṃ ussannattā evaṃladdhanāme gāmake.Pokkharaṇiyāyanti pokkharaṇiyānāmake vihāre.Abhikkantāya rattiyāti rattiyā paṭhamayāmaṃ atikkamma majjhimayāme sampatte.Abhikkantavaṇṇāti abhikkantaatimanāpavaṇṇā.Kevalakappanti sakalakappaṃ.Pokkharaṇiyaṃ obhāsetvāti pokkharaṇiyānāmakaṃ mahāvihāraṃ attano obhāsena pharitvā.Samanuññoti samānaanuñño samānacitto.Dovacassatāti dubbacabhāvo.Pāpamittatāti lāmakamittatā. Imasmiṃ sutte parihāniyadhammāva kathitā. Dutiye aparihāniyadhammā lokuttaramissakā kathitā.

21-22.In the first of the third, sāmagāmaketi in a village named thus due to the abundance of Sāmaka trees. Pokkharaṇiyāyanti in a monastery named Pokkharaṇiya. Abhikkantāya rattiyāti when the first watch of the night had passed and the middle watch had arrived. Abhikkantavaṇṇāti of surpassing, exceedingly pleasing complexion. Kevalakappanti the entire aeon. Pokkharaṇiyaṃ obhāsetvāti having illuminated the great monastery named Pokkharaṇiya with his own radiance. Samanuññoti agreeing, of one mind. Dovacassatāti difficulty in being advised. Pāpamittatāti association with bad friends. In this sutta, only the conditions for decline are spoken of. In the second, the conditions for non-decline, mixed with the supramundane, are spoken of.

3. Bhayasuttavaṇṇanā
3. Bhaya Sutta Commentary

23.Tatiyekāmarāgarattāyanti kāmarāgaratto ayaṃ.Chandarāgavinibaddhoti chandarāgena vinibaddho.Bhayāti cittutrāsabhayā.Paṅkāti kilesapaṅkato.Saṅgo paṅko ca ubhayanti saṅgo ca paṅko ca idampi ubhayaṃ.Ete kāmā pavuccanti, yattha satto puthujjanoti yasmiṃ saṅge ca paṅke ca puthujjano satto laggo laggito palibuddho.Upādāneti catubbidhe upādāne.Jātimaraṇasambhaveti jātiyā ca maraṇassa ca sambhave paccayabhūte.Anupādāvimuccantīti anupādiyitvā vimuccanti.Jātimaraṇasaṅkhayeti jātimaraṇānaṃ saṅkhayasaṅkhāte nibbāne, nibbānārammaṇāya vimuttiyā vimuccantīti attho. Imasmiṃ ṭhāne vivaṭṭetvā arahattameva patto esa bhikkhu. Idāni taṃ khīṇāsavaṃ thomentote khemappattātiādimāha. Tatthakhemappattāti khemabhāvaṃ pattā.Sukhinoti lokuttarasukhena sukhitā.Diṭṭhadhammābhinibbutāti abbhantare kilesābhāvena diṭṭhadhammeyeva abhinibbutā. Imasmiṃ sutte vaṭṭameva kathetvā gāthāsu vaṭṭavivaṭaṃ kathitaṃ.

23.In the third, kāmarāgarattāyanti one who is infatuated with sensual desire. Chandarāgavinibaddhoti bound by desire and lust. Bhayāti from fear, from agitation of mind. Paṅkāti from the mud of defilements. Saṅgo paṅko ca ubhayanti attachment and mud, both of these. Ete kāmā pavuccanti, yattha satto puthujjanoti these are called sensual pleasures, in which the ordinary person is attached, stuck, clinging. Upādāneti in the four kinds of clinging. Jātimaraṇasambhaveti in the arising of birth and death. Anupādāvimuccantīti not clinging, they are released. Jātimaraṇasaṅkhayeti in Nibbana, reckoned as the cessation of birth and death; meaning, they are released by a liberation with Nibbana as its object. In this place, having understood and developed insight, that monk attained Arahatship. Now, praising that one with destroyed āsavas, he says, te khemappattātiādi. Therein, khemappattāti having attained security. Sukhinoti happy with supramundane happiness. Diṭṭhadhammābhinibbutāti extinguished in this very life due to the absence of defilements within. In this sutta, only the round of existence is spoken of, and in the verses, the round of existence and release from it are spoken of.

4. Himavantasuttavaṇṇanā
4. Himavanta Sutta Commentary

24.Catutthepadāleyyāti bhindeyya.Chavāyāti lāmikāya.Samādhissa samāpattikusalo hotīti āhārasappāyautusappāyāni pariggahetvā samādhiṃ samāpajjituṃ kusalo hoti cheko samattho paṭibalo.Samādhissa ṭhitikusaloti samādhissa ṭhitiyaṃ kusalo, samādhiṃ ṭhapetuṃ sakkotīti attho.Samādhissa vuṭṭhānakusaloti samādhissa vuṭṭhāne kusalo, yathāparicchedena vuṭṭhātuṃ sakkotīti attho.Samādhissa kallitakusaloti samādhissa kallatāya kusalo, samādhicittaṃ hāsetuṃ kallaṃ kātuṃ sakkotīti attho.Samādhissa gocarakusaloti samādhissa asappāye anupakārake dhamme vajjetvā sappāye upakārake sevantopi, ‘‘ayaṃ samādhinimittārammaṇo ayaṃ lakkhaṇārammaṇo’’ti jānantopi samādhissa gocarakusalo nāma hoti.Samādhissa abhinīhārakusaloti upariuparisamāpattisamāpajjanatthāya paṭhamajjhānādisamādhiṃ abhinīharituṃ sakkonto samādhissa abhinīhārakusalo nāma hoti. So paṭhamajjhānā vuṭṭhāya dutiyaṃ samāpajjati, dutiyajjhānā…pe… tatiyajjhānā vuṭṭhāya catutthaṃ samāpajjatīti.

24.In the fourth, padāleyyāti should break. Chavāyāti disgusting. Samādhissa samāpattikusalo hotīti having determined suitable food and climate, he is skilled in attaining concentration, clever, capable, and able. Samādhissa ṭhitikusaloti skilled in the stability of concentration, he is able to establish concentration. Samādhissa vuṭṭhānakusaloti skilled in arising from concentration, he is able to arise as determined. Samādhissa kallitakusaloti skilled in the pliancy of concentration, he is able to make the mind pliant, to make it fit. Samādhissa gocarakusaloti skilled in the domain of concentration, even while avoiding unsuitable and unhelpful qualities for concentration and cultivating suitable and helpful ones, and also knowing, "this is concentration with a sign as its object, this is concentration with a characteristic as its object," he is called skilled in the domain of concentration. Samādhissa abhinīhārakusaloti skilled in elevating concentration, being able to elevate concentration from the first jhāna onwards for the purpose of attaining higher and higher attainments, he is called skilled in elevating concentration. He arises from the first jhāna and attains the second, and so on, he arises from the third jhāna and attains the fourth.

5. Anussatiṭṭhānasuttavaṇṇanā
5. Anussatiṭṭhāna Sutta Commentary

25.Pañcameanussatiṭṭhānānīti anussatikāraṇāni.Itipi so bhagavātiādīni visuddhimagge (visuddhi. 1.123 ādayo) vitthāritāneva.Idampi kho, bhikkhave, ārammaṇaṃ karitvāti idaṃ buddhānussatikammaṭṭhānaṃ ārammaṇaṃ karitvā.Visujjhantīti paramavisuddhiṃ nibbānaṃ pāpuṇanti. Sesaṃ sabbattha uttānatthameva. Imasmiṃ pana sutte cha anussatiṭṭhānāni missakāni kathitānīti veditabbāni.

25.In the fifth, anussatiṭṭhānānīti causes for recollection. Itipi so bhagavātiādīni have already been extensively explained in the Visuddhimagga (Visuddhi. 1.123 ff). Idampi kho, bhikkhave, ārammaṇaṃ karitvāti having made this object, the meditation subject of mindfulness of the Buddha. Visujjhantīti they attain ultimate purity, Nibbana. The rest is straightforward in meaning everywhere. But it should be understood that in this sutta, six mixed causes for recollection are spoken of.

6. Mahākaccānasuttavaṇṇanā
6. Mahākaccāna Sutta Commentary

26.Chaṭṭhesambādheti pañcakāmaguṇasambādhe.Okāsādhigamoti ettha okāsā vuccanti cha anussatiṭṭhānāni, tesaṃ adhigamo.Visuddhiyāti visujjhanatthāya.Sokaparidevānaṃ samatikkamāyāti sokānañca paridevānañca samatikkamatthāya.Atthaṅgamāyāti atthaṃ gamanatthāya.Ñāyassa adhigamāyāti sahavipassanakassa maggassa adhigamanatthāya.Nibbānassa sacchikiriyāyāti apaccayaparinibbānassa paccakkhakiriyatthāya.

26.In the sixth, sambādheti in the confinement of the five strands of sense pleasure. Okāsādhigamoti here, okāsā means the six causes for recollection, their attainment. Visuddhiyāti for the sake of purification. Sokaparidevānaṃ samatikkamāyāti for the sake of overcoming sorrow and lamentation. Atthaṅgamāyāti for the sake of going to the end. Ñāyassa adhigamāyāti for the sake of attaining the path together with insight. Nibbānassa sacchikiriyāyāti for the sake of the direct realization of Nibbana, which is the cessation of conditions.

Sabbasoti sabbākārena.Ākāsasamenāti alagganaṭṭhena ceva apalibuddhaṭṭhena ca ākāsasadisena.Vipulenāti na parittakena.Mahaggatenāti mahantabhāvaṃ gatena, mahantehi vā ariyasāvakehi gatena, paṭipannenāti attho.Appamāṇenāti pharaṇaappamāṇatāya appamāṇena.Averenāti akusalaverapuggalaverarahitena.Abyāpajjhenāti kodhadukkhavajjitena. Sabbametaṃ buddhānussaticittameva sandhāya vuttaṃ. Paratopi eseva nayo.Visuddhidhammāti visujjhanasabhāvā. Imasmimpi sutte cha anussatiṭṭhānāni missakāneva kathitānīti.

Sabbaso means in every way. Ākāsasamenā means like the sky, in the sense of being unattached and unbound. Vipulenā means not limited. Mahaggatenā means having attained greatness, or attained by great noble disciples; that is, followed. Appamāṇenā means immeasurable due to the immeasurable extent of its pervasion. Averenā means free from hostility, free from persons who are hostile and unwholesome. Abyāpajjhenā means devoid of anger and suffering. All this is said with reference to the mindfulness of the Buddha. The same method applies to the rest. Visuddhidhammā means having the nature of purification. In this sutta too, the six objects of mindfulness are spoken of in a mixed way.

7. Paṭhamasamayasuttavaṇṇanā
7. Paṭhamasamayasuttavaṇṇanā

27.Sattamemanobhāvanīyassāti ettha manaṃ bhāveti vaḍḍhetīti manobhāvanīyo.Dassanāyāti dassanatthaṃ.Nissaraṇanti niggamanaṃ vūpasamanaṃ.Dhammaṃ desetīti kāmarāgappajahanatthāya asubhakammaṭṭhānaṃ katheti. Dutiyavārādīsu byāpādappahānāya mettākammaṭṭhānaṃ, thinamiddhappahānāya thinamiddhavinodanakammaṭṭhānaṃ, ālokasaññaṃ vā vīriyārambhavatthuādīnaṃ vā aññataraṃ, uddhaccakukkuccappahānāya samathakammaṭṭhānaṃ, vicikicchāpahānāya tiṇṇaṃ ratanānaṃ guṇakathaṃ kathento dhammaṃ desetīti veditabbo.Āgammāti ārabbha.Manasikarototi ārammaṇavasena citte karontassa.Anantarā āsavānaṃ khayo hotīti anantarāyena āsavānaṃ khayo hoti.

27. In the seventh, manobhāvanīyassa means one who cultivates and develops the mind is manobhāvanīyo. Dassanāyā means for the sake of seeing. Nissaraṇa means escape, cessation. Dhammaṃ desetī means he teaches the Dhamma in order to abandon sensual lust, he speaks about asubha-kammaṭṭhāna. In the second and subsequent instances, it should be understood that he teaches the Dhamma by speaking about mettā-kammaṭṭhāna for the abandonment of ill-will, thinamiddha-vinodanā-kammaṭṭhāna for the abandonment of sloth and torpor, or the light perception (āloka-sañña), or one of the objects for arousing energy, samatha-kammaṭṭhāna for the abandonment of restlessness and remorse, and the qualities of the Triple Gem for the abandonment of doubt. Āgammā means having approached. Manasikaroto means for one who attends in his mind in terms of object. Anantarā āsavānaṃ khayo hotī means immediately there is destruction of the āsavas.

8. Dutiyasamayasuttavaṇṇanā
8. Dutiyasamayasuttavaṇṇanā

28.Aṭṭhamemaṇḍalamāḷeti bhojanasālāya.Cārittakilamathoti piṇḍapātacariyāya uppannakilamatho.Bhattakilamathoti bhattadaratho.Vihārapacchāyāyanti vihārapaccante chāyāya.Yadevassadivā samādhinimittaṃ manasikataṃ hotīti yaṃ eva tassa tato purimadivasabhāge samathanimittaṃ citte kataṃ hoti.Tadevassa tasmiṃ samaye samudācaratīti taṃyeva etassa tasmiṃ samaye divāvihāre nisinnassa manodvāre sañcarati.Ojaṭṭhāyīti ojāya ṭhito patiṭṭhito.Phāsukassahotīti phāsukaṃ assa hoti.Sammukhāti kathentassa sammukhaṭṭhāne.Sutanti sotena sutaṃ.Paṭiggahitanti cittena paṭiggahitaṃ.

28. In the eighth, maṇḍalamāḷe means in the dining hall. Cārittakilamatho means the weariness that arises from wandering for alms. Bhattakilamatho means the exhaustion from the meal. Vihārapacchāyāya means in the shade at the edge of the monastery. Yadevassa divā samādhinimittaṃ manasikataṃ hotī means whatever object of concentration he has attended to in his mind during the earlier part of the day. Tadevassa tasmiṃ samaye samudācaratī means that very thing arises in his mind-door when he is sitting in the monastery during the daytime. Ojaṭṭhāyī means standing on oja, established. Phāsukassa hotī means it is comfortable for him. Sammukhā means in the presence of one who is speaking. Suta means heard by the ear. Paṭiggahita means accepted by the mind.

9. Udāyīsuttavaṇṇanā
9. Udāyīsuttavaṇṇanā

29.Navameudāyinti lāḷudāyittheraṃ.Suṇomahaṃ, āvusoti, āvuso, nāhaṃ badhiro, suṇāmi bhagavato vacanaṃ, pañhaṃ pana upaparikkhāmīti.Adhicittanti samādhivipassanācittaṃ.Idaṃ, bhante, anussatiṭṭhānanti idaṃ jhānattayasaṅkhātaṃ anussatikāraṇaṃ.Diṭṭhadhammasukhavihārāya saṃvattatīti imasmiṃyeva attabhāve sukhavihāratthāya pavattati.Ālokasaññanti ālokanimitte uppannasaññaṃ.Divā saññaṃ adhiṭṭhātīti divāti saññaṃ ṭhapeti.Yathā divā tathā rattinti yathānena divā ālokasaññā manasikatā, rattimpi tatheva taṃ manasi karoti.Yathā rattiṃ tathā divāti yathā vānena rattiṃ ālokasaññā manasikatā, divāpi taṃ tatheva manasi karoti.Vivaṭenāti pākaṭena.Apariyonaddhenāti nīvaraṇehi anonaddhena.Sappabhāsaṃ cittaṃ bhāvetīti dibbacakkhuñāṇatthāya sahobhāsakaṃ cittaṃ brūheti vaḍḍheti. Yaṃ pana ‘‘ālokasaññaṃ manasi karotī’’ti vuttaṃ, taṃ thinamiddhavinodanālokasaññaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ, na dibbacakkhuñāṇālokanti veditabbaṃ.Ñāṇadassanappaṭilābhāyāti dibbacakkhusaṅkhātassa ñāṇadassanassa paṭilābhāya.

29. In the ninth, udāyi means the Elder Lāḷudāyi. Suṇomahaṃ, āvuso means, "Venerable, I am not deaf, I hear the Blessed One's words, but I am examining the question." Adhicitta means the mind of concentration and insight. Idaṃ, bhante, anussatiṭṭhāna means this, which is reckoned as the three jhānas, is a cause for mindfulness. Diṭṭhadhammasukhavihārāya saṃvattatī means it conduces to a pleasant abiding in this very existence. Ālokasañña means the perception that arises based on the light object. Divā saññaṃ adhiṭṭhātī means he establishes the perception as day. Yathā divā tathā ratti means just as he attends to the light perception during the day, so too he attends to it at night. Yathā rattiṃ tathā divā means just as he attends to the light perception at night, so too he attends to it during the day. Vivaṭenā means openly. Apariyonaddhenā means unhindered by the hindrances. Sappabhāsaṃ cittaṃ bhāvetī means he cultivates and develops a mind together with radiance for the sake of the knowledge of the divine eye. However, it should be understood that what is said as "he attends to the light perception" refers to the light perception for dispelling sloth and torpor, not the light for the knowledge of the divine eye. Ñāṇadassanappaṭilābhāyā means for the attainment of the knowledge and vision that is reckoned as the divine eye.

Imameva kāyantiādīsu yaṃ vattabbaṃ siyā, taṃ sabbaṃ sabbākārena vitthārato visuddhimagge kāyagatāsatikammaṭṭhāne vuttaṃ.Kāmarāgappahānāyāti pañcakāmaguṇikassa rāgassa pahānatthāya.Seyyathāpi passeyyāti yathā passeyya.Sarīranti matasarīraṃ.Sivathikāya chaḍḍitanti susāne apaviddhaṃ. Ekāhaṃ matassa assātiekāhamataṃ. Dvīhaṃ matassa assātidvīhamataṃ. Tīhaṃ matassa assātitīhamataṃ. Bhastā viya vāyunā uddhaṃ jīvitapariyādānā yathānukkamaṃ samuggatena sūnabhāvena dhumātattā uddhumātaṃ, uddhumātamevauddhumātakaṃ. Paṭikūlattā vā kucchitaṃ uddhumātantiuddhumātakaṃ. Vinīlaṃ vuccati viparibhinnavaṇṇaṃ, vinīlamevavinīlakaṃ. Paṭikūlattā vā kucchitaṃ vinīlantivinīlakaṃ. Maṃsussadaṭṭhānesu rattavaṇṇassa pubbasannicayaṭṭhānesu setavaṇṇassa yebhuyyena ca nīlavaṇṇassa nīlaṭṭhāne nīlasāṭakapārutasseva chavasarīrassetaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Paribhinnaṭṭhānehi navahi vā vaṇamukhehi vissandamānaṃ pubbaṃ vipubbaṃ, vipubbamevavipubbakaṃ. Paṭikūlattā vā kucchitaṃ vipubbanti vipubbakaṃ. Vipubbakaṃ jātaṃ tathābhāvaṃ gatantivipubbakajātaṃ.

In Imameva kāya and the following passages, whatever should be said, all that has been said in detail in the Visuddhimagga, in the section on kāyagatāsati-kammaṭṭhāna. Kāmarāgappahānāyā means for the abandonment of the lust for the five strands of sense pleasure. Seyyathāpi passeyyā means just as one might see. Sarīra means a dead body. Sivathikāya chaḍḍita means discarded in a charnel ground. Ekāhaṃ matassa assāti ekāhamataṃ means a body dead for one day. Dvīhaṃ matassa assāti dvīhamataṃ means a body dead for two days. Tīhaṃ matassa assāti tīhamataṃ means a body dead for three days. Like a bellows, due to the swelling caused by gas accumulating successively after the cessation of life, uddhumātaṃ means swollen up, and uddhumātakaṃ means simply swollen up. Or, because it is repulsive, kucchitaṃ uddhumātaṃti, uddhumātakaṃ means repulsively swollen up. Vinīlaṃ means of changed color, and vinīlakaṃ means simply changed in color. Or, because it is repulsive, kucchitaṃ vinīlanti, vinīlakaṃ means repulsively changed in color. This is a term for a corpse in which the places where there should be flesh are red, the places where there should be a collection of pus are white, and mostly the blue color is like a blue cloth worn by the corpse. Vipubbaṃ means pus oozing from the nine or so openings where it has broken open, and vipubbakaṃ means simply full of pus. Or, because it is repulsive, kucchitaṃ vipubbanti vipubbakaṃ. Vipubbakajātaṃ means become full of pus, having reached such a state.

Soimameva kāyanti so bhikkhu imaṃ attano kāyaṃ tena kāyena saddhiṃ ñāṇena upasaṃharati upaneti. Kathaṃ?Ayampi kho kāyo evaṃdhammo evaṃbhāvī evaṃanatītoti. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – āyu usmā viññāṇanti imesaṃ tiṇṇaṃ dhammānaṃ atthitāya ayaṃ kāyo ṭhānagamanādikhamo hoti, imesaṃ pana vigamā ayampi evaṃdhammo evaṃpūtikasabhāvoyevāti.Evaṃbhāvīti evamevaṃ uddhumātādibhedo bhavissati.Evaṃ anatītoti evaṃ uddhumātādibhāvaṃ anatikkanto.

So imameva kāyanti that bhikkhu compares this body of his with that body by means of knowledge, he brings it near. How? Ayampi kho kāyo evaṃdhammo evaṃbhāvī evaṃanatītoti. This is what is said: Because of the existence of these three qualities—life, heat, and consciousness—this body is capable of standing, going, etc., but with the passing away of these, this too is simply of such a nature, of such a putrid nature. Evaṃbhāvī means it will become just like that, of such a kind as swollen, etc. Evaṃ anatīto means not gone beyond such a state as swollen, etc.

Khajjamānanti udarādīsu nisīditvā udaramaṃsaoṭṭhamaṃsaakkhikamaṃsādīni luñcitvā luñcitvā khādiyamānaṃ.Samaṃsalohitanti sesāvasesamaṃsalohitayuttaṃ.Nimmaṃsalohitamakkhitanti maṃse khīṇepi lohitaṃ na sussati, taṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ – ‘‘nimmaṃsalohitamakkhita’’nti.Aññenāti aññena disābhāgena.Hatthaṭṭhikanti catusaṭṭhibhedampi hatthaṭṭhikaṃ pāṭiyekkaṃ pāṭiyekkaṃ vippakiṇṇaṃ.Pādaṭṭhikādīsupi eseva nayo.Terovassikānīti atikkantasaṃvaccharāni.Pūtīnīti abbhokāse ṭhitāni vātātapavuṭṭhisamphassena terovassikāneva pūtīni honti, antobhūmigatāni pana cirataraṃ tiṭṭhanti.Cuṇṇakajātānīti cuṇṇavicuṇṇaṃ hutvā vippakiṇṇāni. Sabbatthaso imamevāti vuttanayena khajjamānādīnaṃ vasena yojanā kātabbā.Asmimānasamugghātāyāti asmīti pavattassa navavidhassa mānassa samugghātatthāya.Anekadhātupaṭivedhāyāti anekadhātūnaṃ paṭivijjhanatthāya.Satova abhikkamatīti gacchanto satipaññāhi samannāgatova gacchati.Satova paṭikkamatīti paṭinivattantopi satipaññāhi samannāgatova nivattati. Sesapadesupi eseva nayo.Satisampajaññāyāti satiyā ca ñāṇassa ca atthāya. Iti imasmiṃ sutte satiñāṇāni missakāni kathitānīti.

Khajjamāna means eaten bit by bit, as it sits in the stomach, etc., having torn off pieces of flesh from the stomach, lip, eye, etc. Samaṃsalohita means together with flesh and blood that is not completely gone. Nimmaṃsalohitamakkhita means even when the flesh is gone, the blood does not dry up; with reference to that, it is said, "smeared with blood where there is no flesh." Aññenā means by another directional part. Hatthaṭṭhika means the sixty-four kinds of hand bones scattered individually. The same method applies to pādaṭṭhikā and the rest. Terovassikānī means those that have passed beyond years. Pūtīnī means being rotten simply because they have been in the open air, exposed to the touch of wind, sun, rain for twelve years; however, those that are underground remain much longer. Cuṇṇakajātānī means reduced to powder, scattered having become dust and fragments. Everywhere, so imamevāti should be connected in terms of being eaten, etc., in the manner stated. Asmimānasamugghātāyā means for the destruction of the nine kinds of conceit that occur as "I am." Anekadhātupaṭivedhāyā means for the penetration of the many elements. Satova abhikkamatī means as he goes, he goes together with mindfulness and wisdom. Satova paṭikkamatī means as he returns, he returns together with mindfulness and wisdom. The same method applies to the remaining passages. Satisampajaññāyā means for the sake of mindfulness and knowledge. Thus, in this sutta, mindfulness and knowledge are spoken of in a mixed way.

10. Anuttariyasuttavaṇṇanā
10. Anuttariyasuttavaṇṇanā

30.Dasameuccāvacanti yaṃ kiñci mahantakhuddakaṃ, uccanīcaṃ vā.Hīnanti nihīnaṃ.Gammanti gāmavāsikānaṃ dassanaṃ.Pothujjanikanti puthujjanānaṃ santakaṃ.Anariyanti na ariyaṃ na uttamaṃ na parisuddhaṃ.Anatthasaṃhitanti na atthasannissitaṃ.Na nibbidāyāti na vaṭṭe nibbindanatthāya.Na virāgāyāti na rāgādīnaṃ virajjanatthāya.Na nirodhāyāti na rāgādīnaṃ appavattinirodhāya.Na upasamāyāti na rāgādīnaṃ vūpasamanatthāya.Na abhiññāyāti na abhijānanatthāya.Na sambodhāyāti na sambodhisaṅkhātassa catumaggañāṇassa paṭivijjhanatthāya.Na nibbānāyāti na nibbānassa sacchikiriyāya.

30. In the tenth, uccāvaca means whatever is large or small, high or low. Hīna means inferior. Gamma means seen by villagers. Pothujjanika means belonging to ordinary people. Anariya means not noble, not excellent, not pure. Anatthasaṃhita means not connected with benefit. Na nibbidāyā means not for aversion in the round of existence. Na virāgāyā means not for the fading away of lust, etc. Na nirodhāyā means not for the cessation of the non-occurrence of lust, etc. Na upasamāyā means not for the calming down of lust, etc. Na abhiññāyā means not for direct knowledge. Na sambodhāyā means not for the penetration of the four paths of knowledge that are reckoned as enlightenment. Na nibbānāyā means not for the realization of Nibbāna.

Niviṭṭhasaddhoti patiṭṭhitasaddho.Niviṭṭhapemoti patiṭṭhitapemo.Ekantagatoti ekantaṃ gato, acalappattoti attho.Abhippasannoti ativiya pasanno.Etadānuttariyanti etaṃ anuttaraṃ.Hatthismimpi sikkhatīti hatthinimittaṃ sikkhitabbaṃ hatthisippaṃ sikkhati. Sesapadesupi eseva nayo.Uccāvacanti mahantakhuddakaṃ sippaṃ sikkhati.

Niviṭṭhasaddho means having established faith. Niviṭṭhapemo means having established affection. Ekantagato means gone to one extreme, meaning having attained the unshakeable. Abhippasanno means exceedingly pleased. Etadānuttariya means this is unsurpassed. Hatthismimpi sikkhatī means he learns the elephant craft, which should be learned with reference to the elephant. The same method applies to the remaining passages. Uccāvaca means he learns crafts that are large and small.

Upaṭṭhitā pāricariyeti pāricariyāya paccupaṭṭhitā.Bhāvayanti anussatinti anuttaraṃ anussatiṃ bhāventi.Vivekappaṭisaṃyuttanti nibbānanissitaṃ katvā.Khemanti nirupaddavaṃ.Amatagāminanti nibbānagāminaṃ, ariyamaggaṃ bhāventīti attho.Appamāde pamoditāti satiyā avippavāsasaṅkhāte appamāde āmoditā pamoditā.Nipakāti nepakkena samannāgatā.Sīlasaṃvutāti sīlena saṃvutā pihitā.Te ve kālena paccentīti te ve yuttappayuttakāle jānanti.Yattha dukkhaṃ nirujjhatīti yasmiṃ ṭhāne sakalaṃ vaṭṭadukkhaṃ nirujjhati, taṃ amataṃ mahānibbānaṃ te bhikkhū jānantīti. Imasmiṃ sutte cha anuttariyāni missakāni kathitānīti.

Upaṭṭhitā pāricariye means present for service. Bhāvayanti anussati means they cultivate the unsurpassed mindfulness. Vivekappaṭisaṃyutta means having made it dependent on seclusion. Khema means without danger. Amatagāmina means leading to the deathless, meaning they cultivate the noble path. Appamāde pamoditā means delighted, greatly delighted in diligence, which is reckoned as the non-separation from mindfulness. Nipakā means endowed with wisdom. Sīlasaṃvutā means restrained, covered by virtue. Te ve kālena paccentī means they know the appropriate and inappropriate time. Yattha dukkhaṃ nirujjhatī means in which place all the suffering of the round of existence ceases, those bhikkhus know that deathless, great Nibbāna. In this sutta, the six unsurpassed qualities are spoken of in a mixed way.

4. Devatāvaggo

4. Devatāvaggo

1. Sekhasuttavaṇṇanā
1. Sekhasuttavaṇṇanā

31.Catutthassa paṭhamesekhassāti sattavidhassa sekhassa. Puthujjane pana vattabbameva natthi.Parihānāyāti uparūpariguṇaparihānāya.

31. In the fourth, the first, sekhassā means of the seven kinds of sekhas. But there is nothing to say of an ordinary person. Parihānāyā means for the decline of the higher and higher qualities.

2-3. Aparihānasuttadvayavaṇṇanā
2-3. Aparihānasuttadvayavaṇṇanā

32-33.Dutiyesatthugāravatāti satthari garubhāvo.Dhammagāravatāti navavidhe lokuttaradhamme garubhāvo.Saṅghagāravatāti saṅghe garubhāvo.Sikkhāgāravatāti tīsu sikkhāsu garubhāvo.Appamādagāravatāti appamāde garubhāvo.Paṭisanthāragāravatāti dhammāmisavasena duvidhe paṭisanthāre garubhāvo. Satthā garu assātisatthugaru. Dhammo garu assātidhammagaru. Tibbagāravoti bahalagāravo. Paṭisanthāre gāravo assātipaṭisanthāragāravo. Tatiyesappatissoti sajeṭṭhako sagāravo. Hirottappaṃ panettha missakaṃ kathitaṃ.

32-33. In the second, satthugāravatā means having respect for the Teacher. Dhammagāravatā means having respect for the nine kinds of supramundane Dhammas. Saṅghagāravatā means having respect for the Saṅgha. Sikkhāgāravatā means having respect for the three trainings. Appamādagāravatā means having respect for diligence. Paṭisanthāragāravatā means having respect for the two kinds of friendliness, in terms of Dhamma and material things. Satthugaru means one who has respect for the Teacher. Dhammagaru means one who has respect for the Dhamma. Tibbagāravo means having intense respect. Paṭisanthāragāravo means one who has respect for friendliness. In the third, sappatisso means having a senior, having respect. In this context, moral shame and moral dread are spoken of in a mixed way.

4. Mahāmoggallānasuttavaṇṇanā
4. Mahāmoggallānasuttavaṇṇanā

34.Catutthetisso nāma bhikkhūti therasseva saddhivihāriko.Mahiddhiko mahānubhāvoti ijjhanaṭṭhena mahatī iddhi assāti mahiddhiko. Anupharaṇaṭṭhena mahā ānubhāvo assāti mahānubhāvo.Cirassaṃ kho, mārisa moggallāna, imaṃ pariyāyamakāsīti evarūpaṃ loke pakatiyā piyasamudāhāravacanaṃ hoti. Lokiyā hi cirassaṃ āgatampi anāgatapubbampi manāpajātiyaṃ āgataṃ disvā ‘‘kuto bhavaṃ āgato, cirassaṃ bhavaṃ āgato, kathaṃ te idhāgamanamaggo ñāto, kiṃ maggamūḷhosī’’tiādīni vadanti. Ayaṃ pana āgatapubbattāyeva evamāha. Thero hi kālena kālaṃ brahmalokaṃ gacchatiyeva. Tatthapariyāyamakāsīti vāraṃ akāsi.Yadidaṃ idhāgamanāyāti yo ayaṃ idhāgamanāya vāro, taṃ cirassaṃ akāsīti vuttaṃ hoti.Idamāsanaṃ paññattanti mahārahaṃ brahmapallaṅkaṃ paññāpetvā evamāha.Aveccappasādenāti adhigatena acalena maggappasādena. Imasmiṃ sutte sotāpattimaggañāṇaṃ kathitaṃ.

34. In the fourth, tisso nāma bhikkhū means a co-resident of the Elder. Mahiddhiko mahānubhāvo means one who has great iddhi in the sense of succeeding is mahiddhiko. One who has great power in the sense of pervasiveness is mahānubhāvo. Cirassaṃ kho, mārisa moggallāna, imaṃ pariyāyamakāsī means such a way of speaking is naturally affectionate in the world. For worldly people, seeing someone who has come after a long time, or even someone who has never come before, but is of a pleasing kind, say, "Where have you come from? You have come after a long time. How did you find the way to come here? Did you get lost?" etc. But this one says this simply because he has come before. For the Elder goes to the Brahma world from time to time. There, pariyāyamakāsī means he made a turn. Yadidaṃ idhāgamanāyā means what is said is that he made that turn for coming here after a long time. Idamāsanaṃ paññatta means having prepared a very valuable Brahma couch, he says this. Aveccappasādenā means by the unwavering path-faith that has been attained. In this sutta, the knowledge of the Sotāpatti path is spoken of.

5. Vijjābhāgiyasuttavaṇṇanā
5. Vijjābhāgiyasuttavaṇṇanā

35.Pañcamevijjābhāgiyāti vijjākoṭṭhāsikā.Aniccasaññāti aniccānupassanāñāṇe uppannasaññā.Anicce dukkhasaññāti dukkhānupassanāñāṇe uppannasaññā.Dukkhe anattasaññāti anattānupassanāñāṇe uppannasaññā.Pahānasaññāti pahānānupassanāñāṇe uppannasaññā.Virāgasaññāti virāgānupassanāñāṇe uppannasaññā.Nirodhasaññāti nirodhānupassanāñāṇe uppannasaññā.

35. In the fifth, vijjābhāgiyā means having a share in knowledge. Aniccasaññā means the perception that arises in the knowledge of contemplating impermanence. Anicce dukkhasaññā means the perception that arises in the knowledge of contemplating suffering in impermanence. Dukkhe anattasaññā means the perception that arises in the knowledge of contemplating non-self in suffering. Pahānasaññā means the perception that arises in the knowledge of contemplating abandonment. Virāgasaññā means the perception that arises in the knowledge of contemplating fading away. Nirodhasaññā means the perception that arises in the knowledge of contemplating cessation.

6. Vivādamūlasuttavaṇṇanā
6. Vivādamūlasuttavaṇṇanā

36.Chaṭṭhevivādamūlānīti vivādassa mūlāni.Kodhanoti kujjhanalakkhaṇena kodhena samannāgato.Upanāhīti veraappaṭinissaggalakkhaṇena upanāhena samannāgato.Ahitāya dukkhāya devamanussānanti dvinnaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ vivādo kathaṃ devamanussānaṃ ahitāya dukkhāya saṃvattati? Kosambakakkhandhake viya dvīsu bhikkhūsu vivādaṃ āpannesu tasmiṃ vihāre tesaṃ antevāsikā vivadanti, tesaṃ ovādaṃ gaṇhanto bhikkhunisaṅgho vivadati. Tato tesaṃ upaṭṭhākā vivadanti, atha manussānaṃ ārakkhadevatā dve koṭṭhāsā honti. Tathā dhammavādīnaṃ ārakkhadevatā dhammavādiniyo honti, adhammavādīnaṃ adhammavādiniyo. Tato ārakkhadevatānaṃ mittā bhummadevatā bhijjanti. Evaṃ paramparāya yāva brahmalokā ṭhapetvā ariyasāvake sabbe devamanussā dve koṭṭhāsā honti. Dhammavādīhi pana adhammavādinova bahutarā honti. Tato yaṃ bahukehi gahitaṃ, taṃ gacchanti. Dhammaṃ vissajjetvā bahutarāva adhammaṃ gaṇhanti. Te adhammaṃ purakkhatvā viharantā apāye nibbattanti. Evaṃ dvinnaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ vivādo devamanussānaṃ ahitāya dukkhāya hoti.Ajjhattaṃ vāti tumhākaṃ abbhantaraparisāya.Bahiddhāti paresaṃ parisāya.

36. In the sixth, vivādamūlānī means the roots of quarrel. Kodhano means endowed with anger, characterized by being prone to anger. Upanāhī means endowed with resentment, characterized by not releasing grudges. Ahitāya dukkhāya devamanussānaṃ means for the harm and suffering of gods and humans; how does a quarrel between two monks lead to harm and suffering for gods and humans? As in the Kosambaka quarrel, when two monks fall into dispute in a monastery, their students quarrel, and the monastic community quarrels taking their advice. Then their supporters quarrel, and the guardian deities of humans are divided into two factions. Similarly, the guardian deities of those who speak the Dhamma are for those who speak the Dhamma, and those of the unrighteous for the unrighteous. Then the friend deities of the guardian deities, the earth deities, are divided. Thus, in succession, except for the noble disciples, all gods and humans are divided into two factions up to the Brahma realm. However, those who are unrighteous are more numerous than those who speak the Dhamma. Then they go along with what is embraced by the majority. Abandoning the Dhamma, the majority embrace unrighteousness. Living upholding that unrighteousness, they are reborn in the lower realms. Thus, the quarrel between two monks leads to harm and suffering for gods and humans. Ajjhattaṃ vā means in your inner circle. Bahiddhā means in the circle of others.

Makkhīti paresaṃ guṇamakkhanalakkhaṇena makkhena samannāgato.Paḷāsīti yugaggāhalakkhaṇena paḷāsena samannāgato.Issukīti parassa sakkārādīni issāyanalakkhaṇāya issāya samannāgato.Maccharīti āvāsamacchariyādīhi samannāgato.Saṭhoti kerāṭiko.Māyāvīti katapaṭicchādako.Pāpicchoti asantasambhāvanicchako dussīlo.Micchādiṭṭhīti natthikavādī, ahetuvādī, akiriyavādī.Sandiṭṭhiparāmāsīti sayaṃ diṭṭhameva parāmasati.Ādhānaggāhīti daḷhaggāhī.Duppaṭinissaggīti na sakkā hoti gahitaṃ vissajjāpetuṃ. Imasmiṃ sutte vaṭṭameva kathitaṃ.

Makkhī means endowed with denigration, characterized by disparaging the virtues of others. Paḷāsī means endowed with obstinacy, characterized by seizing the wrong end. Issukī means endowed with envy, characterized by being envious of the gains of others. Maccharī means endowed with stinginess, such as stinginess about dwellings. Saṭho means deceitful. Māyāvī means one who conceals his misdeeds. Pāpiccho means having evil desires, an immoral person desiring what he does not have. Micchādiṭṭhī means holding nihilistic views, denying cause, denying efficacy. Sandiṭṭhiparāmāsī means adhering to one's own views. Ādhānaggāhī means holding firmly. Duppaṭinissaggī means not being able to let go of what is held. In this sutta, only the cycle (vaṭṭa) is discussed.

7. Dānasuttavaṇṇanā
7. Dānasutta Commentary

37.Sattameveḷukaṇḍakīti veḷukaṇḍakanagaravāsinī.Chaḷaṅgasamannāgatanti chahi guṇaṅgehi samannāgataṃ.Dakkhiṇaṃ patiṭṭhāpetīti dānaṃ deti.Pubbeva dānā sumanoti dānaṃ dassāmīti māsaḍḍhamāsato paṭṭhāya somanassappatto hoti. Ettha hi pubbecetanā dassāmīti cittuppādakālato paṭṭhāya ‘‘ito uṭṭhitena dānaṃ dassāmī’’ti khettaggahaṇaṃ ādiṃ katvā cintentassa labbhati.Dadaṃ cittaṃ pasādetīti evaṃ vuttā muñcacetanā pana dānakāleyeva labbhati.Datvā attamano hotīti ayaṃ pana aparacetanā aparāparaṃ anussarantassa labbhati.Vītarāgāti vigatarāgā khīṇāsavā.Rāgavinayāya vā paṭipannāti rāgavinayapaṭipadaṃ paṭipannā. Ukkaṭṭhadesanā cesā, na kevalaṃ pana khīṇāsavānaṃ, anāgāmi-sakadāgāmi-sotāpannānampi antamaso tadahupabbajitassa bhaṇḍagāhakasāmaṇerassāpi dinnā dakkhiṇā chaḷaṅgasamannāgatāva hoti. Sopi hi sotāpattimaggatthameva pabbajito.

37. In the seventh, veḷukaṇḍakī means a resident of Veḷukaṇḍaka city. Chaḷaṅgasamannāgata means endowed with six qualities. Dakkhiṇaṃ patiṭṭhāpetī means gives a gift. Pubbeva dānā sumano means being delighted from a month or half a month before giving, thinking, "I will give a gift." Here, prior intention (pubbecetanā) is obtained from the moment of generating the thought of giving, including considering "I will give a gift when I get up from here," starting with the selection of the field (khettaggahaṇaṃ). Dadaṃ cittaṃ pasādetī means purifying the mind while giving (muñcacetanā), which is obtained at the time of giving. Datvā attamano hotī means being happy after giving; this subsequent intention (aparacetanā) is obtained by repeatedly recollecting the gift. Vītarāgā means free from lust, a perfected being (khīṇāsavā). Rāgavinayāya vā paṭipannā means practicing for the elimination of lust. This is an excellent teaching; it is not only that gifts given to arahants are endowed with six qualities, but also to anāgāmīs, sakadāgāmīs, sotāpannas, and even to a novice (sāmaṇera) who has recently ordained for that day and serves as a storekeeper. Even he is ordained with the intention of attaining the path of stream-entry (sotāpatti).

Yaññassa sampadāti dānassa paripuṇṇatā.Saññatāti sīlasaññamena saññatā.Sayaṃ ācamayitvānāti attanāva hatthapāde dhovitvā mukhaṃ vikkhāletvā.Sakehi pāṇibhīti attano hatthehi. Sayehītipi pāṭho.Saddhoti ratanattayaguṇe saddahanto.Muttena cetasāti lābhamacchariyādīhi vimuttena cittena.Abyāpajjhaṃsukhaṃ lokanti niddukkhaṃ uḷārasukhasomanassaṃ devalokaṃ.

Yaññassa sampadā means the perfection of giving. Saññatā means restrained by moral restraint (sīlasaññama). Sayaṃ ācamayitvānā means having washed hands and feet and rinsed the mouth oneself. Sakehi pāṇibhī means with one's own hands. Sayehītipi pāṭho. Saddho means believing in the qualities of the Triple Gem. Muttena cetasā means with a mind free from stinginess about gains and other defilements. Abyāpajjhaṃ sukhaṃ lokanti means the world of the gods, free from suffering, with great happiness and joy.

8. Attakārīsuttavaṇṇanā
8. Attakārīsutta Commentary

38.Aṭṭhameaddasaṃ vā assosiṃ vāti akkhīni ummīletvā mā addasaṃ, asukasmiṃ nāma ṭhāne vasatīti mā assosiṃ, kathentassa vā vacanaṃ mā assosiṃ.Kathañhi nāmāti kena nāma kāraṇena.Ārambhadhātūti ārabhanavasena pavattavīriyaṃ.Nikkamadhātūti kosajjato nikkhamanasabhāvaṃ vīriyaṃ.Parakkamadhātūti parakkamasabhāvo.Thāmadhātūti thāmasabhāvo.Ṭhitidhātūti ṭhitisabhāvo.Upakkamadhātūti upakkamasabhāvo. Sabbaṃ cetaṃ tena tenākārena pavattassa vīriyasseva nāmaṃ.

38. In the eighth, addasaṃ vā assosiṃ vā means, I have not seen opening my eyes, nor have I heard that he lives in such and such a place, nor have I heard the words of the one speaking. Kathañhi nāmā means by what cause. Ārambhadhātū means energy that proceeds by way of initiating. Nikkamadhātū means energy that has the nature of emerging from laziness. Parakkamadhātū means having the nature of exertion. Thāmadhātū means having the nature of strength. Ṭhitidhātū means having the nature of steadfastness. Upakkamadhātū means having the nature of effort. All these are names for energy that proceeds in various ways.

9-10. Nidānasuttādivaṇṇanā
9-10. Nidānasutta, etc., Commentary

39-40.Navamekammānanti vaṭṭagāmikammānaṃ.Samudayāyāti piṇḍakaraṇatthāya.Nidānanti paccayo.Lobhajenāti lobhato jātena.Napaññāyantīti ‘‘evarūpena kammena nibbattā’’ti na dissanti. Sukkapakkhekammānanti vivaṭṭagāmikammānaṃ. Iti imasmiṃ sutte vaṭṭavivaṭṭaṃ kathitaṃ. Dasameniculavaneti mahāmucalindavane.Saddhammoti sāsanasaddhammo.

39-40. In the ninth, kammānanti means actions that lead to the cycle (vaṭṭa). Samudayāyāti means for the purpose of aggregation. Nidānanti means condition. Lobhajenāti means born of greed. Na paññāyantīti means "they are not seen" as having arisen from such and such actions. In the bright side, kammānanti means actions that lead to liberation (vivaṭṭa). Thus, in this sutta, the cycle (vaṭṭa) and liberation (vivaṭṭa) are discussed. In the tenth, niculavaneti means in the Mahāmucalinda forest. Saddhammoti means the true Dhamma of the dispensation.

11. Dārukkhandhasuttavaṇṇanā
11. Dārukkhandhasutta Commentary

41.Ekādasamecetovasippattoti cittavasibhāvaṃ patto.Pathavītveva adhimucceyyāti thaddhākāraṃ pathavīdhātūti sallakkheyya.Yaṃnissāyāti yaṃ vijjamānaṃ thaddhākāraṃ pathavīdhātuṃ nissāya amuṃ dārukkhandhaṃ pathavītveva adhimucceyya, sā ettha pathavīdhātu atthīti. Iminā nayena sesapadānipi veditabbāni. Yatheva hi tasmiṃ thaddhākārā pathavīdhātu atthi, evaṃ yūsākārā āpodhātu, uṇhākārā tejodhātu, vitthambhanākārā vāyodhātu, rattavaṇṇamhi sāre padumapupphavaṇṇā subhadhātu, pūtibhūte cuṇṇe ceva pheggupapaṭikāsu ca amanuññavaṇṇā asubhadhātu, taṃ nissāya amuṃ dārukkhandhaṃ asubhantveva adhimucceyya sallakkheyyāti. Imasmiṃ sutte missakavihāro nāma kathito.

41. In the eleventh, cetovasippattoti means having attained mastery of mind. Pathavītveva adhimucceyyāti means he would perceive the solid nature as the earth element. Yaṃ nissāyāti means, relying on whatever solid earth element exists, he would perceive this log as earth; the earth element is present here. In this way, the remaining words should be understood. Just as the solid earth element is present in it, so too are the liquid water element, the hot fire element, and the expansive air element. In the red color of the heartwood, there is the beautiful element resembling the color of a lotus flower; in the decaying powder and in the outer bark, there is the unattractive element of unpleasant color. Relying on that, he would perceive this log as unattractive. In this sutta, the mixed dwelling (missakavihāro) is discussed.

12. Nāgitasuttavaṇṇanā
12. Nāgitasutta Commentary

42.Dvādasamegāmantavihārinti gāmantasenāsanavāsiṃ.Samāhitaṃ nisinnanti tasmiṃ gāmantasenāsane samādhiṃ appetvā nisinnaṃ.Idānimanti idāni imaṃ.Samādhimhā cāvessatīti samādhito uṭṭhāpessati.Na attamano homīti na sakamano homi.Pacalāyamānanti niddāyamānaṃ.Ekattanti ekasabhāvaṃ, ekaggatābhūtaṃ araññasaññaṃyeva citte karissatīti attho.Anurakkhissatīti anuggaṇhissati.Avimuttaṃ vā cittaṃ vimocessatīti aññasmiṃ kāle avimuttaṃ cittaṃ idāni pañcahi vimuttīhi vimocayissati.Riñcatīti vajjeti vissajjeti.Paṭipaṇāmetvāti panuditvā vissajjetvā.Uccārapassāvakammāyāti uccārapassāvakaraṇatthāya. Iminā ettakena ṭhānena satthārā araññasenāsanassa vaṇṇo kathito. Suttassa pana paṭhamakoṭṭhāse yaṃ vattabbaṃ, taṃ heṭṭhā vuttamevāti.

42. In the twelfth, gāmantavihārinti means dwelling in a village border residence. Samāhitaṃ nisinnanti means sitting having applied his mind to samādhi in that village border residence. Idānimanti means now, this. Samādhimhā cāvessatīti means will make him rise from samādhi. Na attamano homīti means I am not in control of myself. Pacalāyamānanti means drowsy. Ekattanti means one nature, he will keep the perception of the forest in his mind as one-pointed. Anurakkhissatīti means will support. Avimuttaṃ vā cittaṃ vimocessatīti means at another time he will liberate the mind that is not yet freed now with the five kinds of liberation. Riñcatīti means abandons, releases. Paṭipaṇāmetvāti means having driven away, having released. Uccārapassāvakammāyāti means for the purpose of performing excretion and urination. By this much, the Teacher has described the qualities of the forest dwelling. However, what needs to be said in the first part of the sutta has already been said below.

5. Dhammikavaggo

5. Dhammika Chapter

1. Nāgasuttavaṇṇanā
1. Nāgasutta Commentary

43.Pañcamassa paṭhameāyasmatā ānandena saddhinti idaṃ ‘‘āyāmānandā’’ti theraṃ āmantetvā gatattā vuttaṃ, satthā pana anūnehi pañcahi bhikkhusatehi parivuto tattha agamāsīti veditabbo.Tenupasaṅkamīti teheva pañcahi bhikkhusatehi parivuto upasaṅkami.Parisiñcitvāti vohāravacanametaṃ, nhāyitvāti attho.Pubbāpayamānoti rattadupaṭṭaṃ nivāsetvā uttarāsaṅgacīvaraṃ dvīhi hatthehi gahetvā pacchimalokadhātuṃ piṭṭhito katvā puratthimalokadhātuṃ abhimukho vodakabhāvena gattāni pubbasadisāni kurumāno aṭṭhāsīti attho. Bhikkhusaṅghopi tena tena ṭhānena otaritvā nhatvā paccuttaritvā satthāraṃyeva parivāretvā aṭṭhāsi. Iti tasmiṃ samaye ākāsato patamānaṃ rattasuvaṇṇakuṇḍalaṃ viya sūriyo pacchimalokadhātuṃ paṭipajji, parisuddharajatamaṇḍalo viya pācīnalokadhātuto cando abbhuggañchi, majjhaṭṭhānepi pañcabhikkhusataparivāro sammāsambuddho chabbaṇṇabuddharasmiyo vissajjetvā pubbakoṭṭhakanadītīre lokaṃ alaṅkurumāno aṭṭhāsi.

43. In the first of the fifth, āyasmatā ānandena saddhinti, this is said because he went after addressing the elder as "Āyāmānanda"; it should be understood that the Teacher went there surrounded by no less than five hundred monks. Tenupasaṅkamīti means he approached surrounded by those five hundred monks. Parisiñcitvāti this is a conventional expression, meaning having bathed. Pubbāpayamānoti means having wrapped the red upper cloth, and having taken the upper robe with both hands, having turned the western direction to his back, facing the eastern direction, making the body like water, stood making it similar to before. The community of monks also descended into the river at that place, bathed, re-emerged, and stood surrounding the Teacher. Thus, at that time, like a red-gold earring falling from the sky, the sun approached the western direction; like a pure silver disc, the moon rose from the eastern direction; in the middle, the perfectly enlightened Buddha, surrounded by five hundred monks, stood adorning the world on the bank of the Pubbakoṭṭhaka River, emitting six-colored Buddha rays.

Tena kho pana samayena…pe… seto nāma nāgoti setavaṇṇatāya evaṃ laddhanāmo hatthināgo.Mahātūriyatāḷitavāditenāti mahantena tūriyatāḷitavāditena. Tattha paṭhamaṃ saṅghaṭṭanaṃ tāḷitaṃ nāma hoti, tato paraṃ vāditaṃ.Janoti hatthidassanatthaṃ sannipatitamahājano.Disvā evamāhāti aṅgapaccaṅgāni ghaṃsitvā nhāpetvā uttāretvā bahitīre ṭhapetvā gattāni vodakāni katvā hatthālaṅkārena alaṅkataṃ taṃ mahānāgaṃ disvā idaṃ ‘‘abhirūpo vata, bho’’ti pasaṃsāvacanamāha.Kāyupapannoti sarīrasampattiyā upapanno, paripuṇṇaṅgapaccaṅgoti attho.Āyasmā udāyīti paṭisambhidāppatto kāḷudāyitthero.Etadavocāti taṃ mahājanaṃ hatthissa vaṇṇaṃ bhaṇantaṃ disvā ‘‘ayaṃ jano ahetukapaṭisandhiyaṃ nibbattahatthino vaṇṇaṃ katheti, na buddhahatthissa. Ahaṃ dāni iminā hatthināgena upamaṃ katvā buddhanāgassa vaṇṇaṃ kathessāmī’’ti cintetvā etaṃ ‘‘hatthimeva nu kho, bhante’’tiādivacanaṃ avoca. Tatthamahantanti ārohasampannaṃ.Brahantanti pariṇāhasampannaṃ.Evamāhāti evaṃ vadati. Atha bhagavā yasmā ayaṃ nāgasaddo hatthimhiceva assagoṇauragarukkhamanussesu cāpi pavattati, tasmāhatthimpi khotiādimāha.

Tena kho pana samayena…pe… seto nāma nāgoti, a tusker elephant named White (Seto) because of his white color. Mahātūriyatāḷitavāditenāti with a great orchestra of drums and musical instruments. There, first, the striking is called tāḷita, after that, the playing is called vādita. Janoti means a large crowd gathered to see the elephant. Disvā evamāhāti means having seen that great elephant, cleaned by rubbing his limbs, bathed, lifted up, placed on the outer bank, his body moistened with water, adorned with decorations on his trunk, he said this praising words, "Indeed, beautiful, O venerable one". Kāyupapannoti means endowed with physical beauty, having perfect limbs. Āyasmā udāyīti, the elder Kāḷudāyi, who had attained analytical knowledge. Etadavocāti means, seeing that great crowd praising the beauty of the elephant, he thought, "This crowd is speaking of the beauty of an elephant born from a causeless rebirth, not of the Buddha elephant. Now, using this elephant as an analogy, I will speak of the beauty of the Buddha elephant," and he spoke these words, beginning with "Is it just an elephant, venerable sir?". There, mahantanti means possessing great height. Brahantanti means possessing great girth. Evamāhāti means he speaks thus. Then, because the word nāga applies to elephants, horses, bulls, snakes, trees, and humans, the Blessed One said, hatthimpi khotiādimāha.

Āgunti pāpakaṃ lāmakaṃ akusaladhammaṃ.Tamahaṃ nāgoti brūmīti taṃ ahaṃ imehi tīhi dvārehi dasannaṃ akusalakammapathānaṃ dvādasannañca akusalacittānaṃ akaraṇato nāgoti vadāmi. Ayañhi na āguṃ karotīti iminā atthena nāgo.Imāhi gāthāhi anumodāmīti imāhi catusaṭṭhipadāhi soḷasahi gāthāhi anumodāmi abhinandāmi.

Āgunti means evil, base, unwholesome Dhamma. Tamahaṃ nāgoti brūmīti means I call him nāga because he does not do the ten unwholesome courses of action through these three doors and the twelve unwholesome thoughts. Because he does not do evil, he is a nāga in this sense. Imāhi gāthāhi anumodāmīti means I approve and rejoice with these sixteen verses of sixty-four lines.

Manussabhūtanti devādibhāvaṃ anupagantvā manussameva bhūtaṃ.Attadantanti attanāyeva dantaṃ, na aññehi damathaṃ upanītaṃ. Bhagavā hi attanā uppāditeneva maggadamathena cakkhutopi danto, sotatopi, ghānatopi, jivhātopi, kāyatopi, manatopīti imesu chasu ṭhānesu danto santo nibbuto parinibbuto. Tenāha – ‘‘attadanta’’nti.Samāhitanti duvidhenāpi samādhinā samāhitaṃ.Iriyamānanti viharamānaṃ.Brahmapatheti seṭṭhapathe, amatapathe, nibbānapathe.Cittassūpasame ratanti paṭhamajjhānena pañca nīvaraṇāni vūpasametvā, dutiyajjhānena vitakkavicāre, tatiyajjhānena pītiṃ, catutthajjhānena sukhadukkhaṃ vūpasametvā tasmiṃ cittassūpasame rataṃ abhirataṃ.

Manussabhūtanti means having become a human being without going to the state of gods, etc. Attadantanti means tamed by himself, not brought to taming by others. The Blessed One is tamed from the eye by the path-taming produced by himself, also from the ear, also from the nose, also from the tongue, also from the body, also from the mind; thus, in these six places, he is tamed, peaceful, calmed, completely calmed. Therefore, he said, "attadanta." Samāhitanti means calmed by both kinds of samādhi. Iriyamānanti means living. Brahmapatheti means in the excellent path, the path of deathlessness, the path of Nibbāna. Cittassūpasame ratanti means having calmed the five hindrances with the first jhāna, having calmed thought and examination with the second jhāna, having calmed joy with the third jhāna, having calmed pleasure and pain with the fourth jhāna, delighting in that calming of the mind.

Namassantīti kāyena namassanti, vācāya namassanti, manasā namassanti, dhammānudhammapaṭipattiyā namassanti, sakkaronti garuṃ karonti.Sabbadhammānapāragunti sabbesaṃ khandhāyatanadhātudhammānaṃ abhiññāpāragū, pariññāpāragū, pahānapāragū, bhāvanāpāragū, sacchikiriyāpāragū, samāpattipāragūti chabbidhena pāragamanena pāragataṃ pārappattaṃ matthakappattaṃ.Devāpi taṃ namassantīti dukkhappattā subrahmadevaputtādayo sukhappattā ca sabbeva dasasahassacakkavāḷavāsino devāpi tumhe namassanti.Iti me arahato sutanti iti mayā catūhi kāraṇehi arahāti laddhavohārānaṃ tumhākaṃyeva santike sutanti dīpeti.

Namassantīti means they pay homage with the body, they pay homage with the speech, they pay homage with the mind, they pay homage with the practice of Dhamma in accordance with the Dhamma, they honor, they respect. Sabbadhammānapāragunti means having gone beyond all the qualities of aggregates, sense bases, elements, with knowledge, with complete understanding, with abandonment, with development, with realization, and with attainment; having gone beyond with six kinds of going beyond, having reached the other shore, having reached the summit. Devāpi taṃ namassantīti means even the gods living in the ten thousand world-systems, such as the suffering Subrahmādeva, and all those who have attained happiness, pay homage to you. Iti me arahato sutanti means thus I have heard near you, who have attained the designation of arahant for four reasons.

Sabbasaṃyojanātītanti sabbāni dasavidhasaṃyojanāni atikkantaṃ.Vanā nibbanamāgatanti kilesavanato nibbanaṃ kilesavanarahitaṃ nibbānaṃ āgataṃ sampattaṃ.Kāmehi nekkhammaratanti duvidhehi kāmehi nikkhantattā pabbajjā aṭṭha samāpattiyo cattāro ca ariyamaggā kāmehi nekkhammaṃ nāma, tattha rataṃ abhirataṃ.Muttaṃ selāva kañcananti seladhātuto muttaṃ kañcanasadisaṃ.

Sabbasaṃyojanātītanti means having gone beyond all ten kinds of fetters. Vanā nibbanamāgatanti means having come to nibbāna from the forest of defilements, nibbāna which is devoid of the forest of defilements. Kāmehi nekkhammaratanti means because of having renounced the two kinds of sense pleasures, the renunciation, the eight attainments, and the four noble paths are called renunciation from sense pleasures; delighting in that. Muttaṃ selāva kañcananti means like gold freed from the rock.

Sabbe accarucīti sabbasatte atikkamitvā pavattaruci. Aṭṭhamakañhi atikkamitvā pavattarucitāya sotāpanno accaruci nāma, sotāpannaṃ atikkamitvā pavattarucitāya sakadāgāmī…pe… khīṇāsavaṃ atikkamitvā pavattarucitāya paccekasambuddho, paccekasambuddhaṃ atikkamitvā pavattarucitāya sammāsambuddho accaruci nāma.Himavāvaññe siluccayeti yathā himavā pabbatarājā aññe pabbate atirocati, evaṃ atirocatīti attho.Saccanāmoti tacchanāmo bhūtanāmo āguṃ akaraṇeneva nāgoti evaṃ avitathanāmo.

Sabbe accarucīti means having a surpassing beauty that exceeds all beings. For one who has a surpassing beauty that exceeds the ordinary, a sotāpanna is called accaruci; a sakadāgāmī because of a surpassing beauty that exceeds a sotāpanna…pe… a paccekabuddha because of a surpassing beauty that exceeds a khīṇāsava; a sammāsambuddha because of a surpassing beauty that exceeds a paccekabuddha is called accaruci. Himavāvaññe siluccayeti means just as the Himalayas, the king of mountains, shines above other mountains, so he shines above. Saccanāmoti means having a true name, a factual name, because he does not do evil, he is a nāga, thus having a truthful name.

Soraccanti sucisīlaṃ.Avihiṃsāti karuṇā ca karuṇāpubbabhāgo ca.Pādā nāgassa te duveti te buddhanāgassa duve purimapādā.

Soraccanti means possessing good moral conduct. Avihiṃsāti means compassion and the preliminary stage of compassion. Pādā nāgassa te duveti means those are the two front feet of the Buddha-elephant.

Tapoti dhutasamādānaṃ.Brahmacariyanti ariyamaggasīlaṃ.Caraṇā nāgassa tyāpareti te buddhanāgassa apare dve pacchimapādā.Saddhāhatthoti saddhāmayāya soṇḍāya samannāgato.Upekkhāsetadantavāti chaḷaṅgupekkhāmayehi setadantehi samannāgato.

Tapoti means undertaking the dhuta practices. Brahmacariyanti means the morality of the Noble Path. Caraṇā nāgassa tyāpareti means those are the other two hind feet of the Buddha-elephant. Saddhāhatthoti means endowed with a trunk made of faith. Upekkhāsetadantavāti means endowed with white tusks made of the six-factored equanimity.

Sati gīvāti yathā nāgassa aṅgapaccaṅgasmiṃ sirājālānaṃ gīvā patiṭṭhā, evaṃ buddhanāgassa soraccādīnaṃ dhammānaṃ sati. Tena vuttaṃ – ‘‘sati gīvā’’ti.Siro paññāti yathā hatthināgassa siro uttamaṅgo, evaṃ buddhanāgassa sabbaññutañāṇaṃ. Tena hi so sabbadhamme jānāti. Tena vuttaṃ – ‘‘siro paññā’’ti.Vīmaṃsā dhammacintanāti yathā hatthināgassa aggasoṇḍo vīmaṃsā nāma hoti. So tāya thaddhamudukaṃ khāditabbākhāditabbañca vīmaṃsati, tato pahātabbaṃ pajahati, ādātabbaṃ ādiyati, evameva buddhanāgassa dhammakoṭṭhāsaparicchedakañāṇasaṅkhātā dhammacintanā vīmaṃsā. Tena hi ñāṇena so bhabbābhabbe jānāti. Tena vuttaṃ – ‘‘vīmaṃsā dhammacintanā’’ti.Dhammakucchisamātapoti dhammo vuccati catutthajjhānasamādhi, kucchiyeva samātapo kucchisamātapo. Samātapo nāma samātapanaṭṭhānaṃ. Dhammo kucchisamātapo assāti dhammakucchisamātapo. Catutthajjhānasamādhismiṃ ṭhitassa hi te te iddhividhādidhammā ijjhanti, tasmā so kucchisamātapoti vutto.Vivekoti kāyacittaupadhiviveko. Yathā nāgassa vāladhi makkhikā vāreti, evaṃ tathāgatassa viveko gahaṭṭhapabbajite vāreti. Tasmā sovāladhīti vutto.

Sati gīvāti just as the neck is the support for the network of sinews in the limbs of an elephant, so is mindfulness for the qualities of good moral conduct and so on in the Buddha-elephant. Hence it was said, "sati gīvā." Siro paññāti just as the head is the most excellent part of an elephant, so is the wisdom of omniscience for the Buddha-elephant. Because of that, he knows all things. Hence it was said, "siro paññā." Vīmaṃsā dhammacintanāti just as the tip of the trunk of an elephant is called vīmaṃsā (investigation), with which it investigates what is hard and soft, what should be eaten and what should not, then it rejects what should be rejected and accepts what should be accepted, just so, for the Buddha-elephant, the investigation of the Dhamma, known as the wisdom that distinguishes the divisions of the Dhamma, is vīmaṃsā. With that wisdom, he knows what is fit and unfit. Hence it was said, "vīmaṃsā dhammacintanā." Dhammakucchisamātapoti Dhamma means the fourth jhāna samādhi, the heat in the belly itself is kucchisamātapo. Samātapo means the place of intense heat. He whose Dhamma is kucchisamātapo is dhammakucchisamātapo. For when one is established in the fourth jhāna samādhi, those various supernormal powers are accomplished, therefore it is called kucchisamātapo. Vivekoti means seclusion of body, mind, and defilements. Just as the tail of an elephant drives away flies, so the Tathāgata's seclusion drives away householders and renunciants. Therefore, it is called vāladhī (tail).

Jhāyīti duvidhena jhānena jhāyī.Assāsaratoti nāgassa hi assāsapassāsā viya buddhanāgassa phalasamāpatti, tattha rato, assāsapassāsehi viya tāya vinā na vattatīti attho.Sabbattha saṃvutoti sabbadvāresu saṃvuto.Anavajjānīti sammāājīvena uppannabhojanāni.Sāvajjānīti pañcavidhamicchājīvavasena uppannabhojanāni.

Jhāyīti one who meditates with twofold jhāna. Assāsaratoti just as the in-breath and out-breath of an elephant, so for the Buddha-elephant is the fruition attainment; he delights in that, he does not live without it like without the in-breath and out-breath, this is the meaning. Sabbattha saṃvutoti restrained in all the doors of sense. Anavajjānīti blameless foods, those that arise by means of right livelihood. Sāvajjānīti blameworthy foods, those that arise by means of the five kinds of wrong livelihood.

Aṇuṃthūlanti khuddakañca mahantañca.Sabbaṃ chetvāna bandhananti sabbaṃ dasavidhampi saṃyojanaṃ chinditvāna.Nupalippati lokenāti lokena saddhiṃ taṇhāmānadiṭṭhilepehi na lippati.Mahāginīti mahāaggi.Viññūhi desitāti idha paṭisambhidāppatto kāḷudāyittherova viññū paṇḍito, tena desitāti attho.Viññassanti mahānāgā, nāgaṃ nāgena desitanti udāyittheranāgena desitaṃ buddhanāgaṃ itare khīṇāsavā nāgā vijānissanti.

Aṇuṃthūlanti small and large. Sabbaṃ chetvāna bandhananti having cut off all the ten kinds of fetters. Nupalippati lokenāti he is not stained by the world with the stains of craving, conceit, and wrong views. Mahāginīti great fire. Viññūhi desitāti here, the Venerable Kāḷudāyi, who has attained the paṭisambhidā, is the wise one, the learned one, by him it was taught, this is the meaning. Viññassanti mahānāgā, nāgaṃ nāgena desitanti the Buddha-elephant taught by the elephant Udāyi will be understood by the other great elephants, the arahants.

Sarīraṃvijahaṃ nāgo, parinibbissatīti bodhipallaṅke kilesaparinibbānena parinibbuto, yamakasālantare anupādisesāya nibbānadhātuyā parinibbāyissati. Evaṃ paṭisambhidāppatto udāyitthero soḷasahi gāthāhi catusaṭṭhiyā padehi dasabalassa vaṇṇaṃ kathento desanaṃ niṭṭhāpesi. Bhagavā anumodi. Desanāvasāne caturāsītipāṇasahassāni amatapānaṃ piviṃsūti.

Sarīraṃ vijahaṃ nāgo, parinibbissatīti having abandoned the body, the elephant will attain final Nibbāna: he attained final Nibbāna with the Nibbāna of the defilements at the Bodhi tree, he will attain final Nibbāna without remainder in the grove of twin Sāla trees. Thus, the Venerable Udāyi, who had attained the paṭisambhidā, having completed the teaching while describing the virtues of the Ten-Powered One with sixteen verses and sixty-four words. The Blessed One approved. At the end of the teaching, eighty-four thousand beings drank the deathless drink.

2. Migasālāsuttavaṇṇanā
2. Commentary on the Migasālā Sutta

44.Dutiyekathaṃ kathaṃ nāmāti kena kena kāraṇena.Aññeyyoti ājānitabbo.Yatra hi nāmāti yasmiṃ nāma dhamme.Samasamagatikāti samabhāveneva samagatikā.Bhavissantīti jātā.Sakadāgāmipatto tusitaṃ kāyaṃ upapannoti sakadāgāmipuggalo hutvā tusitabhavaneyeva nibbatto.Kathaṃ kathaṃ nāmāti kena kena nu kho kāraṇena, kiṃ nu kho jānitvā desito, udāhu ajānitvāti. Thero kāraṇaṃ ajānantoevaṃ kho panetaṃ bhagini bhagavatā byākatanti āha.

44.In the second, kathaṃ kathaṃ nāmāti by which reason? Aññeyyoti unknowable. Yatra hi nāmāti in which Dhamma. Samasamagatikāti with evenness, they are of the same destiny. Bhavissantīti born. Sakadāgāmipatto tusitaṃ kāyaṃ upapannoti having been a Once-Returner, he was reborn in the Tusita heaven. Kathaṃ kathaṃ nāmāti by which reason indeed, having known what was it taught, or without knowing? The Elder, not knowing the reason, said, evaṃ kho panetaṃ bhagini bhagavatā byākatanti, "in this way indeed, sister, was it explained by the Blessed One."

Ammakā ammakapaññāti itthī hutvā itthisaññāya eva samannāgatā.Ke ca purisapuggalaparopariyañāṇeti ettha purisapuggalaparopariyañāṇaṃ vuccati purisapuggalānaṃ tikkhamuduvasena indriyaparopariyañāṇaṃ. Tasmā kā ca bālā migasālā, ke ca purisapuggalānaṃ indriyaparopariyañāṇe appaṭihatavisayā sammāsambuddhā, ubhayametaṃ dūre suvidūreti ayamettha saṅkhepo.

Ammakā ammakapaññāti being a woman, endowed only with the perception of a woman. Ke ca purisapuggalaparopariyañāṇeti here, purisapuggalaparopariyañāṇaṃ means the knowledge of the faculties of other individuals, in terms of sharpness and softness. Therefore, what is the foolish Migasālā, and what are the Sammāsambuddhas whose knowledge of the faculties of other individuals is unimpeded; both of these are far away, very difficult to know, this is the summary here.

chayime, ānandātiādimāha.Sorato hotīti pāpato suṭṭhu orato virato hoti. Suratotipi pāṭho.Abhinandanti sabrahmacārī ekattavāsenāti tena saddhiṃ ekatovāsena sabrahmacārī abhinandanti tussanti. Ekantavāsenātipi pāṭho, satatavāsenāti attho.Savanenapi akataṃ hotīti sotabbayuttakaṃ asutaṃ hoti.Bāhusaccenapi akataṃ hotīti ettha bāhusaccaṃ vuccati vīriyaṃ, vīriyena kattabbayuttakaṃ akataṃ hotīti attho.Diṭṭhiyāpi appaṭividdhaṃ hotīti diṭṭhiyā paṭivijjhitabbaṃ appaṭividdhaṃ hoti.Sāmāyikampi vimuttiṃ na labhatīti kālānukālaṃ dhammassavanaṃ nissāya pītipāmojjaṃ na labhati.Hānagāmīyeva hotīti parihānimeva gacchati.

chayime, ānandāti etc. was said. Sorato hotīti he is well restrained, very restrained, and abstains from evil. Suratopi is also a reading. Abhinandanti sabrahmacārī ekattavāsenāti the sabrahmacārī rejoice and are delighted with him by living together. Ekantavāsenātipi is also a reading, meaning constant dwelling. Savanenapi akataṃ hotīti what should be heard is not heard. Bāhusaccenapi akataṃ hotīti here, bāhusaccaṃ means effort, what should be done by effort is not done, this is the meaning. Diṭṭhiyāpi appaṭividdhaṃ hotīti what should be penetrated by view is not penetrated. Sāmāyikampi vimuttiṃ na labhatīti he does not obtain joy and gladness relying on the hearing of the Dhamma from time to time. Hānagāmīyeva hotīti he only goes to decline.

Pamāṇikāti puggalesu pamāṇaggāhakā.Paminantīti pametuṃ tuletuṃ ārabhanti.Eko hīnoti eko guṇehi hīno.Eko paṇītoti eko guṇehi paṇīto.Taṃ hīti taṃ pamāṇakaraṇaṃ.

Pamāṇikāti those who take measure of individuals. Paminantīti they begin to measure and weigh. Eko hīnoti one is inferior in qualities. Eko paṇītoti one is superior in qualities. Taṃ hīti that measuring.

Abhikkantataroti sundarataro.Paṇītataroti uttamataro.Dhammasoto nibbahatīti sūraṃ hutvā pavattamānavipassanāñāṇaṃ nibbahati, ariyabhūmiṃ sampāpeti.Tadantaraṃ ko jāneyyāti taṃ antaraṃ taṃ kāraṇaṃ aññatra tathāgatena ko jāneyyāti attho.

Abhikkantataroti more beautiful. Paṇītataroti more excellent. Dhammasoto nibbahatīti the flood of Dhamma, the wisdom of insight that arises as a hero, carries forth and leads to the Noble Plane. Tadantaraṃ ko jāneyyāti who else other than the Tathāgata would know that difference, that reason, this is the meaning.

Kodhamānoti kodho ca māno ca.Lobhadhammāti lobhoyeva.Vacīsaṅkhārāti ālāpasallāpavasena vacanāneva.Yo vā panassa mādisoti yo vā pana aññopi mayā sadiso sammāsambuddhoyeva assa, so puggalesu pamāṇaṃ gaṇheyyāti attho.Khaññatīti guṇakhaṇanaṃ pāpuṇāti.Ime kho, ānanda, cha puggalāti dve soratā, dve adhigatakodhamānalobhadhammā, dve adhigatakodhamānavacīsaṅkhārāti ime cha puggalā.Gatinti ñāṇagatiṃ.Ekaṅgahīnāti ekekena guṇaṅgena hīnā. Pūraṇo sīlena visesī ahosi, isidatto paññāya. Pūraṇassa sīlaṃ isidattassa paññāṭhāne ṭhitaṃ, isidattassa paññā pūraṇassa sīlaṭṭhāne ṭhitāti.

Kodhamānoti anger and conceit. Lobhadhammāti only greed. Vacīsaṅkhārāti only words in terms of conversation and discussion. Yo vā panassa mādisoti or anyone else who is like me, a Sammāsambuddha, he would take measure of individuals, this is the meaning. Khaññatīti he attains the destruction of qualities. Ime kho, ānanda, cha puggalāti these six individuals: two who are unrestrained, two who have overcome anger and conceit and greed, two who have overcome anger and conceit and verbal fabrications. Gatinti the course of knowledge. Ekaṅgahīnāti deficient in one quality. Pūraṇa was distinguished by morality, Isidatta by wisdom. The morality of Pūraṇa was in the place of the wisdom of Isidatta, and the wisdom of Isidatta was in the place of the morality of Pūraṇa.

3. Iṇasuttavaṇṇanā
3. Commentary on the Iṇa Sutta

45.Tatiyedāliddiyanti daliddabhāvo.Kāmabhoginoti kāme bhuñjanakasattassa.Assakoti attano santakena rahito.Anāḷhikoti na aḍḍho.Iṇaṃ ādiyatīti jīvituṃ asakkonto iṇaṃ ādiyati.Vaḍḍhiṃ paṭissuṇātīti dātuṃ asakkonto vaḍḍhiṃ dassāmīti paṭijānāti.Anucarantipi nanti parisamajjhagaṇamajjhādīsu ātapaṭhapanapaṃsuokiraṇādīhi vippakāraṃ pāpento pacchato pacchato anubandhanti.Saddhā natthīti okappanakasaddhāmattakampi natthi.Hirī natthīti hirīyanākāramattakampi natthi.Ottappaṃnatthīti bhāyanākāramattakampi natthi.Vīriyaṃ natthīti kāyikavīriyamattakampi natthi.Paññā natthīti kammassakatapaññāmattakampi natthi.Iṇādānasmiṃ vadāmīti iṇaggahaṇaṃ vadāmi.Mā maṃ jaññūti mā maṃ jānātu.

45.In the third, dāliddiyanti the state of poverty. Kāmabhoginoti one who enjoys sense pleasures. Assakoti devoid of one's own possessions. Anāḷhikoti not rich. Iṇaṃ ādiyatīti being unable to live, he takes a loan. Vaḍḍhiṃ paṭissuṇātīti being unable to give, he promises to give interest. Anucarantipi nanti they follow behind him, causing distress in the midst of gatherings and groups by throwing dust and so on. Saddhā natthīti there is not even the slightest faith of conviction. Hirī natthīti there is not even the slightest shame. Ottappaṃ natthīti there is not even the slightest fear. Vīriyaṃ natthīti there is not even the slightest physical effort. Paññā natthīti there is not even the slightest wisdom of the results of deeds. Iṇādānasmiṃ vadāmīti I say about the taking of a loan. Mā maṃ jaññūti may he not know me.

Dāliddiyaṃ dukkhanti dhanadaliddabhāvo dukkhaṃ.Kāmalābhābhijappinanti kāmalābhaṃ patthentānaṃ.Pāpakammavinibbayoti pāpakammavaḍḍhako.Saṃsappatīti paripphandati.Jānanti jānanto.Yassa vippaṭisārajāti ye assa vippaṭisārato jātā.Yonimaññataranti ekaṃ tiracchānayoniṃ.Dadaṃ cittaṃ pasādayanti cittaṃ pasādento dadamāno.

Dāliddiyaṃ dukkhanti the poverty of wealth is suffering. Kāmalābhābhijappinanti those who long for sensual gains. Pāpakammavinibbayoti an increase of evil deeds. Saṃsappatīti it flickers. Jānanti knowing. Yassa vippaṭisārajāti which are born from his remorse. Yonimaññataranti one animal realm. Dadaṃ cittaṃ pasādayanti giving while gladdening the mind.

Kaṭaggāhoti jayaggāho, anaparādhaggāho hoti.Gharamesinoti gharāvāsaṃ pariyesantassa vasamānassa vā.Cāgo puññaṃ pavaḍḍhatīti cāgoti saṅkhaṃ gataṃ puññaṃ vaḍḍhati. Cāgā puññanti vā pāṭho.Patiṭṭhitāti patiṭṭhitasaddhā nāma sotāpannassa saddhā.Hirimanoti hirisampayuttacitto.Nirāmisaṃ sukhanti tīṇi jhānāni nissāya uppajjanakasukhaṃ.Upekkhanti catutthajjhānupekkhaṃ.Āraddhavīriyoti paripuṇṇapaggahitavīriyo.Jhānāniupasampajjāti cattāri jhānāni patvā.Ekodi nipako satoti ekaggacitto kammassakatañāṇasatīhi ca samannāgato.

Kaṭaggāhoti holding fast to victory, he holds fast to non-offense. Gharamesinoti for one seeking a house, or dwelling. Cāgo puññaṃ pavaḍḍhatīti the merit that has gone to the state of giving increases. Cāgā puññanti vā is also a reading. Patiṭṭhitāti established faith is the faith of a stream-enterer. Hirimanoti one whose mind is conjoined with shame. Nirāmisaṃ sukhanti the happiness that arises relying on the three jhānas. Upekkhanti the equanimity of the fourth jhāna. Āraddhavīriyoti one who has fully aroused effort. Jhānāni upasampajjāti having attained the four jhānas. Ekodi nipako satoti one who is of concentrated mind and endowed with the wisdom of the results of deeds and mindfulness.

Evaṃ ñatvā yathābhūtanti evaṃ ettakaṃ kāraṇaṃ yathāsabhāvaṃ jānitvā.Sabbasaṃyojanakkhayeti nibbāne.Sabbasoti sabbākārena.Anupādāyāti aggahetvā.Sammā cittaṃ vimuccatīti idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – sabbasaṃyojanakkhayasaṅkhāte nibbāne sabbaso anupādiyitvā sammā hetunā nayena maggacittaṃ vimuccati. ‘‘Etaṃ ñatvā yathābhūtaṃ, sabbasaṃyojanakkhaya’’ntipi pāḷiyaṃ likhitaṃ, tassa etaṃ sabbasaṃyojanakkhayasaṅkhātaṃ nibbānaṃ yathābhūtaṃ ñatvāti attho. Purimapacchimehi pana saddhiṃ na ghaṭīyati.

Evaṃ ñatvā yathābhūtanti having thus known this much reason as it really is. Sabbasaṃyojanakkhayeti in Nibbāna. Sabbasoti in every way. Anupādāyāti without grasping. Sammā cittaṃ vimuccatīti this was said: in Nibbāna, known as the destruction of all fetters, without grasping in every way, the mind is rightly released by the cause, the method, the path-mind. "Etaṃ ñatvā yathābhūtaṃ, sabbasaṃyojanakkhaya"ntipi is also written in the text, its meaning is having known as it really is this Nibbāna, known as the destruction of all fetters. But it does not fit with the preceding and following.

Tassa sammā vimuttassāti tassa sammā vimuttassa khīṇāsavassa.Ñāṇaṃ hotīti paccavekkhaṇañāṇaṃ hoti.Tādinoti taṃsaṇṭhitassa.Akuppāti akuppārammaṇattā kuppakāraṇānaṃ kilesānañca abhāvena akuppā.Vimuttīti maggavimuttipi phalavimuttipi.Bhavasaṃyojanakkhayeti bhavasaṃyojanakkhayasaṅkhāte nibbāne bhavasaṃyojanānañca khayante uppannā.Etaṃ kho paramaṃ ñāṇanti etaṃ maggaphalañāṇaṃ paramañāṇaṃ nāma.Sukhamanuttaranti etadeva maggaphalasukhaṃ anuttaraṃ sukhaṃ nāma.Āṇaṇyamuttamanti sabbesaṃ aṇaṇānaṃ khīṇāsavo uttamaaṇaṇo, tasmā arahattaphalaṃ āṇaṇyamuttamanti arahattaphalena desanāya kūṭaṃ gaṇhi. Imasmiñca sutte vaṭṭameva kathetvā gāthāsu vaṭṭavivaṭṭaṃ kathitanti.

Tassa sammā vimuttassāti for that rightly liberated arahant. Ñāṇaṃ hotīti there is reviewing knowledge. Tādinoti for the stable one. Akuppāti unshakeable because of the unshakeable object and the absence of defilements, the causes of shaking. Vimuttīti path-liberation and fruit-liberation. Bhavasaṃyojanakkhayeti in Nibbāna, known as the destruction of the fetters of existence, and arising at the destruction of the fetters of existence. Etaṃ kho paramaṃ ñāṇanti this path and fruit knowledge is called supreme knowledge. Sukhamanuttaranti this path and fruit happiness is called unsurpassed happiness. Āṇaṇyamuttamanti the arahant is the supreme debtless one of all the debtless ones, therefore the fruit of arahantship is the supreme debtlessness, thus he took the conclusion of the teaching with the fruit of arahantship. And in this sutta, only the round of existence was discussed, but in the verses, the round of existence and escape from it were discussed.

4. Mahācundasuttavaṇṇanā
4. Commentary on the Mahācunda Sutta

46.Catutthecetīsūti cetiraṭṭhe.Sayaṃjātiyanti evaṃnāmake nigame.Mahācundoti dhammasenāpatissa kaniṭṭhabhātiko. Dhamme yogo anuyogo etesantidhammayogā. Dhammakathikānaṃ etaṃ nāmaṃ. Jhāyantītijhāyī. Apasādentīti ghaṭṭenti hiṃsanti.Jhāyantīti cintenti.Pajjhāyantītiādīni upasaggavasena vaḍḍhitāni.Kimime jhāyantīti kiṃ nāma ime jhāyanti.Kintime jhāyantīti kimatthaṃ ime jhāyanti.Kathaṃ ime jhāyantīti kena kāraṇena ime jhāyanti.Amataṃ dhātuṃ kāyena phusitvā viharantīti maraṇavirahitaṃ nibbānadhātuṃ sandhāya kammaṭṭhānaṃ gahetvā viharantā anukkamena taṃ nāmakāyena phusitvā viharanti.Gambhīraṃ atthapadanti guḷhaṃ paṭicchannaṃ khandhadhātuāyatanādiatthaṃ.Paññāyaativijjha passantīti sahavipassanāya maggapaññāya paṭivijjhitvā passanti. Imasmiṃ panatthe sammasanapaṭivedhapaññāpi uggahaparipucchāpaññāpi vaṭṭatiyevāti.

46.In the fourth, cetīsūti in the Ceti country. Sayaṃjātiyanti in a town of that name. Mahācundoti the younger brother of the General of the Dhamma. Dhamme yogo anuyogo etesanti dhammayogā. This is a name for Dhamma-preachers. Jhāyantīti jhāyī. Apasādentīti they strike, they harm. Jhāyantīti they think. Pajjhāyantīti etc. are increased by means of prefixes. Kimime jhāyantīti what indeed do they contemplate? Kintime jhāyantīti for what purpose do they contemplate? Kathaṃ ime jhāyantīti by what reason do they contemplate? Amataṃ dhātuṃ kāyena phusitvā viharantīti having regard to the deathless element of Nibbāna, taking a meditation subject and dwelling, they gradually touch that with the body and dwell. Gambhīraṃ atthapadanti the hidden and concealed meaning of the aggregates, elements, sense bases, etc. Paññāya ativijjha passantīti seeing having penetrated with path-wisdom together with insight. But in this meaning, the wisdom of comprehension and penetration and the wisdom of learning and questioning are suitable.

5-6. Sandiṭṭhikasuttadvayavaṇṇanā
5-6. Commentary on the Sandiṭṭhika Suttas

47-48.Pañcamesantaṃ vā ajjhattanti niyakajjhatte vijjamānaṃ.Lobhotiādīhi tīṇi akusalamūlāni dassitāni.Lobhadhammātiādīhi taṃsampayuttakā dhammā. Chaṭṭhekāyasandosanti kāyadvārassa dussanākāraṃ. Sesadvayepi eseva nayo. Imesu dvīsu suttesu paccavekkhaṇāva kathitā.

47-48.In the fifth, santaṃ vā ajjhattanti existing in one's own self. The three unwholesome roots are shown by lobhoti etc. Lobhadhammāti etc. are the qualities associated with that. In the sixth, kāyasandosanti the manner of corruption of the body-door. The same method applies to the remaining two. Only reviewing was discussed in these two suttas.

7. Khemasuttavaṇṇanā
7. Commentary on the Khema Sutta

49.Sattamevusitavāti vutthabrahmacariyavāso.Katakaraṇīyoti catūhi maggehi kattabbaṃ katvā ṭhito.Ohitabhāroti khandhabhāraṃ kilesabhāraṃ abhisaṅkhārabhārañca otāretvā ṭhito.Anuppattasadatthoti sadattho vuccati arahattaṃ, taṃ pattoti attho.Parikkhīṇabhavasaṃyojanoti khīṇabhavabandhano.Sammadaññā vimuttoti sammā hetunā kāraṇena jānitvā vimutto.Tassa na evaṃ hoti atthi me seyyoti vātiādīhi seyyassa seyyohamasmīti mānādayo tayo mānā paṭikkhittā. Na hi khīṇāsavassa ‘‘atthi mayhaṃ seyyo, atthi sadiso, atthi hīno’’ti māno hoti.Natthi me seyyotiādīhipi teyeva paṭikkhittā. Na hi khīṇāsavassa ‘‘ahameva seyyo, ahaṃ sadiso, ahaṃ hīno, aññe seyyādayo natthī’’ti evaṃ māno hoti.

49. In the seventh, vusitavā means one who has lived the Brahma-life. Katakaraṇīyo means one who has done what was to be done through the four paths and stands completed. Ohitabhāro means one who has laid down the burden of the aggregates, the burden of the defilements, and the burden of karmic formations. Anuppattasadattho means sadattho refers to Arahantship, and it means one who has attained that. Parikkhīṇabhavasaṃyojano means one whose bonds of existence are destroyed. Sammadaññā vimutto means one who is liberated through perfect knowledge, with a right cause and reason. Tassa na evaṃ hoti atthi me seyyoti vā etc., refutes the three kinds of conceit (māna) such as "I am better" (seyyo’hamasmī), related to being better. For a Khīṇāsava, conceit does not arise: "I am better, I am equal, I am inferior." Natthi me seyyo etc., also refutes those same conceits. For a Khīṇāsava, such conceit does not arise: "I alone am better, I am equal, I am inferior, there are no others who are better" and so on.

Acirapakkantesūti arahattaṃ byākaritvā aciraṃyeva pakkantesu.Aññaṃ byākarontīti arahattaṃ kathenti.Hasamānakā maññe aññaṃ byākarontīti hasamānā viya kathenti.Vighātaṃ āpajjantīti dukkhaṃ āpajjanti.

Acirapakkantesū means soon after declaring Arahantship and departing. Aññaṃ byākarontī means declaring Arahantship. Hasamānakā maññe aññaṃ byākarontī means declaring as if laughing. Vighātaṃ āpajjantī means they undergo suffering.

Na ussesu na omesu, samatte nopanīyareti etthaussāti ussitatā seyyapuggalā.Omāti hīnā.Samattoti sadiso. Iti imesu tīsupi seyyahīnasadisesu khīṇāsavā mānena na upanīyare, na upanenti, na upagacchantīti attho.Khīṇā jātīti khīṇā tesaṃ jāti.Vusitaṃ brahmacariyanti vutthaṃ maggabrahmacariyaṃ.Caranti saṃyojanavippamuttāti sabbasaṃyojanehi vimuttā hutvā caranti. Suttepi gāthāyampi khīṇāsavo kathito.

Na ussesu na omesu, samatte nopanīyare here, ussā means those who are superior, the best individuals. Omā means those who are inferior. Samatto means equal. Thus, in these three cases—superior, inferior, and equal—the Khīṇāsavas are not led by conceit, do not lead themselves, do not go along with. Khīṇā jātī means their births are destroyed. Vusitaṃ brahmacariyanti means the path of Brahmacariya is lived. Caranti saṃyojanavippamuttā means they live having been freed from all Saṃyojanas. The Khīṇāsava has been spoken of in both the Sutta and the Gāthā.

8. Indriyasaṃvarasuttavaṇṇanā
8. Indriyasaṃvarasuttavaṇṇanā

50.Aṭṭhamehatūpanisaṃ hotīti hatūpanissayaṃ hoti.Sīlavipannassāti vipannasīlassa.Yathābhūtañāṇadassananti taruṇavipassanāñāṇaṃ.Nibbidāvirāgoti ettha nibbidā balavavipassanā, virāgo ariyamaggo.Vimuttiñāṇadassananti etthavimuttīti arahattaphalaṃ,ñāṇadassananti paccavekkhaṇañāṇaṃ.Upanissayasampannaṃ hotīti sampannaupanissayaṃ hoti. Imasmiṃ sutte sīlānurakkhaṇaindriyasaṃvaro kathito.

50. In the eighth, hatūpanisaṃ hotī means it has its basis destroyed. Sīlavipannassā means for one who is deficient in virtue. Yathābhūtañāṇadassananti means knowledge of true vision, which is young insight. Nibbidāvirāgo here, nibbidā is strong insight, virāgo is the Noble Path. Vimuttiñāṇadassananti here, vimuttī means the fruit of Arahantship, ñāṇadassana means reviewing knowledge. Upanissayasampannaṃ hotī means it has accomplished support. In this Sutta, the restraint of the senses, which protects virtue, is discussed.

9. Ānandasuttavaṇṇanā
9. Ānandasuttavaṇṇanā

51.Navamekittāvatāti kittakena.Assutañcevāti aññasmiṃ kāle assutapubbaṃ.Na sammosaṃ gacchantīti vināsaṃ na gacchanti.Cetaso samphuṭṭhapubbāti cittena phusitapubbā.Samudācarantīti manodvāre caranti.Aviññātañca vijānātīti aññasmiṃ kāle aviññātakāraṇaṃ jānāti.Pariyāpuṇātīti vaḷañjeti katheti.Desetīti pakāseti.Paraṃ vācetīti paraṃ uggaṇhāpeti.

51. In the ninth, kittāvatā means to what extent. Assutañcevā means something never heard before at another time. Na sammosaṃ gacchantī means they do not go to ruin. Cetaso samphuṭṭhapubbā means previously touched by the mind. Samudācarantī means they operate in the mind-door. Aviññātañca vijānātī means one knows the cause of what was previously unknown. Pariyāpuṇātī means recites and speaks. Desetī means reveals. Paraṃ vācetī means causes another to learn.

Āgatāgamāti dīghādīsu yo koci āgamo āgato etesanti āgatāgamā.Dhammadharāti suttantapiṭakadharā.Vinayadharāti vinayapiṭakadharā.Mātikādharāti dvepātimokkhadharā.Paripucchatīti anusandhipubbāparaṃ pucchati.Paripañhatīti idañcidañca pucchissāmīti paritulati paricchindati.Idaṃ, bhante, kathanti, bhante, idaṃ anusandhipubbāparaṃ kathaṃ hotīti pucchati.Imassa kvatthoti imassa bhāsitassa ko atthoti pucchati.Avivaṭanti avivaritaṃ.Vivarantīti pākaṭaṃ karonti.Kaṅkhāṭhāniyesūti kaṅkhāya kāraṇabhūtesu. Tattha yasmiṃ dhamme kaṅkhā uppajjati, sveva kaṅkhāṭhāniyo nāmāti veditabbo.

Āgatāgamā means those to whom any Āgama, such as the Dīgha, has come. Dhammadharā means those who hold the Suttanta Piṭaka. Vinayadharā means those who hold the Vinaya Piṭaka. Mātikādharā means those who hold the two Pātimokkhas. Paripucchatī means asks about the connections between the beginning and the end. Paripañhatī means deliberates and decides, "I will ask this and that." Idaṃ, bhante, kathanti means, "Bhante, how does this connection between the beginning and the end occur?" Imassa kvatthoti means, "What is the meaning of this statement?" Avivaṭanti means not made clear. Vivarantī means they make it apparent. Kaṅkhāṭhāniyesū means in the places that are the cause of doubt. Therein, it should be understood that whatever Dhamma doubt arises in, that itself is called a place of doubt (kaṅkhāṭhāniyo).

10. Khattiyasuttavaṇṇanā
10. Khattiyasuttavaṇṇanā

52.Dasamebhogādhippāyāti bhogasaṃharaṇatthaṃ ṭhapitādhippāyā pavattaajjhāsayā.Paññūpavicārāti paññavanto bhaveyyāmāti evaṃ paññatthāya pavattūpavicārā. Ayameva nesaṃ vicāro citte upavicarati.Balādhiṭṭhānāti balakāyādhiṭṭhānā. Balakāyañhi laddhā te laddhapatiṭṭhā nāma honti.Pathavibhinivesāti pathavisāmino bhavissāmāti evaṃ pathaviatthāya katacittābhinivesā.Issariyapariyosānāti rajjābhisekapariyosānā. Abhisekañhi patvā te pariyosānappattā nāma honti. Iminā nayena sabbattha attho veditabbo.

52. In the tenth, bhogādhippāyā means those whose intention is fixed for the sake of accumulating wealth, whose inclinations are set in motion. Paññūpavicārā means those whose investigations are set in motion for the sake of wisdom, thinking, "May we be wise." This very consideration recurs in their minds. Balādhiṭṭhānā means those whose determination is based on a force of power. Indeed, having obtained a force of power, they are said to have obtained a firm footing. Pathavibhinivesā means those whose minds are fixed for the sake of the earth, thinking, "We will be lords of the earth." Issariyapariyosānā means those whose final goal is royal consecration. Indeed, having attained consecration, they are said to have reached the final goal. In this way, the meaning should be understood everywhere.

mantādhiṭṭhānātiādīni vuttāni.

mantādhiṭṭhānā etc., have been stated.

yaññābhinivesā brahmalokapariyosānāti vuttā. Kammantakaraṇatthāya mano etesaṃ abhinivisatītikammantābhinivesā. Kamme niṭṭhite pariyosānappattā nāma hontītiniṭṭhitakammantapariyosānā.

yaññābhinivesā brahmalokapariyosānā has been stated. kammantābhinivesā means their minds are fixed for the purpose of performing tasks. niṭṭhitakammantapariyosānā means upon completion of the task, they are said to have reached the final goal.

Purisādhippāyāti purisesu pavattaajjhāsayā. Alaṅkāratthāya mano upavicarati etissātialaṅkārūpavicārā. Asapattī hutvā ekikāva ghare vaseyyanti evamassā cittaṃ abhinivisatītiasapattībhinivesā. Gharāvāsissariye laddhe pariyosānappattā nāma hontīti issariyapariyosānā.

Purisādhippāyā means those whose intentions are directed toward men. alaṅkārūpavicārā means consideration recurs in her mind for the sake of adornment. asapattībhinivesā means her mind is fixed, thinking, "May I be without rivals and live alone in the house." issariyapariyosānā means having obtained lordship in the household, they are said to have reached the final goal.

ādānādhippāyā. Gahane nilīyanaṭṭhāne etesaṃ mano upavicaratītigahanūpavicārā. Andhakāratthāya etesaṃ cittaṃ abhinivisatītiandhakārābhinivesā. Adassanappattā pariyosānappattā hontītiadassanapariyosānā.

ādānādhippāyā. gahanūpavicārā means their minds recur in a thicket, a place of concealment. andhakārābhinivesā means their minds are fixed on darkness. adassanapariyosānā means having attained non-appearance, they have reached the final goal.

khantisoraccādhippāyā. Akiñcanabhāve niggahaṇabhāve cittaṃ etesaṃ abhinivisatītiākiñcaññābhinivesā. Nibbānappattā pariyosānappattā hontītinibbānapariyosānā.

khantisoraccādhippāyā. ākiñcaññābhinivesā means their minds are fixed on a state of non-ownership, a state of restraint. nibbānapariyosānā means having attained Nibbāna, they have reached the final goal.

11. Appamādasuttavaṇṇanā
11. Appamādasuttavaṇṇanā

53.Ekādasamesamadhiggayhāti suṭṭhu gaṇhitvā.Jaṅgalānaṃ pāṇānanti pathavītalacārīnaṃ sapādakapāṇānaṃ.Padajātānīti padāni.Samodhānaṃ gacchantīti odhānaṃ upanikkhepaṃ gacchanti.Aggamakkhāyatīti seṭṭhaṃ akkhāyati.Pabbajalāyakoti pabbajatiṇacchedako.Odhunātīti heṭṭhā mukhaṃ dhunāti.Nidhunātīti ubhohi passehi dhunāti.Nicchādetīti bāhāya vā paharati, rukkhe vā paharati.Ambapiṇḍiyāti ambaphalapiṇḍiyā.Vaṇṭūpanibandhanānīti vaṇṭe upanibandhanāni, vaṇṭe vā patiṭṭhitāni.Tadanvayāni bhavantīti vaṇṭānuvattakāni bhavanti, ambapiṇḍidaṇḍakānuvattakāni bhavantītipi attho.Khuddarājānoti khuddakarājāno, pakatirājāno vā.

53. In the eleventh, samadhiggayhā means having well grasped. Jaṅgalānaṃ pāṇānanti means for mobile living beings, for two-legged creatures that move on the surface of the earth. Padajātānī means footprints. Samodhānaṃ gacchantī means they go to a collection, a deposition. Aggamakkhāyatī means it is called the best. Pabbajalāyako means one who cuts pabbaja grass. Odhunātī means shakes downwards. Nidhunātī means shakes on both sides. Nicchādetī means strikes with the arm or strikes against a tree. Ambapiṇḍiyā means a cluster of mango fruits. Vaṇṭūpanibandhanānī means fastened to the stem, or established on the stem. Tadanvayāni bhavantī means they follow the stem, or it also means they follow the mango fruit stalks. Khuddarājāno means small kings, or natural rulers.

12. Dhammikasuttavaṇṇanā
12. Dhammikasuttavaṇṇanā

54.Dvādasamesabbasoti sabbesu.Sattasu vihāresūti sattasu pariveṇesu.Paribhāsatīti paribhavati bhayaṃ upadaṃseti.Vihiṃsatīti viheṭheti.Vitudatīti vijjhati.Roseti vācāyāti vācāya ghaṭṭeti.Pakkamantīti disā pakkamanti.Na saṇṭhahantīti nappatiṭṭhahanti.Riñcantīti chaḍḍenti vissajjenti.Pabbājeyyāmāti nīhareyyāma.Handāti vavassaggatthe nipāto.Alanti yuttametaṃ, yaṃ taṃ pabbājeyyunti attho.Kiṃ te imināti kiṃ tava iminā jātibhūmiyaṃ vāsena.Tīradassiṃ sakuṇanti disākākaṃ.Muñcantīti disādassanatthaṃ vissajjenti.Sāmantāti avidūre. Samantātipi pāṭho, samantatoti attho.Abhinivesoti pattharitvā ṭhitasākhānaṃ niveso.Mūlasantānakānanti mūlānaṃ niveso.

54. In the twelfth, sabbaso means in all respects. Sattasu vihāresūti in the seven monasteries. Paribhāsatī means overwhelms, instills fear. Vihiṃsatī means harasses. Vitudatī means pierces. Roseti vācāyā means provokes with speech. Pakkamantī means the directions depart. Na saṇṭhahantī means they do not stand firm. Riñcantī means they abandon, release. Pabbājeyyāmā means we should expel. Handā is a particle in the sense of abandonment. Alanti means this is fitting, that you should expel him. Kiṃ te iminā means what is yours with dwelling in this birthplace? Tīradassiṃ sakuṇanti means a direction-crow. Muñcantī means they release for the purpose of showing direction. Sāmantā means not far. Samantātipi is also a reading, meaning "from all around." Abhiniveso means the settlement of branches that have spread out. Mūlasantānakānanti means the settlement of roots.

Āḷhakathālikāti taṇḍulāḷhakassa bhattapacanathālikā.Khuddaṃ madhunti khuddamakkhikāhi kataṃ daṇḍakamadhuṃ.Anelakanti niddosaṃ.Na ca sudaṃ aññamaññassa phalāni hiṃsantīti aññamaññassa koṭṭhāse phalāni na hiṃsanti. Attano koṭṭhāsehi mūlaṃ vā tacaṃ vā pattaṃ vā chindanto nāma natthi, attano attano sākhāya heṭṭhā patitāneva paribhuñjanti. Aññassa koṭṭhāsato aññasa koṭṭhāsaṃ parivattitvā gatampi ‘‘na amhākaṃ sākhāya phala’’nti ñatvā no khādanti.Yāvadatthaṃ bhakkhitvāti kaṇṭhappamāṇena khāditvā.Sākhaṃ bhañjitvāti chattappamāṇamattaṃ chinditvā chāyaṃ katvā pakkāmi.Yatra hi nāmāti yo hi nāma.Pakkamissatīti pakkanto.Nādāsīti devatāya ānubhāvena phalameva na gaṇhi. Evañhi sā adhiṭṭhāsi.

Āḷhakathālikā means a pot for cooking rice, holding an āḷhaka measure of rice. Khuddaṃ madhu means honeycomb made by small bees. Anelakanti means faultless. Na ca sudaṃ aññamaññassa phalāni hiṃsantī means they do not harm each other's fruits in their respective sections. There is no one cutting the root, bark, or leaves in their own sections; they consume only what falls below their own branches. Even if something from another's section goes circling around to another's section, knowing that "this is not a fruit from our branch," they do not eat it. Yāvadatthaṃ bhakkhitvā means having eaten to the extent of their need. Sākhaṃ bhañjitvā means having broken off a branch about the size of an umbrella, having made shade, he departed. Yatra hi nāmā means where indeed. Pakkamissatī means having departed. Nādāsī means due to the power of the deity, he did not even take a fruit. Indeed, she resolved in this way.

Tenupasaṅkamīti janapadavāsīhi gantvā, ‘‘mahārāja, rukkho phalaṃ na gaṇhi, amhākaṃ nu kho doso tumhāka’’nti vutte ‘‘neva mayhaṃ doso atthi, na jānapadānaṃ, amhākaṃ vijite adhammo nāma na vattati, kena nu kho kāraṇena rukkho na phalito, sakkaṃ upasaṅkamitvā pucchissāmī’’ti cintetvā yena sakko devānamindo tenupasaṅkami.Pavattesīti parivattesi.Ummūlamakāsīti uddhaṃmūlaṃ akāsi.Api nu tvanti api nu tava.Aṭṭhitāyevāti aṭṭhitāya eva.Sacchavīnīti samānacchavīni pakatiṭṭhāne ṭhitāni.Na paccakkosatīti nappaṭikkosati.Rosantanti ghaṭṭentaṃ.Bhaṇḍantanti paharantaṃ.

Tenupasaṅkamī means the people of the countryside went and said, "Great king, the tree has not yielded fruit, is it our fault or yours?" When he was told this, he thought, "Neither is there a fault of mine, nor of the people of the countryside. Unrighteousness does not prevail in our territory. By what cause has the tree not borne fruit? I will approach Sakka and ask," and he approached Sakka, the lord of the devas. Pavattesī means you have overturned. Ummūlamakāsī means you made it uprooted. Api nu tvanti means is it indeed you. Aṭṭhitāyevā means just as it was established. Sacchavīnī means of equal complexion, standing in their natural places. Na paccakkosatī means does not refuse. Rosantanti means provoking. Bhaṇḍantanti means striking.

Sunettoti nettā vuccanti akkhīni, tesaṃ sundaratāya sunetto.Titthakaroti sugatiogāhanatitthassa kārako.Vītarāgoti vikkhambhanavasena vigatarāgo.Pasavatīti paṭilabhati.Diṭṭhisampannanti dassanasampannaṃ, sotāpannanti attho.Khantinti attano guṇakhaṇanaṃ.Yathāmaṃ sabrahmacārīsūti yathā imaṃ sabrahmacārīsu akkosanaparibhāsanaṃ, aññaṃ evarūpaṃ guṇakhantiṃ na vadāmīti attho.Na no samasabrahmacārīsūti ettha samajano nāma sakajano vuccati. Tasmā na no sakesu samānabrahmacārīsu cittāni paduṭṭhāni bhavissantīti ayamettha attho.

Sunettoti nettā refers to eyes (akkhīni), therefore sunetto means beautiful eyes. Titthakaro means the maker of a ford for plunging into a good destination. Vītarāgo means one who is free from lust by way of overcoming. Pasavatī means obtains. Diṭṭhisampannanti means accomplished in view, a Sotāpanna. Khantinti means patience with the disparagement of one's own qualities. Yathāmaṃ sabrahmacārīsūti means, "Just as this abuse and insult is among the co-celibates, I do not speak of another kind of patience with qualities of this sort." Na no samasabrahmacārīsūti here, samajano refers to one's own people. Therefore, the meaning here is, "Our minds will not be corrupted toward our co-celibates among our own people."

Jotipālo ca govindoti nāmena jotipālo ṭhānena mahāgovindo.Sattapurohitoti reṇuādīnaṃ sattannaṃ rājūnaṃ purohito.Ahiṃsakā atītaṃseti ete cha satthāro atītaṃse ahiṃsakā ahesuṃ.Nirāmagandhāti kodhāmagandhena nirāmagandhā.Karuṇevimuttāti karuṇajjhāne adhimuttā, karuṇāya ca karuṇāpubbabhāge ca ṭhitā.Yeteti ete, ayameva vā pāṭho.Na sādhurūpaṃ āsīdeti sādhusabhāvaṃ na ghaṭṭeyya.Diṭṭhiṭṭhānappahāyinanti dvāsaṭṭhidiṭṭhigatappahāyinaṃ.Sattamoti arahattato paṭṭhāya sattamo.Avītarāgoti avigatarāgo. Etena anāgāmibhāvaṃ paṭikkhipati.Pañcindriyā mudūti pañca vipassanindriyāni mudūni. Tassa hi tāni sakadāgāmiṃ upādāya mudūni nāma honti.Vipassanāti saṅkhārapariggahañāṇaṃ.Pubbeva upahaññatīti paṭhamataraññeva upahaññati.Akkhatoti guṇakhaṇanena akkhato anupahato hutvā. Sesaṃ sabbattha uttānamevāti.

Jotipālo ca govindoti means Jotipāla by name, Mahāgovinda by status. Sattapurohito means the advisor to seven kings, such as Reṇu. Ahiṃsakā atītaṃseti means these six teachers were non-violent in the past. Nirāmagandhāti means free from the stench of anger. Karuṇevimuttāti means those who are especially devoted to the meditation on compassion, and established in compassion and in the preliminary stage of compassion. Yeteti means these, or this itself is the reading. Na sādhurūpaṃ āsīdeti means would not engage in virtuous behavior. Diṭṭhiṭṭhānappahāyinanti means abandoning the sixty-two bases of views. Sattamoti means seventh from the attainment of Arahantship. Avītarāgoti means one whose lust is not gone. With this, he refutes the state of Anāgāmi. Pañcindriyā mudūti means the five faculties of insight are soft. For him, they are called soft beginning with the Sakadāgāmi. Vipassanāti means the knowledge of grasping formations. Pubbeva upahaññatī means it is destroyed earlier. Akkhatoti means uninjured by the disparagement of qualities, being unharmed. The rest is straightforward everywhere.

2. Dutiyapaṇṇāsakaṃ

2. Dutiyapaṇṇāsakaṃ

6. Mahāvaggo

6. Mahāvaggo

1. Soṇasuttavaṇṇanā
1. Soṇasuttavaṇṇanā

55.Chaṭṭhassa paṭhamesoṇoti sukhumālasoṇatthero.Sītavaneti evaṃnāmake susāne. Tasmiṃ kira paṭipāṭiyā pañca caṅkamanapaṇṇasālāsatāni māpitāni, tesu thero attano sappāyacaṅkamanaṃ gahetvā samaṇadhammaṃ karoti. Tassa āraddhavīriyassa hutvā caṅkamato pādatalāni bhijjiṃsu, jāṇūhi caṅkamato jāṇukānipi hatthatalānipi bhijjiṃsu, chiddāni ahesuṃ. Evaṃ āraddhavīriyo viharanto obhāsanimittamattakampi dassetuṃ nāsakkhi. Tassa vīriyena kilamitakāyassa koṭiyaṃ pāsāṇaphalake nisinnassa yo vitakko udapādi, taṃ dassetuṃatha kho āyasmatotiādi vuttaṃ. Tatthaāraddhavīriyāti paripuṇṇapaggahitavīriyā.Na anupādāya āsavehi cittaṃ vimuccatīti sace hi ahaṃ ugghaṭitaññū vā assaṃ vipañcitaññū vā neyyo vā, nūna me cittaṃ vimucceyya. Addhā panasmi padaparamo, yena me cittaṃ na vimuccatīti sanniṭṭhānaṃ katvāsaṃvijjanti kho panātiādīni cintesi. Tatthabhogāti upayogatthe paccattaṃ.

55. In the first of the sixth, soṇo means the elder Sukhumāla Soṇa. Sītavaneti means in a charnel ground with such a name. It is said that in that charnel ground, five hundred walking-path huts were built in succession, and among them, the elder took his suitable walking-path and practiced the ascetic life. For him, as he walked, exerting effort, the soles of his feet cracked, and as he walked on his knees, his kneecaps and the palms of his hands cracked and became full of holes. While living thus, exerting effort, he was not able to show even a mere sign of illumination. To show the thought that arose in him, whose body was exhausted by effort, while sitting on a stone slab at the edge, atha kho āyasmato etc., was stated. Therein, āraddhavīriyāti means one whose energy is fully exerted. Na anupādāya āsavehi cittaṃ vimuccatīti means, "If I were one who understands quickly, or one who understands with explanation, or one who is to be led, surely my mind would be liberated. Indeed, I am merely one who is inferior in words, by which my mind is not liberated," having made this conclusion, he thought saṃvijjanti kho panātiādi. Therein, bhogāti means personal use in the sense of enjoyment.

Pāturahosīti therassa cittācāraṃ ñatvā ‘‘ayaṃ soṇo ajja sītavane padhānabhūmiyaṃ nisinno imaṃ vitakkaṃ vitakketi, gantvāssa vitakkaṃ sahotthaṃ gaṇhitvā vīṇopamaṃ kammaṭṭhānaṃ kathessāmī’’ti pamukhe pākaṭo ahosi.Paññatte āsaneti padhānikabhikkhū attano vasanaṭṭhāne ovadituṃ āgatassa buddhassa bhagavato nisīdanatthaṃ yathālābhena āsanaṃ paññāpetvāva padhānaṃ karonti, aññaṃ alabhamānā purāṇapaṇṇānipi santharitvā upari saṅghāṭiṃ paññapenti. Theropi āsanaṃ paññāpetvā padhānaṃ akāsi. Taṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ – ‘‘paññatte āsane’’ti.

Pāturahosīti: Knowing the venerable one's train of thought, he appeared before him, thinking, "This Sona, sitting today in the cool forest at the place suitable for striving, is contemplating this thought. I will go, grasping his thought along with its reason, and explain the simile of the lute as a meditation subject." Paññatte āsane: Monks devoted to meditation, before engaging in their practice, would arrange a seat for the Buddha, the Blessed One, who had come to advise them in their dwelling place, according to what they had available. If they could find nothing else, they would even spread old leaves and place their outer robe on top. The venerable one, too, arranged a seat and then engaged in meditation. With reference to this, it was said, "On a seat prepared."

Taṃ kiṃ maññasīti satthā ‘‘imassa bhikkhuno avasesakammaṭṭhānehi attho natthi, ayaṃ gandhabbasippe cheko ciṇṇavasī, attano visaye kathiyamānaṃ khippameva sallakkhessatī’’ti vīṇopamaṃ kathetuṃ ‘‘taṃ kiṃ maññasī’’tiādimāha.Vīṇāya tantissare kusalatānāma vīṇāya vādanakusalatā, so ca tattha kusalo. Mātāpitaro hissa ‘‘amhākaṃ putto aññaṃ sippaṃ sikkhanto kāyena kilamissati, idaṃ pana sayane nisinneneva sakkā uggaṇhitu’’nti gandhabbasippameva uggaṇhāpesuṃ. Tassa –

Taṃ kiṃ maññasī: The Teacher, thinking, "This monk has no need for other meditation subjects; he is skilled in the art of music and has long practiced it. He will quickly understand what is being said in his own area of expertise," spoke beginning with "Taṃ kiṃ maññasī" in order to explain the simile of the lute. Vīṇāya tantissare kusalatā: means skill in playing the lute, and he was indeed skilled in it. His parents had him learn only music, thinking, "Our son will tire his body if he learns another art; this, however, he can learn even while sitting in bed." For him –

‘‘Satta sarā tayo gāmā, mucchanā ekavīsati;

‘‘Satta sarā tayo gāmā, mucchanā ekavīsati;
Ṭhānā ekūnapaññāsa, iccete saramaṇḍalā’’ti. –

Accāyatāti atiāyatā kharamucchanā.Saravatīti sarasampannā.Kammaññāti kammakkhamā kammayoggā.Atisithilāti mandamucchanā.Same guṇe patiṭṭhitāti majjhime sare ṭhapetvā mucchitā.

Accāyatā: means exceedingly stretched, with harsh modulations. Saravatī: means full of sound. Kammaññā: means fit for work, suitable for action. Atisithilā: means with weak modulations. Same guṇe patiṭṭhitā: means tuned by placing it in a middle tone.

Accāraddhanti atigāḷhaṃ.Uddhaccāya saṃvattatīti uddhatabhāvāya saṃvattati.Atilīnanti atisithilaṃ.Kosajjāyāti kusītabhāvatthāya.Vīriyasamathaṃ adhiṭṭhahāti vīriyasampayuttaṃ samathaṃ adhiṭṭhaha, vīriyaṃ samathena yojehīti attho.Indriyānañca samataṃ paṭivijjhāti saddhādīnaṃ indriyānaṃ samataṃ samabhāvaṃ adhiṭṭhāhi. Tattha saddhaṃ paññāya, paññañca saddhāya, vīriyaṃ samādhinā, samādhiñca vīriyena yojayatā indriyānaṃ samatā adhiṭṭhitā nāma hoti. Sati pana sabbatthikā, sā sadā balavatīyeva vaṭṭati. Tañca pana tesaṃ yojanāvidhānaṃ visuddhimagge (visuddhi. 1.60-62) pakāsitameva.Tattha ca nimittaṃ gaṇhāhīti tasmiñca samabhāve sati yena ādāse mukhabimbeneva nimittena uppajjitabbaṃ, taṃ samathanimittaṃ vipassanānimittaṃ magganimittaṃ phalanimittañca gaṇhāhi nibbattehīti evamassa satthā arahatte pakkhipitvā kammaṭṭhānaṃ kathesi.

Accāraddhaṃ: means excessively tense. Uddhaccāya saṃvattati: leads to agitation. Atilīnaṃ: means excessively slack. Kosajjāya: for the purpose of laziness. Vīriyasamathaṃ adhiṭṭhaha: establish serenity connected with effort; join effort with serenity, is the meaning. Indriyānañca samataṃ paṭivijjhā: establish the balance, the equanimity, of the faculties such as faith. Here, the balance of the faculties is established by combining faith with wisdom, and wisdom with faith, effort with concentration, and concentration with effort. Mindfulness, however, is effective in all situations; it always prevails as strong. But the method of combining them has already been explained in the Visuddhimagga (Visuddhi. 1.60-62). Tattha ca nimittaṃ gaṇhāhi: And in that balance, by means of which sign an image should arise as in a mirror, grasp, generate, that sign of serenity, sign of insight, sign of the path, and sign of the fruit. Thus, the Teacher, having placed him on the path to Arahatship, explained the meditation subject.

Tattha ca nimittaṃ aggahesīti samathanimittañca vipassanānimittañca aggahesi.Cha ṭhānānīti cha kāraṇāni.Adhimutto hotīti paṭivijjhitvā paccakkhaṃ katvā ṭhito hoti.Nekkhammādhimuttotiādi sabbaṃ arahattavaseneva vuttaṃ. Arahattañhi sabbakilesehi nikkhantattānekkhammaṃ,teheva pavivittattāpaviveko,byāpajjhābhāvatoabyāpajjhaṃ,taṇhākkhayante uppannattātaṇhākkhayo, upādānakkhayante uppannattāupādānakkhayo,sammohābhāvatoasammohoti vuccati.

Tattha ca nimittaṃ aggahesī: He grasped the sign of serenity and the sign of insight. Cha ṭhānānī: six reasons. Adhimutto hoti: having penetrated, he stands having made it visible. Nekkhammādhimutto: etc., all is said only in the sense of Arahatship. For Arahatship is called nekkhamma because of having gone forth from all defilements, paviveka because of being secluded from them, abyāpajjha because of the absence of ill-will, taṇhākkhayo because of arising at the destruction of craving, upādānakkhayo because of arising at the destruction of clinging, and asammoho because of the absence of delusion.

Kevalaṃ saddhāmattakanti paṭivedharahitaṃ kevalaṃ paṭivedhapaññāya asammissakaṃ saddhāmattakaṃ.Paṭicayanti punappunaṃ karaṇena vaḍḍhiṃ.Vītarāgattāti maggapaṭivedhena rāgassa vigatattāyeva nekkhammasaṅkhātaṃ arahattaṃ paṭivijjhitvā sacchikatvā ṭhito hoti, phalasamāpattivihārena viharati, tanninnamānasoyeva ca hotīti attho. Sesapadesupi eseva nayo.

Kevalaṃ saddhāmattakaṃ: means mere faith alone, without penetration, unmixed with the wisdom of penetration. Paṭicayaṃ: means growth by doing repeatedly. Vītarāgattā: because of the disappearance of lust through penetration of the path, he stands having realized and directly experienced Arahatship, which is designated as Nekkhamma; he lives in the attainment of fruition, and he inclines only towards that, is the meaning. This same method applies in the remaining terms as well.

Lābhasakkārasilokanti catupaccayalābhañca tesaññeva sukatabhāvañca vaṇṇabhaṇanañca.Nikāmayamānoti icchamāno patthayamāno.Pavivekādhimuttoti paviveke adhimutto arahanti evaṃ arahattaṃ byākarotīti attho.

Lābhasakkārasilokaṃ: means gain of the four requisites, their being well-done, and praise of virtues. Nikāmayamāno: means desiring, longing for. Pavivekādhimutto: Arahat is one who is intent on seclusion; thus, he declares Arahatship, is the meaning.

Sīlabbataparāmāsanti sīlañca vatañca parāmasitvā gahitaṃ gahaṇamattaṃ.Sāratopaccāgacchantoti sārabhāvena jānanto.Abyāpajjhādhimuttoti abyāpajjhaṃ arahattaṃ byākaroti. Imināva nayena sabbaṭṭhānesu attho daṭṭhabbo. Apicettha ‘‘nekkhammādhimuttoti imasmiṃyeva arahattaṃ kathitaṃ, sesesu pañcasu nibbāna’’nti eke vadanti. Apare ‘‘asammohādhimuttoti ettheva nibbānaṃ kathitaṃ, sesesu arahatta’’nti vadanti. Ayaṃ panettha sāro – sabbesveva tesu arahattampi nibbānampi kathitamevāti.

Sīlabbataparāmāsaṃ: means merely grasping, having touched and seized sīla and vata. Sārato paccāgacchanto: knowing in terms of essence. Abyāpajjhādhimutto: he declares Arahatship, which is non-ill will. In this very way, the meaning should be understood in all places. Moreover, here, some say, "Arahatship is spoken of in just 'nekkhammādhimutto', Nibbana in the remaining five." Others say, "Nibbana is spoken of in 'asammohādhimutto', Arahatship in the remaining." But here this is the essence: in all of these, both Arahatship and Nibbana are spoken of.

Bhusāti balavanto dibbarūpasadisā.Nevassa cittaṃ pariyādiyantīti etassa khīṇāsavassa cittaṃ gahetvā ṭhātuṃ na sakkonti. Kilesā hi uppajjamānā cittaṃ gaṇhanti nāma.Amissīkatanti kilesā hi ārammaṇena saddhiṃ cittaṃ missaṃ karonti, tesaṃ abhāvā amissīkataṃ.Ṭhitanti patiṭṭhitaṃ.Āneñjappattanti acalappattaṃ.Vayañcassānupassatīti tassa cesa cittassa uppādampi vayampi passati.Bhusā vātavuṭṭhīti balavā vātakkhandho.Neva sampakampeyyāti ekabhāgena cāletuṃ na sakkuṇeyya.Na sampakampeyyāti thūṇaṃ viya sabbabhāgato kampetuṃ na sakkuṇeyya.Na sampavedheyyāti vedhetvā pavedhetvā pātetuṃ na sakkuṇeyya.

Bhusā: means powerful, similar to divine forms. Nevassa cittaṃ pariyādiyantī: they are not able to seize and hold the mind of this arahant. For defilements, when arising, seize the mind. Amissīkataṃ: defilements mix the mind with the object, but because of their absence, it is unmixed. Ṭhitaṃ: established. Āneñjappattaṃ: having attained the unshakeable. Vayañcassānupassatī: and he sees the arising and passing away of this mind. Bhusā vātavuṭṭhī: a strong gust of wind. Neva sampakampeyya: it would not be able to shake it to one side. Na sampakampeyya: like a pillar, it would not be able to shake it from all sides. Na sampavedheyya: it would not be able to cause it to tremble, shake, and fall.

Nekkhammaṃadhimuttassāti arahattaṃ paṭivijjhitvā ṭhitassa khīṇāsavassa. Sesapadesupi arahattameva kathitaṃ.Upādānakkhayassa cāti upayogatthe sāmivacanaṃ.Asammohañca cetasoti cittassa ca asammohaṃ adhimuttassa.Disvā āyatanuppādanti āyatanānaṃ uppādañca vayañca disvā.Sammā cittaṃ vimuccatīti sammā hetunā nayena imāya vipassanāpaṭipattiyā phalasamāpattivasena cittaṃ vimuccati, nibbānārammaṇe adhimuccati. Atha vā iminā khīṇāsavassa paṭipadā kathitā. Tassa hi āyatanuppādaṃ disvā imāya vipassanāya adhigatassa ariyamaggassānubhāvena sabbakilesehi sammā cittaṃ vimuccati. Evaṃ tassasammā vimuttassa…pe… na vijjati. Tatthasantacittassāti nibbutacittassa. Sesamettha uttānatthamevāti.

Nekkhammaṃ adhimuttassā: of the arahant, who stands having realized Arahatship. In the remaining terms as well, only Arahatship is spoken of. Upādānakkhayassa cā: and of the destruction of clinging, the possessive case in the sense of purpose. Asammohañca cetaso: and of the mind's non-delusion, of one intent. Disvā āyatanuppādaṃ: having seen the arising and passing away of the sense bases. Sammā cittaṃ vimuccati: by a right cause, by a method, by this practice of insight, the mind is released in terms of fruition attainment, it is intent on Nibbana as its object. Or else, the practice of the arahant is spoken of by this. For him, having seen the arising of the sense bases, by the power of the Noble Path attained by this insight, the mind is rightly released from all defilements. Thus, of him sammā vimuttassa…pe… na vijjati. There, santacittassā: of one whose mind is stilled. The rest here is of obvious meaning.

2. Phaggunasuttavaṇṇanā
2. Phaggunasuttavaṇṇanā

56.Dutiyesamadhosīti uṭṭhānākāraṃ dassesi.Paṭikkamantīti parihāyanti.No abhikkamantīti na vaḍḍhanti.Sīsaveṭhanaṃ dadeyyāti sīsaṃ veṭhetvā daṇḍakena samparivattakaṃ bandheyya.Indriyāni vippasīdiṃsūti tasmiṃ maraṇasamaye cha indriyāni vippasannāni ahesuṃ.Atthupaparikkhāyāti atthānatthaṃ kāraṇākāraṇaṃ upaparikkhane.Anuttare upadhisaṅkhayeti nibbāne.Avimuttaṃ hotīti arahattaphalena adhimuttaṃ hoti.

56. In the second, samadhosī: he showed the manner of rising. Paṭikkamantī: declining. No abhikkamantī: not increasing. Sīsaveṭhanaṃ dadeyyā: one should wrap the head and bind it tightly with a bandage. Indriyāni vippasīdiṃsū: at that time of death, the six faculties were very clear. Atthupaparikkhāya: for the examination of what is beneficial and not beneficial, what is cause and not cause. Anuttare upadhisaṅkhaye: in Nibbana. Avimuttaṃ hotī: he is intent through the fruition of Arahatship.

3. Chaḷabhijātisuttavaṇṇanā
3. Chaḷabhijātisuttavaṇṇanā

57.Tatiyechaḷabhijātiyoti cha jātiyo.Tatridanti tatrāyaṃ.Luddāti dāruṇā.Bhikkhūkaṇṭakavuttikāti samaṇā nāmete.Ekasāṭakāti ekeneva pilotikakhaṇḍena purato paṭicchādanakā.Akāmakassa bilaṃ olaggeyyunti satthe gacchamāne goṇamhi mate gomaṃsamūlaṃ uppādanatthāya vibhajitvā khādamānā ekassa gomaṃsaṃ anicchantasseva koṭṭhāsaṃ katvā ‘‘ayañca te khāditabbo, mūlañca dātabba’’nti taṃ koṭṭhāsasaṅkhātaṃ bilaṃ olaggeyyuṃ, balakkārena hatthe ṭhapeyyunti attho.Akhettaññunāti abhijātipaññattiyā khettaṃ ajānantena.Taṃ suṇāhīti taṃ mama paññattiṃ suṇāhi.Kaṇhābhijātikoti kāḷakajātiko.Kaṇhaṃ dhammaṃ abhijāyatīti kaṇhasabhāvo hutvā jāyati nibbattati, kaṇhābhijātiyaṃ vā jāyati.Nibbānaṃabhijāyatīti nibbānaṃ pāpuṇāti, ariyabhūmisaṅkhātāya vā nibbānajātiyā jāyati.

57. In the third, chaḷabhijātiyo: six kinds of birth. Tatridaṃ: Here in this. Luddā: cruel. Bhikkhū kaṇṭakavuttikā: monks, that is their name. Ekasāṭakā: with only one rag-cloth as a covering in front. Akāmakassa bilaṃ olaggeyyuṃ: while the cart is going along, when an ox dies, in order to produce goṇa-meat, dividing and eating, even to one who does not want the goṇa-meat, they would make a share and, saying, "This too must be eaten, and the price must be paid," they would hang that share in the form of a price, they would forcibly place it in his hand, is the meaning. Akhettaññunā: by one who does not know the field of the designation of birth. Taṃ suṇāhi: listen to that designation of mine. Kaṇhābhijātiko: of black birth. Kaṇhaṃ dhammaṃ abhijāyatī: being of a dark nature, he is born, arises; or he is born in a black birth. Nibbānaṃ abhijāyatī: he attains Nibbana; or he is born in the Nibbana-birth, which is designated as the Noble Plane.

4. Āsavasuttavaṇṇanā
4. Āsavasuttavaṇṇanā

58.Catutthesaṃvarā pahātabbāti saṃvarena pahātabbā. Sesesupi eseva nayo.Idhāti imasmiṃ sāsane.Paṭisaṅkhāti paṭisañjānitvā, paccavekkhitvāti attho.Yonisoti upāyena pathena. Ettha ca asaṃvare ādīnavapaṭisaṅkhā yoniso paṭisaṅkhāti veditabbā. Sā cāyaṃ ‘‘varaṃ, bhikkhave, tattāya ayosalākāya ādittāya sampajjalitāya sajotibhūtāya cakkhundriyaṃ sampalimaṭṭhaṃ, na tveva cakkhuviññeyyesu rūpesu anubyañjanaso nimittaggāho’’tiādinā ādittapariyāyena (saṃ. ni. 4.235) veditabbā.Cakkhundriyasaṃvarasaṃvutoviharatīti ettha cakkhumeva indriyaṃ cakkhundriyaṃ, saṃvaraṇato saṃvaro, pidahanato thakanatoti vuttaṃ hoti. Satiyā etaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Cakkhundriye saṃvarocakkhundriyasaṃvaro. Javane uppajjamānopi hesa tasmiṃ dvāre kilesānaṃ uppattivāraṇato cakkhundriyasaṃvaroti vuccati.Saṃvutoti tena saṃvarena upeto. Tathā hi ‘‘pātimokkhasaṃvarasaṃvuto’’ti imassa vibhaṅge ‘‘iminā pātimokkhasaṃvarena upeto hoti…pe… samannāgato’’ti vuttaṃ. Atha vā saṃvarīti saṃvuto, thakesi pidahīti vuttaṃ hoti. Cakkhundriyasaṃvarasaṃvutoti cakkhundriyasaṃvarasaṅkhātaṃ satikavāṭaṃ cakkhudvāre gharadvāre kavāṭaṃ viya saṃvari thakesi pidahīti vuttaṃ hoti. Ayamevettha attho sundarataro. Tathā hi ‘‘cakkhundriyasaṃvaraṃ asaṃvutassa viharato, saṃvutassa viharato’’ti etesu padesu ayamevattho dissatīti.

58. In the fourth, saṃvarā pahātabbā: must be abandoned by restraint. The same method applies in the rest as well. Idha: in this Dispensation. Paṭisaṅkhā: after reflecting, after considering, is the meaning. Yoniso: by way of the means, the path. And here, lack of restraint is to be known as the danger, reflection is to be known as wise reflection. And this is to be known by the simile of fire in the Adittapariyaya Sutta (Saṃ. Ni. 4.235) beginning with "Better it would be, monks, that the eye-faculty were touched with a blazing, burning, glowing hot iron stake than that one should grasp at the signs and details in forms cognizable by the eye." Cakkhundriyasaṃvarasaṃvuto viharatī: Here, the eye itself is the faculty, the eye-faculty; restraint is so called because of restraining, because of preventing, because of obstructing. This is a designation for mindfulness. Restraint in the eye-faculty is cakkhundriyasaṃvaro. Even when arising in the impulsion, because of preventing the arising of defilements at that door, it is called eye-faculty restraint. Saṃvuto: endowed with that restraint. Thus, in the analysis of "endowed with restraint by the restraint of the Patimokkha" it is said "he is endowed with this restraint of the Patimokkha…pe…possessed of." Or else, saṃvarīti is restrained, it is said that he obstructs and prevents. Cakkhundriyasaṃvarasaṃvutoti: he obstructs and prevents the mindfulness-gate designated as eye-faculty restraint at the eye-door, like a gate at a house-door. This meaning here is more beautiful. Thus, in these passages "while one lives unrestrained in eye-faculty restraint, while one lives restrained," this very meaning is seen.

Yaṃ hissātiādimhi yaṃ cakkhundriyasaṃvaraṃ assa bhikkhuno asaṃvutassa athaketvā apidahitvā viharantassāti attho. Yekārassa vā esa yanti ādeso, ye assāti attho.Āsavā vighātapariḷāhāti cattāro āsavā ca aññe ca vighātakarā kilesapariḷāhā vipākapariḷāhā vā. Cakkhudvārasmiñhi iṭṭhārammaṇaṃ āpāthagataṃ kāmassādavasena assādayato abhinandato kāmāsavo uppajjati, ‘‘īdisaṃ aññasmimpi sugatibhave labhissāmī’’ti bhavapatthanāya assādayato bhavāsavo uppajjati, sattoti vā sattassāti vā gaṇhato diṭṭhāsavo uppajjati, sabbeheva sahajātaṃ aññāṇaṃ avijjāsavoti cattāro āsavā uppajjanti. Etehi sampayuttā apare kilesā vighātapariḷāhā āyatiṃ vā tesaṃ vipākā tehipi asaṃvutasseva viharato uppajjeyyunti vuccanti.Evaṃsateti evaṃ assa te, etenupāyena na honti, no aññathāti vuttaṃ hoti.Paṭisaṅkhā yoniso sotindriyasaṃvarasaṃvutotiādīsupi eseva nayo.Ime vuccanti āsavā saṃvarā pahātabbāti imesu chasu dvāresu cattāro cattāro katvā catuvīsati āsavā saṃvarena pahātabbāti vuccanti.

Yaṃ hissātiādimhi: Yaṃ means whatever eye-faculty restraint there might be for that monk who lives unrestrained, without obstructing, without preventing, is the meaning. Or this ye is a substitute for yaṃ, ye assāti, meaning whatever there might be. Āsavā vighātapariḷāhā: means the four āsavas and other afflictions that cause harm, or the parilahas of the result. For in the eye-door, to one who savors and delights in a desirable object that has come into the range of vision, through the taste of sensuality, the sensuality-āsava arises; to one who savors through desire for existence, "I will obtain something like this in another happy existence," the existence-āsava arises; to one who grasps, "I am," or "It is mine," the view-āsava arises; and ignorance, the innate one, is the ignorance-āsava; thus, the four āsavas arise. Afflictions connected with these and other harmful parilahas, or their results in the future, would arise for one living unrestrained. Evaṃsa te: thus, it is to him; they are not by this means, not otherwise, it is said. Paṭisaṅkhā yoniso sotindriyasaṃvarasaṃvuto: The same method applies in the rest as well. Ime vuccanti āsavā saṃvarā pahātabbā: In these six doors, making four each, twenty-four āsavas are said to be abandoned by restraint.

Paṭisaṅkhā yoniso cīvarantiādīsu yaṃ vattabbaṃ, taṃ sabbaṃ visuddhimagge (visuddhi. 1.18) sīlakathāya vuttameva.Yaṃ hissāti yañhi cīvaraṃ piṇḍapātādīsu vā aññataraṃ assa.Appaṭisevatoti evaṃ yoniso appaṭisevantassa. Imasmiṃ vāre aladdhaṃ cīvarādiṃ patthayato laddhaṃ vā assādayato kāmāsavassa uppatti veditabbā, īdisaṃ aññasmimpi sugatibhave labhissāmīti bhavapatthanāya assādayato bhavāsavassa, ahaṃ labhāmi na labhāmīti vā mayhaṃ vā idanti attasaññaṃ adhiṭṭhahato diṭṭhāsavassa, sabbeheva pana sahajāto avijjāsavoti evaṃ catunnaṃ āsavānaṃ uppatti vighātapariḷāhāva navavedanuppādanatopi veditabbā.Ime vuccanti, bhikkhave, āsavā paṭisevanā pahātabbāti ime ekamekasmiṃ paccaye cattāro cattāro katvā soḷasa āsavā iminā ñāṇasaṃvarasaṅkhātena paccavekkhaṇapaṭisevanena pahātabbāti vuccanti.

Paṭisaṅkhā yoniso cīvaraṃ: Whatever should be said about robes, alms-food, etc., all of that has already been said in the chapter on virtue in the Visuddhimagga (visuddhi. 1.18). Yaṃ hissā: whatever robe or alms-food, etc., or anything else there might be. Appaṭisevato: to one who does not wisely make use of it in this way. On this occasion, the arising of the sensuality-āsava should be understood in one who desires an unobtained robe, etc., or who savors one that has been obtained; the arising of the existence-āsava should be understood in one who savors through desire for existence, "I will obtain something like this in another happy existence"; the view-āsava, in one who establishes a self-notion, "I obtain, I do not obtain," or "This is mine"; and ignorance, innate with all, is the ignorance-āsava; thus, the arising of the four āsavas, and also harmful parilahas because of generating new feeling, should be understood. Ime vuccanti, bhikkhave, āsavā paṭisevanā pahātabbā: These, monks, making four each in each requisite, sixteen āsavas are said to be abandoned by this reflective use of the requisite, which is designated as knowledge-restraint.

Paṭisaṅkhā yoniso khamo hoti sītassāti upāyena pathena paccavekkhitvā khantā hoti sītassa, sītaṃ khamati sahati, na avīrapuriso viya appamattakenapi sītena calati kampati kammaṭṭhānaṃ vijahati.Uṇhādīsupi eseva nayo. Ettha ca vacanamevavacanapathoti veditabbo.Dukkhānantiādīsu dukkhamanaṭṭhena dukkhā, bahalaṭṭhena tibbā, pharusaṭṭhena kharā, tikhiṇaṭṭhena kaṭukā, assādavirahato asātā, manaṃ avaḍḍhanato amanāpā, pāṇaharaṇasamatthatāya pāṇaharāti veditabbā.Yaṃ hissāti sītādīsu yaṃkiñci ekadhammampi assa.Anadhivāsatoti anadhivāsentassa akkhamantassa. Āsavuppatti panettha evaṃ veditabbā – sītena phuṭṭhassa uṇhaṃ patthayato kāmāsavo uppajjati, evaṃ sabbattha. ‘‘Natthi sugatibhave sītaṃ vā uṇhaṃ vā’’ti bhavaṃ patthentassa bhavāsavo, mayhaṃ sītaṃ uṇhanti gāho diṭṭhāsavo, sabbeheva sampayutto avijjāsavoti.Ime vuccantīti ime sītādīsu ekamekassa vasena cattāro cattāro katvā aneke āsavā imāya khantisaṃvarasaṅkhātāya adhivāsanāya pahātabbāti vuccantīti attho.

Paṭisaṅkhā yoniso caṇḍaṃ hatthiṃ parivajjetīti ahaṃ samaṇoti na caṇḍassa hatthissa āsanne ṭhātabbaṃ. Tatonidānañhi maraṇampi maraṇamattampi dukkhaṃ bhaveyyāti evaṃ upāyena pathena paccavekkhitvā caṇḍaṃ hatthiṃ parivajjeti paṭikkamati. Esa nayo sabbattha.Caṇḍanti duṭṭhaṃ vāḷaṃ.Khāṇunti khadirakhāṇukādiṃ.Kaṇṭakaṭṭhānanti yattha kaṇṭakā vijjhanti, taṃ okāsaṃ.Sobbhanti sabbato chinnataṭaṃ.Papātanti ekato chinnataṭaṃ.Candanikanti ucchiṭṭhodakagabbhamalādīnaṃ chaḍḍanaṭṭhānaṃ.Oḷigallanti tesaṃyeva kaddamādīnaṃ sandanokāsaṃ. Taṃ jaṇṇumattampi asucibharitaṃ hoti. Dvepi cetāni ṭhānāni amanussussadaṭṭhānāni honti, tasmā vajjetabbāni.Anāsaneti ettha ayuttaṃ āsanaṃ anāsanaṃ, taṃ atthato aniyatavatthubhūtaṃ rahopaṭicchannāsananti veditabbaṃ.Agocareti etthapi ayutto gocaro agocaro. So vesiyādibhedato pañcavidho.Pāpake mitteti lāmake dussīle mittapatirūpake amitte.Pāpakesūti lāmakesu.Okappeyyunti saddaheyyuṃ adhimucceyyuṃ ‘‘addhā ayamāyasmā akāsi vā karissati vā’’ti.Yaṃ hissāti hatthiādīsu yaṃkiñci ekampi assa. Āsavuppatti panettha evaṃ veditabbā – hatthiādinidānena dukkhena phuṭṭhassa sukhaṃ patthayato kāmāsavo uppajjati, ‘‘natthi sugatibhave īdisaṃ dukkha’’nti bhavaṃ patthentassa bhavāsavo, maṃ hatthī maddati maṃ assoti gāho diṭṭhāsavo, sabbeheva sampayutto avijjāsavoti.Ime vuccantīti ime hatthiādīsu ekekassa vasena cattāro cattāro katvā aneke āsavā iminā sīlasaṃvarasaṅkhātena parivajjanena pahātabbāti vuccanti.

Paṭisaṅkhāyoniso uppannaṃ kāmavitakkaṃ nādhivāsetīti ‘‘itipāyaṃ vitakko akusalo, itipi sāvajjo, itipi dukkhavipāko, so ca kho attabyābādhāya saṃvattatī’’tiādinā (ma. ni. 1.207-208) nayena yoniso kāmavitakke ādīnavaṃ paccavekkhitvā tasmiṃ tasmiṃ ārammaṇe uppannaṃ kāmavitakkaṃ nādhivāseti, cittaṃ āropetvā na vāseti, abbhantare vā na vāsetīti attho. Anadhivāsento kiṃ karotīti?Pajahati. Kiṃ kacavaraṃ viya piṭakenāti? Na hi, api ca kho naṃvinodetitudati vijjhati nīharati. Kiṃ balibaddaṃ viya patodenāti? Na hi, atha kho naṃbyantīkarotivigatantaṃ karoti, yathāssa antopi nāvasissati antamaso bhaṅgamattampi, tathā naṃ karoti. Kathaṃ pana naṃ tathā karotīti?Anabhāvaṃ gametianu anu abhāvaṃ gameti, vikkhambhanappahānena yathā suvikkhambhito hoti, tathā karoti. Sesavitakkadvayepi eseva nayo.Uppannuppanneti uppanne uppanne, uppannamatteyevāti vuttaṃ hoti. Sakiṃ vā uppanne vinodetvā dutiye vāre ajjhupekkhitā na hoti, satakkhattumpi uppanne uppanne vinodetiyeva.Pāpake akusale dhammeti teyeva kāmavitakkādayo, sabbepi vā nava mahāvitakke. Tattha tayo vuttā, avasesā ‘‘ñātivitakko, janapadavitakko, amarāvitakko, parānuddayatāpaṭisaṃyutto vitakko, lābhasakkārasilokappaṭisaṃyutto vitakko, anavaññattippaṭisaṃyutto vitakko’’ti (mahāni. 207) ime cha.Yaṃ hissāti etesu vitakkesu yaṃkiñci assa. Kāmavitakko panettha kāmāsavo eva, tabbiseso bhavāsavo, taṃsampayutto diṭṭhāsavo, sabbavitakkesu avijjā avijjāsavoti evaṃ āsavuppatti veditabbā.Imevuccantīti ime kāmavitakkādivasena vuttappakārā āsavā iminā tasmiṃ tasmiṃ vitakke ādīnavapaccavekkhaṇasahitena vīriyasaṃvarasaṅkhātena vinodanena pahātabbāti vuccanti.

Paṭisaṅkhā yoniso satisambojjhaṅgaṃ bhāvetīti abhāvanāya ādīnavaṃ bhāvanāya ca ānisaṃsaṃ upāyena pathena paccavekkhitvā satisambojjhaṅgaṃ bhāveti. Eseva nayo sabbattha. Bojjhaṅgānaṃ bhāvanā heṭṭhā vitthāritāva.Yaṃ hissāti etesu bojjhaṅgesu yaṃkiñci assa. Āsavuppattiyaṃ panettha imesaṃ ariyamaggasampayuttānaṃ bojjhaṅgānaṃ abhāvitattā ye uppajjeyyuṃ kāmāsavādayo āsavā, bhāvayato evaṃsa te na hontīti ayaṃ nayo veditabbo.Ime vuccantīti ime kāmāsavādayo āsavā imāya lokuttarāya bojjhaṅgabhāvanāya pahātabbāti vuccanti. Imehi chahākārehi pahīnāsavaṃ bhikkhuṃ thomentoyato kho, bhikkhavetiādimāha. Tatthayatoti sāmivacane to-kāro, yassāti vuttaṃ hoti. Porāṇā pana yamhi kāleti vaṇṇayanti.Ye āsavā saṃvarā pahātabbā, te saṃvarā pahīnā hontīti ye āsavā saṃvarena pahātabbā, te saṃvareneva pahīnā honti, na appahīnesuyeva pahīnasaññī hotīti.

5. Dārukammikasuttavaṇṇanā

59.Pañcamedārukammikoti dāruvikkayena pavattitājīvo eko upāsako.Kāsikacandananti saṇhacandanaṃ.Aṅgenāti aguṇaṅgena, sukkapakkhe guṇaṅgena.Nemantanikoti nimantanaṃ gaṇhanako.Saṅghe dānaṃ dassāmīti bhikkhusaṅghassa dassāmi. So evaṃ vatvā satthāraṃ abhivādetvā pakkāmi. Athassa aparabhāge pañcasatā kulūpakā bhikkhū gihibhāvaṃ pāpuṇiṃsu. So ‘‘kulūpakabhikkhū te vibbhantā’’ti vutte ‘‘kiṃ ettha mayha’’nti vatvā cittuppādavemattamattampi na akāsi. Idaṃ sandhāya satthāsaṅghe te dānaṃ dadato cittaṃ pasīdissatīti āha.

6. Hatthisāriputtasuttavaṇṇanā

60.Chaṭṭheabhidhammakathanti abhidhammamissakaṃ kathaṃ.Kathaṃ opātetīti tesaṃ kathaṃ vicchinditvā attano kathaṃ katheti.Therānaṃ bhikkhūnanti karaṇatthe sāmivacanaṃ, therehi bhikkhūhi saddhinti attho. Yā ca therānaṃ abhidhammakathā, taṃ ayampi kathetuṃ sakkotīti attho.Cetopariyāyanti cittavāraṃ.Idhāti imasmiṃ loke.Soratasoratoti sūrato viya sūrato, soraccasamannāgato viyāti attho.Nivātanivātoti nivāto viya nivāto, nivātavutti viyāti attho.Upasantupasantoti upasanto viya upasanto.Vapakassateva satthārāti satthu santikā apagacchati.Saṃsaṭṭhassāti pañcahi saṃsaggehi saṃsaṭṭhassa.Vissaṭṭhassāti vissajjitassa.Pākatassāti pākatindriyassa.

Kiṭṭhādoti kiṭṭhakhādako.Antaradhāpeyyāti nāseyya.Gopasūti gāvo ca ajikā ca.Sippisambukanti sippiyo ca sambukā ca.Sakkharakaṭhalanti sakkharā ca kaṭhalāni ca.Ābhidosikanti abhiññātadosaṃ kudrūsakabhojanaṃ.Nacchādeyyāti na rucceyya. Tattha yadetaṃpurisaṃ bhuttāvinti upayogavacanaṃ, taṃ sāmiatthe daṭṭhabbaṃ.Amuṃ hāvuso, purisanti, āvuso, amuṃ purisaṃ.

Sabbanimittānanti sabbesaṃ niccanimittādīnaṃ nimittānaṃ.Animittaṃ cetosamādhinti balavavipassanāsamādhiṃ.Cīrikasaddoti jhallikasaddo.Sarissati nekkhammassāti pabbajjāya guṇaṃ sarissati.Arahataṃ ahosīti bhagavato sāvakānaṃ arahantānaṃ antare eko arahā ahosi. Ayañhi thero satta vāre gihī hutvā satta vāre pabbaji. Kiṃ kāraṇā? Kassapasammāsambuddhakāle kiresa ekassa bhikkhuno gihibhāve vaṇṇaṃ kathesi. So teneva kammena arahattassa upanissaye vijjamāneyeva satta vāre gihibhāve ca pabbajjāya ca sañcaranto sattame vāre pabbajitvā arahattaṃ pāpuṇīti.

7. Majjhesuttavaṇṇanā

61.Sattamepārāyane metteyyapañheti pārāyanasamāgamamhi metteyyamāṇavassa pañhe.Ubhonte viditvānāti dve ante dve koṭṭhāse jānitvā.Majjhe mantā na lippatīti mantā vuccati paññā, tāya ubho ante viditvā majjhe na lippati, vemajjheṭṭhāne na lippati.Sibbanimaccagāti sibbanisaṅkhātaṃ taṇhaṃ atīto.Phassoti phassavasena nibbattattā ayaṃ attabhāvo.Eko antoti ayameko koṭṭhāso.Phassasamudayoti phasso samudayo assāti phassasamudayo, imasmiṃ attabhāve katakammaphassapaccayā nibbatto anāgatattabhāvo.Dutiyo antoti dutiyo koṭṭhāso.Phassanirodhoti nibbānaṃ.Majjheti sibbinitaṇhaṃ chetvā dvidhākaraṇaṭṭhena nibbānaṃ majjhe nāma hoti.Taṇhā hinaṃ sibbatīti taṇhā naṃ attabhāvadvayasaṅkhātaṃ phassañca phassasamudayañca sibbati ghaṭṭeti. Kiṃ kāraṇā? Tassa tasseva bhavassa abhinibbattiyā. Yadi hi taṇhā na sibbeyya, tassa tassa bhavassa nibbatti na bhaveyya. Imasmiṃ ṭhāne koṭimajjhikūpamaṃ gaṇhanti. Dvinnañhi kaṇḍānaṃ ekato katvā majjhe suttena saṃsibbitānaṃ koṭi majjhanti vuccati. Sutte chinne ubho kaṇḍāni ubhato patanti. Evamettha kaṇḍadvayaṃ viya vuttappakārā dve antā, sibbitvā ṭhitasuttaṃ viya taṇhā, sutte chinne kaṇḍadvayassa ubhatopatanaṃ viya taṇhāya niruddhāya antadvayaṃ niruddhameva hoti.Ettāvatāti ettakena iminā ubho ante viditvā taṇhāya majjhe anupalittabhāvena abhiññeyyaṃ catusaccadhammaṃ abhijānāti nāma, tīraṇapariññāya ca pahānapariññāya ca parijānitabbaṃ lokiyasaccadvayaṃ parijānāti nāma.Diṭṭhevadhammeti imasmiṃyeva attabhāve.Dukkhassantakaro hotīti vaṭṭadukkhassa koṭikaro paricchedaparivaṭumakaro hoti nāma.

Dutiyavāre tiṇṇaṃ kaṇḍānaṃ vasena upamā veditabbā. Tiṇṇañhi kaṇḍānaṃ suttena saṃsibbitānaṃ sutte chinne tīṇi kaṇḍāni tīsu ṭhānesu patanti, evamettha kaṇḍattayaṃ viya atītānāgatapaccuppannā khandhā, suttaṃ viya taṇhā. Sā hi atītaṃ paccuppannena, paccuppannañca anāgatena saddhiṃ saṃsibbati. Sutte chinne kaṇḍattayassa tīsu ṭhānesu patanaṃ viya taṇhāya niruddhāya atītānāgatapaccuppannā khandhā niruddhāva honti.

adukkhamasukhā majjheti dvinnaṃ vedanānaṃ antaraṭṭhakabhāvena majjhe. Sukhañhi dukkhassa, dukkhaṃ vā sukhassa antaraṃ nāma natthi.Taṇhā sibbinīti vedanāsu nandirāgo vedanānaṃ upacchedaṃ nivāretīti tā sibbati nāma.

viññāṇaṃ majjheti paṭisandhiviññāṇampi sesaviññāṇampi nāmarūpapaccayasamudāgatattā nāmarūpānaṃ majjhe nāma.

viññāṇaṃ majjheti kammaviññāṇaṃ majjhe, ajjhattikāyatanesu vā manāyatanena kammassa gahitattā idha yaṃkiñci viññāṇaṃ majjhe nāma, manodvāre vā āvajjanassa ajjhattikāyatananissitattā javanaviññāṇaṃ majjhe nāma.

sakkāyoti tebhūmakavaṭṭaṃ.Sakkāyasamudayoti samudayasaccaṃ.Sakkāyanirodhoti nirodhasaccaṃ.Pariyāyenāti tena tena kāraṇeneva. Sesaṃ sabbattha vuttanayeneva veditabbaṃ.

8. Purisindriyañāṇasuttavaṇṇanā

62.Aṭṭhameaññataroti devadattapakkhiko eko.Samannāharitvāti āvajjitvā. Idaṃ so ‘‘kiṃ nu kho bhagavatā jānitvā kathitaṃ, udāhu ajānitvā, ekaṃsikaṃ vā kathitaṃ udāhu vibhajjakathita’’nti adhippāyena pucchati.Āpāyikoti apāye nibbattanako.Nerayikoti nirayagāmī.Kappaṭṭhoti kappaṭṭhiyakammassa katattā kappaṃ ṭhassati.Atekicchoti na sakkā tikicchituṃ.Dvejjhanti dvidhābhāvaṃ.Vālaggakoṭinittudanamattanti vālassa aggakoṭiyā dassetabbamattakaṃ, vālaggakoṭinipātamattakaṃ vā.Purisindriyañāṇānīti purisapuggalānaṃ indriyaparopariyattañāṇāni, indriyānaṃ tikkhamudubhāvajānanañāṇānīti attho.

62.In the eighth, aññataro means one on Devadatta's side. Samannāharitvā means having adverted. Here, he asks with the intention, "Did the Blessed One speak knowing, or not knowing? Did he speak definitively, or did he speak with distinctions?" Āpāyiko means one who will be reborn in the apāya. Nerayiko means one who will go to niraya. Kappaṭṭho means he will remain for a kappa, having done kappaṭṭhika-karma. Atekiccho means it is not possible to cure. Dvejjha means a state of duality. Vālaggakoṭinittudanamatta means only the amount that can be shown by the tip of a hair, or only the amount of a hair-tip prick. Purisindriyañāṇānī means the knowledge of individual persons regarding the superiority of faculties, the knowledge of knowing the sharp and dull states of the faculties; the meaning is that.

Vijjamānā kusalāpi dhammā akusalāpi dhammāti ettakā kusalā dhammā vijjanti, ettakā akusalā dhammāti jānāmi.Antarahitāti adassanaṃ gatā.Sammukhībhūtāti samudācāravasena pākaṭā jātā.Kusalamūlanti kusalajjhāsayo.Kusalā kusalanti tamhā kusalajjhāsayā aññampi kusalaṃ nibbattissati.Sāradānīti sārādāni gahitasārāni, saradamāse vā nibbattāni.Sukhasayitānīti sukhasannicitāni.Sukhetteti maṇḍakhette.Nikkhittānīti vuttāni.Sappaṭibhāgāti sarikkhakā.Abhido addharattanti abhiaddharattaṃ addharatte abhimukhībhūte.Bhattakālasamayeti rājakulānaṃ bhattakālasaṅkhāte samaye.Parihānadhammoti ko evaṃ bhagavatā ñātoti? Ajātasatturājā. So hi pāpamittaṃ nissāya maggaphalehi parihīno. Aparepi suppabuddhasunakkhattādayo bhagavatā ñātāva.Aparihānadhammoti evaṃ bhagavatā ko ñāto? Susīmo paribbājako aññe ca evarūpā.Parinibbāyissatīti evaṃ ko ñāto bhagavatāti? Santatimahāmatto aññe ca evarūpā.

Vijjamānā kusalāpi dhammā akusalāpi dhammā means, "I know that so many wholesome states exist, so many unwholesome states exist." Antarahitā means gone to disappearance. Sammukhībhūtā means become apparent through the mode of arising. Kusalamūla means a wholesome disposition. Kusalā kusala means from that wholesome disposition, another wholesome thing will arise. Sāradānī means those that are essential, having taken the essence, or those that arise in the autumn season. Sukhasayitānī means comfortably arranged. Sukhette means in a fertile field. Nikkhittānī means stated. Sappaṭibhāgā means similar. Abhido addharatta means just past midnight, when midnight has come. Bhattakālasamaye means at the time known as the mealtime of royal families. Parihānadhammo means who was known thus by the Blessed One? King Ajātasattu. He, relying on bad friends, declined from the paths and fruits. Others too, like Suppabuddha and Sunakkhatta, were known by the Blessed One. Aparihānadhammo means who was known thus by the Blessed One? The wanderer Susīma and others like him. Parinibbāyissatī means who was known thus by the Blessed One? Santati the minister and others like him.

9. Nibbedhikasuttavaṇṇanā
9. Commentary on the Nibbedhika Sutta

63.Navame anibbiddhapubbe appadālitapubbe lobhakkhandhādayo nibbijjhati padāletītinibbedhikapariyāyo,nibbijjhanakāraṇanti attho.Nidānasambhavoti kāme nideti uppādanasamatthatāya niyyādetīti nidānaṃ. Sambhavati tatoti sambhavo, nidānameva sambhavonidānasambhavo. Vemattatāti nānākaraṇaṃ.

63.In the ninth, nibbedhikapariyāyo means the way of penetrating, that is, the cause for penetrating, since one penetrates and splits apart the aggregates of greed, etc., that were not previously penetrated or split apart. Nidānasambhavo means nidāna because it brings forth and delivers kāma, being capable of generating it. Sambhava means arising therefrom; nidāna itself is sambhava, hence nidānasambhavo. Vemattatā means diversification.

Kāmaguṇāti kāmayitabbaṭṭhena kāmā, bandhanaṭṭhena guṇā ‘‘antaguṇa’’ntiādīsu viya.Cakkhuviññeyyāti cakkhuviññāṇena passitabbā.Iṭṭhāti pariyiṭṭhā vā hontu mā vā, iṭṭhārammaṇabhūtāti attho.Kantāti kamanīyā.Manāpāti manavaḍḍhanakā.Piyarūpāti piyajātikā.Kāmūpasañhitāti ārammaṇaṃ katvā uppajjamānena kāmena upasañhitā.Rajanīyāti rāguppattikāraṇabhūtā.Nete kāmāti na ete kamanaṭṭhena kāmā nāma honti.Saṅkapparāgoti saṅkappavasena uppannarāgo.Kāmoti ayaṃ kāmappahānāya paṭipannehi pahātabbo. Kamanaṭṭhena kāmā nāma.Citrānīti citravicitrārammaṇāni.

Kāmaguṇā means kāmā in the sense of being desired, and guṇā in the sense of binding, as in "antaguṇa," etc. Cakkhuviññeyyā means to be seen by eye-consciousness. Iṭṭhā means whether they are very desirable or not, they are objects that are desirable. Kantā means lovely. Manāpā means delighting the mind. Piyarūpā means of a pleasant nature. Kāmūpasañhitā means accompanied by the kāma that arises making them the object. Rajanīyā means being the cause of the arising of desire. Nete kāmā means these are not kāma in the sense of desire. Saṅkapparāgo means the desire that arises by way of thought. Kāmo means this is the kāma to be abandoned by those who have entered the path for the abandonment of kāma. They are called kāma in the sense of desire. Citrānī means objects that are colorful and varied.

Phassoti sahajātaphasso.Kāmayamānoti kāmaṃ kāmayamāno.Tajjaṃ tajjanti tajjātikaṃ tajjātikaṃ.Puññabhāgiyanti dibbe kāme patthetvā sucaritapāripūriyā devaloke nibbattassa attabhāvo puññabhāgiyo nāma, duccaritapāripūriyā apāye nibbattassa attabhāvo apuññabhāgiyo nāma.Ayaṃ vuccati, bhikkhave, kāmānaṃ vipākoti ayaṃ duvidhopi kāmapatthanaṃ nissāya uppannattā kāmānaṃ vipākoti vuccati.So imaṃ nibbedhikanti so bhikkhu imaṃ chattiṃsaṭṭhānesu nibbijjhanakaṃ seṭṭhacariyaṃ jānāti.Kāmanirodhanti kāmānaṃ nirodhane evaṃ laddhanāmaṃ. Imasmiñhi ṭhāne brahmacariyasaṅkhāto maggova kāmanirodhoti vutto.

Phasso means co-nascent contact. Kāmayamāno means desiring kāma. Tajjaṃ tajja means that which is of that kind. Puññabhāgiya means, having wished for divine kāma, the existence of one reborn in the deva-world through the fulfillment of good conduct is called puññabhāgiya; the existence of one reborn in the apāya through the fulfillment of bad conduct is called apuññabhāgiya. Ayaṃ vuccati, bhikkhave, kāmānaṃ vipāko means this twofold one is called the result of kāma, because it arises dependent on wishing for kāma. So imaṃ nibbedhika means that bhikkhu knows this excellent practice of penetrating in thirty-six instances. Kāmanirodha means having this name due to the cessation of kāma. For in this instance, only the path, which is called Brahmacariya, is said to be the cessation of kāma.

Sāmisāti kilesāmisasampayuttā. Iminā nayena sabbaṭhānesu attho veditabbo. Apicetthavohāravepakkanti vohāravipākaṃ. Kathāsaṅkhāto hi vohāro saññāya vipāko nāma.Yathāyathā nanti etthanaṃ-iti nipātamattameva. Iti yasmā yathā yathā sañjānāti, tathā tathā evaṃsaññī ahosinti katheti, tasmā vohāravepakkāti attho.

Sāmisā means connected with the bait of defilements. In this way, the meaning should be understood in all instances. Moreover, here vohāravepakka means the result of conventional expression. For conventional expression, which is synonymous with speech, is called the result of perception. Yathāyathā na here, naṃ is merely an expletive. Thus, because in whatever way he perceives, in that way he declares, "Thus was my perception," therefore, it means the result of conventional expression.

Avijjāti aṭṭhasu ṭhānesu aññāṇabhūtā bahalaavijjā. Nirayaṃ gamentītinirayagamanīyā,niraye nibbattipaccayāti attho. Sesesupi eseva nayo.Cetanāhanti cetanaṃ ahaṃ. Idha sabbasaṅgāhikā saṃvidahanacetanā gahitā.Cetayitvāti dvārappavattacetanā.Manasāti cetanāsampayuttacittena.Nirayavedanīyanti niraye vipākadāyakaṃ. Sesesupi eseva nayo.Adhimattanti balavadukkhaṃ.Dandhavirāgīti garukaṃ na khippaṃ saṇikaṃ vigacchanakadukkhaṃ.Urattāḷiṃ kandatīti uraṃ tāḷetvā rodati.Pariyeṭṭhinti pariyesanaṃ.Ekapadaṃ dvipadanti ekapadamantaṃ vā dvipadamantaṃ vā, ko mantaṃ jānātīti attho.Sammohavepakkanti sammohavipākaṃ. Dukkhassa hi sammoho nissandavipāko nāma. Dutiyapadepi eseva nayo. Pariyesanāpi hi tassa nissandavipākoti. Imasmiṃ sutte vaṭṭavivaṭṭaṃ kathitaṃ.

Avijjā means thick ignorance, being ignorance in eight instances. Nirayagamanīyā means leading to niraya, that is, the condition for rebirth in niraya. The same method applies in the remaining instances as well. Cetanāha means I intend. Here, intention that encompasses everything is taken. Cetayitvā means intention that occurs through a sense-door. Manasā means with mind accompanied by intention. Nirayavedanīya means giving result in niraya. The same method applies in the remaining instances as well. Adhimatta means intense suffering. Dandhavirāgī means heavy suffering that does not quickly or gently fade away. Urattāḷiṃ kandatī means he weeps striking his chest. Pariyeṭṭhi means searching. Ekapadaṃ dvipada means one word or two words; that is, who knows the mantra? Sammohavepakka means the result of delusion. For delusion is the inherent result of suffering. The same method applies in the second instance as well. For searching is also its inherent result. In this sutta, the round of existence and its cessation are discussed.

10. Sīhanādasuttavaṇṇanā
10. Commentary on the Sīhanāda Sutta

64.Dasameāsabhaṃ ṭhānanti seṭṭhaṃ niccalaṭṭhānaṃ.Sīhanādanti abhītanādaṃ pamukhanādaṃ.Brahmacakkanti seṭṭhañāṇacakkaṃ paṭivedhañāṇañceva desanāñāṇañca.Ṭhānañca ṭhānatoti kāraṇañca kāraṇato.Yampīti yena ñāṇena.Idampi tathāgatassāti idampi ṭhānāṭṭhānañāṇaṃ tathāgatassa tathāgatabalaṃ nāma hoti. Evaṃ sabbapadesu attho veditabbo.Kammasamādānānanti samādiyitvā katānaṃ kusalākusalakammānaṃ, kammameva vā kammasamādānaṃ.Ṭhānaso hetusoti paccayato ceva hetuto ca. Tattha gatiupadhikālapayogā vipākassa ṭhānaṃ, kammaṃ hetu.Jhānavimokkhasamādhisamāpattīnanti catunnaṃ jhānānaṃ aṭṭhannaṃ vimokkhānaṃ tiṇṇaṃ samādhīnaṃ navannaṃ anupubbasamāpattīnañca.Saṃkilesanti hānabhāgiyaṃ dhammaṃ.Vodānanti visesabhāgiyaṃ dhammaṃ.Vuṭṭhānanti ‘‘vodānampi vuṭṭhānaṃ, tamhā tamhā samādhimhā vuṭṭhānampi vuṭṭhāna’’nti (vibha. 828) evaṃ vuttaṃ paguṇajjhānañceva bhavaṅganaphalasamāpattiyo ca. Heṭṭhimaṃ heṭṭhimañhi paguṇajjhānaṃ uparimassa uparimassa padaṭṭhānaṃ hoti, tasmā ‘‘vodānampi vuṭṭhāna’’nti vuttaṃ. Bhavaṅgena pana sabbajjhānehi vuṭṭhānaṃ hoti, phalasamāpattiyā nirodhasamāpattito vuṭṭhānaṃ hoti. Taṃ sandhāya ‘‘tamhā tamhā samādhimhā vuṭṭhānampi vuṭṭhāna’’nti vuttaṃ.Anekavihitantiādīni visuddhimagge (visuddhi. 2.402) vaṇṇitāni. Āsavakkhayañāṇaṃ heṭṭhā vuttatthameva. Purimassāpi ñāṇattayassa vitthārakathaṃ icchantena majjhimaṭṭhakathāya mahāsīhanādavaṇṇanā (ma. ni. aṭṭha. 1.146 ādayo) oloketabbā.Samāhitassāti ekaggacittassa.Samādhi maggoti samādhi etesaṃ ñāṇānaṃ adhigamāya upāyo.Asamādhīti anekaggabhāvo.Kummaggoti micchāmaggo. Imasmiṃ sutte tathāgatassa ñāṇabalaṃ kathitanti.

64.In the tenth, āsabhaṃ ṭhāna means the excellent, immovable state. Sīhanāda means fearless roar, foremost roar. Brahmacakka means the excellent wheel of knowledge, both the knowledge of penetration and the knowledge of teaching. Ṭhānañca ṭhānato means the cause and from the cause. Yampī means by whatever knowledge. Idampi tathāgatassā means this knowledge of what is possible and impossible is a strength of the Tathāgata, named the Tathāgata's strength. Thus, the meaning should be understood in all instances. Kammasamādānāna means of the wholesome and unwholesome actions undertaken, or action itself is kammasamādāna. Ṭhānaso hetuso means by way of condition and by way of cause. There, destination, support, time, and application are the condition of the result; action is the cause. Jhānavimokkhasamādhisamāpattīna means of the four jhānas, the eight deliverances, the three samādhis, and the nine successive attainments. Saṃkilesa means the state that pertains to decline. Vodāna means the state that pertains to distinction. Vuṭṭhāna means "vodāna is also vuṭṭhāna, vuṭṭhāna is also emerging from that samādhi" (vibha. 828), thus it is said, skillful jhāna, as well as bhavaṅga and fruition attainment. For the lower skillful jhāna is the basis for the higher one; therefore, it is said, "vodāna is also vuṭṭhāna." But emerging from all the jhānas is through bhavaṅga, and emerging from nirodhasamāpatti is through fruition attainment. With that in mind, it is said, "emerging from that samādhi is also vuṭṭhāna." Anekavihita and the rest have been described in the Visuddhimagga (visuddhi. 2.402). The knowledge of the destruction of the āsavas has the same meaning as stated below. For one who wishes to hear the extensive discussion of the first three knowledges, the Mahāsīhanāda commentary in the Majjhima Nikāya Aṭṭhakathā (ma. ni. aṭṭha. 1.146 ff.) should be consulted. Samāhitassā means of one whose mind is one-pointed. Samādhi maggo means samādhi is the means for attaining these knowledges. Asamādhī means the state of not being one-pointed. Kummaggo means the false path. In this sutta, the knowledge-strength of the Tathāgata is discussed.

7. Devatāvaggo

7. Devatāvagga

1-3. Anāgāmiphalasuttādivaṇṇanā
1-3. Commentary on the Anāgāmiphalasutta, etc.

65-67.Sattamassa paṭhameassaddhiyanti assaddhabhāvaṃ.Duppaññatanti nippaññabhāvaṃ. Dutiyepamādanti sativippavāsaṃ. Tatiyeābhisamācārikanti uttamasamācārabhūtaṃ vattavasena paṇṇattisīlaṃ.Sekhadhammanti sekhapaṇṇattisīlaṃ.Sīlānīti cattāri mahāsīlāni.

65-67.In the seventh, in the first, assaddhiyanti means lack of faith. Duppaññatanti means lack of wisdom. In the second, pamādanti means loss of mindfulness. In the third, ābhisamācārikanti means the sīla that is the highest conduct, established by way of rules. Sekhadhammanti means the sīla that is the trainee's designation. Sīlānīnti means the four great sīlas.

4. Saṅgaṇikārāmasuttavaṇṇanā
4. Commentary on the Saṅgaṇikārāma Sutta

68.Catutthesaṅgaṇikārāmoti gaṇasaṅgaṇikārāmo. Suttantikagaṇādīsu pana gaṇesu attano vā parisāsaṅkhāte gaṇe ramatītigaṇārāmo. Paviveketi kāyaviveke.Cittassa nimittanti samādhivipassanācittassa nimittaṃ samādhivipassanākāraṃ.Sammādiṭṭhinti vipassanāsammādiṭṭhiṃ.Samādhinti maggasamādhiñceva phalasamādhiñca.Saṃyojanānīti dasa saṃyojanāni.Nibbānanti apaccayaparinibbānaṃ.

68.In the fourth, saṅgaṇikārāmo means the ārāma of groups and assemblies. However, among groups such as the Suttantika group, one delights in one's own group, or in a group that is reckoned as an assembly; thus, gaṇārāmo. Paviveke means bodily seclusion. Cittassa nimitta means the sign of the samādhi and vipassanā mind, the mode of samādhi and vipassanā. Sammādiṭṭhi means vipassanā right view. Samādhi means both path-samādhi and fruition-samādhi. Saṃyojanānī means the ten fetters. Nibbāna means nibbāna without conditions.

5. Devatāsuttavaṇṇanā
5. Commentary on the Devatā Sutta

69.Pañcamesovacassatāti subbacabhāvo.Kalyāṇamittatāti sucimittatā.Satthugāravoti satthari gāravayutto. Esa nayo sabbattha.

69.In the fifth, sovacassatā means being easy to admonish. Kalyāṇamittatā means having good friends. Satthugāravo means being respectful towards the teacher. This method applies everywhere.

6. Samādhisuttavaṇṇanā
6. Commentary on the Samādhi Sutta

70.Chaṭṭhena santenāti paccanīkakilesehi avūpasantena.Na paṇītenāti na atappakena.Na paṭippassaddhiladdhenāti kilesappaṭippassaddhiyā aladdhena appattena.Na ekodibhāvādhigatenāti na ekaggabhāvaṃ upagatena.

70.In the sixth, na santenā means not calmed by opposing defilements. Na paṇītenā means not excellent. Na paṭippassaddhiladdhenā means not attained, not reached, through the subsiding of defilements. Na ekodibhāvādhigatenā means not reached by way of one-pointedness.

7. Sakkhibhabbasuttavaṇṇanā
7. Commentary on the Sakkhibhabba Sutta

71.Sattametatra tatrāti tasmiṃ tasmiṃ visese.Sakkhibhabbatanti paccakkhabhāvaṃ.Āyataneti kāraṇe.Hānabhāgiyādayo visuddhimagge (visuddhi. 1.39) saṃvaṇṇitā.Asakkaccakārīti na sukatakārī, na ādarakārī.Asappāyakārīti na sappāyakārī, na upakārabhūtadhammakārī.

71.In the seventh, tatra tatrā means in this and that particular. Sakkhibhabbata means the state of being directly experienced. Āyatane means in the cause. Hānabhāgiyā and the rest have been described in the Visuddhimagga (visuddhi. 1.39). Asakkaccakārī means not doing carefully, not doing attentively. Asappāyakārī means not doing what is suitable, not doing the states that are helpful.

8. Balasuttavaṇṇanā
8. Commentary on the Bala Sutta

72.Aṭṭhamebalatanti balabhāvaṃ thāmabhāvaṃ.Asātaccakārīti na satatakārī. Sesaṃ heṭṭhā vuttanayameva.

72.In the eighth, balata means the state of strength, the state of power. Asātaccakārī means not doing continuously. The rest is the same as the method stated below.

9-10. Tajjhānasuttadvayavaṇṇanā
9-10. Commentary on the two Tajjhāna Suttas

73-74.Navamena yathābhūtaṃ sammappaññāya sudiṭṭho hotīti vatthukāmakilesakāmesu ādīnavo na yathāsabhāvato jhānapaññāya sudiṭṭho hoti. Dasamaṃ uttānatthamevāti.

73-74.In the ninth, na yathābhūtaṃ sammappaññāya sudiṭṭho hotī means the danger in sensual pleasures and defilement-pleasures is not well seen by jhāna-wisdom, according to reality. The tenth is straightforward in meaning.

8. Arahattavaggo

8. Arahattavagga

1. Dukkhasuttavaṇṇanā
1. Commentary on the Dukkha Sutta

75.Aṭṭhamassa paṭhamesavighātanti saupaghātaṃ sopaddavaṃ.Sapariḷāhanti kāyikacetasikena pariḷāhena sapariḷāhaṃ.Pāṭikaṅkhāti icchitabbā avassaṃbhāvinī.

75.In the eighth, in the first, savighāta means with affliction, with oppression. Sapariḷāha means with torment due to physical and mental torment. Pāṭikaṅkhā means to be wished for, inevitably.

2. Arahattasuttavaṇṇanā
2. Commentary on the Arahatta Sutta

76.Dutiyemānanti jātiādīhi maññanaṃ.Omānanti hīnohamasmīti mānaṃ.Atimānanti atikkamitvā pavattaṃ accuṇṇatimānaṃ.Adhimānanti adhigatamānaṃ.Thambhanti kodhamānehi thaddhabhāvaṃ.Atinipātanti hīnassa hīnohamasmīti mānaṃ.

76.In the second, māna means conceit due to birth, etc. Omāna means the conceit, "I am inferior." Atimāna means conceit that occurs excessively, surpassing. Adhimāna means conceit that is attained. Thambha means rigidity due to anger and conceit. Atinipāta means the conceit of an inferior, "I am inferior."

3. Uttarimanussadhammasuttavaṇṇanā
3. Commentary on the Uttarimanussadhamma Sutta

77.Tatiyeuttarimanussadhammāti manussadhammato uttari.Alamariyañāṇadassanavisesanti ariyabhāvaṃ kātuṃ samatthaṃ ñāṇadassanavisesaṃ, cattāro magge cattāri ca phalānīti attho.Kuhananti tividhaṃ kuhanavatthuṃ.Lapananti lābhatthikatāya ukkhipitvā avakkhipitvā vā lapanaṃ.

77.In the third, uttarimanussadhammā means higher than human states. Alamariyañāṇadassanavisesa means the special knowledge and vision capable of producing a noble state; the four paths and the four fruits are the meaning. Kuhana means the three kinds of deception. Lapana means praising or disparaging for the sake of gain.

4. Sukhasomanassasuttavaṇṇanā
4. Commentary on the Sukhasomanassa Sutta

78.Catuttheyoni cassa āraddhā hotīti kāraṇañcassa paripuṇṇaṃ paggahitaṃ hoti.Dhammārāmoti dhamme ratiṃ vindati. Bhāvanāya ramati, bhāvento vā ramatītibhāvanārāmo. Pahāne ramati, pajahanto vā ramatītipahānārāmo. Tividhe paviveke ramatītipavivekārāmo. Abyāpajjhe niddukkhabhāve ramatītiabyāpajjhārāmo. Nippapañcasaṅkhāte nibbāne ramatītinippapañcārāmo.

78.In the fourth, yoni cassa āraddhā hotī means the cause for him is fully established and energized. Dhammārāmo means he finds delight in the Dhamma. Bhāvanāya ramati, bhāvento vā ramatīti bhāvanārāmo means he delights in cultivation, or he delights while cultivating. Pahāne ramati, pajahanto vā ramatīti pahānārāmo means he delights in abandoning, or he delights while abandoning. Tividhe paviveke ramatīti pavivekārāmo means he delights in the three kinds of seclusion. Abyāpajjhe niddukkhabhāve ramatīti abyāpajjhārāmo means he delights in non-ill will, the state without suffering. Nippapañcasaṅkhāte nibbāne ramatīti nippapañcārāmo means he delights in nibbāna, which is called without proliferation.

5. Adhigamasuttavaṇṇanā
5. Commentary on the Adhigama Sutta

79.Pañcamena āyakusaloti na āgamanakusalo.Na apāyakusaloti na apagamanakusalo.Chandanti kattukamyatāchandaṃ.Na ārakkhatīti na rakkhati.

79.In the fifth, na āyakusalo means he is not skilled in coming. Na apāyakusalo means he is not skilled in going away. Chanda means the desire to do. Na ārakkhatī means he does not protect.

6. Mahantattasuttavaṇṇanā
6. Commentary on the Mahantatta Sutta

80.Chaṭṭheālokabahuloti ñāṇālokabahulo.Yogabahuloti yoge bahulaṃ karoti.Vedabahuloti pītipāmojjabahulo.Asantuṭṭhibahuloti kusaladhammesu asantuṭṭho.Anikkhittadhuroti aṭṭhapitadhuro paggahitavīriyo.Uttari ca patāretīti sampati ca uttariñca vīriyaṃ karoteva. Sattamaṃ uttānameva.

80. In the sixth, ālokabahulo means abundant in the light of knowledge. Yogabahulo means frequently engaging in yoga. Vedabahulo means abundant in joy and delight. Asantuṭṭhibahulo means not content with wholesome qualities. Anikkhittadhuro means having the burden not laid down, with effort exerted. Uttari ca patāretī means he makes effort both for what has been attained and for further attainments. The seventh is straightforward.

8-10. Dutiyanirayasuttādivaṇṇanā
8-10. Commentary on the Second Niraya Sutta, etc.

82-84.Aṭṭhamepagabbhoti kāyapāgabbhiyādīhi samannāgato. Navamaṃ uttānatthameva. Dasamevighātavāti mahicchataṃ nissāya uppannena lobhadukkhena dukkhito. Sesaṃ sabbattha uttānamevāti.

82-84. In the eighth, pagabbho means possessing bodily boldness, etc. The ninth is straightforward in meaning. In the tenth, vighātavā means tormented by the suffering born of intense desire. The rest is straightforward everywhere.

9. Sītivaggo

9. Sītivagga

1. Sītibhāvasuttavaṇṇanā
1. Sītibhāva Sutta Commentary

85.Navamassa paṭhamesītibhāvanti sītalabhāvaṃ.Yasmiṃ samaye cittaṃ niggaṇhitabbantiādīsu uddhaccasamaye cittaṃ samādhinā niggahetabbaṃ nāma, kosajjānupatitakāle vīriyena paggahetabbaṃ nāma, nirassādagatakāle samādhinā sampahaṃsitabbaṃ nāma, samappavattakāle bojjhaṅgupekkhāya ajjhupekkhitabbaṃ nāma.

85. In the first of the ninth, sītibhāvanti means coolness. Yasmiṃ samaye cittaṃ niggaṇhitabbanti, that is, when the mind is in a state of agitation, it should be restrained by concentration; when laziness has befallen, it should be roused by effort; when one has fallen into a state of discouragement, it should be cheered up by concentration; when it is properly flowing, it should be regarded with equanimity through the bojjhanga of equanimity.

2. Āvaraṇasuttavaṇṇanā
2. Āvaraṇa Sutta Commentary

86.Dutiyekammāvaraṇatāyāti pañcānantariyakammehi.Kilesāvaraṇatāyāti niyatamicchādiṭṭhiyā.Vipākāvaraṇatāyāti akusalavipākapaṭisandhiyā vā kusalavipākehi ahetukapaṭisandhiyā vāti.

86. In the second, kammāvaraṇatāyāti means by the five heinous offenses (pañcānantariyakammehi). Kilesāvaraṇatāyāti means by fixed wrong view (niyatamicchādiṭṭhiyā). Vipākāvaraṇatāyāti means by an unwholesome result rebirth, or by a causeless rebirth with wholesome results.

4-5. Sussūsatisuttādivaṇṇanā
4-5. Sussūsa Sutta Commentary, etc.

88-89.Catuttheanatthanti avaḍḍhiṃ.Atthaṃ riñcatīti vaḍḍhiatthaṃ chaḍḍeti.Ananulomikāyāti sāsanassa ananulomikāya. Pañcamediṭṭhisampadanti sotāpattimaggaṃ.

88-89. In the fourth, anatthanti means lack of growth. Atthaṃ riñcatīti means abandons the benefit of growth. Ananulomikāyāti means unconducive to the Teaching. In the fifth, diṭṭhisampadanti means the Sotāpatti path.

8-11. Abhabbaṭṭhānasuttacatukkavaṇṇanā
8-11. Abhabbaṭṭhāna Sutta Quartet Commentary

92-95.Aṭṭhameanāgamanīyaṃ vatthunti anupagantabbaṃ kāraṇaṃ, pañcannaṃ verānaṃ dvāsaṭṭhiyā ca diṭṭhigatānametaṃ adhivacanaṃ.Aṭṭhamaṃ bhavanti kāmāvacare aṭṭhamaṃ paṭisandhiṃ. Navamekotūhalamaṅgalenāti diṭṭhasutamutamaṅgalena. Dasamesayaṃkatantiādīni attadiṭṭhivasena vuttāni.Adhiccasamuppannanti ahetunibbattaṃ. Sesaṃ sabbattha uttānamevāti.

92-95. In the eighth, anāgamanīyaṃ vatthunti means an unapproachable cause, this is a designation for the five kinds of hatred and the sixty-two kinds of views. Aṭṭhamaṃ bhavanti means an eighth rebirth in the realm of desire. In the ninth, kotūhalamaṅgalenāti means by auspicious ceremonies that are seen, heard or thought. In the tenth, sayaṃkatanti, etc., are stated in terms of the view of self. Adhiccasamuppannanti means arisen without a cause. The rest is straightforward everywhere.

10. Ānisaṃsavaggo

10. Ānisaṃsa Vagga

1-2. Pātubhāvasuttādivaṇṇanā
1-2. Pātubhāva Sutta Commentary, etc.

96-97.Dasamassa paṭhameariyāyataneti majjhimadese.Indriyānanti manacchaṭṭhānaṃ. Dutiyesaddhammaniyatoti sāsanasaddhamme niyato.Asādhāraṇenāti puthujjanehi asādhāraṇena.

96-97. In the first of the tenth, ariyāyataneti means in the central region. Indriyānanti means the six senses including the mind. In the second, saddhammaniyatoti means fixed in the true Dhamma of the Teaching. Asādhāraṇenāti means not shared by ordinary people.

7. Anavatthitasuttavaṇṇanā
7. Anavatthita Sutta Commentary

102.Sattameanodhiṃ karitvāti ‘‘ettakāva saṅkhārā aniccā, na ito pare’’ti evaṃ sīmaṃ mariyādaṃ akatvā.Anavatthitāti avatthitāya rahitā, bhijjamānāva hutvā upaṭṭhahissantīti attho.Sabbaloketi sakale tedhātuke.Sāmaññenāti samaṇabhāvena, ariyamaggenāti attho.

102. In the seventh, anodhiṃ karitvāti means not making a boundary, thinking, "Only this many conditioned things are impermanent, not more than this." Anavatthitāti means without stability, meaning they will appear as constantly breaking up. Sabbaloketi means in the entire threefold world. Sāmaññenāti means by way of asceticism, that is, by the Noble Path.

8. Ukkhittāsikasuttavaṇṇanā
8. Ukkhittāsika Sutta Commentary

103.Aṭṭhamemettāvatāyāti mettāyuttāya pāricariyāya. Satta hi sekhā tathāgataṃ mettāvatāya paricaranti, khīṇāsavo pariciṇṇasatthuko.

103. In the eighth, mettāvatāyāti means with service endowed with loving-kindness. For seven trainees attend to the Tathāgata with service endowed with loving-kindness, but a khīṇāsava has an attendant ordained by himself.

9. Atammayasuttavaṇṇanā
9. Atammaya Sutta Commentary

104.Navameatammayoti tammayā vuccanti taṇhādiṭṭhiyo, tāhi rahito.Ahaṃkārāti ahaṃkāradiṭṭhi.Mamaṃkārāti mamaṃkārataṇhā. Sesaṃ sabbattha uttānamevāti.

104. In the ninth, atammayoti means tammaya refers to craving and views; he is without them. Ahaṃkārāti means the view of "I"-making. Mamaṃkārāti means the craving of "mine"-making. The rest is straightforward everywhere.

11. Tikavaggo

11. Tika Vagga

1. Rāgasuttavaṇṇanā
1. Rāga Sutta Commentary

107.Ekādasamassa paṭhameasubhāti asubhakammaṭṭhānaṃ.Mettāti mettākammaṭṭhānaṃ.Paññāti sahavipassanā maggapaññā.

107. In the first of the eleventh, asubhāti means the foulness meditation. Mettāti means the loving-kindness meditation. Paññāti means wisdom together with insight, the wisdom of the path.

6. Assādasuttavaṇṇanā
6. Assāda Sutta Commentary

112.Chaṭṭheassādadiṭṭhīti sassatadiṭṭhi.Attānudiṭṭhīti attānaṃ anugatā vīsativatthukā sakkāyadiṭṭhi.Micchādiṭṭhīti dvāsaṭṭhividhāpi diṭṭhi.Sammādiṭṭhīti maggasammādiṭṭhi, natthi dinnantiādikā vā micchādiṭṭhi, kammassakatañāṇaṃ sammādiṭṭhi.

112. In the sixth, assādadiṭṭhīti means the eternalist view. Attānudiṭṭhīti means the twenty-factored view of self that follows after the self. Micchādiṭṭhīti means all sixty-two kinds of views. Sammādiṭṭhīti means the right view of the path, or the wrong view that denies giving, etc.; knowledge of the ownership of action is right view.

7. Aratisuttavaṇṇanā
7. Arati Sutta Commentary

113.Sattameadhammacariyāti dasa akusalakammapathā.

113. In the seventh, adhammacariyāti means the ten unwholesome courses of action.

10. Uddhaccasuttavaṇṇanā
10. Uddhacca Sutta Commentary

116.Dasameasaṃvaroti anadhivāsakabhāvo. Sesaṃ sabbattha uttānamevāti.

116. In the tenth, asaṃvaroti means the state of non-endurance. The rest is straightforward everywhere.

12. Sāmaññavaggavaṇṇanā

12. Sāmañña Vagga Commentary

119-121.Ito paresutapussoti dvevācikupāsako.Tathāgate niṭṭhaṅgatoti buddhaguṇesu patiṭṭhitacitto pahīnakaṅkho. Amataṃ addasātiamataddaso. Ariyenāti niddosena lokuttarasīlena.Ñāṇenāti paccavekkhaṇañāṇena.Vimuttiyāti sekhaphalavimuttiyā.Tavakaṇṇikoti evaṃnāmako gahapati. Tapakaṇṇikotipi pāḷi.

119-121. In the following, tapussoti means the lay disciple Tapussa, a reciter. Tathāgate niṭṭhaṅgatoti means his mind established in the virtues of the Buddha, doubt abandoned. Amataṃ addasāti means one who has seen the deathless. Ariyenāti means with flawless, supramundane morality. Ñāṇenāti means with the knowledge of reviewing. Vimuttiyāti means with the liberation of a trainee's fruition. Tavakaṇṇikoti means a householder by that name. The reading Tapakaṇṇika is also found.

24. Rāgapeyyālavaṇṇanā

24. Rāga Peyyāla Commentary

140.Rāgassāti pañcakāmaguṇikarāgassa. Sesaṃ sabbattha uttānatthamevāti.

140. Rāgassāti means the lust for the five strands of sense desire. The rest is straightforward everywhere.

Manorathapūraṇiyā aṅguttaranikāya-aṭṭhakathāya

The Manorathapūraṇī, Commentary to the Anguttara Nikaya,

. Namo tassa bhagavato arahato sammāsambuddhassa.

. Homage to the Blessed One, the Worthy One, the Fully Enlightened One.

Aṅguttaranikāye

In the Anguttara Nikaya

Sattakanipāta-aṭṭhakathā

Commentary to the Sattaka Nipata

Paṇṇāsakaṃ

Paṇṇāsaka

1. Dhanavaggo

1. Dhana Vagga

1-5. Paṭhamapiyasuttādivaṇṇanā
1-5. First Piya Sutta Commentary, etc.

1-5.Sattakanipātassa paṭhameanavaññattikāmoti abhiññātabhāvakāmo. Tatiyeyoniso vicine dhammanti upāyena catusaccadhammaṃ vicināti.Paññāyatthaṃ vipassatīti sahavipassanāya maggapaññāya saccadhammaṃ vipassati.Pajjotassevāti dīpasseva.Vimokkho hoti cetasoti tassa imehi balehi samannāgatassa khīṇāsavassa dīpanibbānaṃ viya carimakacittassa vatthārammaṇehi vimokkho hoti, gataṭṭhānaṃ na paññāyati. Catutthesaddho hotītiādīni pañcakanipāte vaṇṇitāneva. Pañcamedhanānīti adāliddiyakaraṇaṭṭhena dhanāni.

1-5. In the first of the Sattaka Nipata, anavaññattikāmoti means desiring to be known. In the third, yoniso vicine dhammanti means he investigates the Dhamma of the Four Noble Truths by means of skillful ways. Paññāyatthaṃ vipassatīti means he sees the truth by means of wisdom together with insight, the wisdom of the path. Pajjotassevāti means like a lamp. Vimokkho hoti cetasoti means for that khīṇāsava endowed with these strengths, there is liberation of mind from objects like the extinguishing of a lamp, the place gone to is not known. In the fourth, saddho hotīti, etc., have been described in the Pañcaka Nipata. In the fifth, dhanānīti means wealth in the sense of preventing poverty.

7. Uggasuttavaṇṇanā
7. Ugga Sutta Commentary

7.Sattameuggo rājamahāmattoti pasenadikosalassa mahāamacco.Upasaṅkamīti bhuttapātarāso upasaṅkami.Aḍḍhoti nidhānagatena dhanena aḍḍho.Migārorohaṇeyyoti rohaṇaseṭṭhino nattāraṃ migāraseṭṭhiṃ sandhāyevamāha.Mahaddhanoti vaḷañjanadhanena mahaddhano.Mahābhogoti upabhogaparibhogabhaṇḍassa mahantatāya mahābhogo.Hiraññassāti suvaṇṇasseva. Suvaṇṇāmeva hissa koṭisaṅkhyaṃ ahosi.Rūpiyassāti sesassa taṭṭakasarakaattharaṇapāvuraṇādino paribhogaparikkhārassa pamāṇasaṅkhāne vādoyeva natthi.

7. In the seventh, uggo rājamahāmattoti means Ugga was a great minister of King Pasenadi of Kosala. Upasaṅkamīti means he approached after eating his morning meal. Aḍḍhoti means rich with wealth stored away. Migāro rohaṇeyyoti he spoke thus referring to Migāra the wealthy one, grandson of Rohaṇa the wealthy one. Mahaddhanoti means very wealthy with accumulated wealth. Mahābhogoti means having great enjoyment due to the abundance of goods for use and consumption. Hiraññassāti means of gold. For he had only hundreds of millions in gold. Rūpiyassāti means there is no discussion about estimating the amount of the remaining goods for consumption and use, such as carpets, blankets, and coverings.

8. Saṃyojanasuttavaṇṇanā
8. Saṃyojana Sutta Commentary

8.Aṭṭhameanunayasaṃyojananti kāmarāgasaṃyojanaṃ. Sabbāneva cetāni bandhanaṭṭhena saṃyojanānīti veditabbāni. Imasmiṃ sutte vaṭṭameva kathitaṃ. Sesaṃ sabbattha uttānatthamevāti.

8. In the eighth, anunayasaṃyojananti means the fetter of sensual desire. All these should be understood as fetters in the sense of binding. In this sutta, only the round of existence (vaṭṭa) is spoken of. The rest is straightforward everywhere.

2. Anusayavaggo

2. Anusaya Vagga

3. Kulasuttavaṇṇanā
3. Kula Sutta Commentary

13.Dutiyassa tatiyenālanti na yuttaṃ nānucchavikaṃ.Na manāpenāti na manamhi appanakena ākārena nisinnāsanato paccuṭṭhenti, anādarameva dassenti.Santamassa pariguhantīti vijjamānampi deyyadhammaṃ etassa niguhanti paṭicchādenti.Asakkaccaṃ denti no sakkaccanti lūkhaṃ vā hotu paṇītaṃ vā, asahatthā acittīkārena denti, no cittīkārena.

13. In the third of the second, nālanti means not fitting, not suitable. Na manāpenāti means they do not rise from their seats arranged in an agreeable manner in their mind, they show disrespect. Santamassa pariguhantīti means they hide and conceal from him even the alms they have. Asakkaccaṃ denti no sakkaccanti means whether it is coarse or refined, they give it disrespectfully, uncaringly, not respectfully.

4. Puggalasuttavaṇṇanā
4. Puggala Sutta Commentary

14.Catuttheubhatobhāgavimuttoti dvīhi bhāgehi vimutto, arūpasamāpattiyā rūpakāyato vimutto, maggena nāmakāyato. So catunnaṃ arūpasamāpattīnaṃ ekekato vuṭṭhāya saṅkhāre sammasitvā arahattaṃ pattānaṃ catunnaṃ, nirodhā vuṭṭhāya arahattaṃ pattaanāgāmino ca vasena pañcavidho hoti. Pāḷi panettha ‘‘katamo ca puggalo ubhatobhāgavimutto? Idhekacco puggalo aṭṭha vimokkhe kāyena phusitvā viharati, paññāya cassa disvā āsavā parikkhīṇā hontī’’ti (pu. pa. 208) evaṃ aṭṭhavimokkhalābhino vasena āgatā.

14. In the fourth, ubhatobhāgavimuttoti means liberated in both ways, liberated from the form body by the formless attainments, and from the name body by the path. He is fivefold in terms of four who attain arahantship after emerging from each of the four formless attainments, and the anāgāmi who attains arahantship after emerging from cessation. Here, the Pāḷi comes in terms of the attainment of the eight liberations (vimokkha): “And what sort of person is liberated in both ways? Here, a certain person attains the eight liberations with his body and dwells in them, and his taints are destroyed by seeing with wisdom" (pu. pa. 208).

paññāvimutto. So sukkhavipassako, catūhi jhānehi vuṭṭhāya arahattaṃ pattā cattāro cāti imesaṃ vasena pañcavidho hoti. Pāḷi panettha aṭṭhavimokkhapaṭikkhepavaseneva āgatā. Yathāha – ‘‘na heva kho aṭṭha vimokkhe kāyena phusitvā viharati, paññāya cassa disvā āsavā parikkhīṇā honti. Ayaṃ vuccati puggalo paññāvimutto’’ti.

paññāvimutto. He is a dry-insight practitioner (sukkhavipassako), and four who attain arahantship after emerging from the four jhānas, thus he is fivefold. Here, the Pāḷi comes only in terms of rejecting the eight liberations. As it was said, “He does not attain the eight liberations with his body and dwell in them, but his taints are destroyed by seeing with wisdom. This is called a person who is wisdom-liberated.”

kāyasakkhī. So jhānaphassaṃ paṭhamaṃ phusati, pacchā nirodhaṃ nibbānaṃ sacchikaroti. So sotāpattiphalaṭṭhaṃ ādiṃ katvā yāva arahattamaggaṭṭhā chabbidho hoti. Tenāha – ‘‘idhekacco puggalo aṭṭha vimokkhe kāyena phusitvā viharati, paññāya cassa disvā ekacce āsavā parikkhīṇā honti. Ayaṃ vuccati puggalo kāyasakkhī’’ti (pu. pa. 208).

kāyasakkhī. He first touches the jhāna contact, then realizes cessation and Nibbāna. He is sixfold, beginning with one established in the fruition of stream-entry up to one established in the path of arahantship. Therefore it was said, “Here, a certain person attains the eight liberations with his body and dwells in them, and some of his taints are destroyed by seeing with wisdom. This is called a person who is a body-witness (kāyasakkhī)” (pu. pa. 208).

diṭṭhippatto. Tatridaṃ saṅkhepalakkhaṇaṃ – dukkhā saṅkhārā, sukho nirodhoti ñātaṃ hoti diṭṭhaṃ viditaṃ sacchikataṃ phusitaṃ paññāyāti diṭṭhippatto. Vitthārato pana sopi kāyasakkhī viya chabbidho hoti. Tenevāha – ‘‘idhekacco puggalo ‘idaṃ dukkha’nti yathābhūtaṃ pajānāti…pe… ‘ayaṃ dukkhanirodhagāminī paṭipadā’ti yathābhūtaṃ pajānāti, tathāgatappaveditā cassa dhammā paññāya vodiṭṭhā honti vocaritā paññāya…pe… ayaṃ vuccati puggalo diṭṭhippatto’’ti.

diṭṭhippatto. Here, this is the concise characteristic: it is known, seen, understood, realized, touched with wisdom, that suffering is conditioned and Nibbāna is happiness; thus, he is one attained to view. In detail, however, he is also sixfold like the body-witness. Therefore it was said, “Here, a certain person understands as it really is, ‘This is suffering’…pe… ‘This is the path leading to the cessation of suffering,’ and the teachings proclaimed by the Tathāgata are seen with wisdom, discerned with wisdom…pe… this is called a person attained to view.”

saddhāvimutto. Sopi vuttanayeneva chabbidho hoti. Tenāha – ‘‘idhekacco puggalo ‘idaṃ dukkha’nti yathābhūtaṃ pajānāti…pe… ‘ayaṃ dukkhanirodhagāminī paṭipadā’ti yathābhūtaṃ pajānāti, tathāgatappaveditā cassa dhammā paññāya vodiṭṭhā honti vocaritā paññāya…pe… no ca kho yathādiṭṭhippattassa. Ayaṃ vuccati puggalo saddhāvimutto’’ti. Etassa hi saddhāvimuttassa pubbabhāgamaggakkhaṇe saddahantassa viya okappentassa viya adhimuccantassa viya ca kilesakkhayo hoti, diṭṭhippattassa pubbabhāgamaggakkhaṇe kilesacchedakañāṇaṃ adandhaṃ tikhiṇaṃ sūraṃ hutvā vahati. Tasmā yathā nāma nātitikhiṇena asinā kadaliṃ chindantassa chinnaṭṭhānaṃ maṭṭhaṃ na hoti, asi sīghaṃ na vahati, saddo suyyati, balavataro vāyāmo kātabbo hoti, evarūpā saddhāvimuttassa pubbabhāgamaggabhāvanā. Yathā pana sunisitena asinā kadaliṃ chindantassa chinnaṭṭhānaṃ maṭṭhaṃ hoti, asi sīghaṃ vahati, saddo na suyyati, balavavāyāmakiccaṃ na hoti, evarūpā paññāvimuttassa pubbabhāgamaggabhāvanā veditabbā.

saddhāvimutto. He is also sixfold in the manner stated above. Therefore it was said, “Here, a certain person understands as it really is, ‘This is suffering’…pe… ‘This is the path leading to the cessation of suffering,’ and the teachings proclaimed by the Tathāgata are seen with wisdom, discerned with wisdom…pe… but not as for the one attained to view. This is called a person liberated by faith.” For in the preliminary-stage path-moment of this person liberated by faith, there is destruction of the defilements as in one who is believing, as in one who is deciding, as in one who is resolving, but in the preliminary-stage path-moment of the one attained to view, the knowledge that cuts off the defilements is unhesitating, sharp, and heroic. Therefore, just as the place cut by one cutting a banana tree with a knife that is not very sharp is not smooth, the knife does not go quickly, a sound is heard, and a stronger effort must be made, so is the preliminary-stage path-development of the one liberated by faith. However, just as the place cut by one cutting a banana tree with a well-honed knife is smooth, the knife goes quickly, a sound is not heard, and there is no need for strong effort, so should the preliminary-stage path-development of one liberated by wisdom be understood.

dhammānusārī. Dhammoti paññā, paññāpubbaṅgamaṃ maggaṃ bhāvetīti attho.Saddhānusārimhipi eseva nayo. Ubhopete sotāpattimaggaṭṭhāyeva. Vuttampi cetaṃ – ‘‘yassa puggalassa sotāpattiphalasacchikiriyāya paṭipannassa paññindriyaṃ adhimattaṃ hoti, paññāvāhiṃ paññāpubbaṅgamaṃ ariyamaggaṃ bhāveti. Ayaṃ vuccati puggalo dhammānusārī. Yassa puggalassa sotāpattiphalasacchikiriyāya paṭipannassa saddhindriyaṃ adhimattaṃ hoti, saddhāvāhiṃ saddhāpubbaṅgamaṃ ariyamaggaṃ bhāveti. Ayaṃ vuccati puggalo saddhānusārī’’ti (pu. pa. 208). Ayamettha saṅkhepo, vitthārato panesā ubhatobhāgavimuttādikathā visuddhimagge (visuddhi. 2.771, 889) paññābhāvanādhikāre vuttā. Tasmā tattha vuttanayeneva veditabbāti.

dhammānusārī. Dhamma means wisdom; the meaning is that he develops the path with wisdom as its forerunner. The same method applies to saddhānusārimhi. Both of these are established in the stream-entry path. And this was said: “For whichever person established in realizing the fruition of stream-entry, the faculty of wisdom is excessive, he develops the Noble Path that goes by wisdom, with wisdom as its forerunner. This is called a person who is a follower of the Dhamma. For whichever person established in realizing the fruition of stream-entry, the faculty of faith is excessive, he develops the Noble Path that goes by faith, with faith as its forerunner. This is called a person who is a follower of faith” (pu. pa. 208). This is a summary here, but in detail, this talk of those liberated in both ways, etc., is spoken of in the Visuddhimagga (visuddhi. 2.771, 889) in the chapter on developing wisdom. Therefore, it should be understood in the manner stated there.

5. Udakūpamāsuttavaṇṇanā
5. Udakūpama Sutta Commentary

15.Pañcameudakūpamāti nimujjanādiākāraṃ gahetvā udakena upamitā.Sakiṃ nimuggoti ekavārameva nimuggo.Ekantakāḷakehīti niyatamicchādiṭṭhiṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ.Ummujjatīti uṭṭhahati.Sādhūti sobhanā bhaddakā.Hāyatiyevāti caṅkavāre āsittaudakaṃ viya parihāyateva.Ummujjitvā vipassati viloketīti uṭṭhahitvā gantabbadisaṃ vipassati viloketi.Pataratīti gantabbadisābhimukho tarati nāma.Paṭigādhappatto hotīti uṭṭhāya viloketvā pataritvā ekasmiṃ ṭhāne patiṭṭhāpatto nāma hoti, tiṭṭhati na punāgacchati.Tiṇṇopāraṅgato thale tiṭṭhatīti sabbakilesoghaṃ taritvā paratīraṃ gantvā nibbānathale patiṭṭhito nāma hoti. Imasmiṃ sutte vaṭṭavivaṭṭaṃ kathitaṃ.

15. In the fifth, udakūpamā means compared to water, taking the manner of immersion, etc. Sakiṃ nimuggo means immersed only once. Ekantakāḷakehī means spoken with reference to fixed wrong views, etc. Ummujjatī means rises up. Sādhū means good, excellent. Hāyatiyevā means it only declines, like water poured in a water clock. Ummujjitvā vipassati viloketī means having risen up, he discerns and observes the direction to be gone. Pataratī means he crosses over, facing the direction to be gone. Paṭigādhappatto hotī means having risen up, having observed and crossed over, he becomes established in one place, he stands and does not return. Tiṇṇo pāraṅgato thale tiṭṭhatī means having crossed over all the floods of defilements, having gone to the further shore, he is established on the ground of Nibbāna. In this sutta, the round and the turning away have been spoken of.

6. Aniccānupassīsuttavaṇṇanā
6. Aniccānupassīsuttavaṇṇanā

16.Chaṭṭhe aniccāti evaṃ paññāya pharanto anupassatītianiccānupassī. Aniccāti evaṃ saññā assātianiccasaññī. Aniccāti evaṃ ñāṇena paṭisaṃveditā assātianiccapaṭisaṃvedī. Satatanti sabbakālaṃ.Samitanti yathā purimacittena pacchimacittaṃ samitaṃ samupagataṃ ghaṭṭitaṃ hoti, evaṃ.Abbokiṇṇanti nirantaraṃ aññena cetasā asaṃmissaṃ.Cetasā adhimuccamānoti cittena sanniṭṭhāpayamāno.Paññāya pariyogāhamānoti vipassanāñāṇena anupavisamāno.

16. In the sixth, aniccānupassī means one who contemplates impermanence, pervading with wisdom thus. Aniccasaññī means one who has the perception of impermanence, thinking thus of impermanence. Aniccapaṭisaṃvedī means one who experiences impermanence with knowledge, realizing thus of impermanence. Satata means always. Samita means just as the subsequent thought is stilled, comes together, strikes the preceding thought. Abbokiṇṇa means uninterrupted, unmixed with another thought. Cetasā adhimuccamāno means deciding with the mind. Paññāya pariyogāhamāno means penetrating with the wisdom of insight.

Apubbaṃ acarimanti apure apacchā ekakkhaṇeyeva. Idha samasīsī kathito. So catubbidho hoti rogasamasīsī, vedanāsamasīsī, iriyāpathasamasīsī, jīvitasamasīsīti. Tattha yassa aññatarena rogena phuṭṭhassa sato rogavūpasamo ca āsavakkhayo ca ekappahāreneva hoti, ayaṃrogasamasīsīnāma. Yassa pana aññataraṃ vedanaṃ vedayato vedanāvūpasamo ca āsavakkhayo ca ekappahāreneva hoti, ayaṃvedanāsamasīsīnāma. Yassa pana ṭhānādīsu iriyāpathesu aññatarasamaṅgino vipassantassa iriyāpathassa pariyosānañca āsavakkhayo ca ekappahāreneva hoti, ayaṃiriyāpathasamasīsīnāma. Yassa pana upakkamato vā sarasato vā jīvitapariyādānañca āsavakkhayo ca ekappahāreneva hoti, ayaṃjīvitasamasīsīnāma. Ayamidha adhippeto. Tattha kiñcāpi āsavapariyādānaṃ maggacittena, jīvitapariyādānaṃ cuticittena hotīti ubhinnaṃ ekakkhaṇe sambhavo nāma natthi. Yasmā panassa āsavesu khīṇamattesu paccavekkhaṇavārānantarameva jīvitapariyādānaṃ gacchati, antaraṃ na paññāyati, tasmā evaṃ vuttaṃ.

Apubbaṃ acarima means not before, not after, in one moment only. Here, samasīsī is spoken of. That is fourfold: rogasamasīsī, vedanāsamasīsī, iriyāpathasamasīsī, jīvitasamasīsī. Therein, for one touched by a certain disease, the cessation of the disease and the destruction of the āsavas occur with a single effort; this is called rogasamasīsī. But for one experiencing a certain feeling, the cessation of the feeling and the destruction of the āsavas occur with a single effort; this is called vedanāsamasīsī. But for one contemplating one of the postures, such as standing, the end of the posture and the destruction of the āsavas occur with a single effort; this is called iriyāpathasamasīsī. But for one being attacked or poisoned, the end of life and the destruction of the āsavas occur with a single effort; this is called jīvitasamasīsī. This is what is intended here. Therein, although the end of the āsavas is with the path consciousness, and the end of life is with the dying consciousness, there is no possibility of both occurring in one moment. However, since for him, as soon as the āsavas are destroyed, the end of life occurs immediately after the moment of reviewing, there is no discernible interval, therefore it is said thus.

Antarāparinibbāyīti yo pañcasu suddhāvāsesu yattha katthaci uppanno nibbattakkhaṇe vā thokaṃ atikkamitvā vā vemajjhe ṭhatvā vā arahattaṃ pāpuṇāti, tassetaṃ nāmaṃ.Upahaccaparinibbāyīti yo tattheva āyuvemajjhaṃ atikkamitvā arahattaṃ pāpuṇāti.Asaṅkhāraparinibbāyīti yo tesaṃyeva puggalānaṃ asaṅkhāreneva appayogena kilese khepeti.Sasaṅkhāraparinibbāyīti yo sasaṅkhārena sappayogena kilese khepeti.Uddhaṃsoto akaniṭṭhagāmīti yo heṭṭhā catūsu suddhāvāsesu yattha katthaci nibbattitvā tato cuto anupubbena akaniṭṭhe uppajjitvā arahattaṃ pāpuṇāti.

Antarāparinibbāyī means one who, having arisen in any of the five Suddhāvāsas, attains Arahatship at the moment of arising, or having passed a little beyond, or while standing in the middle. This is his name. Upahaccaparinibbāyī means one who, having passed beyond the middle of life there, attains Arahatship. Asaṅkhāraparinibbāyī means one who, of those same persons, quickly destroys the defilements without effort. Sasaṅkhāraparinibbāyī means one who destroys the defilements with effort. Uddhaṃsoto akaniṭṭhagāmī means one who, having arisen in any of the four lower Suddhāvāsas, having passed away from there, arises successively in Akaniṭṭha and attains Arahatship.

7-9. Dukkhānupassīsuttādivaṇṇanā
7-9. Dukkhānupassīsuttādivaṇṇanā

17-19.Sattamedukkhānupassīti pīḷanākāraṃ dukkhato anupassanto. Aṭṭhameanattānupassīti avasavattanākāraṃ anattāti anupassanto. Navamesukhānupassīti sukhanti evaṃ ñāṇena anupassanto.

17-19. In the seventh, dukkhānupassī means one who contemplates suffering as the mode of oppression. In the eighth, anattānupassī means one who contemplates not-self as the mode of being without mastery. In the ninth, sukhānupassī means one who contemplates as happiness with knowledge thus.

10. Niddasavatthusuttavaṇṇanā
10. Niddasavatthusuttavaṇṇanā

20.Dasameniddasavatthūnīti niddasādivatthūni, ‘‘niddaso bhikkhu, nibbīso, nittiṃso, niccattālīso, nippaññāso’’ti evaṃ vacanakāraṇāni. Ayaṃ kira pañho titthiyasamaye uppanno. Titthiyā hi dasavassakāle mataṃ nigaṇṭhaṃ niddasoti vadanti. So kira puna dasavasso na hoti. Na kevalañca dasavasso, navavassopi ekavassopi na hoti. Eteneva nayena vīsativassādikālepi mataṃ nigaṇṭhaṃ ‘‘nibbīso nittiṃso niccattālīso nippaññāso’’ti vadanti. Āyasmā ānando gāme vicaranto taṃ kathaṃ sutvā vihāraṃ gantvā bhagavato ārocesi. Bhagavā āha – ‘‘na idaṃ, ānanda, titthiyānaṃ adhivacanaṃ, mama sāsane khīṇāsavassetaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Khīṇāsavo hi dasavassakāle parinibbuto puna dasavasso na hoti. Na kevalañca dasavassova, navavassopi…pe… ekavassopi. Na kevalañca ekavassova, ekādasamāsikopi…pe… ekamāsikopi ekamuhuttikopi na hotiyeva’’. Kasmā? Puna paṭisandhiyā abhāvā. Nibbīsādīsupi eseva nayo. Iti bhagavā ‘‘mama sāsane khīṇāsavassetaṃ adhivacana’’nti vatvā yehi kāraṇehi niddaso hoti, tāni dassetuṃ imaṃ desanaṃ ārabhi.

20. In the tenth, niddasavatthūnī means the grounds of niddasa, etc., the reasons for saying, "a bhikkhu is niddaso, nibbīso, nittiṃso, niccattālīso, nippaññāso." It seems that this question arose in the time of the Titthiyas. For the Titthiyas call a Nigaṇṭha who died at the age of ten, niddaso. It seems that he is not again ten years old. And not only ten years old, he is not nine years old or one year old. In the same way, they call a Nigaṇṭha who died at the age of twenty or more, "nibbīso, nittiṃso, niccattālīso, nippaññāso." Venerable Ānanda, while wandering in a village, having heard that talk, went to the monastery and announced it to the Blessed One. The Blessed One said, "This, Ānanda, is not a term of the Titthiyas, it is a term of a Khīṇāsava in my dispensation. For a Khīṇāsava who attained Nibbāna at the age of ten is not again ten years old. And not only ten years old, he is not nine years old…pe… one year old. And not only one year old, he is not eleven months old…pe… one month old, or even one moment old." Why? Because of the absence of rebirth. The same method applies to nibbīsa, etc. Thus, the Blessed One, having said, "This is a term of a Khīṇāsava in my dispensation," began this discourse to show the reasons why he is niddaso.

idhāti imasmiṃ sāsane.Sikkhāsamādāne tibbacchando hotīti sikkhāttayapūraṇe balavacchando hoti.Āyatiñca sikkhāsamādāne avigatapemoti anāgate punadivasādīsupi sikkhāpūraṇe avigatapemeneva samannāgato hoti.Dhammanisantiyāti dhammanisāmanāya. Vipassanāyetaṃ adhivacanaṃ.Icchāvinayeti taṇhāvinaye.Paṭisallāneti ekībhāve.Vīriyārambheti kāyikacetasikassa vīriyassa pūraṇe.Satinepakketi satiyañceva nipakabhāve.Diṭṭhipaṭivedheti maggadassane. Sesaṃ sabbattha uttānamevāti.

Idhā means in this dispensation. Sikkhāsamādāne tibbacchando hotī means he has strong desire in fulfilling the threefold training. Āyatiñca sikkhāsamādāne avigatapemo means he is endowed with unfading love in fulfilling the training again in the future, on subsequent days, etc. Dhammanisantiyā means for the satisfaction of Dhamma. This is a term for Vipassanā. Icchāvinaye means in the abandoning of craving. Paṭisallāne means in seclusion. Vīriyārambhe means in the fulfillment of physical and mental effort. Satinepakke means in mindfulness and cleverness. Diṭṭhipaṭivedhe means in the penetration of the path. The rest is straightforward everywhere.

3. Vajjisattakavaggo

3. Vajjisattakavaggo

1. Sārandadasuttavaṇṇanā
1. Sārandadasuttavaṇṇanā

21.Tatiyassa paṭhamesārandade cetiyeti evaṃnāmake vihāre. Anuppanne kira tathāgate tattha sārandadassa yakkhassa nivāsanaṭṭhānaṃ cetiyaṃ ahosi, athettha bhagavato vihāraṃ kāresuṃ. So sārandadacetiyaṃtveva saṅkhaṃ gato.Yāvakīvañcāti yattakaṃ kālaṃ.Abhiṇhaṃ sannipātāti divasassa tikkhattuṃ sannipatantāpi antarantarā sannipatantāpi abhiṇhaṃ sannipātāva.Sannipātabahulāti ‘‘hiyyopi purimadivasampi sannipatamha, puna ajja kimatthaṃ sannipatāmā’’ti vosānamanāpajjanena sannipātabahulā.Vuddhiyeva licchavī vajjīnaṃ pāṭikaṅkhā no parihānīti abhiṇhaṃ asannipatantā hi disāsu āgataṃ sāsanaṃ na suṇanti, tato ‘‘asukagāmasīmā vā nigamasīmā vā ākulā, asukaṭṭhāne corā pariyuṭṭhitā’’ti na jānanti. Corāpi ‘‘pamattā rājāno’’ti ñatvā gāmanigamādīni paharantā janapadaṃ nāsenti. Evaṃ rājūnaṃ parihāni hoti. Abhiṇhaṃ sannipatantā pana taṃ pavattiṃ suṇanti, tato balaṃ pesetvā amittamaddanaṃ karonti. Corāpi ‘‘appamattā rājāno, na sakkā amhehi vaggabandhanena vicaritu’’nti bhijjitvā palāyanti. Evaṃ rājūnaṃ vuddhi hoti. Tena vuttaṃ – ‘‘vuddhiyeva licchavī vajjīnaṃ pāṭikaṅkhā no parihānī’’ti.

21. In the first of the third, sārandade cetiye means in a monastery of that name. It seems that before the arising of the Tathāgata, there was a Cetiya, a dwelling place of the Yaksha Sārandada there; then the Blessed One had a monastery built there. That went by the name Sārandadacetiya. Yāvakīvañcā means for as long as. Abhiṇhaṃ sannipātā means frequent gatherings, even gathering three times a day, or gathering intermittently are frequent gatherings. Sannipātabahulā means frequent in gatherings, not reaching the end, thinking, "We gathered yesterday and the day before, why do we gather again today?" For those not gathering frequently do not hear the teaching that has come from the directions, then they do not know that "the border of such and such a village or town is disturbed, thieves have surrounded such and such a place." Thieves also, knowing that "the kings are negligent," striking villages and towns, destroy the country. Thus, there is decline for the kings. But those gathering frequently hear that news, then sending forces, they suppress the enemy. Thieves also, "the kings are vigilant, it is not possible for us to wander with a gang," breaking up, they flee. Thus, there is growth for the kings. Therefore, it was said – "growth is to be expected for the Licchavis, the Vajjis, not decline."

Samaggātiādīsu sannipātabheriyā niggatāya ‘‘ajja me kiccaṃ atthi maṅgalaṃ atthī’’ti vikkhepaṃ karontā na samaggā sannipatanti nāma. Bherisaddaṃ pana sutvāva bhuñjamānāpi alaṅkurumānāpi vatthāni nivāsayamānāpi addhabhuttā addhālaṅkatā vatthaṃ nivāsentāva sannipatantāsamaggā sannipatantināma. Sannipatitā pana cintetvā mantetvā kattabbaṃ katvā ekatova avuṭṭhahantā na samaggā vuṭṭhahanti nāma. Evaṃ vuṭṭhitesu hi ye paṭhamaṃ gacchanti, tesaṃ evaṃ hoti – ‘‘amhehi bāhirakathāva sutā, idāni vinicchayakathā bhavissatī’’ti. Ekato vuṭṭhahantā panasamaggā vuṭṭhahantināma. Apica ‘‘asukaṭṭhāne gāmasīmā vā nigamasīmā vā ākulā, corā vā pariyuṭṭhitā’’ti sutvā ‘‘ko gantvā amittamaddanaṃ karissatī’’ti vutte ‘‘ahaṃ paṭhamaṃ ahaṃ paṭhama’’nti vatvā gacchantāpi samaggā vuṭṭhahanti nāma. Ekassa pana kammante osīdamāne sesā puttabhātaro pesetvā tassa kammantaṃ upatthambhayamānāpi āgantukarājānaṃ ‘‘asukassa gehaṃ gacchatu, asukassa gehaṃ gacchatū’’ti avatvā sabbe ekato saṅgaṇhantāpi ekassa maṅgale vā roge vā aññasmiṃ vā pana tādise sukhadukkhe uppanne sabbe tattha sahāyabhāvaṃ gacchantāpisamaggā vajjikaraṇīyāni karontināma.

In samaggā etc., when the assembly drum has gone out, those who are distracted, thinking, "today I have business, I have a festival," do not gather in concord. But those who, having heard the sound of the drum, even while eating, even while adorning themselves, even while putting on clothes, having eaten halfway, adorned halfway, putting on the cloth, gather, are said to gather in concord. But those who, having gathered, having thought and deliberated and done what is to be done, do not rise up together, do not rise up in concord. For when they have risen up thus, it occurs to those who go first – "we have only heard external talk, now there will be talk of decision." But those rising up together are said to rise up in concord. Moreover, having heard that "the border of such and such a village or town is disturbed, or thieves have surrounded," when it is said, "who will go and suppress the enemy?", even those who go saying, "I first, I first," are said to rise up in concord. But when the work of one is failing, even those who send the remaining sons and brothers and support his work, even those who do not say to an visiting king, "go to the house of so-and-so, go to the house of so-and-so," but all gather together in one place, even all those who go to be companions there when happiness or suffering or something similar arises in the festival or illness of one, are said to perform the Vajjian duties in concord.

Appaññattantiādīsu pubbe akataṃ suṅkaṃ vā baliṃ vā daṇḍaṃ vā āharāpentāappaññattaṃ paññāpentināma. Porāṇapaveṇiyā āgatameva pana anāharāpentāpaññattaṃ samucchindantināma. Coroti gahetvā dassite avicinitvā chejjabhejjaṃ anusāsantā porāṇaṃ vajjidhammaṃ samādāya na vattanti nāma. Tesaṃ apaññattaṃ paññāpentānaṃ abhinavasuṅkādipīḷitā manussā ‘‘atiupaddutamha, ke imesaṃ vijite vasissantī’’ti paccantaṃ pavisitvā corā vā corasahāyā vā hutvā janapadaṃ hananti. Paññattaṃ samucchindantānaṃ paveṇiāgatāni suṅkādīni agaṇhantānaṃ koso parihāyati, tato hatthiassabalakāyaorodhādayo yathānibaddhaṃ vaṭṭaṃ alabhamānā thāmabalena parihāyanti. Te neva yuddhakkhamā honti na pāricariyakkhamā. Porāṇaṃ vajjidhammaṃ samādāya avattantānaṃ vijite manussā ‘‘amhākaṃ puttaṃ pitaraṃ bhātaraṃ acoraṃyeva coroti katvā chindiṃsu bhindiṃsū’’ti kujjhitvā paccantaṃ pavisitvā corā vā corasahāyā vā hutvā janapadaṃ hananti. Evaṃ rājūnaṃ parihāni hoti. Apaññattaṃ na paññāpentānaṃ pana ‘‘paveṇiāgataṃyeva rājāno karontī’’ti manussā haṭṭhatuṭṭhā kasivāṇijjādike kammante sampādenti. Paññattaṃ asamucchindantānaṃ paveṇiāgatāni suṅkādīni gaṇhantānaṃ koso vaḍḍhati, tato hatthiassabalakāyaorodhādayo yathānibaddhaṃ vaṭṭaṃ labhamānā thāmabalasampannā yuddhakkhamā ceva pāricariyakkhamā ca honti. Porāṇe vajjidhamme samādāya vattantānaṃ manussā na ujjhāyanti. ‘‘Rājāno porāṇapaveṇiyā karonti, aṭṭakulikasenāpatiuparājūhi parikkhitaṃ sayampi parikkhipitvā paveṇipotthakaṃ vācāpetvā anucchavikameva daṇḍaṃ pavattayanti, etesaṃ doso natthi, amhākaṃyeva doso’’ti appamattā kammante karonti. Evaṃ rājūnaṃ vuddhi hoti.

In appaññatta etc., those who impose a tax or tribute or punishment that was not done before are said to institute what has not been instituted. But those who do not impose what has come by ancient tradition are said to abolish what has been instituted. Those who, having seized and shown thieves, instructing with cutting and piercing without investigation, are said to not proceed in accordance with the ancient Vajjian law. The men, oppressed by new taxes, etc., of those who institute what has not been instituted, thinking, "we are excessively oppressed, who will live in their territory?", entering the border, becoming thieves or companions of thieves, strike the country. For those who abolish what has been instituted, the treasury declines by not taking the taxes, etc., that have come by tradition, then elephants, horses, the main body of troops, the women of the court, etc., not receiving their due allowances, decline in strength and power. They are neither capable of fighting nor capable of service. The men of the territory, angry that "they cut and pierced our son, father, brother, calling them thieves even though they were not thieves," of those who do not proceed in accordance with the ancient Vajjian law, entering the border, becoming thieves or companions of thieves, strike the country. Thus, there is decline for the kings. But for those who do not institute what has not been instituted, the men, happy and pleased that "the kings do only what has come by tradition," accomplish their work of agriculture and trade, etc. For those who do not abolish what has been instituted, the treasury increases by taking the taxes, etc., that have come by tradition, then elephants, horses, the main body of troops, the women of the court, etc., receiving their due allowances, are capable of fighting and capable of service, being endowed with strength and power. The men do not complain of those who proceed in accordance with the ancient Vajjian law. "The kings do according to ancient tradition, surrounded by the council of eight, the commander, the viceroy, having themselves surrounded and having the traditional book read out, they inflict a fitting punishment, there is no fault of these, the fault is only ours," being vigilant, they do their work. Thus, there is growth for the kings.

Sakkarissantīti yaṃkiñci tesaṃ sakkāraṃ karontā sundarameva karissanti.Garuṃ karissantīti garubhāvaṃ paccupaṭṭhapetvā karissanti.Mānessantīti manena piyāyissanti.Pūjessantīti paccayapūjāya pūjessanti.Sotabbaṃ maññissantīti divasassa dve tayo vāre upaṭṭhānaṃ gantvā tesaṃ kathaṃ sotabbaṃ saddhātabbaṃ maññissanti. Tattha ye evaṃ mahallakānaṃ rājūnaṃ sakkārādīni na karonti, ovādatthāya vā nesaṃ upaṭṭhānaṃ na gacchanti, te tehi vissaṭṭhā anovadiyamānā kīḷāpasutā rajjato parihāyanti. Ye pana tathā paṭipajjanti, tesaṃ mahallakarājāno ‘‘idaṃ kātabbaṃ idaṃ na kātabba’’nti porāṇapaveṇiṃ ācikkhanti. Saṅgāmaṃ patvāpi ‘‘evaṃ pavisitabbaṃ, evaṃ nikkhamitabba’’nti upāyaṃ dassenti. Te tehi ovadiyamānā yathāovādaṃ paṭipajjamānā sakkonti rajjapaveṇiṃ sandhāretuṃ. Tena vuttaṃ – ‘‘vuddhiyeva licchavī vajjīnaṃ pāṭikaṅkhā’’ti.

Sakkarissantī means whatever honor they do for them, they will do it beautifully. Garuṃ karissantī means they will do it establishing a sense of respect. Mānessantī means they will endear with honor. Pūjessantī means they will honor with offerings of requisites. Sotabbaṃ maññissantī means going to their presence two or three times a day, they will regard their talk as worth listening to, worth believing. Therein, those who do not do honor, etc., to the old kings in this way, or do not go to their presence for advice, being abandoned by them, not being advised, addicted to play, decline from their kingdom. But for those who act thus, the old kings declare the ancient tradition, saying, "this should be done, this should not be done." Even having reached battle, they show the strategy, saying, "one should enter thus, one should exit thus." Being advised by them, acting according to the advice, they are able to maintain the royal tradition. Therefore, it was said – "growth is to be expected for the Licchavis, the Vajjis."

Kulitthiyoti kulagharaṇiyo.Kulakumāriyoti anividdhā tāsaṃ dhītaro.Okassāti vāpasayhāti vā pasayhākārassevetaṃ nāmaṃ. Okāsātipi paṭhanti. Tatthaokassāti avakasitvā ākaḍḍhitvā.Pasayhāti abhibhavitvā ajjhottharitvāti ayaṃ vacanattho. Evañhi karontānaṃ vijite manussā ‘‘amhākaṃ gehe puttabhātaropi, kheḷasiṅghānikādīni mukhena apanetvā saṃvaḍḍhitā dhītaropi ime balakkārena gahetvā attano ghare vāsentī’’ti kupitā paccantaṃ pavisitvā corā vā corasahāyā vā hutvā janapadaṃ hananti. Evaṃ akarontānaṃ pana vijite manussā appossukkā sakāni kammāni karontā rājakosaṃ vaḍḍhenti. Evamettha vuddhihāniyo veditabbā.

Kulitthiyo means women of good families. Kulakumāriyo means unmarried daughters of those. Okassāpasayhā vā is only a name for the act of violence. They also read okāsātipi. Therein, okassā means having made an opportunity, having dragged away. Pasayhā means having overpowered, having violated; this is the meaning of the words. For to the men of the territory of those doing thus, "these take away by force and settle in their own homes even our sons and brothers in our houses, even our daughters who have been raised, removing the saliva and mucus from their faces with their mouths," angered, entering the border, becoming thieves or companions of thieves, strike the country. But for those not doing thus, the men of the territory, without anxiety, doing their own work, increase the royal treasury. Thus, growth and decline should be understood here.

Vajjīnaṃvajjicetiyānīti vajjirājūnaṃ vajjiraṭṭhe cittīkataṭṭhena cetiyānīti laddhanāmāni yakkhaṭṭhānāni.Abbhantarānīti antonagare ṭhitāni.Bāhirānīti bahinagare ṭhitāni.Dinnapubbaṃ katapubbanti pubbe dinnañca katañca.No parihāpessantīti ahāpetvā yathāpavattameva karissanti. Dhammikaṃ baliṃ parihāpentānañhi devatā ārakkhaṃ susaṃvihitaṃ na karonti, anuppannaṃ dukkhaṃ uppādetuṃ asakkontiyopi uppannaṃ kāsasīsarogādiṃ vaḍḍhenti, saṅgāme patte sahāyā na honti. Aparihāpentānaṃ pana ārakkhaṃ susaṃvihitaṃ karonti, anuppannaṃ sukhaṃ uppādetuṃ asakkontiyopi uppannaṃ kāsasīsarogādiṃ haranti, saṅgāmasīse sahāyā hontīti. Evamettha vuddhihāniyo veditabbā.

Vajjīnaṃ vajjicetiyānīti: "Vajjīnaṃ vajjicetiyānī" means the yaksha shrines named after being shrines created in the Vajjī state by the Vajjī kings.Abbhantarānīti: "Abbhantarānī" means those located inside the city.Bāhirānīti: "Bāhirānī" means those located outside the city.Dinnapubbaṃ katapubbaṃ: "Dinnapubbaṃ katapubbaṃ" means what was given and done previously.No parihāpessantīti: "No parihāpessantīti" means they will not diminish them, but will maintain them as they have been. For when deities see that a lawful offering is diminished, they do not provide well-arranged protection; even if they cannot create suffering that has not yet arisen, they exacerbate what has arisen, such as coughs and headaches; and they are not allies in battle. But for those who do not diminish the offerings, they provide well-arranged protection; even if they cannot create happiness that has not yet arisen, they remove what has arisen, such as coughs and headaches; and they are allies on the battlefield. Thus, increase and decrease should be understood in this matter.

Dhammikā rakkhāvaraṇaguttīti ettha rakkhā eva yathā anicchitaṃ nāgacchati, evaṃ āvaraṇato āvaraṇaṃ. Yathā icchitaṃ na nassati, evaṃ gopāyanato gutti. Tattha balakāyena parivāretvā rakkhanaṃ pabbajitānaṃ dhammikā rakkhāvaraṇagutti nāma na hoti. Yathā pana vihārassa upavane rukkhe na chindanti, vājikā vājaṃ na karonti, pokkharaṇīsu macche na gaṇhanti, evaṃ karaṇaṃ dhammikā rakkhāvaraṇagutti nāma.Kintīti kena nu kho kāraṇena.

Dhammikā rakkhāvaraṇaguttīti: Here, "rakkhā" (protection) is protection such that the unwanted does not come, and "āvaraṇato āvaraṇaṃ" (from barrier to barrier) acts as a shield. "Gutti" (guarding) is guarding such that the wanted does not perish. Protecting by surrounding with an armed force is not called lawful protection and guarding for renunciants. But when, for example, trees in the monastery's grove are not cut down, racing is not done with chariots, and fish are not caught in the ponds, this kind of action is called lawful protection and guarding.Kintīti: "Kintīti" means what could be the reason?

Tattha ye anāgatānaṃ arahantānaṃ āgamanaṃ na icchanti, te assaddhā honti appasannā. Pabbajite sampatte paccuggamanaṃ na karonti, gantvā na passanti, paṭisanthāraṃ na karonti, pañhaṃ na pucchanti, dhammaṃ na suṇanti, dānaṃ na denti, anumodanaṃ na suṇanti, nivāsanaṭṭhānaṃ na saṃvidahanti. Atha nesaṃ avaṇṇo uggacchati ‘‘asuko nāma rājā assaddho appasanno, pabbajite sampatte paccuggamanaṃ na karoti…pe… nivāsanaṭṭhānaṃ na saṃvidahatī’’ti. Taṃ sutvā pabbajitā tassa nagaradvārena gacchantāpi nagaraṃ na pavisanti. Evaṃ anāgatānaṃ arahantānaṃ anāgamanameva hoti. Āgatānaṃ pana phāsuvihāre asati yepi ajānitvā āgatā, te ‘‘vasissāmāti tāva cintetvā āgatamhā, imesaṃ pana rājūnaṃ iminā nīhārena ke vasissantī’’ti nikkhamitvā gacchanti. Evaṃ anāgatesu anāgacchantesu āgatesu dukkhaṃ viharantesu so doso pabbajitānaṃ anāvāso hoti. Tato devatārakkhā na hoti, devatārakkhāya asati amanussā okāsaṃ labhanti, amanussā ussannā anuppannaṃ byādhiṃ uppādenti. Sīlavantānaṃ dassanapañhapucchanādivatthukassa puññassa anāgamo hoti. Vipariyāyena yathāvuttakaṇhapakkhaviparītassa sukkapakkhassa sambhavo hotīti evamettha vuddhihāniyo veditabbā.

Those who do not desire the arrival of future arahants are faithless and unappeased. They do not rise to greet renunciants who have arrived, do not go to see them, do not offer hospitality, do not ask questions, do not listen to the Dhamma, do not give alms, do not listen to words of appreciation, and do not arrange lodging. Then a bad reputation arises for them: "So-and-so, the king, is faithless and unappeased, he does not rise to greet renunciants who have arrived… he does not arrange lodging." Having heard that, renunciants do not even enter the city when passing by its gates. Thus, there is non-arrival of future arahants. But when there is no comfortable dwelling for those who have arrived, even those who came unknowingly think, "We came thinking we would stay, but who would stay with these kings and their behavior?" and they depart. Thus, when future arahants do not come and those who have come live uncomfortably, that fault makes the renunciants unwelcoming. Then there is no divine protection, and when there is no divine protection, non-humans gain an opportunity, and when non-humans are rampant, they create diseases that have not yet arisen. The merit from seeing virtuous ones, asking questions, and so forth, does not arise. Conversely, the arising of the bright side is the opposite of what was said about the dark side. Thus, increase and decrease should be understood in this matter.

2. Vassakārasuttavaṇṇanā
2. Vassakārasuttavaṇṇanā

22.Dutiyeabhiyātukāmoti abhibhavanatthāya yātukāmo.Vajjīti vajjirājāno.Evaṃmahiddhiketi evaṃ mahatiyā rājiddhiyā samannāgate. Etena nesaṃ samaggabhāvaṃ katheti.Evaṃmahānubhāveti evaṃ mahantena rājānubhāvena samannāgate. Etena nesaṃ hatthisippādīsu katasikkhataṃ katheti, yaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ – ‘‘sikkhitā vatime licchavikumārakā, susikkhitā vatime licchavikumārakā, yatra hi nāma sukhumena tāḷacchiggaḷena asanaṃ atipātayissanti poṅkhānupoṅkhaṃ avirādhita’’nti (saṃ. ni. 5.1115).Ucchecchāmīti ucchindissāmi.Vināsessāmīti adassanaṃ nayissāmi.Anayabyasananti avaḍḍhiñceva, ñātibyasanañca.Āpādessāmīti pāpayissāmi.

22.In the second [sutta], abhiyātukāmo means desiring to march for the sake of overpowering.Vajjī means the Vajjī kings.Evaṃmahiddhiketi means endowed with such great royal power. By this, he declares their state of being in harmony.Evaṃmahānubhāveti means endowed with such great royal authority. By this, he declares their proficiency in elephantry and other skills, referring to what was said: "These Licchavi youths are indeed well-trained, these Licchavi youths are indeed very well-trained, such that they will precisely shoot arrows through a fine keyhole, point after point, without missing" (Saṃ. Ni. 5.1115).Ucchecchāmīti means I will cut off.Vināsessāmīti means I will lead to disappearance.Anayabyasanaṃ means both decline and the calamity of relatives.Āpādessāmīti means I will bring about.

Iti kira so ṭhānanisajjādīsu imaṃ yuddhakathameva katheti, ‘‘gamanasajjā hothā’’ti ca balakāyaṃ āṇāpeti. Kasmā? Gaṅgāya kira ekaṃ paṭṭanagāmaṃ nissāya addhayojanaṃ ajātasattuno vijitaṃ, addhayojanaṃ licchavīnaṃ. Tatra pabbatapādato mahagghabhaṇḍaṃ otarati. Taṃ sutvā ‘‘ajja yāmi, sve yāmī’’ti ajātasattuno saṃvidahantasseva licchavino samaggā sammodamānā puretaraṃ āgantvā sabbaṃ gaṇhanti. Ajātasattu pacchā āgantvā taṃ pavattiṃ ñatvā kujjhitvā gacchati. Te punasaṃvaccharepi tatheva karonti. Atha so balavāghātajāto, tadā evamakāsi.

It is said that he only spoke about this war in places for sitting and so forth, and he ordered the armed forces, "Be ready to march!" Why? It is said that, relying on a port village on the Ganges, half a yojana was conquered by Ajātasattu and half a yojana by the Licchavis. There, valuable goods descend from the foot of the mountain. Having heard of that, while Ajātasattu was making arrangements, thinking, "I will go today, I will go tomorrow," the Licchavis, united and rejoicing, would come beforehand and take everything. Ajātasattu would come later, and upon learning of that event, he would become angry and leave. They did the same thing again the following year. Then he, born of great frustration, did this.

atha kho rājā…pe… āpādessāmi vajjīti.

atha kho rājā…pe… āpādessāmi vajjīti.

Bhagavantaṃ bījayamānoti thero vattasīse ṭhatvā bhagavantaṃ bījati, bhagavato pana sītaṃ vā uṇhaṃ vā natthi. Bhagavā brāhmaṇassa vacanaṃ sutvā tena saddhiṃ amantetvā therena saddhiṃ mantetukāmokinti te, ānanda, sutantiādimāha. Taṃ vuttatthameva.

Bhagavantaṃ bījayamānoti: "Bhagavantaṃ bījayamāno" means the Elder, standing at the head of his duties, was fanning the Blessed One, but the Blessed One had neither cold nor heat. The Blessed One, having heard the words of the Brahmin, and wishing to consult with the Elder instead of conferring with him, said, kinti te, ānanda, sutanti, and so on. That has the same meaning as previously stated.

Ekamidāhanti idaṃ bhagavā pubbe vajjīnaṃ imassa vajjisattakassa desitabhāvappakāsanatthaṃ āha.Akaraṇīyāti akattabbā, aggahetabbāti attho.Yadidanti nipātamattaṃ.Yuddhassāti karaṇatthe sāmivacanaṃ, abhimukhaṃ yuddhena gahetuṃ na sakkāti attho.Aññatra upalāpanāyāti ṭhapetvā upalāpanaṃ. Upalāpanā nāma ‘‘alaṃ vivādena, idāni samaggā homā’’ti hatthiassarathahiraññasuvaṇṇādīni pesetvā saṅgahakaraṇaṃ, evañhi saṅgahaṃ katvā kevalaṃ vissāsena sakkā gaṇhitunti attho.Aññatra mithubhedāti ṭhapetvā mithubhedaṃ. Iminā ‘‘aññamaññabhedaṃ katvāpi sakkā ete gahetu’’nti dasseti. Idaṃ brāhmaṇo bhagavato kathāya nayaṃ labhitvā āha. Kiṃ pana bhagavā brāhmaṇassa imāya kathāya nayalābhaṃ jānātīti? Āma jānāti. Jānanto kasmā kathesi? Anukampāya. Evaṃ kirassa ahosi – ‘‘mayā akathitepi katipāhena gantvā sabbe gaṇhissati, kathite pana samagge bhindanto tīhi saṃvaccharehi gaṇhissati. Ettakampi jīvitameva varaṃ. Ettakañhi jīvantā attano patiṭṭhābhūtaṃ puññaṃ karissantī’’ti.Abhinanditvāti cittena nanditvā.Anumoditvāti ‘‘yāva subhāsitamidaṃ bhotā gotamenā’’ti vācāya anumoditvā.Pakkāmīti rañño santikaṃ gato. Rājāpi tameva pesetvā sabbe bhinditvā gantvā anayabyasanaṃ pāpesi.

Ekamidāhanti: "Ekamidāha" means the Blessed One said this formerly to the Vajjīs to reveal that these seven conditions of the Vajjīs had been taught before.Akaraṇīyāti: "Akaraṇīyā" means not to be done, not to be taken.Yadidanti: "Yadidaṃ" is merely an expletive.Yuddhassāti: "Yuddhassa" is a genitive case in the sense of instrumentality, meaning it is not possible to take [them] by facing [them] in battle.Aññatra upalāpanāyāti: "Aññatra upalāpanāya" means except for cajolery. Upalāpana (cajolery) means making a conciliatory gesture by sending elephants, horses, chariots, gold, silver, etc., saying, "Enough of disputes, let us now be harmonious," for it is possible to take them only by gaining their trust through such a conciliatory approach.Aññatra mithubhedāti: "Aññatra mithubhedā" means except by creating division. By this, he shows that "it is possible to take them even by creating division among each other." The Brahmin spoke this having gained insight from the Blessed One's words. But does the Blessed One know that the Brahmin is gaining insight from these words? Yes, he knows. Knowing, why did he speak? Out of compassion. For it occurred to him, "Even if I do not speak, he will go and take all of them in a few days. But if I speak, while dividing those in harmony, he will take them in three years. Even this much life is better, for while living this long, they will perform merit as a foundation for themselves."Abhinanditvāti: "Abhinanditvā" means having rejoiced in his mind.Anumoditvāti: "Anumoditvā" means having approved with his words, "How well said this is by Master Gotama!"Pakkāmīti: "Pakkāmī" means he went to the king's presence. The king also, having sent him, divided everyone and went and brought about decline and calamity.

3. Paṭhamasattakasuttavaṇṇanā
3. Paṭhamasattakasuttavaṇṇanā

23.Tatiyeabhiṇhaṃ sannipātāti idaṃ vajjisattake vuttasadisameva. Idhāpi ca abhiṇhaṃ asannipatantā disāsu āgatasāsanaṃ na suṇanti, tato ‘‘asukavihārasīmā ākulā, uposathappavāraṇā ṭhitā, asukasmiṃ ṭhāne bhikkhū vejjakammadūtakammādīni karonti, viññattibahulā phalapupphadānādīhi jīvikaṃ kappentī’’tiādīni na jānanti. Pāpabhikkhūpi ‘‘pamatto saṅgho’’ti ñatvā rāsibhūtā sāsanaṃ osakkāpenti. Abhiṇhaṃ sannipatantā pana taṃ pavattiṃ suṇanti, tato bhikkhusaṅghaṃ pesetvā sīmaṃ ujuṃ kārenti, uposathappavāraṇāyo pavattāpenti, micchājīvānaṃ ussannaṭṭhāne ariyavaṃsike pesetvā ariyavaṃsaṃ kathāpenti, pāpabhikkhūnaṃ vinayadharehi niggahaṃ kārāpenti. Pāpabhikkhūpi ‘‘appamatto saṅgho, na sakkā amhehi vaggabandhanena vicaritu’’nti bhijjitvā palāyanti. Evamettha vuddhihāniyo veditabbā.

23.In the third [sutta], abhiṇhaṃ sannipātāti: "abhiṇhaṃ sannipātā" is similar to what was said in the Vajjī Sutta. And here also, those who do not frequently assemble do not hear the teaching that has come from various directions. Consequently, they do not know about such things as "the boundary of such-and-such monastery is confused, the uposatha and pavāraṇā ceremonies are neglected, monks in such-and-such place are engaging in medical work, errand running, and so on, they are making many requests, and they are making a living through offerings of fruit, flowers, and so on." Wicked monks also, knowing that "the Sangha is heedless," become numerous and cause the teaching to decline. But those who frequently assemble hear about that situation. Consequently, having sent a monastic community, they straighten out the boundary, establish the uposatha and pavāraṇā ceremonies, send those who uphold the Noble Lineage to places where wrong livelihood is rampant, and cause them to speak about the Noble Lineage. Wicked monks also, thinking, "The Sangha is heedful, it is not possible for us to wander in a faction," break apart and flee. Thus, increase and decrease should be understood in this matter.

Samaggātiādīsu cetiyapaṭijagganatthaṃ vā bodhigharauposathāgāracchādanatthaṃ vā katikavattaṃ vā ṭhapetukāmatāya ‘‘saṅgho sannipatatū’’ti bheriyā vā ghaṇṭiyā vā ākoṭitamattāya ‘‘mayhaṃ cīvarakammaṃ atthi, mayhaṃ patto pacitabbo, mayhaṃ navakammaṃ atthī’’ti vikkhepaṃ karontā na samaggā sannipatanti nāma. Sabbaṃ pana taṃ kammaṃ ṭhapetvā ‘‘ahaṃ purimataraṃ, ahaṃ purimatara’’nti ekappahāreneva sannipatantā samaggā sannipatanti nāma. Sannipatitā pana cintetvā mantetvā kattabbaṃ katvā ekatova avuṭṭhahantā na samaggā vuṭṭhahanti nāma. Evaṃ vuṭṭhitesu hi ye paṭhamaṃ gacchanti, tesaṃ evaṃ hoti ‘‘amhehi bāhirakathāva sutā, idāni vinicchayakathā bhavissatī’’ti. Ekappahāreneva vuṭṭhahantā samaggā vuṭṭhahanti nāma. Apica ‘‘asukaṭṭhāne vihārasīmā ākulā, uposathappavāraṇā ṭhitā, asukaṭṭhāne vejjakammādikārakā pāpabhikkhū ussannā’’ti sutvā ‘‘ko gantvā tesaṃ niggahaṃ karissatī’’ti vutte ‘‘ahaṃ paṭhamaṃ, ahaṃ paṭhama’’nti vatvā gacchantāpi samaggā vuṭṭhahanti nāma.

In samaggāti and so forth, when wishing to establish a rule or custom for the purpose of renovating a shrine, or covering a bodhi tree shrine or uposatha hall, or when the Sangha is summoned to assemble by the beating of a drum or the ringing of a bell, those who are distracted, thinking, "I have robe-making work to do, I have a bowl to dye, I have construction work to do," do not assemble in harmony. But those who put aside all that work and assemble with a single effort, thinking, "I will go first, I will go first," assemble in harmony. However, those who, having assembled, do not rise together with one accord after considering, deliberating, and doing what needs to be done, do not rise in harmony. For when they rise in such a way, those who leave first think, "We only heard external talk, now there will be decisive talk." But those who rise with a single effort rise in harmony. Furthermore, even those who, having heard that "the boundary of the monastery in such-and-such place is confused, the uposatha and pavāraṇā ceremonies are neglected, and wicked monks engaged in medical work and so forth are rampant in such-and-such place," and when it is said, "Who will go and discipline them?" go, saying, "I first, I first," also rise in harmony.

Āgantukaṃ pana disvā ‘‘imaṃ pariveṇaṃ yāhi, etaṃ pariveṇaṃ yāhi, ayaṃ ko’’ti avatvā sabbe vattaṃ karontāpi, jiṇṇapattacīvarakaṃ disvā tassa bhikkhācāravattena pattacīvaraṃ pariyesantāpi, gilānassa gilānabhesajjaṃ pariyesamānāpi, gilānameva anāthaṃ ‘‘asukapariveṇaṃ yāhī’’ti avatvā attano attano pariveṇe paṭijaggantāpi, eko olīyamānako gantho hoti, paññavantaṃ bhikkhuṃ saṅgaṇhitvā tena taṃ ganthaṃ ukkhipāpentāpi samaggā saṅghakaraṇīyāni karonti nāma.

But even those who, upon seeing a newcomer, do not say, "Go to this residence, go to that residence, who is this?" but all perform their duties; even those who, having seen an old, worn-out robe, seek a bowl and robe for him through the alms-seeking duties; even those who, while seeking medicine for a sick person, take care of the sick person themselves in their own residences, without saying to the helpless sick person, "Go to such-and-such residence"; even those who, when there is one obscured text, take hold of a wise monk and have him lift up that text, perform the duties of the Sangha in harmony.

Appaññattantiādīsu navaṃ adhammikaṃ katikavattaṃ vā sikkhāpadaṃ vā gaṇhantā appaññattaṃ paññāpenti nāma purāṇasanthatavatthusmiṃ sāvatthiyaṃ bhikkhū viya. Uddhammaṃ ubbinayaṃ sāsanaṃ dīpentā paññattaṃ samucchindanti nāma, vassasataparinibbute bhagavati vesālikā vajjiputtakā viya. Khuddānukhuddakā pana āpattiyo sañcicca vītikkamantā yathāpaññattesu sikkhāpadesu samādāya na vattanti nāma assajipunabbasukā viya. Tathā akarontā pana apaññattaṃ na paññāpenti, paññattaṃ na samucchindanti, yathāpaññattesu sikkhāpadesu samādāya vattanti nāma āyasmā upaseno viya, āyasmā yaso kākaṇḍakaputto viya, āyasmā mahākassapo viya ca.Vuddhiyevāti sīlādiguṇehi vuddhiyeva, no parihāni.

In appaññattanti and so forth, those who adopt a new, unlawful custom or training rule enact what has not been enacted, like the monks in Sāvatthī regarding an old mattress. Those who reveal the teaching that is against the Dhamma and against the Vinaya abolish what has been enacted, like the Vajjiputtaka monks of Vesālī a hundred years after the Parinibbāna of the Blessed One. However, those who intentionally transgress minor and trivial offenses do not conduct themselves by adhering to the training rules that have been enacted, like Assaji and Punabbasu. But those who do not do so do not enact what has not been enacted, do not abolish what has been enacted, and conduct themselves by adhering to the training rules that have been enacted, like Venerable Upasena, Venerable Yasa Kākandakaputta, and Venerable Mahākassapa.Vuddhiyevāti: "Vuddhiyeva" means increase only in qualities such as virtue and so forth, not decline.

Therāti thirabhāvappattā therakārakehi guṇehi samannāgatā. Bahū rattiyo jānantītirattaññū. Ciraṃ pabbajitānaṃ etesanticirapabbajitā. Saṅghassa pitiṭṭhāne ṭhitātisaṅghapitaro. Pitiṭṭhāne ṭhitattā saṅghaṃ pariṇenti, pubbaṅgamā hutvā tīsu sikkhāsu pavattentītisaṅghapariṇāyakā.

Therā: "Therā" means elders who have attained stability, endowed with the qualities that make one an elder. Rattaññū: "Rattaññū" means knowing for many nights.Cirapabbajitā: "Cirapabbajitā" means those who have been ordained for a long time.Saṅghapitaro: "Saṅghapitaro" means fathers of the Sangha, standing in the place of fathers for the Sangha. Because they stand in the place of fathers, they guide the Sangha, being leaders and setting them in motion in the three trainings: therefore, they are called saṅghapariṇāyakā (leaders of the Sangha).

Ye tesaṃ sakkārādīni na karonti, ovādatthāya dve tayo vāre upaṭṭhānaṃ na gacchanti, tepi tesaṃ ovādaṃ na denti, paveṇikathaṃ na kathenti, sārabhūtaṃ dhammapariyāyaṃ na sikkhāpenti. Te tehi vissaṭṭhā sīlādīhi dhammakkhandhehi sattahi ca ariyadhanehīti evamādīhi guṇehi parihāyanti. Ye pana tesaṃ sakkārādīni karonti, upaṭṭhānaṃ gacchanti, tesaṃ te ‘‘evaṃ te abhikkamitabba’’ntiādikaṃ ovādaṃ denti, paveṇikathaṃ kathenti, sārabhūtaṃ dhammapariyāyaṃ sikkhāpenti, terasahi dhutaṅgehi dasahi kathāvatthūhi anusāsanti. Te tesaṃ ovāde ṭhatvā sīlādīhi guṇehi vaḍḍhamānā sāmaññatthaṃ anupāpuṇanti. Evamettha hānivuddhiyo daṭṭhabbā.

Those who do not show respect to them and so forth, and do not go to attend upon them two or three times for the sake of guidance, and those who do not give them advice, do not speak traditional stories, and do not teach the essence of the Dhamma, are abandoned by them and decline in qualities such as virtue, the aggregates of the Dhamma, and the seven noble treasures, and so forth. But those who show respect to them and so forth, and go to attend upon them, are given advice by them, such as "Thus you should proceed," and so forth, and they speak traditional stories, and they teach the essence of the Dhamma, and they instruct them with the thirteen dhutaṅgas and the ten topics of discussion. Standing in their advice, increasing in qualities such as virtue, they attain the goal of the ascetic life. Thus, decrease and increase should be seen in this matter.

ponobbhavikāya. Na vasaṃ gacchissantīti ettha ye catunnaṃ paccayānaṃ kāraṇā upaṭṭhākānaṃ padānupadikā hutvā gāmato gāmaṃ vicaranti, te tassā vasaṃ gacchanti nāma. Itare na gacchanti. Tattha hānivuddhiyo pākaṭāyeva.

ponobbhavikāya. Na vasaṃ gacchissantīti: Here, those who, on account of the four requisites, wander from village to village following after their supporters, go under its control. The others do not go. There, the increase and decrease are evident.

Āraññakesūti pañcadhanusatikapacchimesu.Sāpekkhāti sālayā. Gāmantasenāsanesu hi jhānaṃ appetvāpi tato vuṭṭhitamattova itthipurisadārakadārikādisaddaṃ suṇāti, yenassa adhigatavisesopi hāyatiyeva. Araññasenāsane niddāyitvāpi pabuddhamatto sīhabyagghamorādīnaṃ saddaṃ suṇāti, yena araññe pītiṃ paṭilabhitvā tameva sammasanto aggaphale patiṭṭhāti. Iti bhagavā gāmantasenāsane jhānaṃ appetvā nisinnabhikkhuto araññe niddāyamānameva pasaṃsati. Tasmā tameva atthavasaṃ paṭicca ‘‘āraññakesu senāsanesu sāpekkhā bhavissantī’’ti āha.

Āraññakesūti: "Āraññakesu" means in remote places five hundred bow-lengths away at the farthest.Sāpekkhāti: "Sāpekhā" means with expectation. For in village dwellings, even if one puts aside jhāna, as soon as one gets up, one hears the sounds of women, men, boys, girls, and so on, by which even the distinction one has attained declines. But in a forest dwelling, even if one falls asleep, as soon as one awakens, one hears the sounds of lions, tigers, peacocks, and so on, by which, having regained joy in the forest, and repeatedly contemplating that, one is established in the highest fruit. Thus, the Blessed One praises one who is sleeping in the forest over one who is sitting having put aside jhāna in a village dwelling. Therefore, with regard to that same advantage, he said, "They will be with expectation in forest dwellings."

Paccattaññeva satiṃ upaṭṭhāpessantīti attanāva attano abbhantare satiṃ upaṭṭhapessanti.Pesalāti piyasīlā. Idhāpi sabrahmacārīnaṃ āgamanaṃ anicchantā nevāsikā assaddhā honti appasannā, vihāraṃ sampattabhikkhūnaṃ paccuggamana-pattacīvarapaṭiggahaṇa-āsanapaññāpanatālavaṇṭaggahaṇādīni na karonti. Atha nesaṃ avaṇṇo uggacchati ‘‘asukavihāravāsino bhikkhū assaddhā appasannā vihāraṃ paviṭṭhānaṃ vattappaṭivattampi na karontī’’ti. Taṃ sutvā pabbajitā vihāradvārena gacchantāpi vihāraṃ na pavisanti. Evaṃ anāgatānaṃ anāgamanameva hoti. Āgatānaṃ pana phāsuvihāre asati yepi ajānitvā āgatā, te ‘‘vasissāmāti tāvacintetvā āgatamhā, imesaṃ pana nevāsikānaṃ iminā nīhārena ko vasissatī’’ti nikkhamitvā gacchanti. Evaṃ so vihāro aññesaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ anāvāsova hoti. Tato nevāsikā sīlavantānaṃ dassanaṃ alabhantā kaṅkhāvinodakaṃ vā ācārasikkhāpakaṃ vā madhuradhammasavanaṃ vā na labhanti. Tesaṃ neva aggahitadhammaggahaṇaṃ na gahitasajjhāyakaraṇaṃ hoti. Iti nesaṃ hāniyeva hoti, na vuddhi.

Paccattaññeva satiṃ upaṭṭhāpessantī means they establish mindfulness within themselves, by themselves. Pesalā means amiable in their conduct. Here too, those who do not want fellow monks to come, the residents, are faithless and displeased. They do not perform welcoming duties for monks who have arrived at the monastery, such as going out to meet them, receiving their robes and bowls, providing seats, or offering fans. Then, a bad reputation arises for them: "The monks residing in such-and-such a monastery are faithless and displeased; they do not even perform the basic duties for those who enter the monastery." Hearing that, monks who are passing by the monastery gate do not even enter the monastery. Thus, for those who have not yet come, there is no coming at all. But for those who have come, if there is no comfortable dwelling, even those who have come unknowingly think, "We came intending to stay, but who would stay with such behavior from these residents?" and they depart. Thus, that monastery becomes uninhabitable for other monks. Consequently, the residents, not receiving the sight of virtuous monks, do not receive the removal of doubts, nor instruction in conduct, nor the hearing of sweet Dhamma. For them, there is neither the acquisition of unacquired Dhamma nor the repetition of what has been acquired. Thus, there is only decline for them, not growth.

Ye pana sabrahmacārīnaṃ āgamanaṃ icchanti, te saddhā honti pasannā, āgatānaṃ sabrahmacārīnaṃ paccuggamanādīni katvā senāsanaṃ paññapetvā denti, te gahetvā bhikkhācāraṃ pavisanti, kaṅkhaṃ vinodenti, madhuradhammassavanaṃ labhanti. Atha nesaṃ kittisaddo uggacchati ‘‘asukavihāre bhikkhū evaṃ saddhā pasannā vattasampannā saṅgāhakā’’ti. Taṃ sutvā bhikkhū dūratopi āgacchanti. Tesaṃ nevāsikā vattaṃ karonti, samīpaṃ gantvā vuḍḍhataraṃ āgantukaṃ vanditvā nisīdanti, navakatarassa santike āsanaṃ gahetvā nisīditvā ‘‘imasmiṃ vihāre vasissatha, gamissathā’’ti pucchanti. ‘‘Gamissāmā’’ti vutte ‘‘sappāyaṃ senāsanaṃ, sulabhā bhikkhā’’tiādīni vatvā gantuṃ na denti. Vinayadharo ce hoti, tassa santike vinayaṃ sajjhāyanti. Suttantādidharo ce, tassa santike taṃ taṃ dhammaṃ sajjhāyanti. Te āgantukatherānaṃ ovāde ṭhatvā saha paṭisambhidāhi arahattaṃ pāpuṇanti. Āgantukā ‘‘ekaṃ dve divasāni vasissāmāti āgatamhā, imesaṃ pana sukhasaṃvāsatāya dasa dvādasa vassāni vasimhā’’ti vattāro honti. Evamettha hānivuddhiyo veditabbā.

Those, however, who want fellow monks to come, are faithful and pleased. Having performed welcoming duties for the fellow monks who have arrived, they provide and allocate lodging. Having received that, they enter for alms, dispel doubt, and obtain the hearing of sweet Dhamma. Then, a good reputation arises for them: "The monks in such-and-such a monastery are faithful, pleased, accomplished in duties, and helpful." Hearing that, monks come even from afar. The residents perform duties for them; going near, they pay homage to the elder visiting monk and sit down. Taking a seat near the newer monk, they sit down and ask, "Will you stay in this monastery, or will you depart?" If they say, "We will depart," they say, "There is suitable lodging, alms are easily available," and do not allow them to leave. If he is a Vinaya expert, they recite the Vinaya in his presence. If he is a Suttanta expert, they recite that Dhamma in his presence. Standing in the instruction of those visiting elders, they attain Arahatship together with the discriminations. The visitors say, "We came intending to stay for one or two days, but due to the pleasant association with these monks, we have stayed for ten or twelve years." Thus, decline and growth should be understood here.

4. Dutiyasattakasuttavaṇṇanā
4. Dutiyasattakasuttavaṇṇanā

24.Catutthena kammārāmāti ye divasaṃ cīvarakamma-kāyabandhanaparissāvana-dhammakaraṇa-sammajjani-pādakaṭhalikādīneva karonti, te sandhāyesa paṭikkhepo. Yo pana tesaṃ karaṇavelāya evaṃ etāni karoti, uddesavelāya uddesaṃ gaṇhāti, sajjhāyavelāya sajjhāyati, cetiyaṅgaṇavattavelāya cetiyaṅgaṇavattaṃ karoti, manasikāravelāya manasikāraṃ karoti, na so kammārāmo nāma.

24. In the fourth, na kammārāmā means this rejection refers to those who spend the day doing only robe-making, belt-making, water-strainer making, toothpick making, sweeping, footstool making, and so on. But one who does these things only at the time of doing them, and at the time of learning takes up the lesson, at the time of reciting recites, at the time of performing the Cetiya courtyard duties performs them, at the time of attending in mind attends in mind, is not called a delighting in work.

bhassārāmonāma. Yo pana rattindivaṃ dhammaṃ katheti, pañhaṃ vissajjeti, ayaṃ appabhassova bhasse pariyantakārīyeva. Kasmā? ‘‘Sannipatitānaṃ vo, bhikkhave, dvayaṃ karaṇīyaṃ dhammī vā kathā ariyo vā tuṇhībhāvo’’ti (ma. ni. 1.273) vuttattā.

bhassārāmo means one who speaks Dhamma day and night, answers questions, this one has little talk, indeed one who makes an end to talk. Why? Because it was said, "Monks, when you have gathered together, two things are to be done: either talk about the Dhamma or noble silence" (M. i. 273).

niddārāmonāma. Yassa pana karajakāyagelaññena cittaṃ bhavaṅgaṃ otarati, nāyaṃ niddārāmo. Tenevāha – ‘‘abhijānāmahaṃ, aggivessana, gimhānaṃ pacchime māse pacchābhattaṃ piṇḍapātappaṭikkanto catugguṇaṃ saṅghāṭiṃ paññapetvā dakkhiṇena passena sato sampajāno niddaṃ okkamitā’’ti (ma. ni. 1.387).

niddārāmo means delighting in sleep. But for one whose mind inclines to bhavaṅga due to bodily illness caused by dry blood, this is not delighting in sleep. Therefore, he said: "Aggivessana, I recall, in the last month of summer, after the meal, returning from alms round, having folded the outer robe in four, mindful and aware, I would lie down on my right side" (M. i. 387).

saṅgaṇikārāmo. Yo pana catūsu iriyāpathesu ekakova assādaṃ labhati, nāyaṃ saṅgaṇikārāmo.

saṅgaṇikārāmo means delighting in society. But one who obtains pleasure alone in the four postures is not called delighting in society.

pāpicchānāma. Yesaṃ pāpakā mittā catūsu iriyāpathesu saha ayanato pāpasahāyā, ye ca tanninnatappoṇatappabbhāratāya pāpesu sampavaṅkā, tepāpamittā pāpasahāyā pāpasampavaṅkānāma.

pāpicchā means evil desires. Those whose evil friends are evil companions moving together in the four postures, and who incline, tend, and lean towards evil, are called pāpamittā pāpasahāyā pāpasampavaṅkā, evil friends, evil companions, evil associates.

Oramattakenāti avaramattakena appamattakena.Antarāti arahattaṃ appatvāva etthantare.Vosānanti pariniṭṭhitabhāvaṃ ‘‘alamettāvatā’’ti osakkanaṃ. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – yāva sīlapārisuddhijjhānavipassanā sotāpannabhāvādīnaṃ aññataramattakena vosānaṃ nāpajjissanti, tāva vuddhiyeva bhikkhūnaṃ pāṭikaṅkhā, no parihānīti.

Oramattakenā means with an inferior, small amount. Antarā means in between, without reaching Arahatship. Vosāna means the state of completion, withdrawing with "Enough, this is all." This is what is said: As long as they do not reach completion with some degree of purity of morality, jhāna, or Vipassanā, or the state of stream-entry and so on, only growth is to be expected for monks, not decline.

7. Saññāsuttavaṇṇanā
7. Saññāsuttavaṇṇanā

27.Sattameaniccasaññādayo aniccānupassanādīhi sahagatasaññā.

27. In the seventh, aniccasaññā and the rest are perceptions associated with contemplation of impermanence and so on.

8. Paṭhamaparihānisuttavaṇṇanā
8. Paṭhamaparihānisuttavaṇṇanā

28.Aṭṭhame uppannānaṃ saṅghakiccānaṃ nittharaṇena bhāraṃ vahantītibhāravāhino. Te tena paññāyissantīti te therā tena attano therabhāvānurūpena kiccena paññāyissanti.Tesu yogaṃāpajjatīti payogaṃ āpajjati, sayaṃ tāni kiccāni kātuṃ ārabhatīti.

28. In the eighth, bhāravāhino means carrying the burden by completing the Sangha duties that have arisen. Te tena paññāyissantī means those elders will be known by that duty befitting their elder status. Tesu yogaṃ āpajjatī means he undertakes the effort, he begins to do those duties himself.

9. Dutiyaparihānisuttavaṇṇanā
9. Dutiyaparihānisuttavaṇṇanā

29.Navamebhikkhudassanaṃ hāpetīti bhikkhusaṅghassa dassanatthāya gamanaṃ hāpeti.Adhisīleti pañcasīladasasīlasaṅkhāte uttamasīle.Ito bahiddhāti imamhā sāsanā bahiddhā.Dakkhiṇeyyaṃ gavesatīti deyyadhammapaṭiggāhake pariyesati.Tattha ca pubbakāraṃ karotīti tesaṃ bāhirānaṃ titthiyānaṃ datvā pacchā bhikkhūnaṃ deti. Sesaṃ sabbattha uttānamevāti.

29. In the ninth, bhikkhudassanaṃ hāpetī means he causes the going for the sight of the Sangha of monks to diminish. Adhisīle means in higher morality, counted as the superior morality of the five or ten precepts. Ito bahiddhā means outside this Dispensation. Dakkhiṇeyyaṃ gavesatī means he seeks out those who receive offerings. Tattha ca pubbakāraṃ karotī means he gives to those external sectarians first, and only afterwards gives to the monks. The rest is plain in meaning everywhere.

4. Devatāvaggo

4. Devatāvaggo

5. Paṭhamamittasuttavaṇṇanā
5. Paṭhamamittasuttavaṇṇanā

36.Catutthassa pañcameduddadanti duppariccajaṃ mahārahaṃ bhaṇḍakaṃ.Dukkaraṃ karotīti kātuṃ asukaraṃ kammaṃ karoti.Dukkhamaṃ khamatīti sahāyassa atthāya duradhivāsaṃ adhivāseti.Guyhamassa āvikarotīti attano guyhaṃ tassa āvikaroti.Guyhamassa pariguhatīti tassa guyhaṃ aññesaṃ nācikkhati.Khīṇena nātimaññatīti tassa bhoge khīṇe tena khayena taṃ nātimaññati, tasmiṃ omānaṃ attani ca atimānaṃ na karoti.

36. In the fifth of the fourth, duddada means something hard to give away, a very valuable item. Dukkaraṃ karotī means he does what is difficult to do. Dukkhamaṃ khamatī means he endures what is hard to endure for the sake of a friend. Guyhamassa āvikarotī means he reveals his secret to him. Guyhamassa pariguhatī means he does not tell the other's secret to others. Khīṇena nātimaññatī means when his wealth is diminished, he does not despise him because of that diminution; he does not have contempt for him and arrogance for himself.

6. Dutiyamittasuttavaṇṇanā
6. Dutiyamittasuttavaṇṇanā

37.Chaṭṭhevattāti vacanakusalo.Vacanakkhamoti vacanaṃ khamati, dinnaṃ ovādaṃ karoti.Gambhīranti guyhaṃ rahassaṃ jhānanissitaṃ vipassanāmaggaphalanibbānanissitaṃ.

37. In the sixth, vattā means skilled in speech. Vacanakkhamo means he endures speech, he acts upon the advice given. Gambhīra means hidden, secret, dependent on jhāna, dependent on insight, the path, the fruit, and Nibbāna.

7. Paṭhamapaṭisambhidāsuttavaṇṇanā
7. Paṭhamapaṭisambhidāsuttavaṇṇanā

38.Sattameidaṃ me cetaso līnattanti uppanne cetaso līnatte ‘‘idaṃ me cetaso līnatta’’nti yathāsabhāvato jānāti.Ajjhattaṃ saṃkhittaṃnāma thinamiddhānugataṃ.Bahiddhā vikkhittaṃnāma pañcasu kāmaguṇesu vikkhittaṃ.Vedanātiādīni papañcamūlavasena gahitāni. Vedanā hi taṇhāya mūlaṃ sukhavasena taṇhuppattito, saññā diṭṭhiyā mūlaṃ avibhūtārammaṇe diṭṭhiuppattito, vitakko mānassa mūlaṃ vitakkavasena asmīti mānuppattito.Sappāyāsappāyesūti upakārānupakāresu.Nimittanti kāraṇaṃ. Sesaṃ sabbattha uttānatthamevāti.

38. In the seventh, idaṃ me cetaso līnatta means when dullness of mind arises, he knows as it actually is, "This is dullness of my mind." Ajjhattaṃ saṃkhittaṃ means inwardly contracted, associated with sloth and torpor. Bahiddhā vikkhittaṃ means scattered externally, scattered in the five strands of sense pleasure. Vedanā and the rest are taken as the root of proliferation. For feeling is the root of craving, from the arising of craving in the way of pleasure; perception is the root of views, from the arising of views in an indistinct object; thought is the root of conceit, from the arising of conceit 'I am' in the way of thought. Sappāyāsappāyesū means in what is helpful and unhelpful. Nimitta means cause. The rest is plain in meaning everywhere.

5. Mahāyaññavaggo

5. Mahāyaññavaggo

1-2. Sattaviññāṇaṭṭhitisuttādivaṇṇanā
1-2. Sattaviññāṇaṭṭhitisuttādivaṇṇanā

44-45.Pañcamassa paṭhameviññāṇaṭṭhitiyoti paṭisandhiviññāṇassa ṭhānāni.Seyyathāpīti nidassanatthe nipāto, yathā manussāti attho. Aparimāṇesu hi cakkavāḷesu aparimāṇānaṃ manussānaṃ vaṇṇasaṇṭhānādivasena dvepi ekasadisā natthi. Yepi hi katthaci yamakabhātaro vaṇṇena vā saṇṭhānena vā sadisā honti, tesampi ālokitavilokitakathitahasitagamanaṭṭhānādīhi viseso hotiyeva. Tasmānānattakāyāti vuttā. Paṭisandhisaññā pana nesaṃ tihetukāpi dvihetukāpi ahetukāpi hoti. Tasmānānattasaññinoti vuttā.Ekacce ca devāti cha kāmāvacaradevā. Tesu hi kesañci kāyo nīlo hoti, kesañci pītakādivaṇṇo. Saññā pana tesaṃ dvihetukāpi tihetukāpi hoti, ahetukā natthi.Ekacceca vinipātikāti catuapāyavinimuttā uttaramātā yakkhinī, piyaṅkaramātā, phussamittā, dhammaguttāti evamādikā aññe ca vemānikā petā. Etesañhi pītaodātakāḷamaṅguracchavisāmavaṇṇādivasena ceva kisa thūlarassadīghavasena ca kāyo nānā hoti, manussānaṃ viya dvihetukatihetukaahetukavasena saññāpi. Te pana devā viya na mahesakkhā, kapaṇamanussā viya appesakkhā dullabhaghāsacchādanā dukkhapīḷitā viharanti. Ekacce kāḷapakkhe dukkhitā juṇhapakkhe sukhitā honti. Tasmā sukhasamussayato vinipatitattāvinipātikāti vuttā. Ye panettha tihetukā, tesaṃ dhammābhisamayopi hoti piyaṅkaramātādīnaṃ viya.

44-45. In the first of the fifth, viññāṇaṭṭhitiyo means the locations of rebirth-consciousness. Seyyathāpī is a particle used in examples, meaning "just as humans." For in the immeasurable world-systems, there are no two immeasurable humans alike in terms of color, shape, and so on. Even if twin brothers are similar in color or shape somewhere, there is still a difference in looking, glancing, speaking, smiling, walking, standing, and so on. Therefore, they are said to be nānattakāyā, diverse in body. But their rebirth-consciousness can be with three roots, two roots, or without roots. Therefore, they are said to be nānattasaññino, diverse in perception. Ekacce ca devā means the six sensual plane deities. For among them, some have a blue body, some have a yellow color, and so on. But their perception can be with two roots or three roots; it is not without roots. Ekacce ca vinipātikā means those who are not freed from the four woeful planes, such as Uttaramātā the yakkhiṇī, Piyaṅkaramātā, Phussamittā, Dhammaguttā, and other such vemānika petas. For these have diverse bodies in terms of yellowish-white, black, reddish-brown, even complexioned color, as well as thin, thick, short, and long shapes, like humans; and their perceptions are also with two roots, three roots, or without roots. But they are not as powerful as the deities; they live afflicted with suffering, having little power, with scarce food and clothing, like wretched humans. Some are miserable in the dark fortnight and happy in the bright fortnight. Therefore, because they have fallen from an accumulation of happiness, they are said to be vinipātikā. Among these, those with three roots also have the penetration of the Dhamma, like Piyaṅkaramātā and others.

Brahmakāyikāti brahmapārisajjabrahmapurohitamahābrahmāno.Paṭhamābhinibbattāti te sabbepi paṭhamajjhānena abhinibbattā. Brahmapārisajjā pana parittena abhinibbattā, tesaṃ kappassa tatiyo bhāgo āyuppamāṇaṃ. Brahmapurohitā majjhimena, tesaṃ upaḍḍhakappo āyuppamāṇaṃ, kāyo ca tesaṃ vipphārikataro hoti. Mahābrahmāno paṇītena, tesaṃ kappo āyuppamāṇaṃ, kāyo ca pana tesaṃ ativipphārikova hoti. Iti te kāyassa nānattā paṭhamajjhānavasena saññāya ekattānānattakāyā ekattasaññinoti veditabbā.

Brahmakāyikā means the Brahmapārisajja, Brahmapurohita, and Mahābrahmā deities. Paṭhamābhinibbattā means all of them are reborn through the first jhāna. The Brahmapārisajja are reborn through the lesser jhāna; their life-span is one-third of a kappa. The Brahmapurohita through the medium jhāna; their life-span is half a kappa, and their body is more expansive. The Mahābrahmāno through the excellent jhāna; their life-span is one kappa, and their body is even more expansive. Thus, because of the diversity of body and the unity of perception due to the first jhāna, they should be understood as nānattakāyā ekattasaññino - diverse in body, unified in perception.

nānattakāyā ekattasaññinotveva saṅkhyaṃ gacchanti.

nānattakāyā ekattasaññino thus, they go to the count.

Ābhassarāti daṇḍaukkāya acci viya etesaṃ sarīrato ābhā chijjitvā chijjitvā patantī viya sarati vissaratīti ābhassarā. Tesu pañcakanaye dutiyatatiyajjhānadvayaṃ parittaṃ bhāvetvā upapannā parittābhā nāma honti, tesaṃ dve kappā āyuppamāṇaṃ. Majjhimaṃ bhāvetvā upapannā appamāṇābhā nāma honti, tesaṃ cattāro kappā āyuppamāṇaṃ. Paṇītaṃ bhāvetvā upapannā ābhassarā nāma honti, tesaṃ aṭṭha kappā āyuppamāṇaṃ. Idha pana ukkaṭṭhaparicchedavasena sabbeva te gahitā. Sabbesañhi tesaṃ kāyo ekavipphārova hoti, saññā pana avitakkavicāramattā vā avitakkaavicārā vāti nānā.

Ābhassarā means, like the flame of a torch, radiance from their body seems to slip and scatter, therefore, Ābhassarā. Among them, in the fivefold method, those who have developed the second and third jhāna in a limited way and have been reborn are called Parittābhā, their life-span is two kappas. Those who have developed the medium jhāna and have been reborn are called Appamāṇābhā, their life-span is four kappas. Those who have developed the excellent jhāna and have been reborn are called Ābhassarā, their life-span is eight kappas. Here, however, all of them are taken according to the highest limit. For the body of all of them is of uniform expansion, but their perception is diverse, being merely without applied and sustained thought, or without applied thought and without sustained thought.

Subhakiṇhāti subhena vokiṇṇā vikiṇṇā, subhena sarīrappabhāvaṇṇena ekagghanāti attho. Etesañhi na ābhassarānaṃ viya chijjitvā chijjitvā pabhā gacchati. Pañcakanaye pana parittamajjhimapaṇītassa catutthajjhānassa vasena soḷasabāttiṃsacatussaṭṭhikappāyukā parittaappamāṇasubhakiṇhā nāma hutvā nibbattanti. Iti sabbepi teekattakāyāceva catutthajjhānasaññāyaekattasaññinocāti veditabbā.Vehapphalāpi catutthaviññāṇaṭṭhitimeva bhajanti.Asaññasattāviññāṇābhāvā ettha saṅgahaṃ na gacchanti, sattāvāsesu gacchanti.

Subhakiṇhā means filled and pervaded with beauty, of a single mass due to the beauty of their bodily radiance. For radiance does not go from them piecemeal as it does from the Ābhassarā. In the fivefold method, however, based on the fourth jhāna, being limited, medium or excellent, they are reborn as Paritta, Appamāṇa or Subhakiṇhā, with life spans of sixteen, thirty-two, or sixty-four kappas. Thus, all of them are known as ekattakāyā, unified in body, and ekattasaññino, unified in perception due to the fourth jhāna. Vehapphalā also resort to the fourth station of consciousness. Asaññasattā do not go to this reckoning due to the absence of consciousness, they go to the abodes of beings.

Suddhāvāsāvivaṭṭapakkhe ṭhitā na sabbakālikā, kappasatasahassampi asaṅkheyyampi buddhasuññe loke na uppajjanti. Soḷasakappasahassaabbhantare buddhesu uppannesuyeva uppajjanti. Dhammacakkappavattissa bhagavato khandhāvāraṭṭhānasadisā honti. Tasmā neva viññāṇaṭṭhitiṃ na sattāvāsaṃ bhajanti. Mahāsīvatthero pana ‘‘na kho pana so, sāriputta, āvāso sulabharūpo, yo mayā anāvutthapubbo iminā dīghena addhunā aññatra suddhāvāsehi devehī’’ti (ma. ni. 1.160) iminā suttena suddhāvāsāpi catutthaviññāṇaṭṭhitiṃ catutthasattāvāsañca bhajantīti vadati, taṃ appatibāhiyattā suttassa anuññātaṃ.

Suddhāvāsā stand in the stage of abandoning, they are not for all time; they do not arise in a world devoid of Buddhas, even for hundreds of thousands or countless aeons. They arise only when Buddhas have arisen within sixteen thousand aeons. They are like the site of the command-headquarters of the Blessed One who turns the Wheel of Dhamma. Therefore, they do not resort to either a station of consciousness or an abode of beings. Mahāsīvatthera, however, says that the Suddhāvāsa also resorts to the fourth station of consciousness and the fourth abode of beings, with this sutta, "Sāriputta, that dwelling is not easily obtained, which I have not dwelt in before in this long journey, except for the Suddhāvāsa deities" (M. i. 160), this is allowed by the sutta due to its irrefutability.

samādhiparikkhārāti maggasamādhissa sambhārā.

samādhiparikkhārā means requisites for concentration on the path.

3. Paṭhamaaggisuttavaṇṇanā
3. Paṭhamaaggisuttavaṇṇanā

46.Tatiye sabbepi rāgādayo anuḍahanaṭṭhenaaggī. Āhuneyyaggītiādīsu panettha āhunaṃ vuccati sakkāro, āhunaṃ arahantīti āhuneyyā. Mātāpitaro hi puttānaṃ bahupakārattā āhunaṃ arahanti, tesu vippaṭipajjamānā puttā nirayādīsu nibbattanti. Tasmā kiñcāpi mātāpitaro na anuḍahanti, anuḍahanassa pana paccayā honti. Iti anuḍahanaṭṭheneva āhuneyyaggīti vuccanti.Gahapatīti pana gehasāmiko vuccati, so mātugāmassa sayanavatthālaṅkārādianuppadānena bahupakāro. Taṃ aticaranto mātugāmo nirayādīsu nibbattati. Tasmā sopi purimanayeneva anuḍahanaṭṭhenagahapataggīti vutto.Dakkhiṇeyyaggīti ettha pana dakkhiṇāti cattāro paccayā, bhikkhusaṅgho dakkhiṇeyyo. So hi gihīnaṃ tīsu saraṇesu pañcasu sīlesu dasasu sīlesu mātāpitupaṭṭhāne dhammikasamaṇabrāhmaṇupaṭṭhāneti evamādīsu kalyāṇadhammesu niyojanena bahupakāro. Tasmiṃ micchāpaṭipannā gihī bhikkhusaṅghaṃ akkositvā paribhāsitvā nirayādīsu nibbattanti. Tasmā sopi purimanayeneva anuḍahanaṭṭhena dakkhiṇeyyaggīti vutto. Kaṭṭhato nibbatto pākatikova aggikaṭṭhaggināma.

46. In the third, all passions such as lust are fires because of their burning nature. In phrases like āhuneyyaggī, here, āhunaṃ means honor, and those worthy of honor are āhuneyyā. Parents are worthy of honor (āhunaṃ) from their children because they have done much for them, and children who mistreat them are reborn in hells and other woeful states. Therefore, although parents do not burn (literally), they are the cause of burning. Thus, they are called āhuneyyaggī because of their burning nature. Gahapatī means the master of the house, who greatly benefits the female partner by providing bedding, clothing, ornaments, and so on. A female partner who transgresses against him is reborn in hells and other woeful states. Therefore, she too, in the same way, is called gahapataggī because of her burning nature. In dakkhiṇeyyaggī, dakkhiṇā refers to four requisites, and the monastic community (bhikkhusaṅgha) is dakkhiṇeyya. They greatly benefit laypeople by guiding them in wholesome practices such as the three refuges, the five precepts, the ten precepts, the support of parents, and the support of righteous ascetics and brahmins. Laypeople who wrongly treat the monastic community, by scolding and insulting them, are reborn in hells and other woeful states. Therefore, they too, in the same way, are called dakkhiṇeyyaggī because of their burning nature. The fire that is born from wood, the obvious fire, is called kaṭṭhaggi.

4. Dutiyaaggisuttavaṇṇanā
4. Commentary on the Second Aggisutta

47.Catuttheuggatasarīrassāti so kira brāhmaṇamahāsālo attabhāvenapi bhogehipi uggato sārappatto ahosi, tasmā uggatasarīrotveva paññāyittha.Upakkhaṭoti paccupaṭṭhito.Thūṇūpanītānīti yūpasaṅkhātaṃ thūṇaṃ upanītāni.Yaññatthāyāti vadhitvā yajanatthāya.Upasaṅkamīti so kira sabbaṃ taṃ yaññasambhāraṃ sajjetvā cintesi – ‘‘samaṇo kira gotamo mahāpañño, kiṃ nu kho me yaññassa vaṇṇaṃ kathessati udāhu avaṇṇaṃ, pucchitvā jānissāmī’’ti iminā kāraṇena yena bhagavā tenupasaṅkami.Aggissaādānanti yaññayajanatthāya navassa maṅgalaggino ādiyanaṃ.Sabbena sabbanti sabbena sutena sabbaṃ sutaṃ sameti saṃsandati, ekasadisaṃ hotīti dasseti.Satthānīti vihiṃsanaṭṭhena satthāni viyāti satthāni.Sayaṃ paṭhamaṃ samārambhatīti attanāva paṭhamataraṃ ārabhati.Hantunti hanituṃ.

47. In the fourth, uggatasarīrassā means that the wealthy brahmin householder was prominent and attained excellence in both his person and possessions, thus he was known as uggatasarīra. Upakkhaṭo means prepared. Thūṇūpanītānī means brought near to the stake (thūṇaṃ), which is a kind of sacrificial post. Yaññatthāyā means for the purpose of sacrificing by killing. Upasaṅkamī means that after preparing all the sacrificial materials, he thought: "The ascetic Gotama is very wise; I wonder whether he will praise or criticize my sacrifice. I will ask him and find out." For this reason, he approached the Blessed One. Aggissaādānanti means the taking up of a new, auspicious fire for the purpose of sacrificial offering. Sabbena sabbanti shows that all that is heard agrees and aligns with all that is heard, being of one kind. Satthānī means instruments of violence (satthāni) because of their nature of harming. Sayaṃ paṭhamaṃ samārambhatīti means he himself initiates it first. Hantunti means to kill.

Pahātabbāti pariharitabbā.Atohayanti ato hi mātāpitito ayaṃ.Āhutoti āgato.Sambhūtoti uppanno.Ayaṃ vuccati, brāhmaṇa, gahapataggīti ayaṃ puttadārādigaṇo yasmā, gahapati, viya gehasāmiko viya hutvā aggati vicarati, tasmā gahapataggīti vuccati.Attānanti cittaṃ.Damentīti indriyadamanena damenti.Samentīti rāgādisamanena samenti. Tesaññeva parinibbāpanenaparinibbāpenti. Nikkhipitabboti yathā na vinassati, evaṃ ṭhapetabbo.Upavāyatanti upavāyatu. Evañca pana vatvā brāhmaṇo sabbesampi tesaṃ pāṇānaṃ jīvitaṃ datvā yaññasālaṃ viddhaṃsetvā satthu sāsane opānabhūto ahosīti.

Pahātabbāti means should be avoided. Atohayanti means from these parents here. Āhutoti means come. Sambhūtoti means born. Ayaṃ vuccati, brāhmaṇa, gahapataggīti means this group of sons, daughters, etc., brahmin, is called gahapataggī because it wanders like a householder (gahapati), like the master of the house. Attānanti means the mind. Damentīti means they tame by taming the senses. Samentīti means they calm by calming passions such as lust. They parinibbāpenti by extinguishing those very defilements. Nikkhipitabboti means should be kept so that it does not perish. Upavāyatanti means let it blow. And having said this, the brahmin gave life to all those beings and demolished the sacrificial hall, becoming one who was receptive to the Teaching of the Teacher.

5-6. Saññāsuttadvayavaṇṇanā
5-6. Commentary on the Two Saññāsuttas

48-49.Pañcameamatogadhāti nibbānapatiṭṭhā.Amatapariyosānāti nibbānāvasānā. Chaṭṭhemethunadhammasamāpattiyāti methunadhammena samaṅgibhāvato.Nhārudaddulanti nhārukhaṇḍaṃ nhāruvilekhanaṃ vā.Anusandatīti pavattati.Natthi me pubbenāparaṃ visesoti natthi mayhaṃ pubbena abhāvitakālena saddhiṃ aparaṃ bhāvitakāle viseso.Lokacitresūti tidhātukalokasannivāsasaṅkhātesu lokacitresu.Ālasyeti ālasiyabhāve.Vissaṭṭhiyeti vissaṭṭhabhāve.Ananuyogeti yogassa ananuyuñjane.Ahaṅkāramamaṅkāramānāpagatanti ahaṅkāradiṭṭhito ca mamaṅkārataṇhāto ca navavidhamānato ca apagataṃ.Vidhāsamatikkantanti tisso vidhā atikkantaṃ.Santanti tappaccanīkakilesehi santaṃ.Suvimuttanti pañcahi vimuttīhi suṭṭhu vimuttaṃ.

48-49. In the fifth, amatogadhāti means having Nibbana as its foundation. Amatapariyosānāti means having Nibbana as its final end. In the sixth, methunadhammasamāpattiyāti means being associated with the practice of sexual intercourse. Nhārudaddulanti means a piece of sinew or a scratch made by sinew. Anusandatīti means it flows. Natthi me pubbenāparaṃ visesoti means there is no difference for me between the past, the time when it was uncultivated, and the future, the time when it is cultivated. Lokacitresūti means in the variegated worlds (lokacitresu), which are aggregates of the three realms of existence. Ālasyeti means in a state of laziness. Vissaṭṭhiyeti means in a state of neglect. Ananuyogeti means in not applying oneself to effort. Ahaṅkāramamaṅkāramānāpagatanti means free from the view of "I," from the craving for "mine," and from the nine kinds of conceit. Vidhāsamatikkantanti means having transcended the three kinds of defilement (vidhā). Santanti means calm due to the absence of the opposing defilements. Suvimuttanti means well-liberated by the five kinds of liberation.

7. Methunasuttavaṇṇanā
7. Commentary on the Methunasutta

50.Sattameupasaṅkamīti bhuttapātarāso dāsakammakaraparivuto upasaṅkami.Bhavampinoti bhavampi nu.Brahmacārī paṭijānātīti ‘‘ahaṃ brahmacārī’’ti evaṃ brahmacariyavāsaṃ paṭijānātīti pucchati. Evaṃ kirassa ahosi – ‘‘brāhmaṇasamaye vedaṃ uggaṇhantā aṭṭhacattālīsa vassāni brahmacariyaṃ caranti. Samaṇo pana gotamo agāraṃ ajjhāvasanto tīsu pāsādesu tividhanāṭakaratiyā abhirami, idāni kiṃ nu kho vakkhatī’’ti imamatthaṃ sandhāyevaṃ pucchati. Tato bhagavā mantena kaṇhasappaṃ gaṇhanto viya amittaṃ gīvāya pādena akkamanto viya attano saṃkilesakāle chabbassāni padhānacariyāya rajjasukhaṃ vā pāsādesu nāṭakasampattiṃ vā ārabbha vitakkamattassāpi anuppannabhāvaṃ sandhāya sīhanādaṃ nadantoyañhi taṃ brāhmaṇātiādimāha. Tatthadvayaṃdvayasamāpattinti dvīhi dvīhi samāpajjitabbabhāvaṃ.Dukkhasmāti sakalavaṭṭadukkhato.Sañjagghatīti hasitakathaṃ katheti.Saṃkīḷatīti keḷiṃ karoti.Saṃkeḷāyatīti mahāhasitaṃ hasati.Cakkhunā cakkhunti attano cakkhunā tassā cakkhuṃ paṭivijjhitvā upanijjhāyati.Tirokuṭṭaṃ vā tiropākāraṃ vāti parakuṭṭe vā parapākāre vā.Devoti eko devarājā.Devaññataroti aññataro devaputto.Anuttaraṃ sammāsambodhinti arahattañceva sabbaññutaññāṇañca.

50. In the seventh, upasaṅkamīti means he approached, surrounded by servants and laborers, after eating his morning meal. Bhavampinoti means even becoming. Brahmacārī paṭijānātīti means he asks, "Does he profess to be practicing the brahmacariya?" It occurred to him: "In brahminical times, those learning the Vedas practiced brahmacariya for forty-eight years. But the ascetic Gotama, while living at home, enjoyed himself in three palaces with various performances and delights; now, what will he say?" Intending this, he asked in this way. Then the Blessed One, like catching a black snake with a spell, like trampling on an enemy's neck with his foot, intending that even a thought did not arise in his time of defilement regarding royal pleasure or the splendor of performances in palaces during the six years of striving, roaring the lion's roar, said yañhi taṃ brāhmaṇā and so on. There, dvayaṃdvayasamāpattinti means the state of being associated with two by two. Dukkhasmāti means from all the suffering of the cycle of existence (vaṭṭa). Sañjagghatīti means he tells a joking story. Saṃkīḷatīti means he plays. Saṃkeḷāyatīti means he laughs loudly. Cakkhunā cakkhunti means he gazes intently, piercing her eye with his own eye. Tirokuṭṭaṃ vā tiropākāraṃ vāti means on another wall or another enclosure. Devoti means one king of gods. Devaññataroti means another godling. Anuttaraṃ sammāsambodhinti means both Arahatship and the knowledge of omniscience.

8. Saṃyogasuttavaṇṇanā
8. Commentary on the Saṃyogasutta

51.Aṭṭhamesaṃyogavisaṃyoganti saṃyogavisaṃyogasādhakaṃ.Dhammapariyāyanti dhammakāraṇaṃ.Ajjhattaṃ itthindriyanti niyakajjhatte itthibhāvaṃ.Itthikuttanti itthikiriyaṃ.Itthākappanti nivāsanapārupanādiitthiākappaṃ.Itthividhanti itthiyā mānavidhaṃ.Itthichandanti itthiyā ajjhāsayacchandaṃ.Itthissaranti itthisaddaṃ.Itthālaṅkāranti itthiyā pasādhanabhaṇḍaṃ.Purisindriyādīsupi eseva nayo.Bahiddhā saṃyoganti purisena saddhiṃ samāgamaṃ.Ativattatīti anabhiratāti evaṃ vuttāya balavavipassanāya ariyamaggaṃ patvā ativattati. Imasmiṃ sutte vaṭṭavivaṭṭaṃ kathitaṃ.

51. In the eighth, saṃyogavisaṃyoganti means that which leads to union and disunion. Dhammapariyāyanti means a cause of the Dhamma. Ajjhattaṃ itthindriyanti means the state of femaleness within oneself. Itthikuttanti means the actions of a woman. Itthākappanti means the female form, such as clothing and covering oneself. Itthividhanti means the various kinds of women. Itthichandanti means the inclination and desire for women. Itthissaranti means the sound of a woman. Itthālaṅkāranti means the adornments of a woman. The same method applies to purisindriyā and so on. Bahiddhā saṃyoganti means association with a man. Ativattatīti means, not delighting in that, having been said thus, she transcends by attaining the Noble Path due to the power of insight. In this sutta, the cycle of existence (vaṭṭa) and its cessation (vivaṭṭa) are discussed.

9. Dānamahapphalasuttavaṇṇanā
9. Commentary on the Dānamahapphalasutta

52.Navamesāpekhoti sataṇho.Paṭibaddhacittoti vipāke baddhacitto.Sannidhipekhoti nidhānapekho hutvā.Peccāti paralokaṃ gantvā.Taṃ kammaṃ khepetvāti taṃ kammavipākaṃ khepetvā.Iddhinti vipākiddhiṃ.Yasanti parivārasampadaṃ.Ādhipaccanti jeṭṭhabhāvakāraṇaṃ.Āgantā itthattanti itthabhāvaṃ ime pañcakkhandhe puna āgantā, na tatrūpapattiko na uparūpapattiko, heṭṭhāgāmīyeva hotīti attho.Sāhu dānanti dānaṃ nāmetaṃ sādhu bhaddakaṃ sundaraṃ.Tāni mahāyaññānīti tāni sappinavanītadadhimadhuphāṇitādīhi niṭṭhānaṃ gatāni mahādānāni.Cittālaṅkāracittaparikkhāranti samathavipassanācittassa alaṅkārabhūtañceva parivārabhūtañca.Brahmakāyikānaṃ devānaṃ sahabyatanti na sakkā tattha dānena upapajjituṃ. Yasmā pana taṃ samathavipassanācittassa alaṅkārabhūtaṃ, tasmā tena dānālaṅkatena cittena jhānañceva ariyamaggañca nibbattetvā jhānena tattha upapajjati.Anāgāmī hotīti jhānānāgāmī nāma hoti.Anāgantā itthattanti puna itthabhāvaṃ na āgantā, uparūpapattiko vā tatrūpapattiko vā hutvā tattheva parinibbāyati. Iti imesu dānesu paṭhamaṃ taṇhuttariyadānaṃ, dutiyaṃ cittīkāradānaṃ, tatiyaṃ hirottappadānaṃ, catutthaṃ niravasesadānaṃ, pañcamaṃ dakkhiṇeyyadānaṃ, chaṭṭhaṃ somanassupavicāradānaṃ, sattamaṃ alaṅkāraparivāradānaṃ nāmāti.

52. In the ninth, sāpekhoti means with craving. Paṭibaddhacittoti means with a mind attached to the result. Sannidhipekhoti means being desirous of hoarding. Peccāti means having gone to the next world. Taṃ kammaṃ khepetvāti means having exhausted the result of that action. Iddhinti means the success of the result. Yasanti means the fortune of retinue. Ādhipaccanti means the cause of leadership. Āgantā itthattanti means coming again to this state of being female, he is not one who attains rebirth there, nor is he one who attains rebirth above, but he is one who goes to a lower realm; this is the meaning. Sāhu dānanti means this giving is good, excellent, and beautiful. Tāni mahāyaññānīti means those great donations, completed with ghee, fresh butter, yogurt, honey, molasses, and so on. Cittālaṅkāracittaparikkhāranti means both the adornment and the surroundings of the mind of serenity and insight. Brahmakāyikānaṃ devānaṃ sahabyatanti means it is not possible to be reborn there through giving alone. But since that is the adornment of the mind of serenity and insight, therefore, having generated jhāna and the Noble Path with that mind adorned with giving, one is reborn there through jhāna. Anāgāmī hotīti means he is called a non-returner (anāgāmī) through jhāna. Anāgantā itthattanti means not coming again to the state of femaleness, either having attained rebirth above or having attained rebirth there, he is completely extinguished there. Thus, among these givings, the first is giving with craving as primary, the second is giving with mental construction, the third is giving with shame and fear of wrongdoing, the fourth is giving without remainder, the fifth is giving to those worthy of offerings, the sixth is giving with joy and investigation, and the seventh is called giving of adornments and surroundings.

10. Nandamātāsuttavaṇṇanā
10. Commentary on the Nandamātāsutta

53.Dasamaṃ atthuppattivasena desitaṃ. Satthā kira vutthavasso pavāretvā dve aggasāvake ohāya ‘‘dakkhiṇāgiriṃ cārikaṃ gamissāmī’’ti nikkhami, rājā pasenadi kosalo, anāthapiṇḍiko gahapati, visākhā mahāupāsikā, aññe ca bahujanā dasabalaṃ nivattetuṃ nāsakkhiṃsu. Anāthapiṇḍiko gahapati ‘‘satthāraṃ nivattetuṃ nāsakkhi’’nti raho cintayamāno nisīdi. Atha naṃ puṇṇā nāma dāsī disvā ‘‘kiṃ nu kho te, sāmi, na pubbe viya indriyāni vippasannānī’’ti pucchi. Āma, puṇṇe, satthā cārikaṃ pakkanto, tamahaṃ nivattetuṃ nāsakkhiṃ. Na kho pana sakkā jānituṃ puna sīghaṃ āgaccheyya vā na vā, tenāhaṃ cintayamāno nisinnoti. Sacāhaṃ dasabalaṃ nivatteyyaṃ, kiṃ me kareyyāsīti? Bhujissaṃ taṃ karissāmīti. Sā gantvā satthāraṃ vanditvā ‘‘nivattatha, bhante’’ti āha. Mama nivattanapaccayā tvaṃ kiṃ karissasīti? Tumhe, bhante, mama parādhīnabhāvaṃ jānātha, aññaṃ kiñci kātuṃ na sakkomi, saraṇesu pana patiṭṭhāya pañca sīlāni rakkhissāmīti. Sādhu sādhu puṇṇeti, satthā dhammagāravena ekapadasmiññeva nivatti. Vuttañhetaṃ – ‘‘dhammagaru, bhikkhave, tathāgato dhammagāravo’’ti (a. ni. 5.99).

53. The tenth is taught according to the arising of the event. It is said that the Teacher, having spent the rainy season (vassa) and made the Pavāraṇā, leaving behind the two chief disciples, set out saying, "I will go on pilgrimage to Dakkhināgiri." King Pasenadi of Kosala, Anāthapiṇḍika the householder, Visākhā the great female lay disciple, and many other people were unable to turn back the Ten-Powered One. Anāthapiṇḍika the householder sat down, thinking privately, "I was unable to turn back the Teacher." Then a servant named Puṇṇā, seeing him, asked, "Why, master, are your senses not as clear as before?" "Yes, Puṇṇā, the Teacher has departed on pilgrimage, and I was unable to turn him back. It is not possible to know whether he will return soon or not, so I am sitting here thinking." "If I were to turn back the Ten-Powered One, what would you do for me?" "I will make you free." She went and, after paying homage to the Teacher, said, "Please return, venerable sir." "What will you do if I return?" "You know, venerable sir, that I am under the control of another; I cannot do anything else, but I will take refuge and keep the five precepts." "Good, good, Puṇṇā," the Teacher turned back on the spot out of respect for the Dhamma. It was said, "The Tathāgata, monks, is respectful of the Dhamma, reverent of the Dhamma" (a. ni. 5.99).

ekaṃ samayaṃ āyasmā sāriputtotiādi vuttaṃ.

ekaṃ samayaṃ āyasmā sāriputto and so on was said.

veḷukaṇḍakīti veḷukaṇṭakanagaravāsinī. Tassa kira nagarassa pākāraguttatthāya pākārapariyantena veḷū ropitā, tenassa veḷukaṇṭakanteva nāmaṃ jātaṃ.Pārāyananti nibbānasaṅkhātapāraṃ ayanato pārāyananti laddhavohāraṃ dhammaṃ.Sarena bhāsatīti sattabhūmikassa pāsādassa uparimatale susaṃvihitārakkhaṭṭhāne nisinnā samāpattibalena rattibhāgaṃ vītināmetvā samāpattito vuṭṭhāya ‘‘imaṃ rattāvasesaṃ katarāya ratiyā vītināmessāmī’’ti cintetvā ‘‘dhammaratiyā’’ti katasanniṭṭhānā tīṇi phalāni pattā ariyasāvikā aḍḍhateyyagāthāsataparimāṇaṃ pārāyanasuttaṃ madhurena sarabhaññena bhāsati.Assosi khoti ākāsaṭṭhakavimānāni pariharitvā tassa pāsādassa uparibhāgaṃ gatena maggena naravāhanayānaṃ āruyha gacchamāno assosi.Kathāpariyosānaṃ āgamayamāno aṭṭhāsīti ‘‘kiṃ saddo esa bhaṇe’’ti pucchitvā ‘‘nandamātāya upāsikāya sarabhaññasaddo’’ti vutte otaritvā ‘‘idamavocā’’ti idaṃ desanāpariyosānaṃ olokento avidūraṭṭhāne ākāse aṭṭhāsi.

veḷukaṇḍakīti means a resident of the city of Veḷukaṇṭaka. It is said that bamboos were planted around the perimeter of that city for the sake of protecting its walls, hence the name Veḷukaṇṭaka arose. Pārāyananti means the Dhamma that is referred to as Pārāyana because it is the path (ayana) to the further shore, which is Nibbana. Sarena bhāsatīti means sitting on the upper floor of a seven-storied palace, in a well-arranged and protected place, having spent the night in the power of attainment (samāpatti), arising from that attainment, thinking, "With what delight shall I spend the remainder of this night?" having determined "with the delight of the Dhamma," that female noble disciple, having attained the three fruits, recites the Pārāyanasutta, comprising one hundred and fifty-two and a half verses, in a sweet melody. Assosi khoti means he heard, travelling by the path that bypassed the aerial mansions, riding in a palanquin carried by men, going to the upper part of that palace. Kathāpariyosānaṃ āgamayamāno aṭṭhāsīti means having asked, "What sound is that?" and being told, "It is the melodious sound of the female lay disciple Nandamātā," he descended and stood in the sky not far away, looking for the end of the discourse, saying, "She said this."

Sādhu bhagini, sādhu bhaginīti ‘‘suggahitā te bhagini dhammadesanā sukathitā, pāsāṇakacetiye nisīditvā soḷasannaṃ pārāyanikabrāhmaṇānaṃ sammāsambuddhena kathitadivase ca ajja ca na kiñci antaraṃ passāmi, majjhe bhinnasuvaṇṇaṃ viya te satthu kathitena saddhiṃ sadisameva kathita’’nti vatvā sādhukāraṃ dadanto evamāha.Ko paneso bhadramukhāti imasmiṃ susaṃvihitārakkhaṭṭhāne evaṃ mahantena saddena ko nāmesa, bhadramukha, laddhamukha, kiṃ nāgo supaṇṇo devo māro brahmāti suvaṇṇapaṭṭavaṇṇaṃ vātapānaṃ vivaritvā vigatasārajjā tīṇi phalāni pattā ariyasāvikā vessavaṇena saddhiṃ kathayamānā evamāha.Ahaṃ te bhagini bhātāti sayaṃ sotāpannattā anāgāmiariyasāvikaṃ jeṭṭhikaṃ maññamāno ‘‘bhaginī’’ti vatvā puna taṃ paṭhamavaye ṭhitattā attano kaniṭṭhaṃ, attānaṃ pana navutivassasatasahassāyukattā mahallakataraṃ maññamāno ‘‘bhātā’’ti āha.Sādhu bhadramukhāti, bhadramukha, sādhu sundaraṃ, svāgamanaṃ te āgamanaṃ, āgantuṃ yuttaṭṭhānamevasi āgatoti attho.Idaṃ te hotu ātitheyyanti idameva dhammabhaṇanaṃ tava atithipaṇṇākāro hotu, na hi te aññaṃ ito uttaritaraṃ dātabbaṃ passāmīti adhippāyo.Evañceva me bhavissati ātitheyyanti evaṃ attano pattidānaṃ yācitvā ‘‘ayaṃ te dhammakathikasakkāro’’ti aḍḍhateḷasāni koṭṭhasatāni rattasālīnaṃ pūretvā ‘‘yāvāyaṃ upāsikā carati, tāva mā khayaṃ gamiṃsū’’ti adhiṭṭhahitvā pakkāmi. Yāva upāsikā aṭṭhāsi, tāva koṭṭhānaṃ heṭṭhimatalaṃ nāma daṭṭhuṃ nāsakkhiṃsu. Tato paṭṭhāya ‘‘nandamātāya koṭṭhāgāraṃ viyā’’ti vohāro udapādi.

"Good, sister, good, sister," saying, "Well grasped by you, sister, is the Dhamma teaching, well spoken. Sitting at the Pāsāṇaka shrine on the day the sixteen Pārāyanika brahmins were addressed by the Sammāsambuddha, and today, I see no difference. It is spoken just as the Teacher spoke it, like gold that has been split in the middle," thus giving approval, he spoke thus. "Who is this, auspicious one?" In this very well-guarded place, who is this by name, auspicious one, blessed one? Is it a Nāga, a Supaṇṇa, a Deva, Māra, or Brahmā?" Opening the golden lattice window, without familiarity, having attained three fruits, the noble female disciple, speaking with Vessavaṇa, said thus: "I am your brother, sister." Considering himself the elder because he was a Sotāpanna and she an Anāgāmi noble female disciple, he said "sister." Then, because she remained in her early years, thinking her younger than himself, and himself much older due to having an lifespan of ninety hundred thousand years, he said "brother." "Good, auspicious one," auspicious one, good, beautiful. Welcome is your arrival; you have come to a place fit to come to, is the meaning. "Let this be your hospitality," let this very Dhamma talk be your offering of hospitality. Indeed, I see nothing greater than this to be given to you, is the intention. "Even so, it will be my hospitality," thus requesting the giving of his merit, filling one hundred and fifty-two and a half koṭṭhas with red rice, having determined, "May they not be exhausted as long as this female lay disciple lives," he departed. As long as the female lay disciple remained, they were unable to see even the bottom level of the koṭṭhas. From then on, the saying arose, "Like Nandamātā's storehouse."

Akatapātarāsoti abhuttapātarāso.Puññanti pubbacetanā ca muñcanacetanā ca.Puññamahīti aparacetanā.Sukhāya hotūti sukhatthāya hitatthāya hotu. Evaṃ attano dāne vessavaṇassa pattiṃ adāsi.

"Having not eaten morning food," having not consumed morning food. "Merit," is both the initial intention and the intention of relinquishing. "Field of merit," is the subsequent intention. "May it be for happiness," may it be for the purpose of happiness, for the purpose of benefit. Thus, he gave the merit of his giving to Vessavaṇa.

Pakaraṇeti kāraṇe.Okkassa pasayhāti ākaḍḍhitvā abhibhavitvā.Yakkhayoninti bhummadevatābhāvaṃ.Teneva purimena attabhāvena uddassetīti purimasarīrasadisameva sarīraṃ māpetvā alaṅkatapaṭiyatto sirigabbhasayanatale attānaṃ dasseti.Upāsikā paṭidesitāti upāsikā ahanti evaṃ upāsikābhāvaṃ desesiṃ.Yāvadeti yāvadeva. Sesaṃ sabbattha uttānamevāti.

"In the circumstance," in the reason. "Having seized by force," having pulled and overwhelmed. "Yakkha birth," the state of being a terrestrial deity. "By that same former existence he shows himself," creating a body just like his former body, adorned and prepared, he shows himself lying on the bed in the auspicious chamber. "The female lay disciple is designated," I am a female lay disciple, thus he declared the state of being a female lay disciple. "As long as," just as long as. The rest is straightforward everywhere.

6. Abyākatavaggo

6. Abyākata Category

1. Abyākatasuttavaṇṇanā
1. Abyākata Sutta Commentary

54.Chaṭṭhavaggassa paṭhameabyākatavatthūsūti ekaṃsādivasena akathitavatthūsu.Tathāgatoti satto.Diṭṭhigatametanti micchādiṭṭhimattakametaṃ, na tāya diṭṭhiyā gahitasatto nāma atthi.Paṭipadanti ariyamaggaṃ.Na chambhatīti diṭṭhivasena na kampati. Sesapadesupi eseva nayo.Taṇhāgatanti diṭṭhitaṇhā.Saññāgatādīsupi eseva nayo. Diṭṭhisaññā eva hettha saññāgataṃ, diṭṭhinissitamānoyeva diṭṭhimaññitameva vā maññitaṃ, diṭṭhipapañcova papañcitaṃ, diṭṭhupādānameva upādānaṃ, diṭṭhiyā virūpaṃ paṭisaraṇabhāvoyeva vippaṭisāro nāmāti veditabbo. Ettha ca diṭṭhiggahaṇena dvāsaṭṭhi diṭṭhiyo, diṭṭhinirodhagāminipaṭipadāgahaṇena sotāpattimaggo gahitoti.

54. In the first of the sixth category, "In undeclared matters," in matters not declared in terms of one side, etc. "The Tathāgata," is the being. "This is a view," this is merely a mass of wrong view; there is no being grasped by that view. "Practice," is the Noble Path. "Does not tremble," does not waver in terms of view. This same method applies in the remaining passages. "Craving-gone," view-craving. This same method applies in "Perception-gone," etc. Here, view-perception itself is perception-gone, the conceit issued from view itself is conceit, or what is considered as view is conceiving, the proliferation of view itself is proliferation, the clinging of view itself is clinging, the transformation of view into a refuge is to be known as remorse. And here, by grasping view, the sixty-two views are grasped, and by grasping the practice leading to the cessation of view, the Sotāpatti Path is grasped.

2. Purisagatisuttavaṇṇanā
2. Purisagati Sutta Commentary

55.Dutiyepurisagatiyoti purisassa ñāṇagatiyo.Anupādāparinibbānanti apaccayanibbānaṃ.No cassāti atīte attabhāvanibbattakaṃ kammaṃ no ce abhavissa.No ca me siyāti etarahi me ayaṃ attabhāvo na siyā.Na bhavissatīti etarahi me anāgatattabhāvanibbattakaṃ kammaṃ na bhavissati.Na ca me bhavissatīti anāgate me attabhāvo na bhavissati.Yadatthi yaṃ bhūtanti yaṃ atthi yaṃ bhūtaṃ paccuppannakkhandhapañcakaṃ.Taṃ pajahāmīti upekkhaṃ paṭilabhatīti taṃ tattha chandarāgappahānena pajahāmīti vipassanupekkhaṃ paṭilabhati.Bhave na rajjatīti atīte khandhapañcake taṇhādiṭṭhīhi na rajjati.Sambhave na rajjatīti anāgatepi tatheva na rajjati.Atthuttaripadaṃ santanti uttari santaṃ nibbānapadaṃ nāma atthi.Sammappaññāya passatīti taṃ sahavipassanāya maggapaññāya sammā passati.Na sabbena sabbanti ekaccānaṃ kilesānaṃ appahīnattā saccapaṭicchādakassa tamassa sabbaso aviddhaṃsitattā na sabbākārena sabbaṃ.Haññamāneti saṇḍāsena gahetvā muṭṭhikāya koṭṭiyamāne.Antarāparinibbāyīti upapattisamanantarato paṭṭhāya āyuno vemajjhaṃ anatikkamitvā etthantare kilesaparinibbānena parinibbuto hoti.Anupahacca talanti ākāsatalaṃ anupahacca anatikkamitvā, bhūmiṃ appatvā ākāseyeva nibbāyeyyāti imāhi tīhi upamāhi tayo antarāparinibbāyī dassitā.

55. In the second, "Courses of a person," are courses of knowledge of a person. "Unbinding without remainder," is Nibbāna without condition. "If there were no," if there had been no past kamma that produces an existence. "Nor would there be for me," this existence would not be for me now. "Will not be," there will be no future kamma that produces an existence for me now. "Nor will there be for me," there will be no existence for me in the future. "Whatever there is, whatever has become," whatever there is, whatever has become, the present aggregate of five khandhas. "I abandon that, he obtains equanimity," with the abandonment of desire and lust there, he obtains the equanimity of insight. "Is not colored in becoming," he is not colored in the past aggregate of five khandhas by craving and views. "Is not colored in originating," he is not colored in the future in the same way. "There is a supreme state," there is a supreme, peaceful state called Nibbāna. "Sees with right wisdom," he rightly sees that with the wisdom of the path together with insight. "Not all in every way," because some defilements have not been abandoned and because the darkness that conceals the truth has not been completely dispelled, not all in every way. "While being hammered," having seized it with tongs and hammered it with a mallet. "One who attains final Nibbāna in between," from immediately after rebirth without exceeding the midpoint of life, he attains final Nibbāna here in between by the final Nibbāna of defilements. "Without striking the surface," without striking or exceeding the surface of the sky, without reaching the ground, he might be extinguished in the sky itself. These three similes show the three who attain final Nibbāna in between.

Upahaccaparinibbāyīti āyuvemajjhaṃ atikkamitvā pacchimakoṭiṃ appatvā parinibbuto hoti.Upahacca talanti jalamānā gantvā ākāsatalaṃ atikkamitvā pathavītalaṃ vā upahanitvā pathaviyaṃ patitamattāva nibbāyeyya. Asaṅkhārena appayogena kilese khepetvā parinibbāyītiasaṅkhāraparinibbāyī. Sasaṅkhārena sappayogena kilese khepetvā parinibbāyītisasaṅkhāraparinibbāyī. Gacchanti nirārakkhaṃ araññaṃ.Dāyanti sārakkhaṃ abhayatthāya dinnaṃ araññaṃ. Sesamettha uttānatthameva. Imasmiṃ sutte ariyapuggalāva kathitāti.

"One who attains final Nibbāna upon reaching," having exceeded the midpoint of life without reaching the final limit, he attains final Nibbāna. "Striking the surface," going while burning, having exceeded the surface of the sky, he might strike the surface of the earth, and having fallen onto the earth, he might be extinguished as soon as he falls. One who, without effort or exertion, exhausts the defilements and attains final Nibbāna is asaṅkhāraparinibbāyī. One who, with effort and exertion, exhausts the defilements and attains final Nibbāna is sasaṅkhāraparinibbāyī. "Gaccha," is an unprotected forest. "Dāya," is a protected forest, given for safety. The remainder here is straightforward in meaning. In this sutta, only noble individuals are spoken of.

3. Tissabrahmāsuttavaṇṇanā
3. Tissa Brahmā Sutta Commentary

56.Tatiyebhikkhuniyoti mahāpajāpatiyā parivārā pañcasatā bhikkhuniyo.Vimuttāti pañcahi vimuttīhi vimuttā.Anupādisesāti upādānasesaṃ aṭṭhapetvā pañcahi vimuttīhi anavasesāhipi vimuttā.Saupādisese vā saupādisesoti saupādānasese puggale ‘‘saupādānaseso aya’’nti. Itarasmimpi eseva nayo.Tissoti therassa saddhivihārikabrahmā.Anulomikānīti paṭipattiyā anulomāni vivittāni antimapariyantimāni.Indriyānīti saddhādīni vipassanindriyāni.Samannānayamānoti samannāhāre ṭhapayamāno.Na hi pana teti idaṃ kasmā ārabhi? Sattamassa puggalassa dassanatthaṃ. Sattamo hi saddhānusāripuggalo na dassito. Atha bhagavā balavavipassakavasena taṃ dassento evamāha. Tatthasabbanimittānanti sabbesaṃ niccanimittādīnaṃ.Animittanti balavavipassanāsamādhiṃ.

56. In the third, "Female monastics," are the five hundred female monastics in Mahāpajāpati's retinue. "Freed," freed by the five freedoms. "Without remainder of clinging," having set aside the remainder of clinging, freed by the five freedoms without any remainder. "Or in one with a remainder of clinging, one with a remainder of clinging," in a person with a remainder of clinging, "This is one with a remainder of clinging." This same method applies to the other. "Tissa," is the Thera's co-resident Brahmā. "Conducive," conducive to the practice, secluded, ultimate, final. "Faculties," are the faculties of faith, etc., the faculties of insight. "Bringing into harmony," placing in a state of harmony. "But indeed, you do not," why was this begun? For the purpose of showing the seventh person. For the seventh person, the faith-follower, was not shown. Then the Blessed One, showing that person by way of strong insight, spoke thus. There, "All signs," of all impermanent signs, etc. "Signless," is strong insight-concentration.

4. Sīhasenāpatisuttavaṇṇanā
4. Sīhasenāpati Sutta Commentary

57.Catutthemaccharīti pañcamaccherayutto.Kadariyoti thaddhamacchariyo, paresaṃ diyyamānampi vāreti.Anuppadānaratoti punappunaṃ dānaṃ dadamānova ramati.Anukampantāti ‘‘ko ajja amhehi anuggahetabbo, kassa deyyadhammaṃ vā paṭiggaṇheyyāma, dhammaṃ vā deseyyāmā’’ti evaṃ cittena anukampamānā.

57. In the fourth, "Miserly," endowed with the five kinds of miserliness. "Stingy," is rigid miserliness; he even prevents others from giving. "Delighting in not giving," only delights in continually giving donations. "Being compassionate," "Who should be assisted by us today, to whom should we give allowable things, or to whom should we teach the Dhamma?" thus being compassionate with such a mind.

5. Arakkheyyasuttavaṇṇanā
5. Arakkheyya Sutta Commentary

58.Pañcamenimittanti dhammanimittampi puggalanimittampi. Ayañhi attanā desitadhamme ekapadampi durakkhātaṃ aniyyānikaṃ apassanto dhammanimittaṃ na samanupassati, ‘‘durakkhāto tayā dhammo na svākkhāto’’ti uṭṭhahitvā paṭippharantaṃ ekaṃ puggalampi apassanto puggalanimittaṃ na samanupassati nāma. Sesadvayepi eseva nayo. Chaṭṭhasattamāni uttānāneva.

58. In the fifth, "Sign," is both the sign of the Dhamma and the sign of a person. For, not seeing even a single word that is poorly explained, that does not lead out, in the Dhamma taught by himself, he does not pay attention to the sign of the Dhamma; and not seeing even a single person who rises up and opposes, saying, "The Dhamma is poorly explained by you, not well explained," he does not pay attention to the sign of a person. This same method applies in the remaining two. The sixth and seventh are straightforward.

8. Pacalāyamānasuttavaṇṇanā
8. Pacalāyamāna Sutta Commentary

61.Aṭṭhamepacalāyamānoti taṃ gāmaṃ upanissāya ekasmiṃ vanasaṇḍe samaṇadhammaṃ karonto sattāhaṃ caṅkamanavīriyena nimmathitattā kilantagatto caṅkamanakoṭiyaṃ pacalāyamāno nisinno hoti.Pacalāyasi noti niddāyasi nu.Anumajjitvāti parimajjitvā.Ālokasaññanti middhavinodanaālokasaññaṃ.Divāsaññanti divātisaññaṃ.Yathā divā tathā rattinti yathā divā ālokasaññā adhiṭṭhitā, tathā naṃ rattimpi adhiṭṭhaheyyāsi.Yathā rattiṃ tathā divāti yathā ca te rattiṃ ālokasaññā adhiṭṭhitā, tathā naṃ divāpi adhiṭṭhaheyyāsi.Sappabhāsanti dibbacakkhuñāṇatthāya sahobhāsaṃ.Pacchāpuresaññīti purato ca pacchato ca abhiharaṇasaññāya saññāvā.Antogatehi indriyehīti bahi avikkhittehi anto anupaviṭṭheheva pañcahi indriyehi.Middhasukhanti niddāsukhaṃ. Ettakena ṭhānena bhagavā therassa middhavinodanakammaṭṭhānaṃ kathesi.Soṇḍanti mānasoṇḍaṃ.Kiccakaraṇīyānīti ettha avassaṃ kattabbāni kiccāni, itarāni karaṇīyāni.Maṅkubhāvoti nittejatā domanassatā. Ettakena ṭhānena satthārā therassa bhikkhācāravattaṃ kathitaṃ.

61. In the eighth, "Pacalāyamāna," dwelling near that village, doing the practice of a recluse in a certain forest grove, having become exhausted and his body worn out by the energy of pacing for a week, he sits tottering at the end of the walking course. "Are you drowsy," are you sleeping? "Having rubbed," having massaged. "Perception of light," perception of light that dispels drowsiness. "Perception of day," extreme perception of day. "As during the day, so during the night," just as the perception of light is established during the day, so you should establish it at night. "As during the night, so during the day," and just as the perception of light is established by you during the night, so you should establish it during the day. "With luminosity," with co-luminosity for the sake of the divine eye knowledge. "One who is percipient of what is behind and before," one who is percipient with perception of application to what is before and behind. "With the senses turned inwards," with the five senses turned inwards, unscattered outwards, and indeed entered within. "Drowsiness-ease," the ease of sleep. With this much, the Blessed One spoke to the Thera about the meditation subject for dispelling drowsiness. "Soṇḍa," is mind-soṇḍa. "Things to be done," here, duties that must be done, the others are things to be done. "State of inertness," is lack of energy, dejection. With this much, the Teacher spoke to the Thera about the practice of alms-begging.

tasmātihātiādimāha. Tatthaviggāhikakathanti ‘‘na tvaṃ imaṃ dhammavinayaṃ ājānāsī’’tiādinayappavattā viggāhikakathā.Nāhaṃ moggallānātiādi pāpamittasaṃsaggavivajjanatthaṃ vuttaṃ.Kittāvatā nu khoti kittakena nu kho.Taṇhāsaṅkhayavimutto hotīti taṇhāsaṅkhaye nibbāne taṃ ārammaṇaṃ katvā vimuttacittatāya taṇhāsaṅkhayavimutto nāma saṃkhittena kittāvatā hoti. Yāya paṭipattiyā taṇhāsaṅkhayavimutto hoti, tameva khīṇāsavassa bhikkhuno pubbabhāgapaṭipadaṃ saṃkhittena desethāti pucchati.Accantaniṭṭhoti khayavayasaṅkhātaṃ antaṃ atītāti accantā, accantā niṭṭhā assāti accantaniṭṭho, ekantaniṭṭho satataniṭṭhoti attho.Accantayogakkhemīti accantaṃ yogakkhemī, niccayogakkhemīti attho.Accantabrahmacārīti accantaṃ brahmacārī, niccabrahmacārīti attho. Accantaṃ pariyosānamassāti purimanayenevaaccantapariyosāno. Seṭṭho devamanussānanti devānañca manussānañca seṭṭho uttamo. Evarūpo bhikkhu kittāvatā hoti, saṅkhepeneva tassa paṭipattiṃ kathethāti yācati.

"Therefore, here," etc., he said. There, "Quarrelsome talk," quarrelsome talk that proceeds in the manner of "You do not understand this Dhamma-Vinaya," etc. "I am not Moggallāna," etc., was said for the sake of avoiding association with evil friends. "How far then," how much then. "Is freed by the destruction of craving," by the destruction of craving, in Nibbāna, having made that the object, how much in brief is he called freed by the destruction of craving due to a mind freed? He asks that the preliminary practice of the bhikkhu who is a Khīṇāsava, by which he is freed by the destruction of craving, be taught in brief. "Utterly accomplished," anta means that which is past, reckoned by decay and dissolution; accantā means that which has gone beyond anta. He is utterly accomplished because he has utterly reached the end. The meaning is, he is eternally accomplished, constantly accomplished. "Utterly secure from bonds," utterly secure from bonds; the meaning is, eternally secure from bonds. "Utterly practicing the holy life," utterly practicing the holy life; the meaning is, eternally practicing the holy life. One whose ultimate end is utter; following the former method, "utterly perfected." Best of devas and humans," best and supreme of devas and humans. How much is a bhikkhu of such a kind? He requests that his practice be spoken of in brief.

Sabbe dhammā nālaṃ abhinivesāyāti ettha sabbe dhammā nāma pañcakkhandhā dvādasāyatanāni aṭṭhārasa dhātuyo, te sabbepi taṇhādiṭṭhivasena abhinivesāya nālaṃ na pariyattā na samattā na yuttā. Kasmā? Gahitākārena atiṭṭhanato. Te hi niccā sukhā attāti gahitāpi aniccā dukkhā anattāva sampajjanti. Tasmā nālaṃ abhinivesāya.Abhijānātīti aniccaṃ dukkhaṃ anattāti ñātapariññāya abhijānāti.Parijānātīti tatheva tīraṇapariññāya parijānāti.Yaṃkiñci vedananti antamaso pañcaviññāṇasampayuttaṃ yaṃkiñci appamattakampi vedanaṃ anubhavati. Iminā bhagavā therassa vedanāvasena ca vinivaṭṭetvā arūpapariggahaṃ dassesi.

"All things are not fit for clinging," here, all things means the five aggregates, the twelve sense bases, the eighteen elements; all of these are not fit, not sufficient, not complete, not proper for clinging in terms of craving and views. Why? Because they do not remain according to the way they are grasped. For even when grasped as permanent, pleasant, and self, they come to be impermanent, painful, and selfless. Therefore, they are not fit for clinging. "Understands fully," understands fully by knowledge-understanding that they are impermanent, painful, and selfless. "Knows completely," knows completely in the same way by discernment-understanding. "Whatever feeling," whatever small amount of feeling is experienced, even that associated with the five consciousnesses. With this, the Blessed One, having turned the Thera away in terms of feeling, showed the comprehension of the immaterial.

Aniccānupassīti aniccato anupassanto.Virāgānupassīti ettha dve virāgā khayavirāgo ca accantavirāgo ca. Tattha saṅkhārānaṃ khayaṃ khayato passanā vipassanāpi, accantavirāgaṃ nibbānaṃ virāgato dassanamaggañāṇampi virāgānupassanā. Tadubhayasamaṅgipuggalo virāgānupassī nāma. Taṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ – ‘‘virāgānupassī’’ti, virāgato anupassantoti attho.Nirodhānupassimhipi eseva nayo. Nirodhopi hi khayanirodho accantanirodhoti duvidhoyeva.Paṭinissaggānupassīti ettha paṭinissaggo vuccati vossaggo. So ca pariccāgavossaggo pakkhandanavossaggoti duvidho hoti. Tatthapariccāgavossaggoti vipassanā. Sā hi tadaṅgavasena kilese ca khandhe ca vossajati.Pakkhandanavossaggoti maggo. So hi nibbānaṃ ārammaṇato pakkhandati. Dvīhipi vā kāraṇehi so vossaggoyeva, samucchedavasena khandhānaṃ kilesānañca vossajanato nibbāne ca pakkhandanato. Tasmā kilese ca khandhe ca pariccajatīti pariccāgavossaggo. Nirodhāya nibbānadhātuyā cittaṃ pakkhandatīti pakkhandanavossaggoti ubhayampetaṃ magge sameti. Tadubhayasamaṅgī puggalo imāya paṭinissaggānupassanāya samannāgatattā paṭinissaggānupassī nāma hoti. Taṃ sandhāyetaṃ vuttaṃ.Na kiñci loke upādiyatīti kiñci ekampi saṅkhāragataṃ taṇhāvasena na upādiyati na gaṇhāti na parāmasati.Anupādiyaṃ na paritassatīti aggaṇhanto taṇhāparitassanāya na paritassati.Paccattaṃyeva parinibbāyatīti sayameva kilesaparinibbānena parinibbāyati.Khīṇā jātītiādinā panassa paccavekkhaṇā dassitā. Iti bhagavā saṃkhittena khīṇāsavassa pubbabhāgappaṭipadaṃ pucchito saṃkhitteneva kathesi. Idaṃ pana suttaṃ therassa ovādopi ahosi vipassanāpi. So imasmiṃyeva sutte vipassanaṃ vaḍḍhetvā arahattaṃ pattoti.

Aniccānupassī means contemplating impermanence. Virāgānupassī here refers to two kinds of detachment: khaya-virāga (detachment through destruction) and accanta-virāga (absolute detachment). Vipassanā (insight) is seeing the destruction of formations as destruction. The path knowledge (maggañāṇa) is seeing Nibbāna as absolute detachment. A person endowed with both is called virāgānupassī. Referring to that, it is said, "virāgānupassī" means contemplating detachment. Nirodhānupassimhi also follows the same method. Indeed, cessation is of two kinds: cessation by destruction (khaya-nirodha) and absolute cessation (accanta-nirodha). Paṭinissaggānupassī: Here, paṭinissagga means relinquishment (vossagga), which is twofold: relinquishment by abandonment (pariccāga-vossagga) and relinquishment by inclination (pakkhandana-vossagga). Here, pariccāga-vossagga is vipassanā, as it relinquishes defilements and aggregates on a temporary basis. Pakkhandana-vossagga is the path, as it inclines towards Nibbāna as its object. In both cases, it is relinquishment (vossagga) because of relinquishing aggregates and defilements by cutting them off and inclining towards Nibbāna. Therefore, relinquishing defilements and aggregates is relinquishment by abandonment (pariccāga-vossagga). The mind inclining towards the element of Nibbāna for cessation is relinquishment by inclination (pakkhandana-vossagga); both of these converge on the path. A person endowed with both is called paṭinissaggānupassī because they possess this contemplation of relinquishment. Referring to that, this was said. Na kiñci loke upādiyatī means one does not grasp, take, or cling to anything in the world, even a single formation, due to craving. Anupādiyaṃ na paritassatī means not clinging, one is not agitated by the agitation of craving. Paccattaṃyeva parinibbāyatī means one attains parinibbāna by oneself through the parinibbāna of defilements. Khīṇā jātī etc., show his reviewing (paccavekkhaṇā). Thus, when the Blessed One was asked about the preliminary practice of an arahant in brief, he spoke briefly. This sutta was both an admonition and insight for the elder. He developed insight based on this sutta and attained arahantship.

9. Mettasuttavaṇṇanā

62.Navamemā, bhikkhave, puññānaṃ bhāyitthāti puññāni karontā tesaṃ mā bhāyittha.Mettacittaṃ bhāvesinti tikacatukkajjhānikāya mettāya sampayuttaṃ paṇītaṃ katvā cittaṃ bhāvesinti dasseti.Saṃvaṭṭamāne sudāhanti saṃvaṭṭamāne sudaṃ ahaṃ.Saṃvaṭṭamāneti jhāyamāne vipajjamāne.Dhammikoti dasakusaladhammasamannāgato.Dhammarājāti tasseva vevacanaṃ. Dhammena vā laddharajjattā dhammarājā.Cāturantoti puratthimasamuddādīnaṃ catunnaṃ samuddānaṃ vasena cāturantāya pathaviyā issaro.Vijitāvīti vijitasaṅgāmo. Janapado tasmiṃ thāvariyaṃ thirabhāvaṃ pattotijanapadatthāvariyappatto. Parosahassanti atirekasahassaṃ.Sūrāti abhīruno.Vīraṅgarūpāti vīrānaṃ aṅgaṃ vīraṅgaṃ, vīriyassetaṃ nāmaṃ. Vīraṅgarūpametesanti vīraṅgarūpā. Vīriyajātikā vīriyasabhāvā vīriyamayā viya akilāsuno divasampi yujjhantā na kilamantīti vuttaṃ hoti.Sāgarapariyantanti cakkavāḷapabbataṃ sīmaṃ katvā ṭhitasamuddapariyantaṃ.Adaṇḍenāti dhanadaṇḍenapi chejjabhejjānusāsanena satthadaṇḍenapi vināyeva.Asatthenāti ekatodhārādinā paraviheṭhanasatthenapi vināyeva.Dhammena abhivijiyāti ehi kho, mahārājāti evaṃ paṭirājūhi sampaṭicchitāgamano ‘‘pāṇo na hantabbo’’tiādinā dhammeneva vuttappakāraṃ pathaviṃ abhivijinitvā.

Sukhesinoti sukhapariyesake satte āmanteti.Suññabrahmūpagoti suññabrahmavimānūpago.Pathaviṃ imanti imaṃ sāgarapariyantaṃ mahāpathaviṃ.Asāhasenāti na sāhasikakammena.Samena manusāsitanti samena kammena anusāsiṃ.Tehi etaṃ sudesitanti tehi saṅgāhakehi mahākāruṇikehi buddhehi etaṃ ettakaṃ ṭhānaṃ sudesitaṃ sukathitaṃ.Pathabyoti puthavisāmiko.

10. Bhariyāsuttavaṇṇanā

63.Dasamekevaṭṭā maññe macchavilopeti kevaṭṭānaṃ macchapacchiṃ otāretvā ṭhitaṭṭhāne jāle vā udakato ukkhittamatte macchaggāhakānaṃ mahāsaddo hoti, taṃ sandhāyetaṃ vuttaṃ.Sujātāti visākhāya kaniṭṭhā.Sā neva sassuṃ ādiyatīti sassuyā kattabbavattaṃ nāma atthi, taṃ na karoti, sassūtipi naṃ na gaṇeti.Na sasuraṃ ādiyatīti vacanaṃ na gaṇhāti. Evaṃ anādaratāyapi aggahaṇenapi na ādiyati nāma. Sesesupi eseva nayo. Evaṃ anāthapiṇḍiko suṇisāya ācāraṃ gahetvā satthu purato nisīdi. Sāpi sujātā ‘‘kiṃ nu kho ayaṃ seṭṭhi dasabalassa santike mayhaṃ guṇaṃ kathessati udāhu aguṇa’’nti gantvā avidūre saddaṃ suṇantī aṭṭhāsi. Atha naṃ satthāehi sujāteti āmantesi.

Ahitānukampinīti na hitānukampinī.Aññesūti parapurisesu.Atimaññateti omānāti mānavasena atimaññati.Dhanena kītassāti dhanena kītā assa.Vadhāya ussukāvadhituṃ ussukkamāpannā.Yaṃ itthiyā vindati sāmiko dhananti itthiyā sāmiko yaṃ dhanaṃ labhati.Appampi tassa apahātumicchatīti thokatopi assa harituṃ icchati, uddhane āropitaukkhaliyaṃ pakkhipitabbataṇḍulatopi thokaṃ haritumeva vāyamati.Alasāti nisinnaṭṭhāne nisinnāva ṭhitaṭṭhāne ṭhitāva hoti.Pharusāti kharā.Duruttavādinīti dubbhāsitabhāsinī, kakkhaḷaṃ vāḷakathameva katheti.Uṭṭhāyakānaṃ abhibhuyya vattatīti ettha uṭṭhāyakānanti bahuvacanavasena viriyuṭṭhānasampanno sāmiko vutto, tassa taṃ uṭṭhānasampattiṃ abhibhavitvā heṭṭhā katvā vattati.Pamodatīti āmoditapamoditā hoti.Koleyyakāti kulasampannā.Patibbatāti patidevatā.Vadhadaṇḍatajjitāti daṇḍakaṃ gahetvā vadhena tajjitā, ‘‘ghātessāmi na’’nti vuttā.Dāsīsamanti sāmikassa vattapūrikā dāsīti maṃ bhagavā dhāretūti vatvā saraṇesu patiṭṭhāsi.

11. Kodhanasuttavaṇṇanā

64.Ekādasamesapattakantāti sapattānaṃ verīnaṃ kantā piyā tehi icchitapatthitā.Sapattakaraṇāti sapattānaṃ verīnaṃ atthakaraṇā.Kodhaparetoti kodhānugato.Pacuratthatāyāti bahuatthatāya bahuhitatāya.Anatthampīti avuddhimpi.Attho me gahitoti vuḍḍhi me gahitā.

Atho atthaṃ gahetvānāti atho vuddhiṃ gahetvā.Anatthaṃ adhipajjatīti anattho me gahitoti sallakkheti.Vadhaṃ katvānāti pāṇātipātakammaṃ katvā.Kodhasammadasammattoti kodhamadena matto, ādinnagahitaparāmaṭṭhoti attho.Āyasakyanti ayasabhāvaṃ, ayaso niyaso hotīti attho.Antarato jātanti abbhantare uppannaṃ.Atthaṃ na jānātīti vuddhiatthaṃ na jānāti.Dhammaṃ na passatīti samathavipassanādhammaṃ na passati.Andhatamanti andhabhāvakaraṃ tamaṃ bahalatamaṃ.Sahateti abhibhavati.

Dummaṅkuyanti dummaṅkubhāvaṃ nittejataṃ dubbaṇṇamukhataṃ.Yato patāyatīti yadā nibbattati.Na vāco hoti gāravoti vacanassapi garubhāvo na hoti.Na dīpaṃ hoti kiñcananti kāci patiṭṭhā nāma na hoti.Tapanīyānīti tāpajanakāni.Dhammehīti samathavipassanādhammehi.Ārakāti dūre.Brāhmaṇanti khīṇāsavabrāhmaṇaṃ.Yāya mātu bhatoti yāya mātarā bhato posito.Pāṇadadiṃ santinti jīvitadāyikaṃ samānaṃ.Hanti kuddho puthuttānanti kuddho puggalo puthu nānākāraṇehi attānaṃ hanti.Nānārūpesu mucchitoti nānārammaṇesu adhimucchito hutvā.Rajjuyā bajjha mīyantīti rajjuyā bandhitvā maranti.Pabbatāmapi kandareti pabbatakandarepi patitvā maranti.

Bhūnahaccānīti hatavuddhīni.Itāyanti iti ayaṃ.Taṃ damena samucchindeti taṃ kodhaṃ damena chindeyya. Katarena damenāti?Paññāvīriyena diṭṭhiyāti vipassanāpaññāya ceva vipassanāsampayuttena kāyikacetasikavīriyena ca maggasammādiṭṭhiyā ca.Tatheva dhamme sikkhethāti yathā akusalaṃ samucchindeyya, samathavipassanādhammepi tatheva sikkheyya.Mā no dummaṅkuyaṃ ahūti mā amhākaṃ dummaṅkubhāvo ahosīti imamatthaṃ patthayamānā.Anāyāsāti anupāyāsā.Anussukāti katthaci ussukkaṃ anāpannā. Sesaṃ sabbattha uttānamevāti.

7. Mahāvaggo

1. Hiriottappasuttavaṇṇanā

65.Sattamassa paṭhamehatūpanisoti hataupaniso chinnapaccayo.Yathābhūtañāṇadassananti taruṇavipassanā.Nibbidāvirāgoti balavavipassanā ceva maggo ca.Vimuttiñāṇadassananti arahattavimutti ca paccavekkhaṇā ca.

2. Sattasūriyasuttavaṇṇanā

66.Dutiye yasmā ayaṃ sattasūriyadesanā tejosaṃvaṭṭadassanavasena pavattā, tasmā tayo saṃvaṭṭā, tisso saṃvaṭṭasīmā, tīṇi saṃvaṭṭamūlānī, tīṇi kolāhalānīti ayaṃ tāva āditova imassa suttassa purecārikakathā veditabbā. Sā visuddhimagge (visuddhi. 2.403) pubbenivāsānussatiniddese vitthāritāva.Etadavocāti aniccakammaṭṭhānikānaṃ pañcannaṃ bhikkhusatānaṃ ajjhāsayena upādinnakānaṃ anupādinnakānaṃ saṅkhārānaṃ vipattidassanatthaṃ etaṃ ‘‘aniccā, bhikkhave, saṅkhārā’’tiādisattasūriyopamasuttantaṃ avoca. Tatthaaniccāti hutvā abhāvaṭṭhena aniccā.Saṅkhārāti upādinnakaanupādinnakā saṅkhāradhammā.Addhuvāti evaṃ aciraṭṭhena na dhuvā.Anassāsikāti asassatabhāvena assāsarahitā.Alamevāti yuttameva.

Ajjhogāḷhoti udake anupaviṭṭho.Accuggatoti udakapiṭṭhito uggato.Devo na vassatīti paṭhamaṃ tāva upakappanamegho nāma koṭisatasahassacakkavāḷe ekamegho hutvā vassati, tadā nikkhantabījaṃ na puna gehaṃ pavisati. Tato paṭṭhāya dhamakaraṇe niruddhaṃ viya udakaṃ hoti, puna ekabindumpi devo na vassatīti upamānadhammakathāva pamāṇaṃ. Vinassante pana loke paṭhamaṃ avīcito paṭṭhāya tuccho hoti, tato uṭṭhahitvā sattā manussaloke ca tiracchānesu ca nibbattanti. Tiracchānesu nibbattāpi puttabhātikesu mettaṃ paṭilabhitvā kālakatā devamanussesu nibbattanti. Devatā ākāsena carantiyo ārocenti – ‘‘na idaṃ ṭhānaṃ sassataṃ na nibaddhaṃ, mettaṃ bhāvetha, karuṇaṃ, muditaṃ, upekkhaṃ bhāvethā’’ti. Te mettādayo bhāvetvā tato cutā brahmaloke nibbattanti.

Bījagāmāti ettha bījagāmo nāma pañca bījajātāni.Bhūtagāmonāma yaṃkiñci nikkhantamūlapaṇṇaṃ haritakaṃ.Osadhitiṇavanappatayoti etthaosadhīti osadharukkhā.Tiṇāti bahisārā tālanāḷikerādayo.Vanappatayoti vanajeṭṭhakarukkhā.Kunnadiyoti ṭhapetvā pañca mahānadiyo avasesā ninnagā.Kusobbhāti ṭhapetvā satta mahāsare avasesā rahadādayo.Dutiyo sūriyotiādīsu dutiyasūriyakāle eko udeti, eko atthaṅgameti. Tatiyakāle eko udeti, eko atthaṅgameti, eko majjhe hoti. Catutthakāle catukulike gāme cattāro piṇḍacārikā dvārapaṭipāṭiyā ṭhitā viya honti. Pañcamādikālepi eseva nayo.Palujjantīti chijjitvā chijjitvā patanti.Neva chārikā paññāyati na masīti cakkavāḷamahāpathavī sinerupabbatarājā himavā cakkavāḷapabbato cha kāmasaggā paṭhamajjhānikabrahmalokāti ettake ṭhāne daḍḍhe accharāya gahetabbamattāpi chārikā vā aṅgāro vā na paññāyati.Ko mantā ko saddhātāti ko tassa saddhāpanatthāya samattho, ko vā tassa saddhātā.Aññatra diṭṭhapadehīti diṭṭhapade sotāpanne ariyasāvake ṭhapetvā ko añño saddahissatīti attho.

Vītarāgoti vikkhambhanavasena vītarāgo.Sāsanaṃ ājāniṃsūti anusiṭṭhiṃ jāniṃsu, brahmalokasahabyatāya maggaṃ paṭipajjiṃsu.Samasamagatiyoti dutiyattabhāve sabbākārena samagatiko ekagatiko.Uttari mettaṃ bhāveyyanti paṭhamajjhānato uttari yāva tikacatukkajjhānā paṇītaṃ katvā mettaṃ bhāveyyaṃ.Cakkhumāti pañcahi cakkhūhi cakkhumā.Parinibbutoti bodhipallaṅkeyeva kilesaparinibbānena parinibbuto. Evaṃ aniccalakkhaṇaṃ dīpetvā satthari desanaṃ vinivaṭṭente pañcasatāpi te aniccakammaṭṭhānikā bhikkhū desanānusārena ñāṇaṃ pesetvā nisinnāsanesuyeva arahattaṃ pāpuṇiṃsūti.

3. Nagaropamasuttavaṇṇanā

67.Tatiyeyatoti yadā.Paccantimanti raṭṭhapariyante raṭṭhāvasāne niviṭṭhaṃ. Majjhimadesanagarassa pana rakkhākiccaṃ natthi, tena taṃ na gahitaṃ.Nagaraparikkhārehi suparikkhatanti nagarālaṅkārehi alaṅkataṃ.Akaraṇīyanti akattabbaṃ ajiniyaṃ.Gambhīranemāti gambhīraāvāṭā.Sunikhātāti suṭṭhu sannisīdāpitā. Taṃ panetaṃ esikāthambhaṃ iṭṭhakāhi vā karonti silāhi vā khadirādīhi vā sārarukkhehi. Taṃ nagaraguttatthāya karontā bahinagare karonti, alaṅkāratthāya karontā antonagare. Taṃ iṭṭhakāmayaṃ karontā mahantaṃ āvāṭaṃ katvā cayaṃ cinitvā upari aṭṭhaṃsaṃ katvā sudhāya limpanti. Yadā hatthinā dantehi abhihato na calati, tadā sulitto nāma hoti. Silāthambhādayopi aṭṭhaṃsā eva honti. Te sace aṭṭha ratanā honti, caturatanamattaṃ āvāṭe pavisati, caturatanamattaṃ upari hoti. Soḷasaratanavīsatiratanesupi eseva nayo. Sabbesañhi upaḍḍhaṃ heṭṭhā hoti, upaḍḍhaṃ upari. Te gomuttavaṅkā honti, tena tesaṃ antare padaramayaṃ katvā kammaṃ kātuṃ sakkā hoti, te pana katacittakammā paggahitaddhajāva honti.

Parikhāti parikkhipitvā ṭhitamātikā.Anupariyāyapathoti anto pākārassa pākārena saddhiṃ gato mahāpatho, yattha ṭhitā bahipākāre ṭhitehi saddhiṃ yujjhanti.Salākanti saratomarādinissaggiyāvudhaṃ.Jevanikanti ekatodhārādisesāvudhaṃ.

Hatthārohāti sabbepi hatthiācariyahatthivejjahatthibandhādayo.Assārohāti sabbepi assācariyaassavejjaassabandhādayo.Rathikāti sabbepi rathācariyarathayodharatharakkhādayo.Dhanuggahāti issāsā.Celakāti ye yuddhe jayaddhajaṃ gahetvā purato gacchanti.Calakāti ‘‘idha rañño ṭhānaṃ hotu, idha asukamahāmattassā’’ti evaṃ senābyūhakārakā.Piṇḍadāyikāti sāhasikamahāyodhā. Te kira parasenaṃ pavisitvā piṇḍapiṇḍamiva chetvā chetvā dayanti, uppatitvā niggacchantīti attho. Ye vā saṅgāmamajjhe yodhānaṃ bhattapānīyaṃ gahetvā pavisanti, tesampetaṃ nāmaṃ.Uggā rājaputtāti uggatuggatā saṅgāmāvacarā rājaputtā.Pakkhandinoti ye ‘‘kassa sīsaṃ vā āvudhaṃ vā āharāmā’’ti vatvā ‘‘asukassā’’ti vuttā saṅgāmaṃ pakkhanditvā tadeva āharanti, ime pakkhandantīti pakkhandino. Mahānāgā viyamahānāgā,hatthiādīsupi abhimukhaṃ āgacchantesu anivattiyayodhānaṃ etaṃ adhivacanaṃ.Sūrāti ekasūrā, ye sajālikāpi savammikāpi samuddaṃ tarituṃ sakkonti.Cammayodhinoti ye cammakañcukaṃ vā pavisitvā saraparittāṇacammaṃ vā gahetvā yujjhanti.Dāsakaputtāti balavasinehā gharadāsayodhā.Dovārikoti dvārapālako.Vāsanalepanasampannoti vāsanena sabbavivarapaṭicchādanena sudhālepena sampanno. Bahi vā khāṇupākārasaṅkhātena vāsanena ghanamaṭṭhena ca sudhālepena sampanno puṇṇaghaṭapantiṃ dassetvā katacittakammapaggahitaddhajo.Tiṇakaṭṭhodakanti hatthiassādīnaṃ ghāsatthāya gehānañca chādanatthāya āharitvā bahūsu ṭhānesu ṭhapitatiṇañca, gehakaraṇapacanādīnaṃ atthāya āharitvā ṭhapitakaṭṭhañca, yantehi pavesetvā pokkharaṇīsu ṭhapitaudakañca.Sannicitaṃ hotīti paṭikacceva anekesu ṭhānesu suṭṭhu nicitaṃ hoti.Abbhantarānaṃ ratiyāti antonagaravāsīnaṃ ratiatthāya.Aparitassāyāti tāsaṃ anāpajjanatthāya.Sāliyavakanti nānappakārā sāliyo ceva yavā ca.Tilamuggamāsāparaṇṇanti tilamuggamāsā ca sesāparaṇṇañca.

evameva khotiādi āraddhaṃ. Tatthasaddhammehīti sudhammehi.Saddhoti okappanasaddhāya ceva paccakkhasaddhāya ca samannāgato. Tattha dānasīlādīnaṃ phalaṃ saddahitvā dānādipuññakaraṇe saddhā okappanasaddhā nāma. Maggena āgatasaddhā paccakkhasaddhā nāma. Pasādasaddhātipi esā eva. Tassā lakkhaṇādīhi vibhāgo veditabbo.

lakkhaṇaṃnāma. ‘‘Tīhi, bhikkhave, ṭhānehi saddho pasanno veditabbo. Katamehi tīhi? Sīlavantānaṃ dassanakāmo hotī’’tiādinā (a. ni. 3.42) nayena vuttaṃ pana saddhāyanimittaṃnāma. ‘‘Ko cāhāro saddhāya, saddhammassavanantissa vacanīya’’nti (a. ni. 10.61) ayaṃ panassāāhāronāma. ‘‘Saddhāpabbajitassa, bhikkhave, bhikkhuno ayaṃ anudhammo hoti, yaṃ rūpe nibbidābahulo viharissatī’’ti ayamassaanudhammonāma. ‘‘Saddhā bandhati pātheyyaṃ, sirī bhogānamāsayo’’ (saṃ. ni. 1.79). ‘‘Saddhā dutiyā purisassa hoti’’ (saṃ. ni. 1.36). ‘‘Saddhāya tarati oghaṃ’’ (saṃ. ni. 1.246). ‘‘Saddhā bījaṃ tapo vuṭṭhi’’ (su. ni. 77; saṃ. ni. 1.197). ‘‘Saddhāhattho mahānāgo. Upekhāsetadantavā’’tiādīsu pana suttesu etissā baddhabhattapuṭādisarikkhatāya anekasarasatā bhagavatā pakāsitā. Imasmiṃ pana nagaropamasuttante esā acalasuppatiṭṭhitatāya esikāthambhasadisā katvā dassitā.

Saddhesikoti saddhaṃ esikāthambhaṃ katvā ariyasāvako akusalaṃ pajahatīti iminā nayena sabbapadesu yojanā kātabbā. Apicettha hirottappehi tīsu dvāresu saṃvaro sampajjati, so catupārisuddhisīlaṃ hoti. Iti imasmiṃ sutte ekādasasu ṭhānesu arahattaṃ pakkhipitvā desanāya kūṭaṃ gahitanti veditabbaṃ.

4. Dhammaññūsuttavaṇṇanā

68.Catutthekālaṃ jānātīti yuttappattakālaṃ jānāti.Ayaṃ kālo uddesassāti ayaṃ buddhavacanaṃ uggaṇhanakālo.Paripucchāyāti atthānatthaṃ kāraṇākāraṇaṃ paripucchāya.Yogassāti yoge kammaṃ pakkhipanassa.Paṭisallānassāti nilīyanassa ekībhāvassa.Dhammānudhammappaṭipannoti navannaṃ lokuttaradhammānaṃ anurūpadhammaṃ pubbabhāgapaṭipadaṃ paṭipanno.Evaṃ kho, bhikkhave, bhikkhu puggalaparoparaññū hotīti evaṃ bhikkhu puggalānaṃ paroparaṃ tikkhamudubhāvaṃ jānanasamattho nāma hoti.

5. Pāricchattakasuttavaṇṇanā

69.Pañcamepannapalāsoti patitapalāso.Jālakajātoti sañjātapattapupphajālo. Tassa hi pattajālañca pupphajālañca saheva nikkhamati.Khārakajātoti pāṭiyekkaṃ sañjātena suvibhattena pattajālakena ca pupphajālakena ca samannāgato.Kuṭumalakajātoti sañjātamakuḷo.Korakajātoti avikasitehi mahākucchīhi sambhinnamukhehi pupphehi samannāgato.Sabbapāliphulloti sabbākārena supupphito.Dibbe cattāro māseti dibbena āyunā cattāro māse. Manussagaṇanāya pana tāni dvādasa vassasahassāni honti.Paricārentīti ito cito ca indriyāni cārenti, kīḷanti ramantīti attho.

Ābhāya phuṭaṃ hotīti tattakaṃ ṭhānaṃ obhāsena phuṭaṃ hoti. Tesañhi pupphānaṃ bālasūriyassa viya ābhā hoti, pattāni paṇṇacchattappamāṇāni, anto mahātumbamattā reṇu hoti. Pupphite pana pāricchattake ārohanakiccaṃ vā aṅkusakaṃ gahetvā namanakiccaṃ vā pupphāharaṇatthaṃ caṅgoṭakakiccaṃ vā natthi, kantanakavāto uṭṭhahitvā pupphāni vaṇṭato kantati, sampaṭicchanakavāto sampaṭicchati, pavesanakavāto sudhammaṃ devasabhaṃ paveseti, sammajjanakavāto purāṇapupphāni nīharati, santharaṇakavāto pattakaṇṇikakesarāni rañjento santharati. Majjhaṭṭhāne dhammāsanaṃ hoti yojanappamāṇo ratanapallaṅko upari tiyojanena setacchattena dhāriyamānena, tadanantaraṃ sakkassa devarañño āsanaṃ atthariyati, tato tettiṃsāya devaputtānaṃ, tato aññesaṃ mahesakkhānaṃ devānaṃ, aññataradevatānaṃ pupphakaṇṇikāva āsanaṃ hoti. Devā devasabhaṃ pavisitvā nisīdanti. Tato pupphehi reṇuvaṭṭi uggantvā uparikaṇṇikaṃ āhacca nipatamānā devatānaṃ tigāvutappamāṇaṃ attabhāvaṃ lākhārasaparikammasajjitaṃ viya suvaṇṇacuṇṇapiñjaraṃ viya karoti. Ekacce devā ekekaṃ pupphaṃ gahetvā aññamaññaṃ paharantāpi kīḷantiyeva. Paharaṇakālepi mahātumbappamāṇā reṇu nikkhamitvā sarīraṃ pabhāsampannehi gandhacuṇṇehi sañjatamanosilārāgaṃ viya karoti. Evaṃ sā kīḷā catūhi māsehi pariyosānaṃ gacchati.Ayamānubhāvoti ayaṃ anupharituṃ ānubhāvo.

evameva khotiādimāha. Tatthapabbajjāya cetetīti pabbajissāmīti cinteti.Devānaṃvāti devānaṃ viya.Yāva brahmalokā saddo abbhuggacchatīti pathavitalato yāva brahmalokā sādhukārasaddena sabbaṃ ekasaddameva hoti.Ayamānubhāvoti ayaṃ khīṇāsavassa bhikkhuno anupharaṇānubhāvo. Imasmiṃ sutte catupārisuddhisīlaṃ pabbajjānissitaṃ hoti, kasiṇaparikammaṃ paṭhamajjhānasannissitaṃ, vipassanāya saddhiṃ tayo maggā tīṇi ca phalāni arahattamaggasannissitāni honti. Desanāya heṭṭhato vā uparito vā ubhayato vā paricchedo hoti, idha pana ubhayato paricchedo. Tenetaṃ vuttaṃ. Saṅkhepato panettha vaṭṭavivaṭṭaṃ kathitanti veditabbaṃ.

6. Sakkaccasuttavaṇṇanā

70.Chaṭṭheparisuddhā ca bhavissantīti bhiyyosomattāya parisuddhā bhavissanti nimmalā.Sakammāragatoti ettha sa-kāro nipātamattaṃ, kammāragato kammāruddhanagatoti attho.

7. Bhāvanāsuttavaṇṇanā

71.Sattameananuyuttassāti na yuttappayuttassa hutvā viharato.Seyyathāpi, bhikkhave, kukkuṭiyā aṇḍānīti imā kaṇhapakkhasukkapakkhavasena dve upamā vuttā. Tāsu kaṇhapakkhūpamā atthassa asādhikā, itarā sādhikāti sukkapakkhūpamāya eva attho veditabbo.Seyyathāti opammatthe nipāto.Apīti sambhāvanatthe. Ubhayenāpi seyyathāpi nāma, bhikkhaveti dasseti.Kukkuṭiyā aṇḍāni aṭṭha vā dasa vā dvādasa vāti ettha pana kiñcāpi kukkuṭiyā vuttappakārato ūnādhikānipi aṇḍāni honti, vacanasiliṭṭhatāya panetaṃ vuttaṃ. Evañhi loke siliṭṭhaṃ vacanaṃ hoti.Tānassūti tāni assu, bhaveyyunti attho.Kukkuṭiyā sammā adhisayitānīti tāya janettiyā kukkuṭiyā pakkhe pasāretvā tesaṃ upari sayantiyā sammā adhisayitāni.Sammā pariseditānīti kālena kālaṃ utuṃ gaṇhāpentiyā suṭṭhu samantato seditāni, usmīkatānīti vuttaṃ hoti.Sammāparibhāvitānīti kālena kālaṃ suṭṭhu samantato bhāvitāni, kukkuṭagandhaṃ gāhāpitānīti attho.

Kiñcāpi tassā kukkuṭiyāti tassā kukkuṭiyā imaṃ tividhakiriyākaraṇena appamādaṃ katvā kiñcāpi na evaṃ icchā uppajjeyya.Atha kho bhabbāva teti atha kho te kukkuṭapotakā vuttanayena sotthinā abhinibbhijjituṃ bhabbāva. Te hi yasmā tāya kukkuṭiyā evaṃ tīhākārehi tāni aṇḍāni paripāliyamānāni na pūtīni honti. Yopi nesaṃ allasineho, so pariyādānaṃ gacchati, kapālaṃ tanukaṃ hoti, pādanakhasikhā ca mukhatuṇḍakañca kharaṃ hoti, sayampi pariṇāmaṃ gacchati. Kapālassa tanuttā bahiddhā āloko anto paññāyati, tasmā ‘‘ciraṃ vata mayaṃ saṃkuṭitahatthapādā sambādhe sayimha, ayañca bahi āloko dissati, ettha dāni no sukhavihāro bhavissatī’’ti nikkhamitukāmā hutvā kapālaṃ pādena paharanti, gīvaṃ pasārenti, tato taṃ kapālaṃ dvedhā bhijjati. Atha te pakkhe vidhunantā taṃkhaṇānurūpaṃ viravantā nikkhamantiyeva. Nikkhamantā ca gāmakkhettaṃ upasobhayamānā vicaranti.

Kiñcāpi tassā kukkuṭiyā means, although that hen, having made effort through performing this threefold activity, may not have such a desire arising. Atha kho bhabbāva te means, but those chicks are indeed capable of breaking out safely in the manner described. For indeed, because those eggs are thus well-protected by that hen in three ways, they do not become rotten. And whatever soft moisture they have goes to completion, the shell becomes thin, and the tips of the claws and the beak become hard, and they themselves undergo change. Because of the thinness of the shell, light from outside is visible inside, therefore they think, "For a long time, indeed, we have lain crowded with folded hands and feet, and now this light is seen outside, here now there will be a pleasant dwelling for us," and desiring to come out, they strike the shell with their feet, they stretch out their necks, then that shell breaks in two. Then, flapping their wings and chirping in accordance with the moment, they come out. And coming out, they wander, adorning the village field.

Evamevakhoti idaṃ opammasampaṭipādanaṃ. Taṃ evaṃ atthena saṃsandetvā veditabbaṃ – tassā kukkuṭiyā aṇḍesu adhisayanāditividhakiriyākaraṇaṃ viya hi imassa bhikkhuno bhāvanaṃ anuyuttakālo, kukkuṭiyā tividhakiriyāsampādanena aṇḍānaṃ apūtibhāvo viya bhāvanaṃ anuyuttassa bhikkhuno tividhānupassanāsampādanena vipassanāñāṇassa aparihāni. Tassā tividhakiriyākaraṇena aṇḍānaṃ allasinehapariyādānaṃ viya tassa bhikkhuno tividhānupassanāsampādanena bhavattayānugatanikantisinehapariyādānaṃ, aṇḍakapālānaṃ tanubhāvo viya bhikkhuno avijjaṇḍakosassa tanubhāvo, kukkuṭapotakānaṃ nakhatuṇḍakānaṃ thaddhabhāvo viya bhikkhuno vipassanāñāṇassa tikkhakharavippasannasūrabhāvo, kukkuṭapotakānaṃ pariṇāmakālo viya bhikkhuno vipassanāñāṇassa pariṇāmakālo vaḍḍhikālo gabbhaggahaṇakālo, kukkuṭapotakānaṃ pādanakhasikhāya vā mukhatuṇḍakena vā aṇḍakosaṃ padāletvā pakkhe papphoṭetvā sotthinā abhinibbhidākālo viya tassa bhikkhuno vipassanāñāṇagabbhaṃ gaṇhāpetvā vicarantassa tajjātikaṃ utusappāyaṃ vā bhojanasappāyaṃ vā puggalasappāyaṃ vā dhammassavanasappāyaṃ vā labhitvā ekāsane nisinnasseva vipassanaṃ vaḍḍhentassa anupubbādhigatena arahattamaggena avijjaṇḍakosaṃ padāletvā abhiññāpakkhe papphoṭetvā sotthinā arahattappattakālo veditabbo.

Evameva kho This is the connecting of the simile. That should be understood by connecting it with the meaning thus: just as the hen's performing of the threefold activity of lying on the eggs, so too is this bhikkhu's time devoted to development (bhāvanā); just as the hen's accomplishing the threefold activity prevents the eggs from becoming rotten, so too does the bhikkhu who is devoted to development, by accomplishing the threefold contemplation (anupassanā), prevent the decline of insight knowledge (vipassanāñāṇa). Just as the completion of the soft moisture of the eggs through the performance of the threefold activity, so too is the completion of the affection attached to the three existences (bhavattaya) through the bhikkhu's accomplishment of the threefold contemplation; just as the thinness of the eggshells, so too is the thinness of the bhikkhu's eggshell of ignorance (avijjaṇḍakosa); just as the hardness of the chicks' claws and beaks, so too is the sharpness, hardness, clarity, and bravery of the bhikkhu's insight knowledge; just as the time of the chicks' development, so too is the bhikkhu's time of the growth of insight knowledge, the time of increase, the time of seizing the womb; just as the time of the chicks breaking the eggshell with the tips of their claws or beaks, flapping their wings, and breaking out safely, so too should be understood the time of the bhikkhu, who, while developing insight and wandering, having received a suitable climate, suitable food, a suitable person, or suitable Dhamma listening, and sitting in a single seat, breaks the eggshell of ignorance with the path of arahantship attained in due order, flaps the wings of knowledge, and attains arahantship safely.

Yathā pana kukkuṭapotakānaṃ pariṇatabhāvaṃ ñatvā mātāpi aṇḍakosaṃ bhindati, evaṃ tathārūpassa bhikkhuno ñāṇaparipākaṃ ñatvā satthāpi –

Just as the mother, knowing the ripeness of the chicks, also breaks the eggshell, so too the Teacher, knowing the ripeness of such a bhikkhu's knowledge—

‘‘Ucchinda sinehamattano, kumudaṃ sāradikaṃva pāṇinā;

‘‘Cut off your affection for yourself,
Like an autumnal lotus with your hand;
Develop only the path to peace,
Nibbāna described by the Sugata.’’ (dha. pa. 285) –

Ādinā nayena obhāsaṃ pharitvā gāthāya avijjaṇḍakosaṃ paharati. So gāthāpariyosāne avijjaṇḍakosaṃ bhinditvā arahattaṃ pāpuṇāti. Tato paṭṭhāya yathā te kukkuṭapotakā gāmakkhettaṃ upasobhayamānā tattha vicaranti, evaṃ ayampi mahākhīṇāsavo nibbānārammaṇaṃ phalasamāpattiṃ appetvā saṅghārāmaṃ upasobhayamāno vicarati.

—after pervading with light in this way, strikes the eggshell of ignorance with the verse. He, at the end of the verse, breaks the eggshell of ignorance and attains arahantship. Thenceforth, just as those chicks wander there adorning the village field, so too does this great perfected one (mahākhīṇāsava), after experiencing the fruition attainment (phalasamāpatti) with Nibbāna as its object, wander adorning the monastery.

Phalagaṇḍassāti vaḍḍhakissa. So hi olambakasaṅkhātaṃ phalaṃ cāretvā dārūnaṃ gaṇḍaṃ haratīti phalagaṇḍoti vuccati.Vāsijaṭeti vāsidaṇḍakassa gahaṇaṭṭhāne.Ettakaṃ me ajja āsavānaṃ khīṇanti pabbajitassa hi pabbajjāsaṅkhepena uddesena paripucchāya yonisomanasikārena vattapaṭipattiyā ca niccakālaṃ āsavā khīyanti. Evaṃ khīyamānānaṃ pana nesaṃ ‘‘ettakaṃ ajja khīṇaṃ ettakaṃ hiyyo’’ti evamassa ñāṇaṃ na hotīti attho. Imāya upamāya vipassanānisaṃso dīpito.

Phalagaṇḍassa means, of a carpenter. For he is called phalagaṇḍa because he removes the knots of wood after marking the timber known as olambaka. Vāsijaṭe means, at the holding place of the axe handle. Ettakaṃ me ajja āsavānaṃ khīṇa means, for a renunciant, the āsavas are constantly being destroyed by the act of renunciation, by learning by heart, by questioning, by wise attention, and by the practice of duties. However, the meaning is that he does not have the knowledge that "so much was destroyed today, so much yesterday" regarding their being destroyed in this way. With this simile, the benefit of insight (vipassanā) is shown.

Hemantikenāti hemantasamayena.Paṭippassambhantīti thirabhāvena parihāyanti.Evameva khoti ettha mahāsamuddo viya sāsanaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ, nāvā viya yogāvacaro, nāvāya mahāsamudde pariyāyanaṃ viya imassa bhikkhuno ūnapañcavassakāle ācariyupajjhāyānaṃ santike vicaraṇaṃ, nāvāya mahāsamuddaudakena khajjamānānaṃ bandhanānaṃ tanubhāvo viya bhikkhuno pabbajjāsaṅkhepena uddesaparipucchādīhiyeva saṃyojanānaṃ tanubhāvo, nāvāya thale ukkhittakālo viya bhikkhuno nissayamuttakassa kammaṭṭhānaṃ gahetvā araññe vasanakālo, divā vātātapena saṃsussanaṃ viya vipassanāñāṇena taṇhāsinehassa saṃsussanaṃ, rattiṃ himodakena temanaṃ viya kammaṭṭhānaṃ nissāya uppannena pītipāmojjena cittatemanaṃ, rattindivaṃ vātātapehi ceva himodakena ca parisukkhaparitintānaṃ bandhanānaṃ dubbalabhāvo viya vipassanāñāṇapītipāmojjehi saṃyojanānaṃ bhiyyosomattāya dubbalabhāvo, pāvussakamegho viya arahattamaggañāṇaṃ, meghavuṭṭhiudakena nāvāya antopūtibhāvo viya āraddhavipassakassa rūpasattakādivasena vipassanaṃ vaḍḍhentassa okkhāyamāne pakkhāyamāne kammaṭṭhāne ekadivasaṃ utusappāyādīni laddhā ekapallaṅkena nisinnassa arahattaphalādhigamo. Pūtibandhanāya nāvāya kiñci kālaṃ ṭhānaṃ viya khīṇasaṃyojanassa arahato mahājanaṃ anuggaṇhantassa yāvatāyukaṃ ṭhānaṃ, pūtibandhanāya nāvāya anupubbena bhijjitvā apaṇṇattikabhāvūpagamo viya khīṇāsavassa upādinnakkhandhabhedena anupādisesāya nibbānadhātuyā parinibbutassa apaṇṇattikabhāvūpagamoti imāya upamāya saṃyojanānaṃ dubbalatā dīpitā.

Hemantikenā means, in the winter season. Paṭippassambhantī means, they diminish in a stable manner. Evameva kho Here, the Dispensation (sāsana) should be seen as like the great ocean, the meditator (yogāvacaro) as like a boat, this bhikkhu's wandering near the teachers and preceptors for less than five years as like the boat's journey in the great ocean, the thinning of the bonds being gnawed at by the water of the great ocean as like the thinning of the fetters by the bhikkhu's act of renunciation, learning by heart, questioning, and so on, the time of the boat being hauled up on land as like the time of the bhikkhu who is free from dependence, taking a meditation subject (kammaṭṭhāna) and dwelling in the forest, the drying up by the wind and heat during the day as like the drying up of the moisture of craving by insight knowledge, the wetting by the cold water at night as like the wetting of the mind by the joy and gladness arising dependent on the meditation subject, the weakening of the bonds that are completely dried and completely wet by the wind, heat, and cold water day and night as like the greater weakening of the fetters by insight knowledge, joy, and gladness, the cloud of the rainy season as like the knowledge of the path of arahantship, the rotting inside the boat by the water of the cloud's rain as like the attainment of the fruit of arahantship of one who has aroused insight, is increasing insight in terms of the group of forms and so on, when the meditation subject is about to lapse or is lapsing, having obtained suitable weather and so on one day, sitting in a single posture. The boat remaining for some time with rotten bonds as like the arahant with destroyed fetters remaining for as long as he lives, helping the great multitude; the boat with rotten bonds gradually breaking up and reaching a state of non-indication (apaṇṇattikabhāva) as like the perfected one with destroyed āsavas, with the breaking up of the appropriated aggregates, being completely extinguished in the Nibbāna element without remainder and reaching a state of non-indication; with this simile, the weakness of the fetters is shown.

8. Aggikkhandhopamasuttavaṇṇanā
8. Aggikkhandhopamasuttavaṇṇanā

72.Aṭṭhamaṃ atthuppattiyaṃ kathitaṃ. Atthuppatti panassa heṭṭhā cūḷaccharāsaṅghātasuttavaṇṇanāya (a. ni. aṭṭha. 1.1.51 ādayo) vitthāritā eva.Passatha noti passatha nu.Āliṅgitvāti upagūhitvā.Upanisīdeyyāti samīpe nissāya nisīdeyya.Upanipajjeyyāti upagantvā nipajjeyya.Ārocayāmīti ācikkhāmi.Paṭivedayāmīti paṭivedetvā jānāpetvā kathemi.Vālarajjuyāti assavālagovālehi vaṭṭitarajjuyā.Paccorasminti uramajjhe.Pheṇuddehakanti pheṇaṃ uddehitvā, ussādetvāti attho.Attatthanti attano diṭṭhadhammikasamparāyikalokiyalokuttaraṃ atthaṃ.Paratthobhayatthesupi eseva nayo. Sesamettha yaṃ vattabbaṃ siyā, taṃ sabbaṃ cūḷaccharāsaṅghātasuttassa (a. ni. 1.51 ādayo) atthuppattiyaṃ kathitameva. Idañca pana suttaṃ kathetvā satthā cūḷaccharāsaṅghātasuttaṃ kathesi. Navamaṃ uttānatthameva.

72. The eighth was spoken on the occasion of the arising of the meaning. But its occasion of arising has already been extensively explained in the commentary on the Cūḷaccharāsaṅghātasutta below (a. ni. aṭṭha. 1.1.51 ff.). Passatha no means, do you see? Āliṅgitvā means, having embraced. Upanisīdeyyā means, should sit near, depending on. Upanipajjeyyā means, having approached, should lie down. Ārocayāmī means, I will declare. Paṭivedayāmī means, having announced, having made known, I will tell. Vālarajjuyā means, with a rope twisted from horsehair or cow hair. Paccorasmi means, in the middle of the chest. Pheṇuddehaka means, having lifted up the foam, having raised it up, is the meaning. Attattha means, one's own benefit in this life, future benefit, worldly and supramundane benefit. The same method applies Paratthobhayatthesu too. Whatever else should be said here, all of that has been said in the occasion of arising of the Cūḷaccharāsaṅghātasutta (a. ni. 1.51 ff.). And after speaking this sutta, the Teacher spoke the Cūḷaccharāsaṅghātasutta. The ninth is of obvious meaning.

10. Arakasuttavaṇṇanā
10. Arakasuttavaṇṇanā

74.Dasameparittanti appaṃ thokaṃ. Tañhi sarasaparittatāyapi khaṇaparittatāyapi ṭhitiparittatāyapi parittameva. Lahuṃ uppajjitvā nirujjhanatolahukaṃ. Mantāyaṃboddhabbanti mantāya boddhabbaṃ, paññāya jānitabbanti attho.Pabbateyyāti pabbatasambhavā.Hārahārinīti rukkhanaḷaveḷuādīni haritabbāni harituṃ samatthā. Sesaṃ sabbattha uttānatthamevāti.

74. In the tenth, paritta means, little, small. For it is indeed little because of being little in essence, little in duration, and little in stability. Lahukaṃ because it quickly arises and ceases. Mantāyaṃ boddhabba means, should be understood by mantra, should be known by wisdom, is the meaning. Pabbateyyā means, originating from the mountains. Hārahārinī means, capable of carrying things to be carried, such as trees, reeds, and bamboo. The rest is all of obvious meaning everywhere.

8. Vinayavaggo

8. Vinayavaggo

1. Paṭhamavinayadharasuttavaṇṇanā
1. Paṭhamavinayadharasuttavaṇṇanā

75.Aṭṭhamassa paṭhameāpattiṃ jānātīti āpattiṃyeva āpattīti jānāti. Sesapadesupi eseva nayo.

75. In the first of the eighth, āpattiṃ jānāti means, he knows an offense as just an offense. The same method applies in the remaining terms as well.

2. Dutiyavinayadharasuttavaṇṇanā
2. Dutiyavinayadharasuttavaṇṇanā

76.Dutiyesvāgatānīti suāgatāni suppaguṇāni.Suvibhattānīti koṭṭhāsato suṭṭhu vibhattāni.Suppavattīnīti āvajjitāvajjitaṭṭhāne suṭṭhu pavattāni daḷhappaguṇāni.Suvinicchitānīti suṭṭhu vinicchitāni.Suttasoti vibhaṅgato.Anubyañjanasoti khandhakaparivārato.

76. In the second, svāgatānī means, well-received, of good qualities. Suvibhattānī means, well-divided in terms of sections. Suppavattīnī means, well-established in places where it is turned to and turned away from, of firm qualities. Suvinicchitānī means, well-decided. Suttaso means, according to the Vibhaṅga. Anubyañjanaso means, according to the Khandhaka and Parivāra.

3. Tatiyavinayadharasuttavaṇṇanā
3. Tatiyavinayadharasuttavaṇṇanā

77.Tatiyevinaye kho pana ṭhito hotīti vinayalakkhaṇe patiṭṭhito hoti.Asaṃhīroti na sakkā hoti gahitaggahaṇaṃ vissajjāpetuṃ.

77. In the third, vinaye kho pana ṭhito hotī means, he is established in the characteristics of the Vinaya. Asaṃhīro means, it is not possible to make him give up a position he has taken.

9. Satthusāsanasuttavaṇṇanā
9. Satthusāsanasuttavaṇṇanā

83.Navameekoti adutiyo.Vūpakaṭṭhoti kāyena gaṇato, cittena kilesehi vūpakaṭṭho vivekaṭṭho dūrībhūto.Appamattoti satiavippavāse ṭhito.Pahitattoti pesitatto.Nibbidāyāti vaṭṭe ukkaṇṭhanatthāya.Virāgāyāti rāgādīnaṃ virajjanatthāya.Nirodhāyāti appavattikaraṇatthāya.Vūpasamāyāti kilesavūpasamāya appavattiyā.Abhiññāyāti tilakkhaṇaṃ āropetvā abhijānanatthāya.Sambodhāyāti maggasaṅkhātassa sambodhassa atthāya.Nibbānāyāti nibbānassa sacchikaraṇatthāya.

83. In the ninth, eko means, without a second. Vūpakaṭṭho means, withdrawn in body from the group, withdrawn in mind from the defilements, the meaning is secluded, separated. Appamatto means, established in non-forgetfulness of mindfulness. Pahitatto means, with a sent-forth self. Nibbidāyā means, for weariness in the round (vaṭṭa), for disgust. Virāgāyā means, for the detachment from rāga and so on. Nirodhāyā means, for the making of non-arising. Vūpasamāyā means, for the subsiding of defilements, for non-arising. Abhiññāyā means, for directly knowing after applying the three characteristics. Sambodhāyā means, for the sake of enlightenment (sambodha) known as the path. Nibbānāyā means, for the realization of Nibbāna.

10. Adhikaraṇasamathasuttavaṇṇanā
10. Adhikaraṇasamathasuttavaṇṇanā

84.Dasame adhikaraṇāni samenti vūpasamentītiadhikaraṇasamathā. Uppannuppannānanti uppannānaṃ uppannānaṃ.Adhikaraṇānanti vivādādhikaraṇaṃ anuvādādhikaraṇaṃ āpattādhikaraṇaṃ kiccādhikaraṇanti imesaṃ catunnaṃ.Samathāya vūpasamāyāti samathatthañceva vūpasamanatthañca.Sammukhāvinayo dātabbo…pe… tiṇavatthārakoti ime satta samathā dātabbā. Tesaṃ vinicchayo vinayasaṃvaṇṇanato (cūḷava. aṭṭha. 186-187 ādayo) gahetabbo. Apica dīghanikāye saṅgītisuttavaṇṇanāyampi (dī. ni. aṭṭha. 3.331 adhikaraṇasamathasattakavaṇṇanā) vitthāritoyeva, tathā majjhimanikāye sāmagāmasuttavaṇṇanāyāti (ma. ni. aṭṭha. 3.46).

84. In the tenth, adhikaraṇasamathā means, they settle and calm down disputes. Uppannuppannāna means, of those that have arisen and arisen. Adhikaraṇāna means, of these four: dispute-disputes (vivādādhikaraṇa), accusation-disputes (anuvādādhikaraṇa), offense-disputes (āpattādhikaraṇa), and duty-disputes (kiccādhikaraṇa). Samathāya vūpasamāyā means, for the sake of both settling and calming down. Sammukhāvinayo dātabbo…pe… tiṇavatthārako These seven settlements (samathā) should be given. Their adjudication should be taken from the Vinayasaṃvaṇṇana (cūḷava. aṭṭha. 186-187 ff.). Moreover, it has already been extensively explained in the Saṅgītisuttavaṇṇanā in the Dīghanikāya (dī. ni. aṭṭha. 3.331 adhikaraṇasamathasattakavaṇṇanā), as well as in the Sāmagāmasuttavaṇṇanā in the Majjhimanikāya (ma. ni. aṭṭha. 3.46).

Ito parāni satta suttāni uttānatthāneva. Na hettha kiñci heṭṭhā avuttanayaṃ nāma atthīti.

The seven suttas beyond this are of obvious meaning. For there is nothing here of a method not said below.

Manorathapūraṇiyā aṅguttaranikāya-aṭṭhakathāya

The Aṅguttaranikāya Commentary of Manorathapūraṇī